AutoPlant 3D Structure - Reference Guide 2004 Edition

AutoPLANT® 3D Structural
Reference Guide
2004 Edition
DAA036460-1/0001
Copyright Information
COPYRIGHT INFORMATION
TRADEMARK NOTICE
Bentley, the "B" Bentley logo, and MicroStation are registered or non-registered trademarks of Bentley
Systems, Inc. or Bentley Software, Inc. All other marks are the property of their respective owners.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE
© 2005, Bentley Systems, Incorporated. All Rights Reserved.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may only be used pursuant to applicable
software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Bentley Systems,
Incorporated and/or third parties which is protected by copyright and trade secret law and may not be
provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.
Information in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on
the part of Bentley Systems Incorporated. The software in this document is furnished under a license
agreement or a non-disclosure agreement. It is against the law to copy the software on any medium
except as specifically allowed in the license or non-disclosure agreement. No part of this manual may
be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including
photocopying or recording, for any purpose without the written permission of Bentley Systems,
Incorporated. If this manual is being received electronically, you may print one copy for each licensed
user, to whom the manual relate, for informational, non-commercial purposes, provided that any copy
of this document (or any portion thereof) contains this copyright notice.
ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
Bentley and the “B” Bentley logo are registered trademarks and Bentley SELECT is a registered
service mark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated or Bentley Software, Inc.
AutoPLANT is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated.
Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft™ Corporation.

AutoCAD is a registered trademark of Autodesk, Inc.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
Other brands and product names are the trademarks of their respective owners.
RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGENDS

If this software is acquired for or on behalf of the United States of America, its agencies and/or
instrumentalities ("U.S. Government"), it is provided with restricted rights. This software and
accompanying documentation are "commercial computer software" and "commercial computer
software documentation," respectively, pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 227.7202, and "restricted
computer software" pursuant to 48 C.F.R. 52.227-19(a), as applicable. Use, modification, reproduction,
release, performance, display or disclosure of this software and accompanying documentation by the
U.S. Government are subject to restrictions as set forth in this Agreement and pursuant to 48 C.F.R.
12.212, 52.227-19, 227.7202, and 1852.227-86, as applicable. Contractor/Manufacturer is Bentley
Systems, Incorporated, 685 Stockton Drive, Exton, PA 19341-0678.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the Copyright Laws of the United States and International treaties.
Bentley
AutoPLANT Structural Copyright © 2005 Bentley Systems, Incorporated Do Not Duplicate
12/22/2005
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... 1-1

GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................ 1-2
WELCOME TO AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL........................................................ 1-2
CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL ............................................................................. 1-2
NOT PROVIDED IN THIS MANUAL....................................................................... 1-2
DIFFERENCES TO YOUR CURRENT VERSION ................................................. 1-2
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................... 1-3
DIALOG FRAMEWORK ................................................................................................. 1-4
AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL DIALOG BOXES ..................................................... 1-4
TEMPLATE MANAGER.......................................................................................... 1-6
ROLLOVER-MECHANISM ..................................................................................... 1-8
PICK FRAME AND AUXILIARY GRAPHICS.......................................................... 1-9
INPUT EXTENSIONS ............................................................................................. 1-9
PROJECT MANAGER.................................................................................................. 1-10
FILE MANAGEMENT RELATED TO THE PROJECT .......................................... 1-10
WORKING WITH PROJECTS .............................................................................. 1-11
CREATE NEW PROJECTS.................................................................................. 1-12
GLOBAL SETTINGS .................................................................................................... 1-14
OPTIONS.............................................................................................................. 1-15
GRIPS................................................................................................................... 1-16
SHAPES ............................................................................................................... 1-18
SHAPES...LABELS............................................................................................... 1-18
SHAPES...SKETCH DISPLAY.............................................................................. 1-19
SHAPES...NAME CONVENTIONS....................................................................... 1-20
STRAIGHT PLATES ............................................................................................. 1-21
PLATES...LABELS................................................................................................ 1-22
PLATES...DESCRIPTION..................................................................................... 1-22
PLATES...CALCULATION .................................................................................... 1-23
BOLTS .................................................................................................................. 1-24
WORK FRAME ..................................................................................................... 1-25
VALUES................................................................................................................ 1-26
LOGICAL LINKS ................................................................................................... 1-27
DISPLAY............................................................................................................... 1-28
COLOURS 1 ......................................................................................................... 1-29
COLOURS 2 ......................................................................................................... 1-29
DIALOG SETTINGS ............................................................................................. 1-30
DIALOG SETTINGS...PROPERTIES ................................................................... 1-31
CONFIGURATION FILES..................................................................................... 1-31
2 MODELING ......................................................................................................................... 2-1

LAYER FUNCTIONS ...................................................................................................... 2-2
CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES ......................................................................................... 2-4
CONSTRUCTION LINES........................................................................................ 2-4
DIRECT USE OF SOME SETTINGS...................................................................... 2-5
MEASURE OF DISTANCES................................................................................... 2-6
Bentley
12/22/2005 i
Table of Contents
3D COMPONENT PART VIEWS.................................................................................... 2-7

OBJECT VIEW / OBJECT-UCS ............................................................................. 2-7
SURFACE VIEW / SURFACE-UCS ....................................................................... 2-8
GLOBAL VIEW ....................................................................................................... 2-8
TOP VIEW .............................................................................................................. 2-9
FREE VIEW ............................................................................................................ 2-9
CUTTING PLANE ................................................................................................. 2-10
PERSPECTIVE VIEW .......................................................................................... 2-11
MOVE AND COPY PARTS .......................................................................................... 2-13
MOVE/COPY ........................................................................................................ 2-14
TURN.................................................................................................................... 2-15
MIRROR ............................................................................................................... 2-15
ALIGN ................................................................................................................... 2-16
CLONE ................................................................................................................. 2-17
ROTATE ............................................................................................................... 2-17
SETTINGS............................................................................................................ 2-18
DISPLAY / ASSIGN PARTS ......................................................................................... 2-19
HIDE ..................................................................................................................... 2-19
REGENERATE ..................................................................................................... 2-19
DISPLAY CLASSES ............................................................................................. 2-19
AREA CLASSES .................................................................................................. 2-21
PART FAMILIES................................................................................................... 2-21
DEFINING PART FAMILIES OR CHANGING PROPERTIES.............................. 2-22
SEARCH PARTS.......................................................................................................... 2-23
DEFINE SEARCH CONDITION ........................................................................... 2-24
PLACEHOLDERS WHEN SEARCHING FOR DESCRIPTIONS.......................... 2-24
WORK FRAMES........................................................................................................... 2-25
BASIC TYPES ...................................................................................................... 2-25
RECTANGULAR WORK FRAME......................................................................... 2-26
CYLINDRICAL WORK FRAME ............................................................................ 2-29
WEDGE-SHAPED WORK FRAME ...................................................................... 2-30
PYRAMIDAL WORK FRAME ............................................................................... 2-30
CREATE VIEWS................................................................................................... 2-30
AXES NAMES ...................................................................................................... 2-32
OPTIONS.............................................................................................................. 2-34
USER-DEFINED BLOCKS ................................................................................... 2-35
SELECT VIEW.............................................................................................................. 2-36
INSERT SHAPES ......................................................................................................... 2-37
STRAIGHT SHAPES ............................................................................................ 2-38
BENT SHAPES..................................................................................................... 2-42
ADDITIONAL SETTINGS ..................................................................................... 2-43
SHAPE SERIES ................................................................................................... 2-44
CRANKED SHAPES............................................................................................. 2-45
GIRDER POSITION.............................................................................................. 2-47
INSERT PLATES.......................................................................................................... 2-48
INSERTION OF STRAIGHT PLATES .................................................................. 2-48
INSERT BENT PLATES ....................................................................................... 2-51
DIALOG-COMMANDS.......................................................................................... 2-51
ANALYSIS OF DIMENSIONS .............................................................................. 2-52
INSERT SOLIDS .......................................................................................................... 2-52
3D-MODIFICATIONS ................................................................................................... 2-54
DIVIDE / COMBINE .............................................................................................. 2-54
MODIFY SHAPES ................................................................................................ 2-62
MODIFY PLATES ................................................................................................. 2-64
Bentley
12/22/2005 ii
Table of Contents
NOTCH ................................................................................................................. 2-66

OUTLET................................................................................................................ 2-68
BOOLEAN OPERATIONS .................................................................................... 2-71
PLATE EDITOR............................................................................................................ 2-72
BOOLEAN OPERATIONS .................................................................................... 2-72
CHAMFER / ROUNDING OFF ............................................................................. 2-74
EDGE PROCESSING........................................................................................... 2-75
DRILLING / BOLTED CONNECTIONS ........................................................................ 2-76
DRILL HOLES / DRILL HOLE FIELDS ................................................................. 2-77
BOLTED CONNECTIONS .................................................................................... 2-79
EDGE DISTANCES .............................................................................................. 2-82
BOLTS .......................................................................................................................... 2-83
BOLTING PARTS ................................................................................................. 2-84
BOLT STYLE MANAGEMENT ............................................................................. 2-85
SORT .................................................................................................................... 2-90
INSERTION OF STIFFENERS ............................................................................. 2-91
DIMENSIONS ....................................................................................................... 2-92
CONNECT ............................................................................................................ 2-93
OPTIONS.............................................................................................................. 2-94
ASSIGNMENTS.................................................................................................... 2-94
OBLIQUE STIFFENERS....................................................................................... 2-95
PLATE CONNECTIONS............................................................................................... 2-95
CREATING PLATE CONNECTIONS ................................................................... 2-95
FREE PLATE CONNECTIONS ............................................................................ 2-96
DRILL HOLES....................................................................................................... 2-98
CONNECT ............................................................................................................ 2-99
STIFFENING PLATES........................................................................................ 2-100
STIFFENERS...................................................................................................... 2-101
BOTTOM TRAIN................................................................................................. 2-101
ASSIGNMENTS.................................................................................................. 2-103
CONNECTIONS RESISTANT TO DEFLECTION / SHEAR FORCES ............... 2-103
CONNECTIONS RESISTANT TO DEFLECTION .............................................. 2-104
SHEAR FORCE CONNECTIONS ...................................................................... 2-105
USER-DEFINED CONNECTIONS ..................................................................... 2-105
BASE PLATES ACCORDING TO DSTV.................................................................... 2-105
INSERT BASE PLATES ..................................................................................... 2-105
LAYOUT.............................................................................................................. 2-106
DRILL HOLES..................................................................................................... 2-107
BOLTS ................................................................................................................ 2-107
STANDARD DEFINITIONS ................................................................................ 2-108
ASSIGNMENTS.................................................................................................. 2-109
WEB ANGLE .............................................................................................................. 2-109
CREATE WEB ANGLE CONNECTION.............................................................. 2-109
SHAPES ............................................................................................................. 2-110
DISTANCES ....................................................................................................... 2-111
COPE.................................................................................................................. 2-112
STANDARD DATA.............................................................................................. 2-113
FORM GROUP ................................................................................................... 2-114
ASSIGNMENTS.................................................................................................. 2-114
SHEAR PLATES......................................................................................................... 2-114
SHAPES ............................................................................................................. 2-115
SPLICE JOINTS ......................................................................................................... 2-119
PURLIN CONNECTION ............................................................................................. 2-123
BOLTED CONNECTION .................................................................................... 2-124
PURLIN SOCKET ............................................................................................... 2-125
Bentley
12/22/2005 iii
Table of Contents
CONNECTION PLATE ....................................................................................... 2-126

CONNECTION SHAPE ...................................................................................... 2-127
GUSSET PLATES ...................................................................................................... 2-128
BRACINGS ................................................................................................................. 2-131
SETTING ............................................................................................................ 2-131
CREATION OF BRACING PARTS..................................................................... 2-134
CREATING A BRACING .................................................................................... 2-135
HAUNCHES................................................................................................................ 2-136
CONNECTION EDITOR ............................................................................................. 2-139
DIALOG-COMMANDS........................................................................................ 2-140
VERIFY CONNECTIONS ................................................................................... 2-140
EDIT SINGLE CONNECTION ............................................................................ 2-141
GROUPS .................................................................................................................... 2-141
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT GROUPS................................................... 2-141
CREATION AND PROCESSING OF GROUPS ................................................. 2-141
CHECK GROUPS............................................................................................... 2-143
SETTINGS.......................................................................................................... 2-145
POSITIONING ............................................................................................................ 2-145
AUTOMATIC POSITIONING .............................................................................. 2-146
MANUAL INSERTION ........................................................................................ 2-150
AUTOMATIC INSERTION (DISTRIBUTION) ..................................................... 2-153
OTHER AUXILIARY COMMANDS ..................................................................... 2-156
DEPICTION OF POSITION FLAGS ................................................................... 2-157
MANAGEMENT OF STYLES ............................................................................. 2-160
DRAWING INFORMATION ........................................................................................ 2-161
CREATE PARTS LISTS ............................................................................................. 2-162
CREATE PARTS LISTS ..................................................................................... 2-163
PROCESS PARTS LIST..................................................................................... 2-165
DRAWING PARTS LIST............................................................................................. 2-170
PARTS LIST CREATION.................................................................................... 2-170
PROCESSING OF PARTS LIST STYLES ......................................................... 2-172
MANAGEMENT OF PARTS LIST STYLES........................................................ 2-177
PROCESSING THE CONTENT OF PARTS LIST.............................................. 2-177
CONTAINMENT LIST................................................................................................. 2-178
CREATION OF CONTAINMENT LIST ............................................................... 2-178
PROCESSING OF LIST STYLES ...................................................................... 2-179
MANAGEMENT OF LIST STYLES..................................................................... 2-181
PROCESSING THE CONTENT OF DRAWING CONTAINMENT LIST ............. 2-182
3 DETAILING ......................................................................................................................... 3-1

DETAILCENTER ............................................................................................................ 3-2
THE 2D-DETAILING............................................................................................... 3-2
DETAILING WITH THE DETAIL CENTER ............................................................. 3-3
GENERAL INFORMATION – SCALE AND DIMENSION STYLES........................ 3-7
INTELLIGENT 2D-DETAILS................................................................................... 3-8
DISPLAY OF CONSTRUCTION COMPONENT LISTS ....................................... 3-10
COMPONENT OVERVIEW .................................................................................. 3-14
VIEWS OVERVIEW.............................................................................................. 3-22
DETAIL BLOCK OVERVIEW (INSERT) ............................................................... 3-28
GLOBAL SETTINGS ............................................................................................ 3-32
AUTOMATIC TRANSLATION .............................................................................. 3-35
TRANSFER DRAWING PATHS ........................................................................... 3-36
DRAWING VERIFICATION .................................................................................. 3-38
DIRECT DETAILING ............................................................................................ 3-41
MODIFICATION MANAGEMENT ......................................................................... 3-42
DETAILING STYLE ...................................................................................................... 3-46
Bentley
12/22/2005 iv
Table of Contents
WORKING WITH DETAILING STYLES ............................................................... 3-46

GENERAL INFO ................................................................................................... 3-46
GLOBAL SETTINGS............................................................................................. 3-48
2D-DISPLAY ......................................................................................................... 3-52
VIEWS DIALOG TAB............................................................................................ 3-57
DIMENSIONING ................................................................................................... 3-64
LABEL SETTINGS................................................................................................ 3-80
EXAMPLE – DETAILING OF A SINGLE PART.................................................... 3-85
DETAILCENTER EXPRESS ........................................................................................ 3-85
START THE DETAILCENTER EXPRESS............................................................ 3-86
SELECTION PAGES ............................................................................................ 3-86
SINGLE SHEET OUTPUT .................................................................................... 3-96
AUTOMATIC 2D-CUT ................................................................................................ 3-103
ADD CUT ............................................................................................................ 3-103
MODIFICATION OF CUT ................................................................................... 3-103
CRANKED 2D-VIEW .................................................................................................. 3-104
ADD CUT ............................................................................................................ 3-104
NORTH SYMBOL ....................................................................................................... 3-105
NORTH SYMBOL (REFERENCE)...................................................................... 3-106
HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT............................................................................... 3-107
VERTICAL ALIGNMENT .................................................................................... 3-108
USER-DEFINED SYMBOLS............................................................................... 3-108
SHAPE LABELLING ........................................................................................... 3-108
MANUAL DIMENSIONING POINTS........................................................................... 3-109
SELECTION OF VIEWS ..................................................................................... 3-110
MANUAL COMPONENT PART LINK......................................................................... 3-110
GLOBAL SCALE......................................................................................................... 3-110
DRAWING BORDER .................................................................................................. 3-111
CREATION OF ENTRIES................................................................................... 3-112
MANUAL CUT ............................................................................................................ 3-113
DIALOG-COMMANDS........................................................................................ 3-114
DEPICTION OF THE CUT.................................................................................. 3-114
MANUAL DIMENSIONING ......................................................................................... 3-115
DIALOG-COMMANDS........................................................................................ 3-118
DIMENSION CHAINS ......................................................................................... 3-121
ALIGNMENT AND COORDINATE DIMENSIONING.......................................... 3-121
FENCE CHAIN DIMENSIONING........................................................................ 3-122
ELEVATION FLAGS................................................................................................... 3-123
SPECIFICATION OF THE ORIGIN COORDINATES ......................................... 3-124
ELEVATION DEPICTION ................................................................................... 3-125
GEOMETRY DEFINITION .................................................................................. 3-126
STYLE MANAGEMENT...................................................................................... 3-127
WELD SYMBOLS ....................................................................................................... 3-127
CREATING WELD SYMBOLS AND SEAMS ..................................................... 3-128
FORM WELD GROUPS ..................................................................................... 3-129
DEPICTION OF WELD SYMBOLS..................................................................... 3-129
STYLE MANAGEMENT...................................................................................... 3-132
SHORT2D................................................................................................................... 3-133
2D-CUTOUT ............................................................................................................... 3-134
4 MISCELLANEOUS ................................................................................................................ 4-1

USER-DEFINED COMPONENT PARTS ....................................................................... 4-2
SPECIAL PARTS.................................................................................................... 4-2
SPECIAL SHAPES ................................................................................................. 4-2
WELD SHAPES ...................................................................................................... 4-8
BLOCKCENTER........................................................................................................... 4-11
Bentley
12/22/2005 v
Table of Contents
STRUCTURE OF THE BLOCKCENTER ............................................................. 4-11

CREATION AND EDITION OF BLOCKS ............................................................. 4-13
INSERT BLOCKS ................................................................................................. 4-14
DISPLAY OF BLOCK STRUCTURE .................................................................... 4-15
DATABASE OF BLOCK DATA............................................................................. 4-18
ROOF/WALL PANELS ................................................................................................. 4-23
SURFACE LAYOUT ............................................................................................. 4-24
SHAPE SELECTION ............................................................................................ 4-25
POLY-CUTS ......................................................................................................... 4-26
DISPATCH BLOCKS .................................................................................................... 4-27
INSERTION OF THREAD BOLTS........................................................................ 4-27
INSERTION OF BLOCKS..................................................................................... 4-29
FURTHER OPTIONS AND DATA BASE.............................................................. 4-30
AUXILIARY TOOLS...................................................................................................... 4-31
COLLISION CHECK ............................................................................................. 4-31
CENTER OF GRAVITY ........................................................................................ 4-32
TUBE UNFOLD .................................................................................................... 4-32
MOVE OBJECTS.................................................................................................. 4-34
CONVERT ADT SHAPES .................................................................................... 4-34
ADD EFFECTIVE STATIC ANALYSIS LINES.............................................................. 4-34
EFFECTIVE LINES............................................................................................... 4-35
QUERY AND MODIFY STATIC EFFECTIVE LINES ........................................... 4-36
DATA EXCHANGE ....................................................................................................... 4-37
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT DATA EXCHANGE ..................................... 4-37
EXCHANGE LISTS............................................................................................... 4-38
INTERFACE FORMAT SELECTION.................................................................... 4-42
DATA IMPORT COMMAND ................................................................................. 4-43
DATA EXPORT COMMAND ................................................................................ 4-47
DIRECT DATA EXCHANGE VIA RSTAB............................................................. 4-50
NEW INTERFACES.............................................................................................. 4-51
PREVIOUS INTERFACES ................................................................................... 4-59
A APPENDIX ...................................................................................................................A-1
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT STAIRCASE ........................................................................A-2
DIMENSIONS .........................................................................................................A-3
LANDINGS .............................................................................................................A-4
FLOORS .................................................................................................................A-5
SHAPES .................................................................................................................A-6
STEPS ....................................................................................................................A-6
HANDRAIL..............................................................................................................A-7
WORK FRAME .......................................................................................................A-8
ASSIGNMENTS......................................................................................................A-8
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT HANDRAIL ..........................................................................A-8
DIMENSIONS .........................................................................................................A-9
END FORM...........................................................................................................A-10
SHAPES ...............................................................................................................A-11
BASEBOARD .......................................................................................................A-12
CONNECTION......................................................................................................A-12
FILLER RODS ......................................................................................................A-14
ASSIGNMENTS....................................................................................................A-15
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT HANGAR FRAME..............................................................A-15
DIMENSIONS .......................................................................................................A-16
SHAPES ...............................................................................................................A-17
LEFT AND RIGHT KNEE .....................................................................................A-17
APEX ....................................................................................................................A-18
ASSIGNMENTS....................................................................................................A-19
Bentley
12/22/2005 vi
Table of Contents
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT BRACING ..........................................................................A-19

GENERAL SETTINGS..........................................................................................A-20
SHAPE BRACING ................................................................................................A-22
ROD BRACING.....................................................................................................A-24
PIPE BRACING ....................................................................................................A-25
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT TRUSS GIRDER................................................................A-27
DIMENSIONS .......................................................................................................A-28
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT PURLIN COURSE .............................................................A-30
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT LADDER ............................................................................A-35
DIMENSIONS .......................................................................................................A-35
SHAPES ...............................................................................................................A-36
WALL MOUNTING................................................................................................A-37
SAFETY CAGE.....................................................................................................A-38
ASSIGNMENTS....................................................................................................A-39
PROPERTIES...............................................................................................................A-39
SHAPES ...............................................................................................................A-40
PLATES ................................................................................................................A-47
BOLTS ..................................................................................................................A-50
VOLUME SOLIDS / BASIC PRIMITIVES .............................................................A-53
SPECIAL PARTS..................................................................................................A-54
WORK FRAMES / VIEWS ....................................................................................A-54
STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS .................................................................................A-54
ROOF/WALL-OBJECTS .......................................................................................A-55
POSITION FLAGS, ELEVATIONS, WELD MARKS,... .........................................A-55
DRAWING PARTS LISTS.....................................................................................A-55
3D MODIFICATIONS............................................................................................A-55
POLY-CUTS .........................................................................................................A-57
EDGE PROCESSING...........................................................................................A-58
OUTLET................................................................................................................A-58
COMMON PROPERTIES .....................................................................................A-58
Bentley
12/22/2005 vii
Table of Contents
Bentley
12/22/2005 viii
3
1 Introduction
GENERAL INFORMATION 1-2
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 1-3
DIALOG FRAMEWORK 1-4
PROJECT MANAGER 1-10
GLOBAL SETTINGS 1-14
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-1
General information
GENERAL INFORMATION
WELCOME TO AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL

You decided to buy our AutoPLANT Structural program because you are convinced that you will cope
with your daily tasks faster and in a more reliable way in the future by using a CAD software package
which is successful, well tried and tested all over the world.
We are pleased that you selected a product of our company and we hope that for a long time we will be
your reliable partner.
CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL

This manual provides a complete description of all commands available with the AutoPLANT
Structural steel construction software package.
Some of the individual descriptions contain examples, which facilitate the recreation of the different
command applications by providing graphics and screenshots.
NOT PROVIDED IN THIS MANUAL

Working with AutoPLANT Structural and this manual requires that you are already familiar with the
use of AutoCAD. The chapters of this manual require knowledge of AutoCAD and Windows.
If that is not the case, you should familiarize yourself with the most important basic AutoCAD
commands to be able to work effectively with the new software. Although the program will help you to
overcome many of the three-dimensional AutoCAD construction hurdles, you should be familiar with
such terms as object snap, user coordinate system (UCS), blocks, etc.
DIFFERENCES TO YOUR CURRENT VERSION

Our new CAL-technology (CAD Abstract Layer) permits a largely uniform functionality and desktop
of AutoPLANT Structural on the most different CAD-platforms.
In addition, AutoPLANT Structural is available in several licence models, which differ from each other
with regard to their performance range.
Due to the fact that the integration into the CAD system AutoCAD of Messrs. AutoDesk is the most
extensive implementation at the moment, the description of all functions of this manual refers to the
version AutoPLANT Structural Professional for AutoCAD.
When you bought AutoPLANT Structural for another platform than AutoCAD or another licence
model (e.g. without detailing), the actual performance range of your version may differ from this
manual. In addition, there may be differences due to intermediate updates of the program after
publication of this manual.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-2
System Requirements
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
The system requirements are based on an installation running under AutoCAD. For other platforms
these requirements can be different and they are depended on the selected CAD system.
Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000, SP4 or later, OR

Microsoft Windows XP Professional, SP 1a or later
Microsoft Office Microsoft Office Professional Edition
Memory 512 MB (More memory typically results in better performance.)
Hard Disk 1.5 GB minimum free hard disk space
Input Device Any industry-standard input device supported by Windows
Output Device Any industry-standard output device supported by Windows
Video Graphics Any industry-standard video card/monitor
Card
CAD Engines AutoCAD: 2004, 2005, and 2006
AutoCAD Mechanical Desktop: 6.0, 2004 (plus SP1), 2005
Architectural Desktop: 3.3, 2004 (plus SP1), 2005
Building Systems: 3.0, 2004, 2005
AutoCAD Mechanical 2004, 2005
Databases MSDE
Oracle 8.1.3 and 8.1.4, Oracle 9i
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-3
Dialog Framework
DIALOG FRAMEWORK
AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL DIALOG BOXES

In AutoPLANT Structural you will mainly meet dialog frames based on a standardized appearance.
The advantage is that you will always find certain repetitions of the different commands at the same
place and with the same icon.
DIALOG FRAME STRUCTURE

Each dialog consists of the basic control buttons such as OK, CANCEL, TEMPLATE, etc., which are
placed at the bottom edge of the dialog.
On the right, you will find auxiliary diagrams, preview windows or a pick frame also called “monitor”
in the descriptions, appearing in some of the commands.
The actual content of the dialog differs for each command; additional buttons may appear in the lower
button bar depending on the corresponding command. The following picture shows a typical dialog
frame, containing all standard elements, for the example of an end plate connection:
The standard elements (lower button bar) as well as the general behaviour of the dialogs are described
below. When the different commands are described, these things won’t be explained any more.
DIALOG-COMMANDS
OK
By clicking on this button, you close the dialog and the last settings such as content of the dialog,
position on the screen, selected dialog tab, etc. are stored.
Depending on the command, you are prompted to continue with other things like e.g. selection of
component parts, etc.
CANCEL
By clicking on this button, you close the dialog and the command is cancelled. If possible, the
previous status is restored as it was before selection of the command.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-4
Dialog Framework
HELP
When you click on this button, the Online-help is opened.
TEMPLATE
By clicking on this button, you can save or load again the complete settings of the dialog for the
selected command under any template name you like.
Here, another dialog of AutoPLANT Structural template management opens which is described
separately in this subordinate chapter.
CLONE
By clicking on this button, you can read the settings of an existing connection and import it onto
another one. This function is especially suitable for automatic connections.
It helps you to obtain an identical connection to an existing one, the exact default settings of which,
however, you don’t know any more. For more detailed information, please refer to the descriptions of
the individual functions.
UPDATE
When you click on this button, the connection, structure or the component part are updated
according to your default settings.
Normally in AutoPLANT Structural, you are working in a dynamic mode. Each modification of a
parameter is directly translated into a modification of the corresponding object so that you can see the
results immediately.
In case of very complex structures or less powerful computers, it may be reasonable to deactivate this
automatic update in the global settings of AutoPLANT Structural and to activate it manually if need
be.
ROLL-OVER
By clicking on this button, you alternatively switch on or off the so-called Roll-Over-
mechanism.
When RollOver is switched on, the visible dialog area depends on the current mouse position.
For more detailed information, please refer to the separate description in this chapter.
GRAPHIC
When you click on this button, the auxiliary graphics of the corresponding dialogs are
alternatively switched on or off. This influences the size of the dialog on the screen.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-5
Dialog Framework
TEMPLATE MANAGER
When working with the program, you will see that it provides a variety of different dialog boxes,
which are used to enter settings for the functions and commands. Many of these settings are repeated
for construction tasks in different orders or are used in a slightly modified for (e.g. connection plates
with holes for specific supports) – it would be useful to save these settings for later use.
For this purpose, AutoPLANT Structural offers you a template management function. Many of the
dialogs feature a template button. Clicking this button calls up the template management dialog box
where you then can save or load the settings. Sometimes, the templates can also be accessed via the
context menu of the right mouse key.
Although this is always the same window, the saved entries depend on the type of dialog box from
which you are using the template management dialog. The only items visible in the command ’Work
Frame’ are saved work frames. The command ‘Plates’ correspondingly offers only connection plate
specifications.
The methods of working within the template management are very similar to those of Windows
Explorer. For example, you can organize the templates’ structure in different list branches and easily
modify this structure at any time via Drag&Drop.
DIALOG-COMMANDS
LOAD
When you click on this button, the template marked in the selection list is loaded and the input
fields of the dialog box are filled in accordingly. Then, the dialog will be closed immediately.
You can also double-click the list entry for this command.
SAVE
By clicking on this button, you can save the settings entered in the dialog frame using a name
indicated by you. You first have to select the desired list branch where your template has to be saved
and then click the Save button.
Now an entry with a default name will be created the name of which can be modified immediately or
at a later moment.
To overwrite an existing entry, select the corresponding entry instead of a list branch.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-6
Dialog Framework
NEW FOLDER
By clicking on this button, you can create a new branch (folder) on the topmost level or even
within a list branch to save your templates.
You first have to select the desired list branch and then click the new folder button.
IMPORT
Click on this button to add other templates of the same type to your current template file. This
may be a single template, a list branch or the complete file.
A file selection dialog opens where you can select the template file to be imported. It is checked
whether you selected the same type.
If the name of some list branches of the imported template file is identical with the entry in the existing
file, you can decide for each branch individually whether the existing data have to be overwritten or
not.
The new branches or templates are only added; they may be re-organized later by using Drag&Drop.
SORT
Click on this button, and the alphabetical order of the display list is turned upside down. You can
reach entries which are placed further down without having to scroll up and down the list.
First, you have to select a list branch the order of which has to be changed. Sorting can be defined for
each branch individually.
CONTEXT MENU
Most of the dialog commands can be reached via the context menu of the right mouse key. Further
commands are available here.
REMOVE
Select this command to delete the selected template or a complete branch including all subordinate
branches.
EXPORT
Select this command to save the selected template or a complete branch including all subordinate
branches under any file name you like. The data can be added again at any time using the Import
command or they can be made accessible to other users for import.
After selection of the command, the file selection dialog opens where you can select a file name or a
file path.
PERMANENT AND TEMPORARY DIALOG TEMPLATES

The templates are saved as permanent dialog settings in the variants folder of the program and thus are
available for all users at the same time in a network if the same folder has been set at this workstation.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-7
Dialog Framework
In addition, the last settings are saved in an individual temporary folder of the workstation each time
the dialog is left. Thus you have fast access to the last entry when selecting the function repeatedly.
VERSION CONTROL
You are perhaps used to the fact that in other programs and in previous AutoPLANT Structural
versions already defined templates were often lost during an update.
This is the reason why the data structure of template file was equipped with a version and type control.
Your new defined templates remain compatible with the following versions and when former files are
loaded, any new added values will have a default value.
DBASE-IMPORT AND -EXPORT

Different functions additionally offer the possibility to export the template files into the dBASE-format
or to import them from this format. You can create data records using Excel or comparable programs.
These data records then are available as AutoPLANT Structural-templates.
Especially the creation of template records similar in quality (e.g. only with two variable dimensions)
is considerably facilitated.
Select Export and Import as file type dBASE III List in the dialog commands to export individual
templates or branches into the dBASE-format or to import them from there.
If the selection is not possible, format conversion is not available for these dialog templates.
ROLLOVER-MECHANISM
The so-called RollOver-mechanism allows for a better use of your drawing surface in AutoPLANT
Structural because the dialogs are only displayed completely if you probably intend to enter something
or to control the settings.
Otherwise, the dialogs are reduced to the title bar allowing you at any time to recognize which dialogs
are open at the moment.
The change from complete to reduced status depends on the movements of your mouse.
When you leave the input area of a dialog with the mouse, it will be “folded up” except for the title bar
shortly afterwards and you can look at your construction. It is not until you move to the title bar again
with the mouse, that the dialog is displayed completely because the program now assumes that you are
going to modify something.
INDIVIDUAL CONTROL
Due to the fact that perhaps you don’t want to have a RollOver-mechanism activated for each dialog, it
can be switched on or off for each dialog individually. You may even completely deactivate the
RollOver-mechanism in the global settings if you don’t like this way of working at all. However, your
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-8
Dialog Framework
individual defaults are kept in each dialog frame and become valid again when the mechanism is
activated.
PICK FRAME AND AUXILIARY GRAPHICS

Many dialogs have a graphic depiction on the right. This is either a pure auxiliary graphic explaining
the dialog parameters or – depending on the command – a pick frame for the determination of
reference points (“monitor“).
AUXILIARY GRAPHICS
The auxiliary graphics show a depiction in the form of a diagram, e.g. a connection or a structural
element with the most important dimensions, which can be modified in the dialog frame.
Here, different numbers which you will find again in the labelling of input fields and which allow for a
clear assignment marks the dimensions. In some dialog frames, the graphics change depending on the
selection of an option or even of an input field. Thus they are sufficient in most cases as help for the
parameters.
MONITOR
The monitor frame helps you to define the reference points e.g. at the insertion of shapes.
In this case, you usually find small circles serving as marks to be clicked. The activated reference point
then is displayed in red.
In addition, the monitor also shows a preview of your current default settings e.g. at the definition of
position flags. In contrast to the auxiliary graphics, its proportions change.
INPUT EXTENSIONS
Apart from the ToolTips customary in Windows-programs, displaying an auxiliary text with
explanations, when you move your mouse to an input field or button, further useful helps are available
for you in the dialog frames.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-9
Project Manager
PICK LENGTHS
Most input fields for entering distances allow picking the distance in your drawing. Then, the picked
length is entered into the input field. This extension permits comfortable seizing of distances from your
construction.
Double-clicking the corresponding field temporarily hides the dialog frame, and you can pick the
distance via two points.
If additionally you keep the SHIFT-key pressed during double-clicking, the distance will be calculated
without Z-coordinates.
POCKET CALCULATOR
Most input fields for entering distances alternatively allow the use of an integrated pocket calculator to
calculate the values. The new calculated value then is entered into the input field.
Double-clicking the corresponding field when at the same time the CTRL-key is pressed displays the
pocket calculator. If a value was entered into the input field before, it will be automatically displayed
in the pocket calculator.
PROJECT MANAGER
Command Name: Ps_Project
In all AutoPLANT Structural versions it is possible to store drawing files, parts list files or similar
things on the folder you like. This feature is often very useful; on the other hand, however, the problem
is to keep all files of a project together.
Up to now, it was not possible to store the pre-settings, templates or even configurations related to the
project. In the current version, a project manager has been implemented offering exactly these options.
FILE MANAGEMENT RELATED TO THE PROJECT

You can choose for your temporary, template, style and format files whether these have to be managed
related to the project or related to the work station.
Related to the work station means that you only have a data record of the settings. In contrast, related
to the project means that your settings may differ for each project and will be stored within the project.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-10
Project Manager
If you work e.g. with detailing styles and formats related to the customer, but use always the same
settings and templates, you set the temporary and template files to ‘not related to the project’, the style
and format files, however, are related to the project.
WORKING WITH PROJECTS

In the upper line, you see the set project path where the projects are filed and from which the stored
projects are displayed. In the list, all available projects are displayed, the lines on the right show the
information stored for the corresponding project.
Use this button to load the currently highlighted project and to carry out all desired modifications
of the configuration. The available possibilities are displayed under Create Project. Alternatively,
you can activate a project by double-clicking on it.
Load Project...: If this option is activated, the current project is automatically activated when you
start AutoPLANT Structural. The prerequisite is, however, that AutoPLANT Structural has been
quit as usual.
Click on this button to finish the current project and to return to the basic configuration.
This option permits to create a new project. The available possibilities are displayed below.
Use this option to delete the currently highlighted project as well as all included files. Also, you
have the possibility to close this function, and then the files will be deleted. The current project
cannot be deleted.
This option allows the modification of project data and settings. Please refer to Create New
Project.
This option permits the creation of a DwgInfo-table (drawing information) throughout the project.
In each project drawing, these files can be taken over later into the corresponding DwgInfo-table.
The change of the AutoCAD main dialog informs you whether a project has been loaded. Name and
file path of the loaded project are displayed there, instead of the information that you are working with
a certain AutoCAD version. Open this dialog to see the name of the current project displayed in the
bottom line as well.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-11
Project Manager
CREATE NEW PROJECTS

The following dialog appears when you want to create a new project. Use this dialog to enter the
project data.
Project Name: Enter the desired name of your project. The remaining paths are modified as well
according to your inputs. However, they can be overwritten individually.
Model Files: Enter the path to be used for storing your model files. In contrast to the other paths, it
is not possible to force AutoCAD to use this path as previously set. Therefore at storing, you have
to take care manually that this path will be used to store your model files there.
This button allows interactive path selection if you don’t want to use the proposed path.
This button deletes your individual input and activates the previously set path again.
Detail Files: This is the path for your detail drawings. The Detail Centre takes over the selection
made here as pre-setting.
Parts Lists: This is the path for your parts list files. The file for the creation of parts lists takes over
the selection made here as pre-setting. Of course, only the new selection is concerned. If another
project was activated at the last selection of the parts list creation, the path still is the one set for
this project.
NC Files: This is the path for your NC files. The NC-creation takes over the selection made here
as pre-setting. Of course, only the new selection is concerned. If another project was activated at
the last selection of the NC-creation, the path still is the one set for this project.
PPS Files: This is the path for your PPS files. The PPS-function takes over the selection made here
as pre-setting. Of course, only the new selection is concerned. If another project was activated at
the last selection of the PPS-function, the path still is the one set for this project.
Export Files: This is the path for your export files. The export function takes over the selection
made here as pre-setting. Of course, only the new selection is concerned. If another project was
activated at the last selection of the NC-creation, the path still is the one set for this project.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-12
Project Manager
Temp Project: If this option is activated, you can store the temporary files separated from the
standard storing place and organize your settings related to the project. In the temporary files e.g.
the last active dialog content, the dialog position, etc. are stored.
Temp Files: Enter the path for your temporary files.
Copy from: Enter the path from which all existing temporary files have to be copied into the new
directory. You don’t have to work with a bare installation, but you will find the usual
environment, even if from now on it will only be valid for this project.
Templates Proj.: If this option is activated, you can store the template files separated from the
standard storing place and organize your settings related to the project. In the template files, all
data are stored which have been created via the template management.
Template Files: Enter the path for your template files.
Copy from: Enter the path from which all existing template files have to be copied into the new
Styles Project: If this option is activated, you can store the style files separated from the standard
storing place and organize your settings related to the project. This option is valid for all 5 types of
style files (detailing style, position flags, weld marks, elevations, bolts).
Style File: Enter the path for your style files. This path is used to file the corresponding
subdirectories for the 5 types of style files.
Copy From: Enter the path from which all existing style files have to be copied into the new
DWG Project: If this option is activated, you can store the Dwg format templates separated from
the standard storing place and organize your settings related to the project.
DWG Frame: Enter the path for your frame files.
Copy From Enter the path from which all existing sDwg frames have to be copied into the new
directory.
Project Descr.: Here you have the opportunity to describe your project in 10 lines. The data are
displayed at project selection and have to facilitate selection.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-13
Global Settings
GLOBAL SETTINGS
Command Name: PS_GLOBAL_SETTINGS
This dialog box and its pages allow you to enter the standard settings for several functions. You access
the dialog by selecting the ‘AutoPLANT Structural/Options item via the context menu of the right
mouse button when no objects are selected.
Identical values for the corresponding AutoPLANT Structural components resulting from these
settings can be modified at any time for each part via the “Change PS Properties” command.
Most entries are explained with the individual functions; therefore just some settings will be explained
in the following.
Options: General settings
Grips: Settings for grips and stretching; when no grip is entered for an object, the AutoCAD-
command “Stretch” cannot be used.
Shapes: Settings for shapes
Straight Plates : Settings for any kind of plate (poly-plates)
Bolts: Settings for bolt display
Work Frame: Settings for work frame
Values: Settings for resolution of circular volumes for volume patterns
LogLinks: Settings for links between elements
Display: Settings for display
Colours 1+2: Settings for the element and other highlighting colours
Dialogs : Settings for all dialogs are specified.
Files: Access to the most important system files; this is only visible in expert mode (see Dialog
settings).
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-14
Global Settings
OPTIONS
Process Status:An additional page is added to the properties dialog boxes when clicking elements
with context menu ‘Change PS Properties’, where you can enter data concerning production status
of an element (manufactured, galvanized, delivered, etc).
As this might not be of interest for your application, this function can be switched off.
Analysis View: For shape properties, an additional tab for the static view is available. If this
option is not required, you can deactivate it here generally.
Double Click: The part properties can be processed by double clicking the part.
Unit Dialog: You are asked at the beginning of a new drawing in which unit system you want to
work (metrical or imperial). Otherwise, the current AutoCAD-setting will be adopted.
As the consequent use of the same unit system within a drawing is indispensable for the correct
display of shapes, the modification of the system variable MEASUREMENT that is responsible
for this can cause unwanted results.
This option grants that the once selected unit system is kept and a corresponding hint will be
displayed in case of (mostly unwanted) modifications.
Enable DSTV: The shape and bolt designations in a parts list are named according to the latest
DSTV standard.
Remove Modifications: Drill holes e.g. which lie outside of the shape after a length modification
has been performed, are deleted automatically.
Remove Links: Logical links, which haven’t any meaning any more, are deleted when parts are
deleted. During normal operation, this option should be turned on.
Remove References: When the drawing is cleaned with the AutoCAD command “Purge”, in order
to reduce the drawing size, unused shape references can be deleted after confirmation.
Check DWG: Each time the drawing is opened, it is verified with regard to invalid group entries.
In some cases, unexpectedly big drawings could be created which is avoided using this option.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-15
Global Settings
Recalculate Parts: Internal calculations are not carried out by AutoPLANT Structural each time a
part is „touched“, but only if it is really necessary. This shortens the processing time of some
functions.
Group as a Whole: This option permits selection of groups as a whole if the AutoCAD system
variable “Pickstyle” has been set accordingly.
Convert Boolean: In case of Boolean volume operations, the solid, which is responsible for the
processing, will be parameterized.
Thus it is possibly to modify the dimensions of the processing later, even if the solid responsible
for the processing doesn’t exist any more (in the case it was e.g. only an auxiliary object and has
been deleted again).
Check Shape Lengths: The shape lengths are automatically verified when a shape is inserted.
Check Hole Edges: The admissible edge distances are automatically verified if drill holes are
inserted.
Description Layer: Component parts are placed on the corresponding layer indicated in the
description file
Execute Boolean: logical links are processed, the Boolean volume operations within the parts are
carried out before a cut is made. The display of component parts can change by using this option.
Shapes as ACIS: New created shapes are generated using the ACIS-modeller.
Plates as ACIS: New created shapes are generated using the ACIS-modeller.
LogDwgInput: Each time a drawing is loaded, a minute’s file will be created in the same directory.
GRIPS
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-16
Global Settings
Shapes
Modify Length: A grip is created for length change (or for position change) and all measurements
can be altered.
Move Cuts: A grip is created for the section. You might now have one grip for changing the length
and one for changing the section.
Note Please note: When you move a section grip in a way to shorten the length of the shape, the
length grip is moved simultaneously.
When you move the length grip over the section grip, the shape will be cut off at the same
spot, because you have not moved the sectional plane. When you move the section grip over
the length grip, you eliminate the section from the shape (although the sectional plane
remains at the section grip) the section grip “seizes” the sectional plane, while the length grip
“seizes” the shape length.
When you stretch a cut shape, the section angle within the shape remains the same, just like
in reality.
Move Holes: Drill holes receive a grip and can be moved. Otherwise they remain where inserted
when the shape is stretched.
Move Polycuts: Poly-sections receive a grip and can be moved (the original form of the poly-line
is stored; therefore you only move the line). Otherwise, the section remains where inserted when
the shape is stretched.
Only Along Center Line: Shapes can only be stretched along their axis, i.e. a change of position is
not possible.
Layout: When you have entered a value > 0 in this input field, the length of the shape can only be
changed via grips in preset modular steps. When you have entered 0, any kind of change can be
performed.
Plates
Modify Plate Size: grip for changing thickness is displayed, in all other cases only form changes
can be performed.
Move Cuts: All other plates fields have same definition as the shape fields. Please refer to this
chapter for more detailed information.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-17
Global Settings
SHAPES
With the exception of the additional dialogs and some specifications, most of the settings can be found
under the section describing the shape properties.
Offset Center Line: Here, you specify the length beyond which the center line has to exceed the
shape ends.
Maximum Shape: If you enter a value bigger than 0 and you have checked the entry ‘Verify Shape
Lengths’ under ‘Options’, and shapes are inserted, a message is displayed drawing your attention
to the fact that the maximum delivery length is exceeded by some shapes.
A hint dialog appears and the corresponding shapes are highlighted in colour.
SHAPES...LABELS
In the 3D-model a shape labelling can be displayed additionally, the configuration of which is set here.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-18
Global Settings
Text Size: Enter the text size of the shape labelling.
Distance: Enter the distance between labelling and the upper side of the shape. However, don’t
forget that the actual size depends on the set global scale of the drawing.
Label: The name of the shape is additionally added to the labelling.
Position Number: The position number is additionally added to the labelling.
Length: The length of the shape is additionally added to the labelling.
Note2: The content of the note2 field is output as well. If the ‘Below’ field is also checked, it will
be displayed in a second line.
Dynamic: The text of shape labelling is dynamically adjusted to the view for depictions in paper
area if the “Viewport- support” has been activated.
The advantage is that the text has the same size independent of the scale in the view window.
Select the AutoCAD text style to be used for the labelling in the selection list Text Style.
Shape Type not to be labelled: In this input field you enter the shape types, which have to be
excluded from labelling. The advantage is that only shape sizes differing from a default value will
be output individually.
SHAPES...SKETCH DISPLAY
Sketch Size
Sketch Length: You can enter the length of sketch display from the center in the ‘Value’ input
field below to outline the shape as solid. If you enter the value 0, the result will only be a cross-
section display at the center.
Relative Length: You can enter the relative size of sketch display related t o the overall length of
the shape in the ‘Value’ input field below.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-19
Global Settings
End Offset: You can enter the distance of the end points of the displayed system line towards the
actual insertion points in the ‘Value’ input field below.
Layout
Insertion Line: The insertion line of the shape is displayed as system line of the shape (which
could for example be the upper edge).
Middle Line: The middle line of the shape is displayed as system line.
Here, you can see an example for a sketch display as well as some corresponding dimensions:
SHAPES...NAME CONVENTIONS
Input Fields: Here, you can indicate a general default consisting of format variables and constant
designations for the indicated shape type in question.
All format variables are placed in round brackets and start with a $-symbol outside the brackets.
Thus they can be identified as variables at once. This is followed by the format specification for
the desired dimension.
Format Specifications:
$(W) shape width
$(H) shape height
$(T) shape thickness
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-20
Global Settings
$(D) outside diameter in case of round shapes or edge length at

square shapes
STRAIGHT PLATES
With the exception of the additional dialogs and some specifications, most of the settings can be found
under the section describing the shape properties.
Grid lengthwise: Here you enter the lengthwise grid distances if a grid is to be displayed.
Grid cross-wise: Here you enter the cross-wise grid distances if a grid is to be displayed.
Grid Length: This is where you specify the maximum grid length running from the outer edge of
the plate or from existing inner contours. If you enter the value 0, the plate will be displayed with
a complete grid. This option permits you to display the plate without complete grid. The display is
limited to the contour edges. Shapes which are situated below remain visible by this way.
Grid Height: Enter the grid height here.
Offset Middle Line: If you selected the display as middle line, this is where you enter a projection
of the middle line over the two plate surfaces.
In contrast to shapes, the center line of plates is not running along the longitudinal direction but
along the plate thickness.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-21
Global Settings
PLATES...LABELS
Since the dialog is identical with the shape labelling, please refer to this chapter for the meaning of the
input fields.
PLATES...DESCRIPTION
Description of Name: Here, you specify the format default of the plate name as it is used e.g. at
labelling and in the property fields.
Position Flags: Here, you specify the format default of the plate name in position flags.
Export: here, you specify the format default of the plate name at the export of parts list data.
Format Default Structure:

The names like e.g. $(N) serve as variable for the current value of the corresponding plate and are
explained in the dialog itself. The ‘Name’ of the plate is the constant part like plate, grating, etc.
In the input fields of the corresponding description, you can enter a text consisting of the variables
and any other characters.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-22
Global Settings
When the program is running, the variables are replaced by the current values e.g. for the length
and the other characters will be kept as in the original input.
Round at..: Here, you specify the accuracy to which the specifications concerning dimensions of
the plate name have to be rounded. This doesn’t have any influence on the actual dimensions of
the plate model.
Length greatest...: The greatest value of dimensions is always regarded as plate length. This
doesn’t depend on how you inserted the plate.
PLATES...CALCULATION
Here, a dialog opens where you can determine the method for calculating the weight of the plate resp.
the surface to be painted. These specifications influence the result in the parts list output.
The values can be defined according to the exact form, according to the rubber tape-method (as if a
rubber tape was tightened around the plate) or according to the smallest surrounding rectangle.
For plates having a grid (e.g. to display a gridiron) you can reduce the weight to the percentage value
indicated in the input field Weight at Grid.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-23
Global Settings
BOLTS
Layout: Bolts can be inserted into the drawing with different display settings: as Middle Line,
Line with Circle, Extruded Circles or in real Display.
Back to Back: permits automatic bolted connections back-to-back; the bolts are guided through all
parts (penetrating bolts).
Global Workloose: It is not possible to set an individual clearance in the dialogs, but a uniform
value is used instead.
Round...to: When the bolt is attached, the found clamping length is rounded to a clamping length
which can be divided through the indicated value.
Round bigger...: The rounding is set to the next bigger value. The found clamping length is not
decreased, but always increased.
Search smaller...: If a bolt cannot be created with the found size, the next smaller bolt will be
searched and used.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-24
Global Settings
WORK FRAME
Frame: In the case of new work frames to be inserted, the outer frame will be displayed.
Diagonal: In the case of new work frames to be inserted, the diagonal will be drawn.
Cut Plane: In the case of new work frames to be inserted, the cutting planes are displayed.
Origin: In the case of new work frames to be inserted, the coordinate system of the working area
(ECS) will be displayed
Area Name: In the case of new work frames to be inserted, the frame text will be displayed.
Dynamic..: In the case of new work frames to be inserted, the frame text will be displayed
dynamically.
Size Adjustment: In the case of new work frames to be inserted, the frame text will be adjusted to
the size of the display.
Left/Right Designation: In the case of work frames to be inserted, the left resp. the right axis
designation will be displayed.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-25
Global Settings
VALUES
Resolution: The input fields are used to specify the resolution for creating circular volumes. The
higher the resolution, the more detailed the display but the computer processing speed decreases.
Use high-resolution settings only for large scales and important details.
Due to some special features in the volume-modeller, you should only specify odd numbers here.
2D Subpart: Specify the size of the pick helper symbol for detailed construction groups. You need
the pick helpers to access the individual parts of construction groups in the workshop drawing
after the detailing.
Clip Plane Distance: Specify the front and rear section plane distances of the object view.
Rounding Stiffener Thickness: Here, you specify the accuracy the plate thickness of the calculated
stiffener thickness has to be rounded at stiffeners in connections.
An unnecessary accuracy can thus be avoided resp. only certain plate thicknesses, which are
available in the workshop, will be used.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-26
Global Settings
LOGICAL LINKS
Create Passive: The active or passive links referencing the corresponding components are created.
No Update: Any changes made to a component are not passed on to its associated components
using an update.
On Request: You are prompted to indicate if any changes made to a component are to be passed
on to its associated components using an update.
Automatic Update: Any changes made to a component are immediately passed on to its associated
components using an update.
Structural Elements..: The automatic update of all structural elements such as bracing, staircases,
etc. is suppressed.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-27
Global Settings
DISPLAY
Viewport: Here you can set the support of optimum depiction when working with view windows
in the paper area.
Without Support – No adaptations are made within the depiction.
Only for normal output – The depiction of the shape labelling is e.g. adapted to the depiction scale
if dynamic adjustment option has been activated.
Complete Support – A complete support of the depiction takes place.
Shape Clipping: The active UCS plane (top view) displays the cross-section of the object tapered
to it theoretically. This option should be turned on.
When this option is switched off, you do not get a correct cross-section top view of an object if it
starts below and ends above sectional plane.
Plate Clipping: This option is identical with ShapeClipping, but it is only valid for plates.
Suppress..: Any shape labelling inserted into the model is hidden if the AutoCAD function “Hide /
Shade” is selected.
Cache 2D: The result of all line calculations effected by the volume-modeller (e.g. at a 2D-
depiction, object snap, etc) is written into an intermediate storage. A new calculation is only made
in case of modifications.
Thus the processing speed for the determination of auto- object snap-points especially in case of
complex construction groups is considerably increased.
Real...shaded: Bolts or curved shapes (arcs) are displayed as real objects when the AutoCAD-
function “Hide/Shade” is selected. This option should be turned on during normal operation.
Position Flags at Shade: All position flags placed in the model will not be hidden when the
AutoCAD-function “Hide/Shade” is selected.
Additional Lines at Shade: All lines in the model, like center lines, gravity lines or other
construction lines will not be hidden when the AutoCAD-function “Hide/Shade” is selected.
Workframe at Shade: All work frames within the model will not be hidden when the AutoCAD-
function “Hide/Shade” is selected.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-28
Global Settings
COLOURS 1
Here, you set the colours to be used for the different display markings and objects of the program
by indicating the AutoCAD colour number. Please refer to the corresponding commands for the
meaning of the different markings.
You can also select the colour in a comfortable way by clicking the corresponding input field and
then loading the AutoCAD dialog for colour selection by clicking the SELECT button.
COLOURS 2
Here, you set the colours to be used for the different display markings and objects of the program
by indicating the AutoCAD colour number. Please refer to the corresponding commands for the
meaning of the different markings.
You can also select the colour in a comfortable way by clicking the corresponding input field and
then loading the AutoCAD dialog for colour selection by clicking the SELECT button.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-29
Global Settings
DIALOG SETTINGS
Expert Mode: Here, you can configure different display properties in the dialogs. The following
options are available for selection: Beginner, Middle and Expert. This setting has an influence on
the display of constructional graphics in the dialogs and more.
Accuracy: Here you specify the default settings for the display of lengths, angles and other values.
If you enter –1, the AutoCAD-defaults settings will be used.
RollOver: Here, you switch on RollOver for the dialogs.
Suppress ToolTips: Here, you switch off the auxiliary ToolTips.
Input of Hole Dia : You can specify any hole diameter. If this field is not checked, you can only
specify hole diameters from a given list.
Dynamic Point Input: This option permits dynamic zoom and pan during the picking of points or
lines.
Tabs one after the other: If there isn’t enough place, the selection tabs for the pages of a dialog are
displayed one after the other instead of next to each other.
Key Assignment: This field controls the key abbreviations for selecting different commands in the
dialogs. Two alternatives are available for selection.
Field is switched off
Pick Length DoubleClick

Length without Z DoubleClick with SHIFT
Pocket Calculator DoubleClick with CTRL
Field is switched on
Pick Length DoubleClick with CTRL

Length without Z DoubleClick with CTRL and SHIFT
Pocket Calculator DoubleClick with SHIFT
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-30
Global Settings
No Update: Switches off the dynamic update in the dialogs. The advantage is during operation in
the case of very complex calculating processes.
To permit a manual release of update an additional button with an exclamation mark is displayed
in the command line of some dialogs.
Coloured Icons: For some symbols different colours are displayed instead of the symbols of one
colour (blue).
DIALOG SETTINGS...PROPERTIES
In this dialog, you can specify the default settings for the properties of individual object types in
AutoPLANT Structural.
Select the object type in the Selection List. The depiction of the dialog tab will be adopted. Please refer
to the descriptions of the different object types for the meaning of the entries.
CONFIGURATION FILES
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-31
Global Settings
The basic configuration of AutoPLANT Structural is effected via different files which you can see by
corresponding selection and which you can edit using the integrated text editor.
DELETE TEMPORARY FILES
Click this button to delete any existing files in the temporary directory. By deleting the
temporary files, you reset all command dialogs to the original state at delivery.
DELETE TEMPLATES
Click this button to delete all existing data in the template directory. However, please remember
that in this case all dialog templates created by you will be irrevocably deleted. Important templates
such as e.g. certain company standards should be saved elsewhere.
Note Please note that you only have access to this page via the “Expert Mode” because
modifications at this place have a decisive influence on the operation of the program.
Bentley
12/22/2005 1-32
3
2 Modeling
LAYER FUNCTIONS .............................................................................................................. 2-2

CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES ................................................................................................. 2-4
3D COMPONENT PART VIEWS............................................................................................ 2-7
MOVE AND COPY PARTS .................................................................................................. 2-13
DISPLAY / ASSIGN PARTS ................................................................................................. 2-19
SEARCH PARTS.................................................................................................................. 2-23
WORK FRAMES................................................................................................................... 2-25
SELECT VIEW...................................................................................................................... 2-36
INSERT SHAPES ................................................................................................................. 2-37
INSERT PLATES.................................................................................................................. 2-48
INSERT SOLIDS .................................................................................................................. 2-52
3D-MODIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................... 2-54
PLATE EDITOR.................................................................................................................... 2-72
DRILLING / BOLTED CONNECTIONS ................................................................................ 2-76
BOLTS .................................................................................................................................. 2-83
PLATE CONNECTIONS....................................................................................................... 2-95
BASE PLATES ACCORDING TO DSTV............................................................................ 2-105
WEB ANGLE ...................................................................................................................... 2-109
SHEAR PLATES................................................................................................................. 2-114
SPLICE JOINTS ................................................................................................................. 2-119
PURLIN CONNECTION ..................................................................................................... 2-123
GUSSET PLATES .............................................................................................................. 2-128
BRACINGS ......................................................................................................................... 2-131
HAUNCHES........................................................................................................................ 2-136
CONNECTION EDITOR ..................................................................................................... 2-139
GROUPS ............................................................................................................................ 2-141
POSITIONING .................................................................................................................... 2-145
DRAWING INFORMATION ................................................................................................ 2-161
CREATE PARTS LISTS ..................................................................................................... 2-162
DRAWING PARTS LIST..................................................................................................... 2-170
CONTAINMENT LIST......................................................................................................... 2-178
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-1
Layer Functions
LAYER FUNCTIONS
Command Name: PS_LAYER
The program is equipped with an automatic layer control. Normally you don’t have to take care of this.
If you use the program commands to create different objects such as shapes, dimensions, welding
symbols, etc., these are created on their own layer.
The activation, deactivation, and switching of layers is one of the most frequently performed tasks
when using AutoCAD. AutoPLANT Structural supplies its own switching functions for this purpose.
Switching to the most important layers can be done with just one click, and without long searches.
Select the command by clicking its associated button or enter PS_LAYER from the keyboard with the
indicated parameter.
Work Frame On: LFRAMEON
The layer with the frame for the work area is activated.
Work Frame Off: LFRAMEOFF
The layer with the frame for the work area is deactivated.
Element Layer On: LELEMON
The layers for the main elements are activated. These are the
layers for shape, roof/wall shapes, plates, construction lines,
and bolts.
Element Layer Off: LELEMOFF\
The layers for the main elements are deactivated. These are
the layers for shape, roof/wall shapes, plates, construction
lines, and bolts.
Additional Layer On: LADDION
The layers for the additional elements are activated. These are
the layers for dimensioning, midlines, position flags, relative
heights, welding symbols, etc.
Additional Layer Off: LADDIOFF
The layers for the additional elements are deactivated. These

are the layers for dimensioning, midlines, position flags,
relative heights, welding symbols, etc.
Object Layer Current: LOBJECT
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-2
The layer for a freely selectable element becomes the current
layer. You can select the element by clicking it.
Object Layer Off: LOBJECTOFF
The layer for a freely selectable element is deactivated. You

can select the element by clicking it.
Construction Lines Current: LCONSTAKT (black lines)
The layer for the construction lines becomes the current layer.
Construction Lines On: LCONSTON (brown lines)
The layer for the construction lines is activated.
Construction Lines Off: LCONSTOFF
The layer for the construction lines is deactivated.
Layer 0 Current: LNULL
The AutoCAD-Layer ‘0’ becomes the current layer.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-3
Construction Utilities
CONSTRUCTION UTILITIES
CONSTRUCTION LINES
The program offers several options to create construction lines, divide distances evenly or measure
distances which all serve as design and constructional aids. These lines are created on their own layer
(default is Ps_const), so that all of them can be jointly hidden or deleted as well.
Direction: determines how the direction of the construction line is defined.
2 Points: You have to pick 2 points.
Line: You pick a line.
Point Line: You pick a line for direction and a point for position.
Line Type:You can either use standard lines the length of which is determined by projection or X-
lines which always run up to the edge of the screen.
Distance:The distance of the construction line(s) from the displayed line in case of parallel or
vertical construction lines; resp. the distance of one line to the other if several lines have been
generated.
Scale: Distance / spacing information is converted to the scale of your drawing indicated here.
This allows actual dimensions to be used.
Angle: The construction lines are rotated by the angle indicated here.
Number: The number of construction lines or divisions created simultaneously when using the
Divide function.
Offset: The construction lines are extended at both ends by this value with respect to the displayed
reference line.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-4
Only in Plane: All construction lines are only created on the current UCS (user coordinate
system)-plane. In addition, possible picked points are projected to the current UCS-plane as well.
Create Reference Line: A construction line is drawn on the reference line as well (even for a non-
existing line indicated with only 2 points).
This creates a construction line parallel towards the current UCS-X-axis, either at the picked point
or with the selected distance to the picked reference.
This creates a construction line parallel towards the current UCS-Y-axis, either at the picked point
or with the selected distance to the picked reference.
This creates parallel construction lines for a reference line selected or displayed via pick points.
This creates vertical construction lines for a reference line selected or displayed via pick points.
The reference line created by two pick points is divided into equal sections with the help of
construction lines running perpendicular to this distance.
A 3D distance is measured and displayed in different variations (see →’Measure’).
All construction lines created up to now on the layer are deleted.
DIRECT USE OF SOME SETTINGS

You may also use selected settings to create construction lines directly and to create construction lines
much more rapidly.
The number and type of the lines depends on the Number and Line Type settings as described in the
previous dialog window regarding construction lines command PS_CONST. The commands remain
active until terminated by pressing the ESC-key or the right mouse button.
Hint The construction lines are created only within the current user coordinate system plane. It is
best to use them only in the views.
PS_CONST_HOR: This command creates a horizontal construction line.

Click a point the construction line is to intersect.
PS_CONST_VER: This command creates a vertical construction line. Click a point the
construction line is to intersect.
PS_CONST_PAP: This command creates a construction line running parallel with a reference
line.
First click the reference line and then on a point the construction line is to intersect.
PS_CONST_PAE: This command creates a construction line running parallel with a reference line
using a specified distance.
First enter the desired distance and then click the reference line. Finally, click the side of the
reference line along which the parallel line is to be created.
PS_CONST_SAP: This command creates a perpendicular construction line for a reference line.
Click the reference line and then on a point the construction line is to intersect.
PS_CONST_SAE: with distance: This command creates a perpendicular construction line for a
reference line using a specified distance from the reference point.
First enter the desired distance and then click the reference line. Finally, click the reference point
and then on the side of the reference point where the perpendicular line is to be created^.
PS_CONST_DVD: This command divides a reference line into equal segments and creates
corresponding perpendicular construction lines along this line (also utilizing the start and end
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-5
point).
First enter the number of sections and then click the reference line.
PS_CONST_DEL: This command deletes all construction lines drawn up to then on the layer
created for the construction lines.
MEASURE OF DISTANCES
Choose the Measure command if you would like to measure a distance. Then click two points, which
returns the following dialog box showing a few measurement results.
The area ‘UCS Coordinates’ shows the measuring results regarding the current user coordinate
system!
Start or End X, Y, Z are the coordinates of the two measuring points.
Dist X, Y, Z is the distance in the direction of the respective coordinate axis.
Dist Direct is the direct distance of the points.
Angle is the angle from the start to end point in reference to the user coordinate x-axis.
The section ‘WCS Coordinates’ shows the measuring results regarding the current world coordinate
system.
Start or End X, Y, Z are the coordinates of the two measuring points in the WCS and Cos X, Y, Z is
the so-called ‘directional cosine’ of the vector from start to ent point (a mathematical size which
normally hasn't any further meaning for you).
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-6
3D Component Part Views
3D COMPONENT PART VIEWS
OBJECT VIEW / OBJECT-UCS

The object view is a very important tool because it allows you to look at nearly any AutoPLANT
Structural-object from a certain direction. The object view command is used to align the UCS plane on
an object, which results in a perpendicular view on this plane.
The origin of the UCS can either be perpendicular from the pick point to the centerline or be situated at
the pick point itself. This depends on the selected setting ‘Object View’ or ‘Centered Object View’.
The object is aligned in such a way as to center the pick point on the screen and align its insertion
direction parallel to the X-axis, which means that a shape inserted into a work frame at a slant is
displayed as running horizontally, and the surrounding work frame is rotated accordingly.
Hint If the view does not match the model position select the command again (e.g., using the right
mouse button with the context menu) and confirm immediately with RETURN. The view is
aligned. Alternatively, you can keep the ALT-key pressed while selecting the view direction.
Thus, the view is forced to align as well.
The command ‘Object-UCS’ runs analogously to the command ‘Object-View’. In contrast to object
view however, this command only sets the UCS on the selected view direction. The view itself is not
modified.
The following message appears in the command line after the command ‘Object View’ has been
selected: Pick the steel component defining the view or hit RETURN to align the view.
After part selection, coloured coordinate crosshairs are displayed on the selected component and the
following message appears in the command line: Select the desired axis. Now use your mouse to click
the corresponding coloured circle and the object view is displayed with the selected direction.
You want an object view on front. Pick the shape while keeping the ALT-key pressed, clicking one of
these lines on the front,...
..and coordinate crosshairs appear at the pick point. You can now select the matching colour by
clicking it.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-7
The view is displayed, the UCS’s origin is aligned and parallel with the front.
SURFACE VIEW / SURFACE-UCS

In principle, this command is an object view; thus you can refer to the above chapter for the basic
description.
In contrast to the object view that only allows 6 possible view directions (rectangular or parallel to
shape direction), the surface view offers you the option to look on each surface of the component part.
In case of special shapes with sloping surfaces it is easier to obtain the suitable view.
The picture below shows you an example of a surface view: By clicking the displayed line (component
edge), you can get a view on the surface 1 or 2.
When you select the function, you first have to click the desired component part at a bordering edge
between two surfaces. Then the coordinate crosshairs are displayed at this position and you can select
the desired view by clicking an axis.
If you have selected the command PS_FACE_VIEW_CEN, the origin of the view is situated in the
middle of the clicked line.
CHANGE ONLY UCS

Analogously to the command Object-UCS you can only set the current UCS on the desired surface
view as well without modifying the actual view. Here, too you can choose between the picked and the
centred origin.
GLOBAL VIEW
This command shows the 3D model in a global view display.
The default is an isometric display of the model diagonally from the right front. However, four other
global view variants with their own direct calls are possible as well: PS_GLOBAL_VIEW2 ...
PS_GLOBAL_VIEW5.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-8
The global views are freely definable similar to the AutoCAD input “Apoint” for the view in the
program configuration file ps_st3d.cfg and initially indicated with default values.
Configuration File Excerpt
...(other entries)
1VIEWX=0.66 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR X AXIS
1VIEWY=-1.33 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR Y AXIS
1VIEWZ=0.66 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR Z AXIS
2VIEWX=-0.46 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR X AXIS
2VIEWY=-1.33 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR Y AXIS
2VIEWZ=0.66 ; GLOBAL VIEW FACTOR Z AXIS
(other entries)...
The numbers placed in front of the view refer to the number of the command or button, i.e., _VIEW,
_VIEW2 to _VIEW5.
TOP VIEW
The top view command is identical with the AutoCAD command “vpoint 0,0,1” , i.e. you are viewing
the current UCS-plane vertically.
This command switches to the true model top view from within the global view. It does not have a
function in the other views because you already view the plane vertically.
Remember the difference between this top view and the top view used for a work frame with roof:
FREE VIEW
The ’Free View’ command creates a model view where you select a source and target point. The view
then presented appears to be from your source point to the target point.
The following message appears in the command line after the command ‘Free View’ has been
selected: Select the target point of the line of vision direction. Now you determine the target point by
entering the coordinates or by clicking it.
The following message appears in the command line: Select the source point of the line of vision
direction.
Specify the source point by entering the coordinates or by clicking it and the view is visible on the
screen.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-9
The cutting plane command is activated. Changing the distances is not possible here and can only be
done using the global settings of AutoPLANT Structural.
CUTTING PLANE
Working with a 3D model can quickly turn complex, especially if many parts are spatially stacked.
AutoPLANT Structural offers a command to hide parts in front of and behind the current work plane
– the cutting plane.
This facilitates the design process since only those objects are visible that are close to the same work
plane and prevents the accidental manipulation of stacked shapes. When selecting one of the defined
views or an object view, such objects are automatically hidden, provided that you have not turned off
this command globally.
Sometimes it is however also reasonable to look at all component parts of the model in the depth – to
have an overall orientation. This is the reason why this function can be switched on and off.
PRINCIPLE OF CUTTING PLANES

When the function ‘Cut Plane’ is active, only those parts of the work frame are shown that are located
within the limits of the cut plane distance. The cut plane distance is the distance between imaginary
delimitation in front of and behind the active UCS plane.
Off: The cut plane command is deactivated.

All component parts are shown. When switching to another view, the command is activated again,
provided that it has not been turned off globally.
On: The cut plane command is activated.

Only those component parts that are located within the delimitation are shown. If the command
has been turned off globally, it is turned on again when switching to another view.
Flip:The cut plane command is alternately switched on or off globally. This command makes
sense when you do not want to work with the cut plane command for a long time.
Distance: Input of the cut plane distances

First enter the rear distance and then the front distance. When you enter the distance 0, no cut
planes are created.
When switching to one of the standard views, these values are overwritten.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-10
3D-model of a stage construction in the global view
(Object-) view on the upper stage frame with switched on cut plane command (standard setting)
(Object-) view on the upper stage frame with switched off cut plane command
PERSPECTIVE VIEW
3D-design usually utilizes the isometric 3D depiction. This means that a line located very far back
appears to be as long on the screen as the distance located further to the front.
In reality, however, distances appear to shrink the farther they are removed from an object. This effect
can be simulated with the perspective view.
The perspective view is a form of free view using a fictional camera. You are prompted for the
position of source point (camera) and target point (motif, centre of picture) and this determine the line
of vision. The parameter Focal Distance is used to indicate - as in photography - the focus of the
camera. Larger values are used to zoom the object as if using a telephoto lens. Smaller values create a
wide-angle effect.
The parameter Distance is used to subsequently change the distance to the target point and move back
and forth along the indicated line of vision.
If you select the command, the following message appears in the command line: Select the desired
function Off/Distance/Focal Distance/ <Set>. You can now select a function or select the command
directly using the corresponding button:
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-11
Set: The perspective view is activated.

This requires that you first enter the target and source point of the view and then the focal distance
of the camera. The program switches now to the perspective view.
Off: The perspective view is deactivated.

The program switches now back to the isometric view.
Focal Distance: Here you can change the focal distance of the camera.
Distance: Here you change the distance of the camera from the target point.
Lines of vision changes are only possible using coordinates and the pick function is deactivated.
Changing to the model global view does not yield the desired result until the perspective view is
deactivated again.
Remember that the perspective view is only a display view and does not allow any changes. For that,
switch back to the isometric display.
In the following, you will see some examples of the difference between the perspective and the
isometric display as well as the effect of the focal distance on the isometric display:
Isometric Display
3D Global View
Isometric Display
The point down on the left (0,0,0) is also the point of origin of the world coordinate system.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-12
Move and Copy Parts
Front View
Isometric Display
You see a view with the settings
Target point = (5000,0,5000)
Source point = (5000,-100,5000)
Perspective Display
Front View
Perspective View
Focal distance = 50
The source and target points are first set identically to the points of the isometric view.
However, since the picture is much too large, the distance from camera to target is increased to 30000.
This corresponds with the source point (5000,-30000,5000).
Front View
Perspective View
Focal distance = 100
The focal distance of the camera is increased but the picture shows only a section of the results.
MOVE AND COPY PARTS

The notes about the AutoCAD standard commands mention the fact that AutoPLANT Structural
objects are treated as AutoCAD elements, and can be copied or moved the same way. This is correct,
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-13
Move and Copy Parts
but the AutoPLANT Structural copy and move commands offer you additional help by offering the
option of limiting the direction of the move. Apart from that, you can specifically take the group
structure into consideration.
Using AutoCAD object snaps in a view may result in points being selected that are not in the proper
plane. The AutoPLANT Structural copy and move commands prevent this by limiting the direction of
the move to the current user coordinate system plane or even to one axis direction.
If several individual components have been assembled into construction modules or groups, this
command can be used to process the entire group by selecting just one part of the group. This will
eliminate unnecessary searching and collecting of the parts within a selection set.
After the command has been selected, a dialog box will become available featuring the following
options, each single tab permitting a certain action.
This button carries out the selected action for single parts without taking into consideration a possible
group.
This button carries out the action for complete groups. In the options, you can specify whether this
selection has to be made only when the main part is picked or for each part of the group.
MOVE/COPY
Alignment: Here, you select the move direction of the actions. A cone shows you the move
direction.
3D – The selected elements can be moved in all three dimensions.
2D – The start and end points of the move are perpendicular to the current UCS-plane. This means
that shapes are only moved within this UCS-plane.
X-Axis - The start and end points of the move are perpendicular to the X-axis of the current UCS-
plane. This means that shapes are only moved parallel to the X-axis within this UCS-plane.
Y-Axis - The start and end points of the move are perpendicular to the Y-axis of the current UCS-
plane. This means that shapes are only moved parallel to the Y-axis within this UCS-plane.
Z-Axis - The start and end points of the move are perpendicular to the Z-axis of the current UCS-
plane. This means that shapes are only moved in vertical direction to this UCS-plane.
Free – You can move the selected elements in any of the three dimensions. The elements “drag”
with the crosshairs and thus can be visibly moved.
Multiple: The elements can be moved several times.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-14
Move and Copy Parts
TURN
Axis: Here, you select the desired rotation axis.

Free Axis – The rotation axis can be determined by clicking two points.
Object Axis – One of the (parallel) coordinate axes of the element UCS is specified as the rotation
axis. By specifying a starting point after selection of the parts you can move it in parallel direction.
Object Axis: Here, you select the desired part axis if the ‘Object Axis’ option has been specified.
The selected axis is displayed at the object selected first in colour for your orientation.
Angle: Specify the rotation angle. Select either one of the defined angles or the ‘Free’ field for
indication of any rotation angle you like.
Turn+Copy: A copy of the component parts is created first which then will be turned. Otherwise,
the original parts are rotated to the new position.
MIRROR
Method: Enter the desired mirror plane here.

2-Points – You can determine the plane by clicking two points. The mirror plane is then
perpendicular to the current view and aligned with this line (for this purpose, it is best to use a
perpendicular view of the component).
3 Points – The plane is indicated by clicking three points in space.
Mirror+Copy: A copy of the component parts are created first which then will be mirrored.
Otherwise, the original parts will be mirrored.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-15
Move and Copy Parts
ALIGN
Use this command to align a component or an entire construction group in respect to a certain plane or
coordinate system.
Specify two coordinate systems, which are then aligned congruently with one another. The calculated
required movement and rotation are applied to the selected parts. You can determine the coordinate
systems either by specifying three points for each one or via element surfaces. There, the point of
origin is always regarded as the bottom point of the surface.
Method: Determine the two planes either by specifying three points or via part surfaces.
Align+Copy : A copy of the component parts is created first which will be aligned afterwards.
Otherwise, the original parts will be aligned.
SURFACE METHOD
When applying the surface method, you can only make use of one element. Select the element at an
edge neighbouring the desired surface. Then, you obtain a coloured display of the surfaces available
for selection. The target surface is selected analogously.
3 POINT METHOD
If ‘3-Point’ was selected, specify the original position after object selection by clicking the origin as
well as a point on the X- and Y-axis as a reference position. Then indicate the desired new position by
clicking the origin as well as a point on the X- and Y-axis.
The parts are then aligned according to the specifications with the origin points being identical.
The example below shows how the left shape was aligned on the right shape as a copy. It is moved and
rotated at the same time.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-16
Move and Copy Parts
CLONE
Use this command to transfer the manipulations performed on a component or an entire construction
group to other components.
A prerequisite for cloning is that the parts have a position number and that these match. The
manipulations are transferred in such a way that all components are identical again after the transfer
has been concluded. However, there is the option to limit the manipulations to be transferred to certain
types such as only drill holes, etc.
For example, use this command to apply the same modifications within a model at a later time. For
example, if a hangar has been constructed with many identical supports and holes have to be added
later to each support, they may be added to just one support and then transferred to all of the others.
Cuts: All normal cuts are transferred. This includes the mitred cuts as well.
Drill Holes: All drilled holes are transferred.
PolyCut: All poly-cuts are transferred.
Notches: All outlets are transferred.
Boolean; All Boolean operations are transferred.
When you start this action, you first have to select the component with the manipulations to be
transferred. Then select the components, which are to accept the manipulations.
However, only parts with the same position number as the original part will be considered.
Please remember that the transfer of the manipulations refers to the coordinate system of the parts. For
example, if you look at a shape whose parts coordinate system has its origin on the right side and you
would like to transfer a drill hole to a part 100 mm from the right but its parts coordinate system
originates from the left, this component will receive the new boring 100 mm from the left as well.
ROTATE
This command permits a rotated copy with vertical offset to distribute e.g. the steps of a spiral
staircase. Two methods can be applied. The number of steps and the angle between the steps, or by an
angle area and the steps to be distributed within this area either/or defines the rotation.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-17
Move and Copy Parts
Method: Defines the kind of distribution.
Number: Either the total amount or the number via the angle area.
Angle: Either the angle between the steps or the complete angle.
Vertical Offset: Vertical offset between the different elements.
The construction on the left has been created by rotating the flat steel around the central tube.
SETTINGS
Swap Effect:The meaning of the ALT-key during selection of the parts is changed.
If these functions are directly selected via the menu, normally the selection as single parts is
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-18
Display / Assign parts
activated. If you keep the ALT-key pressed during selection, this has the effect that as group is
selected.
Group only.: The selection as complete group is only effected if the main part has been selected.
Otherwise the selection is made at any part of a group.
DISPLAY / ASSIGN PARTS
HIDE
This command can be used to hide components or whole groups, which means that the parts are made
invisible, and cannot be selected. This command permits you to hide only selected components or to
show only selected components and to hide all others. This provides a clearer view of the model.
Hint This command is most practical if individual parts are to be hidden from view. To hide/show
entire groups of parts it is better to use display classes feature.
PS_Hide: select the parts to be hidden after selecting the command. The parts are no longer visible
after pressing the ENTER key or using the right mouse button. The command →’Regenerate’ (not
to be confused with the AutoCAD-command “Regenerate”) will switch all parts back to visible.
PS_Hide_Exclude: This function is working just the other way round than the previous one. After
selecting the command, you can choose the parts which you don’t want to hide. After pressing the
ENTER key or using the right mouse button, all other parts are hidden.
PS_Hide_Group: This function is working like PS_HIDE. The only difference is that the whole
group is hidden, if you only selected one part of the group.
PS_Hide_Group_Exclude: this function is working like PS_HIDE_EXCLUDE. The only

difference is that the whole group remains visible, if you only selected one part of the group.
REGENERATE
Command Name: PS_REGEN
This command shows all components hidden by the user or hidden automatically by the program.
You have to use this command, for example, to generate a parts list since all processed parts are
automatically hidden there for control purposes.
This command is not identical with the AutoCAD-command “Regenerate” since the AutoCAD
command does not reactivate the components again.
DISPLAY CLASSES
You can organize AutoPLANT Structural-objects from different layers into ”Display Classes”, which
are independent of the AutoCAD layers.
Contrary to the command →’Hide’ , which forces you to select all parts individually, here you can
select entire object groups and make them visible or hidden. This will simplify the view of the model
dislayed on screen. For example, bracings, bay rails, curtain walls, etc. could each be assigned to a
display class and displayed or hidden as needed. Each element can exist in only one class at a time.
This means that it will be removed from one class if it is assigned to another.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-19
After selection of the command, the following dialog opens.
Class Name: The available display classes are listed and the desired class may be selected. The value
of Status indicates if the elements are currently shown (On) or hidden (Off).
You can edit the content by double-clicking the field Class Name.
Status: Here, you see the current status of a display class. You can modify the status by double-
clicking on it. It is also possible to highlight several lines and to carry out the modification for all
highlighted lines.
This button permits to hide parts without creating an assignment to a display class. See PS_HIDE
Click this button to show all individually hidden parts again.See PS_REGEN.
The elements of the selected display class are hidden.
This command shows the elements of the selected display class.
This command hides the elements of all other display classes except for the selected ones.
This command shows the elements of all other display classes except for the selected ones.
Click on this button to assign elements to a display class. The desired class must be selected in the list
first. After clicking the button, select the elements to be assigned to the display class in the model.
Click on this button to remove elements from a display class. The desired class must be selected in the
list first. After clicking the button, select the elements to be removed from the display class in the
model.
Complete Groups: If this field is checked, the complete group will be selected at selection of elements,
even if you select only one part of this group.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-20
AREA CLASSES
AutoPLANT Structural objects may also be assigned to one of the “Area Classes” in addition to the
display classes.
While the display classes serve to present the 3D constructions in a clearly arranged manner, the area
classes are better suited for a logical structuring of the model into construction sections or similar
divisions. These “Area Classes” can be used as selection and sorting criteria during the detailing
process.
Each element can exist in only one of these area classes. This means that it will be removed from one
class if it is assigned to another. Area and display classes are completely independent from one
another.
The function works analogously to the display classes. Area classes can be hidden as well. Please note
that in case of overlapping with the display classes the last carried out action will be valid. This means
if you hide parts with display classes, they can be displayed again by means of assigned and displayed
area classes.
PART FAMILIES
The part families are another structuring variant of the construction. The belonging to family classes
permits an automatic allocation of position number prefixes as well as a differentiation of the
constructive groups by different colours. In addition, components belonging to one family class can
have a common detail style for detailing.
Each element can exist only in one family class. This means if it is assigned to another family class, it
will be removed from its former family class. New is the possibility to assign certain colours and line
types for detailing to the members of a part family. For example, you can assign another colour to the
girders of a 2D-depiction than that assigned to the supports.
Display List: The currently available family classes are listed as well as the linked defaults of
colour, prefix etc.
Single Parts: If you click on a button of this line, the parts are treated as single parts at selection.
In this mode, all data of the family classes will be adopted into the components.
Groups: If you click on a button of this line, only the component groups are treated at selection of
the parts. In this mode, only the prefixes of the family classes will be adopted for the position
number of the group.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-21
Both: If you click on a button of this line, both the single parts and the groups are treated at selection of
the parts. Click on these buttons to assign elements to a part family. The desired class must be selected
in the list first. After clicking the buttons, select the elements to be assigned to the family class in the
model.
Click on these buttons to remove elements from a part family. The desired class must be selected in the
list first. After clicking the buttons, select the elements to be removed from the family class in the
model
Click on these buttons to transfer the modifications of the entries in the part family to the component
parts. After clicking the buttons, select the elements to be updated in the model.
By double-clicking on a line, you can modify the definition of the part family.
DEFINING PART FAMILIES OR CHANGING PROPERTIES

Up to 64 different family classes may be defined, to which the components may be assigned.
To create a class, just double-click an empty list entry. A dialog opens where you can define the
properties. The same method applies to changing the properties of an existing entry.
Description: Enter the name of your part family here. The entry appears in the selection list and
the part properties.
Pos Prefix:: Here, you enter the pos. prefix, which appears in front of each position number itself
if the part belongs to this family.
Colour: Enter the colour of the part family here. Indicate the AutoCAD colour number or select it
by clicking the SELECT button.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-22
Search Parts
Detail Style: Enter the detail style to be assigned to a component part belonging to this family.
Enter the name of the detail style or select it by clicking the SELECT button.
Note that assigning detail styles normally should be done inside the Detail Center. If the Detail
Center is open, the component part list has to be updated after modification of shape properties.
Select Line Type: Here, you specify the line type determined for the 2D-depiction. The settings
can be defined individually for visible, invisible and center lines.
Detail Colour: Here you specify the colour to be used for 2D-depiction of the selected line.
Line Type: Here, you specify the line type to be used for 2D-depiction of the selected line.
Please note that the 2D line settings are only activated if the component parts are displayed in 2D.
These settings don’t have any effects on the model display.
SEARCH PARTS
Command Name: PS_SEARCH
Use this command to search for parts and components within a model, which meet certain
requirements.
You can define several conditions, which have to be met at the same time. If these conditions are met,
the part is either marked or all parts not meeting the requirements are hidden.
Fields: This list displays the search terms available to you by clicking them.
Operator: Select the respective condition operator between search term and comparison value.
Compare Value: Here you indicate the value that has to be filled. Only values existing in the
drawing are offered.
In case of names, you can also indicate an asterisk (*) for any other characters such as e.g. HE*
for HEA,HEB etc.
Buttons: Use the following buttons to combine the filter condition with different logical operators.
Complete Filter Condition: Here, the complete filter expression is displayed after insertion of all
filter conditions. You can reset or restore the last step using the buttons or you can delete the
complete filter condition.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-23
Search Parts
Specifications: Select the action which has to be carried out with the found parts.
Mark: If this field is checked, all parts satisfying the search condition are marked in colour. Use
the command ’Global Settings / colours’ to specify what colours to apply.
Hide: If this field is checked all parts not satisfying the search condition are hidden. The hidden
parts become visible again using the command ‘Regenerate‘.
Zoom: If this field is checked, all parts satisfying the search condition are automatically zoomed.
A dialog opens permitting you to indicate the display size (zoom factor) and to make an iteration
of the different found parts using the keys << and >>.
Condition List This list displays the current search conditions linked with AND.
Click this button to add a search condition formed from the selected search term,
operator and comparison value to the condition list.
Click this button to start the search. First, you have to select all objects to be
included in the search, then the result will be highlighted or hidden, depending on your choice.
DEFINE SEARCH CONDITION

A search condition always consists of the search term (e.g. length), the condition operator (e.g. >= for
“greater than or equal”), and a comparison value (e.g. 2000).
For example, if you would like to find all IPE shapes with a length between 1000 and 3000
millimeters, you need to define the following search condition:
NAME = IPE* (for IPE80,IPE100 etc.)
(and) LENGTH >= 1000 (Length greater than or equal 1000)
(and) LENGTH <= 3000 (Length smaller than or equal 3000)
PLACEHOLDERS WHEN SEARCHING FOR DESCRIPTIONS

* Any other characters (blank spaces as well)
? Exactly one character you like in this specific position
# Exactly one numerical character you like in this specific position (0-9)
@ Exactly one alphabetical character you like in this specific position (aA-zZ)
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-24
Work Frames
Parameter separator to indicate two options.

This allows you to specify an OR operation separated by the comma such as e.g. (HEA*,HEB*
WORK FRAMES
Any AutoPLANT Structural model generation is started with the creation of one or several work
frames.
These work frames aid 3D orientation because they can display the basic system dimensions (e.g. axes
dimensions) as design aid objects, and automatically create the associated UCS systems of the views
created by defining the work frame.
A simple click of the mouse will change the view.
BASIC TYPES
Before defining a work frame, first decide basic shape desired. The following choices are possible:
Rectangular work frames
Cylindrical (also conical) work frames
Wedge-shaped work frames
Pyramidal work frames
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-25
Work Frames
RECTANGULAR WORK FRAME

Workframe-Layout: Here you specify the design of the desired work frame.
Length: Specify the length of the work frame and its longitudinal division. If the Length input
field is activated, you define the length by means of the overall length and the number of regular
fields.
If the field is not activated, the fields can be defined individually by specification of the width for
each individual field. Please also refer to the hints at the end of this section.
Width: The work frame width is determined analogously to the length.
Height: The work frame height is determined analogously to the length.
Absolute: Normally, you enter the height of the different fields. If this field has been checked, the
list data define absolute height values.
Axis Descriptions: Axes labels are added according to the settings in the text pages.
Insert Position: Defines the insertion position of the work frame related to the insertion point.
Roof Angle: If you want to have the form of a gabled roof for your work frame, you can enter the
roof slope in degrees.
Centre Height: If you want to have the form of a gabled roof for your work frame, you can enter
the ridge height.
Ridge Width: If you want to have the form of a gabled roof for your work frame, you can enter the
ridge width. If it is 0 or equal to the width of the work frame, only a roof surface will be created.
ASYMMETRICAL DIVISIONS
To simplify the input of asymmetrical work frames, you can choose a special kind of input. The
following dialog opens when you keep the ALT-key pressed while activating one of the three list
values:
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-26
Work Frames
In the input field, you can either indicate the different fields separated by a comma or repeated sections
by number*distance. This simplifies the input of complex divisions.
Keeping CTRL-key pressed while activating one of the three list fields, you will delete the whole field
definition in this dimension.
Existing field definitions cannot be modified using this method. They will be completely overwritten.
INSERT WORK FRAME

After selecting the ’Work Frame’ command, click the point of origin of the work frame or enter this
value in the form of coordinates. Just pressing the right mouse button causes the point (0,0,0) to be
accepted as point of origin.
Finally, indicate the spatial position by specifying the X-axis of the work frame. Pressing the right
mouse button causes the current UCS X-axis to be accepted as alignment.
The dialog box for the work frame opens and you can select one of the different types.
The entries of the dialogs above result in the following display of a AutoPLANT Structural work frame
in AutoCAD (no additional rotation):
With asymmetrical length division
L=15000, B=8000,H=5000
X-axis: axis 1
Y-axis: axis A
Z-axis: perpendicular to axis A/1
Origin: Axis A/1, Height H=0
SEVERAL WORK FRAMES WITHIN ONE MODEL

You can define as many different work frames within one model as desired, which are then
distinguished from each other by their group names.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-27
Work Frames
This group name is a prefix preceding the view name, e.g. hangar_TOP and platform_TOP (with
'hangar' and 'platform' being the group names specified by you).
This makes it possible to set and specify all-important areas of the project even before the 3D model is
built and access them easily using the PS_SETUCS view selection.
A platform with the dimensions

3000 x 3000 and the height 1500 is to be inserted as displayed.
The coordinates of the origin are set to y=0, x=5000, z=0 and the group name is ‘platform’ – the other
settings match the size and sections.
The axes are not displayed although this is possible.
When selecting the views to be created, the overlapping views of the same work plane of other work
frames may be omitted because normally they are of no further use for you (when selecting the
corresponding plane, you will see the whole view).
In connection with the object-oriented feature of AutoPLANT Structural there are good reasons for
creating these views. It is e.g. possible to move the complete work frame and this view is perhaps
missing. However, if the above picture corresponds to the reality, you can omit the front and right side
view of the platform because the ‘hangar’ work frame already provides them.
WORK FRAMES ARE OBJECTS

One of the great strengths of AutoPLANT Structural is its object-orientation; and work frames are
good examples of this!
This means that previously created work frames can be modified and manipulated using the standard
AutoCAD commands. You can move, rotate, etc. the work frame or even just partial views – the
displayed work planes - and the correct UCS settings ‘listen to every word’.
If a view is selected, you will see the expected view. The associated UCS system has adjusted itself to
the movement of the object.
Additionally, you can subsequently set up individual cutting planes for each work plane and effect
other modifications using the context menu “Change PS Properties”. Please remember: The frame
layer has to be unlocked for any changes to take effect!
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-28
Work Frames
The platform is moved and the entire work frame 'hangar' and 'platform' is rotated.
Click on the 3D-grid via "Change Properties", and the divisions or even the basic shape of the frame
can be modified.
CYLINDRICAL WORK FRAME
Base: Bottom cylinder radius
Top Radius: Top cylinder radius
Height: You can specify the height of the work frame analogously to the height of the rectangular
dimension.
Segmentation: This input field indicates the number of circle segments into which the cylinder is
divided.
All further options correspond to those of the rectangular work frame. Please refer to this chapter for
more detailed information.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-29
Work Frames
WEDGE-SHAPED WORK FRAME
At left: The top of the triangle is modified to the left.
PYRAMIDAL WORK FRAME
Roof Length: indicates the length of the roof.
Ridge Width: indicates the width of the ridge.
CREATE VIEWS
Use this command to create views on all surfaces directly. You can directly select them later using the
command PS_SETUCS. Depending on the selected form, some options are not available.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-30
Work Frames
Front View: A view on the front view is created.
Side View R: A view on the right side view is created.
Side View L: A view on the left side view is created.
Back View: A view on the back side is created.
Top View: A view on the horizontal roof area is created.
Underside View: An underside view is created.
Roof View R: A view upon the right roof area is created, if this option is activated.
Roof View L: A view on the left roof area is created, if this option is activated.
Length Axis: A view is created for each created axis into the depth.
Width Axis: A view is created for each created axis into the width.
Height Axis: A view is created for each created axis into the height.
Use Axis Descriptions: You can either select standardized names such as X_1,X_2 for length and
width axes or you can use the specified axes names.
Height with Coordinates: For the height axes, the heights are additionally added to the name.
Group Name: Since several work frames may be inserted into one drawing, these have to be
equipped with their own code. The group name is placed in front of all views. In this case, it is
R1_X2.
Distances Cut.Surfaces: The views can automatically hide all elements situated outside a certain
distance. Here, you specify these distances for all views of this work frame, separated in front and
back.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-31
Work Frames
AXES NAMES
The settings for the axes names can be made separately for X- and Y-axis. We will only describe one
axis here. The names can be generated automatically or you can add a name to each axis individually.
Depiction: 123/ABC - Choose the axis name type. The designations may either be numerical (123)
or alphanumerical (ABC).
Text, Circle... – Here you specify the depiction of the text. The text can either be displayed just as
it is or with the selected border. If you have selected ‘Block’ depiction, you may use an own text
design. Please refer to Blocks for more detailed information.
Connection Line: A line is drawn from the corresponding edge of the work frame to the text.
Start Value: indicates the start of automatic axes names.
Size: The text size is specified. At blocks it is defined by the attribute size.
Scale: You can enter a scale for the blocks.
Distance: indicates the distance of the text to the edge of the work frame.
Main Axis: When several work frames are involved, you can here enter the name of the main work
frame, if the current frame is rather considered to be a subordinate frame. It can also be used as
prefix.
Suppress First Axis: When frames are used, the axes names can overlap. This option suppresses
the display of the first axis.
Suppress Last Axis: When frames are used, the axes names can overlap. This option suppresses
the display of the last axis.
Avoid I,O: When alphanumerical axes names are used, you can refrain from using I and O to
avoid any possibility of confusion.
Decreasing: Normally, axis labelling is effected in increasing order, e.g. 1,2,3, etc. This option has
the opposite effect.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-32
Work Frames
Position: The axes can be attached either in front or at the rear, or on the left or on the right.
2 Lines: Main and subordinate axes are displayed in 2 lines.
Dynamic: The axes names are always adapted to the corresponding view direction. Thus, a good
readability will be guaranteed at any time.
Axis Gap: Here, the distance of the actual grid to the connection line of axis name is indicated.
This entry is only displayed if you edit the grid in a 2D-detail.
Here is the example of an anchor plan with preset axis gap.
INDIVIDUAL AXES NAMES

EDIT
Click on this button to edit the different grid axes individually.
Here, you can enter the name and the main axis for each single axis. In addition, you can specify
whether the axis name has to be overwritten manually (manual) and whether this axis has to be
displayed (invisible).
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-33
Work Frames
Switch over by double-clicking the entries in the first two columns. The entries of the last two columns
can be edited by double-clicking.
OPTIONS
No Lines: The work frame doesn’t create any inner lines.
Axis on Edges: This option has the effect that the axes names are not displayed in a fixed distance
to the work frame edges, but always at the outer edge of the displayed view. You are informed
about the corresponding position, even if the work frame edges are invisible.
This option reacts to each command except for the use of dynamic Pan/Zoom commands. To
update the display you can release a normal zoom or ‘Regenerate’.
It is helpful to switch on the 'Dynamic' option.
Show Axis Lines: connection lines of the work frame edges are drawn up to the designations and
even within.
Height Grid Lines: In side or front views the height axes indicating the corresponding height are
displayed as well.
3D Pattern: The work frame is displayed as 3D-object.
Lock Layer: The layer for the view elements is locked.
Segmentation: The circles of cylindrical work frames are displayed in segments.
Text Style: Select the text style for axis labelling.
Line Type: Select the line type for the connection lines of work frame edges and axes names.
Text Scale: The axes names are scaled using this factor.
Colours: The colours of the different work frame elements can be selected freely.
Either enter the colour number directly or check the corresponding field and use the left button for
dialog selection.
All colours are reset to default with the right button.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-34
Work Frames
Different Display Variants
With Lines Without Lines
On Screen Edge With Axis Lines
USER-DEFINED BLOCKS
You can also use your own block definitions instead of circles and rectangular for bordering the axis
names. They have to be equipped with attributes, which then are replaced by the actual axes names.
For more detailed information about creation of user-defined blocks, please refer to the chapter
Adaptations in this manual.
From File: Only blocks are used which have already been defined in this drawing.
DWG Blocks: Blocks of external drawings are used. They are loaded unless existing.
Block Path: The path from which the blocks can be loaded.
Block Name X: The selected block for the axes names in X-direction.
Block Name Y: The selected block for the axes names in Y-direction.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-35
Select View
SELECT VIEW
Command Name: PS_SETUCS
Use this command to select the views defined by the work frames command or by adding new views.
Once you select a view, AutoPLANT Structural places the UCS into the selected work plane and
displays the 3D model looking at the plane vertically. The specified cut planes are activated at the
same time so that only the objects within this area are visible.
In addition, you have access to all other auxiliary functions for view control using this dialog.
This dialog shows you the views, which are the result of the settings for a work frame with the area
name ’R1’. The views available in the model are sorted and displayed in this list. Please note that you
can modify the name of a view manually via Change Properties.
Zoom Extents: After a view has been activated a Zoom Extents is carried out at once to have a
complete look on the model.
Clipping-Plane: If a view is activated, the clippling-planes are activated as well. This means: All
elements in front of or behind the view reaching beyond the defined distances are not displayed.
Double Click: If you double click an entry, the selected view is automatically activated and the
dialog is closed. If this option is deactivated, only the view is displayed. If you keep the CTRL-
key pressed during double clicking, you can inverse this setting.
If this option is selected, the selected view is activated and the dialog is closed.
If this option is selected, the UCS of the selected view is activated and the dialog is closed. The view is
not modified.
If this option is selected, the selected view is deleted from the model. The program prompts you
whether you are sure.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-36
Insert Shapes
This option allows the creation of another view. You are asked for the name and then you have to
indicate a rectangle. After that, this view will be created in the current UCS and entered into the list.
This option allows the view via 2 points. The dialog is closed and you have to specify the target point
of the view as well as the camera point of the view.
This option permits a view on an object. The dialog is closed and you are prompted to select an object.
Then, you can select the desired view via coloured arrows.
This option permits an UCS on an object. The dialog is closed and you are prompted to select an
object. Then, you can select the desired UCS-alignment via coloured arrows. See also PS_ObjectUCS.
This option permits to edit the properties of the selected view. See also chapter Change
Properties/Views.
INSERT SHAPES
Command Name: PS_INS_PROF
The actual design work with AutoPLANT Structural starts when shapes are inserted into the model.
However, you need not deal with shape dimensions, representations, etc., but simply instruct the
program which shape shall be inserted where and the program will carry out the operation. When
inserting, you need not pay attention to overlapping shapes: there are many possibilities of correcting
overlapping afterwards using a mouse click.
First, make sure that the shapes are correctly positioned. Since the shop drawings are based on this
position, proceed with care.
From now on, you will work in work frames of the model that are smaller:
Selection of an appropriate view and creation of further construction lines, if necessary.
Insertion of some shapes and corrections, if necessary.
Adaptation of the shapes (e.g. shortening) and creation of connections.
Copying of identical parts, if any.
After selection of the command, a dialog window appears where you can specify the basic behaviour
of the command and further settings. You can create any kind of straight, bent or cranked shapes.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-37
Insert Shapes
STRAIGHT SHAPES
Shape Selection
Shape Type: Select the general shape type here. The AutoPLANT Structural shapes are divided
into 5 different types:
Standard Shapes – These are shapes based on a data base included in the standard delivery range.
Special Shapes – These are shape definitions which you can create yourself by drawing the cross-
section once and creating a shape out of this cross-section.
Roof-Wall-Shapes – These are special shapes created by you which have been optimized for roof-
wall installation.
Combination Shapes – These are shapes which are combined out of several already defined types.
Weld Shapes – These are also user-defined and permit any shape which can be welded by means
of plates.
Resolution: Here, you select the resolution of the depiction Low, Normal and High for special
shapes to make the monitor display clearer in case of complex types.
You can change the resolution at any time afterwards if e.g. a more detailed depiction is required.
Shape Class: Depending on the selected shape type, the available shape catalogues are listed here.
You can specify which catalogues for standard shapes are listed by means of the shape catalogue
selection described in this chapter. For all other shape types, the created shape catalogues are
listed from the corresponding directories on the hard drive.
Shape Size: After a shape catalogue has been selected, all included shape sizes will be displayed in
this list.
Key: Each shape has its own clear access key.

This access key can be entered directly here to be able to create non-standardized shape sizes of
tubes, flat steel, round iron, etc.
Further Defaults
Material: Select the material of the shape here.
Layer: Here, you can specify on which layer the shapes have to be filed.
Part Family: If family classes have been defined, you can set them here. The selection of the
family class can influence the colour of the part.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-38
Insert Shapes
Detail Style: If detailing styles have been defined, you can set them here.
Display Class: If display classes have been defined, you can set them here.
Area Class: If area classes have been defined, you can set them here.
Description: If general parts descriptions have been defined, you can set them here. The selection
of the description can influence the colour and the layer.
Delta X: The insertion offset in X-direction; this field can only be entered, if you have selected the
position ‘Free’ as insertion point (this is the biggest displayed insertion point).
Delta Y: The insertion offset in Y-direction; this field can only be entered, if you have selected the
position ‘Free’ as insertion point (this is the biggest displayed insertion point).
Item: An item number can be used directly here.
Length: Specify the length of the shape. This is important if you want to insert shapes in the cross-
section. Inputs in this field overwrite the length specified by the insertion points.
Turn: Here, you indicate the angle of rotation used to turn the shape around the insertion axis.
Create Group: This option creates a group out of the shape after insertion.
Monitor: The selected shape is displayed as cross-section on the monitor. The possible insertion
points are shown as well. Select one of these points to insert the shape at this insertion axis in
longitudinal direction.
Additionally to the corner and center points further points appear with a slightly smaller depiction
(hole crack, center of gravity or manually created insertion points at special shapes) as well as a
bigger point (free placing).
Insertion of Shapes
After having selected the shape type, resolution, shape class and size, the shape can be inserted. There
are several options to insert shapes.
In general, a shape is always inserted by means of two 3D-points. These points can either be seized by
picking the points or by picking a line. For this purpose, the shape is positioned in a way that – if you
stood at the end point and looked into the direction of the starting point – the view corresponds to the
depiction on the monitor.
However, since two points alone don’t clearly define the shape position in the space, a third point is
defined which determines the position (rotation) depending on the situation:
You can indicate the third point.
When the two points are perpendicular in the world coordinate system (WCS) the alignment is
made according to the WCS X-axis.
When the points have been freely selected in the space, the alignment is made in a way that the X-
axis is aligned as parallel as possible towards the WCS XY-plane.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-39
Insert Shapes
Insertion Commands
along Line
First you are prompted to select a line. The end points of this line are used as insertion points of the
shape.
Since in most cases it is not clear which one of the line points is the starting and which the end point,
the program displays a cone for asymmetrical shapes. This cone allows exchanging the insertion points
and to obtain that the shape is mirrored at the Y-axis.
In the case of a dynamic dialog, this can alternatively be realized via the button. If the selected line is a
poly-line, a cranked shape will be inserted along the poly-line. The bend radius is either taken from the
input value on the option tab or if this is 0, the minimum radius will be used.
Along 2 Points
First you are prompted to pick any two points in the space, which then are used to insert the shape.
along Diagonal
This option is also available if another point than the middle axis has been selected as insertion point.
First you are prompted to select a line or to select two points using the ‘P’ option. Now the shape is
inserted along these points as follows: The selected insertion position at the starting point is kept (e.g.
center of the lower edge). At the end point, however, the opposite position is used (in this case center
upper edge).
If the ‘Select Position after Insertion’ option is activated as well, the positions are exchanged with
rotations via the left mouse button.
Along 3 Points
You select the starting and end point where the shape has to be inserted. Dynamic mode (see options)
will be activated automatically. In addition, you are prompted for the third point defining the
alignment. The shape dynamically follows each move of the mouse pointer and the position can be
determined very precisely.
Multiple along Line
This option permits the simultaneous insertion of several shapes. Several lines can be seized at the
same time and the desired shapes are inserted along all line points.
If these lines are positioned in a way that the end points are overlapping, the inserted shapes will either
get a mitered cut there (if the radius value is equal 0) or additional arcs with the corresponding radius
will be inserted.
Please note that – depending on the selected insertion point – the results cannot be correct. This
proceeding is only safe if you insert along the middle line.
Along view direction
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-40
Insert Shapes
You can use this option if you have indicated a fixed shape length.
You are prompted for an insertion point and for an alignment. Depending on the selection of the
insertion point, the shape will be inserted along the alignment.
ALong Cross-section direction
You can use this option if you have indicated a fixed shape length.
You are prompted for an insertion point and for an alignment. Then the shape will be inserted on the
current XY-plane of the UCS with the corresponding length to the back (into the depth).
Additional Functions
Interrupt Dialog
All inserted shapes are still connected with the dialog, so that subsequent modifications can also be
transferred to already inserted shapes.
If you don’t want this option, you can interrupt the connection using this button. However, the shape is
not deleted in this case.
shape data
Click this button to open the following dialog where all relevant shape data are displayed:
mirror
All inserted shapes, which are still connected with the dialog, are mirrored along their Y-axis. You will
obtain this by exchanging the insertion points.
Turn positive
The shapes are turned positive (turned left in shape direction) around their insertion point using the
entered value.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-41
Insert Shapes
turn negative
The shapes are turned negative (turned right in shape direction) around their insertion point using the
entered value.
fetch INsertion dATa
This option permits to select an existing shape from the drawing and to set the insertion parameters
accordingly.
BENT SHAPES
Apart from normal straight shapes, you have also the possibility to insert a bent shape. The bent shapes
have a constant bending radius.
All settings for selection of the shape type, material, etc. are the same as in the case of inserting
straight shapes. For information, refer to this chapter.
All settings on this tab are stored separately from the straight shapes so that your defaults on this page
don’t disturb the settings for straight shapes.
Insertion Functions
Along arc
First you are prompted to pick an existing arc on the base of which the shape will be inserted. The
position of the arc in the space is not important.
along 3 Points
First you are prompted to pick the center point of the arc, the starting point and the end point.
The points are perpendicular to the current UCS plane and the shape then is inserted on the base of
these points. It is not possible to insert a shape, which is positioned in the space using this method. Nor
can this command create an arc of 180 degrees.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-42
Insert Shapes
ADDITIONAL SETTINGS
The third page contains some additional defaults influencing the behaviour during shape insertion.
Height: The height above the current UCS-plane where the shapes are inserted
Start Offset: The offset at the starting point of straight shapes
End Offset: The offset at the end point of straight shapes
Radius: The rounding radius at shapes which are inserted several times
Scale: The insertion scale if the shapes have to be inserted as 2D depiction
Horizontal Dist.: The distance of the shapes if a shape class has been selected permitting an offset
of several shapes in horizontal direction. (SHAPECLASSLAYOUT=HORDOUBLE, QUADRUPLE, DIAGONAL)
Vertical Dist.: The distance of the shapes if a shape class has been selected permitting an offset of
several shapes in vertical direction. (SHAPECLASSLAYOUT=VERDOUBLE, QUADRUPLE, DIAGONAL)
Angular Insertion: If you select an insertion along a defined length and position, you can select
here which point of the shape has to be used at the pick point
Insert…X,Y Plane: All picked points are perpendicular to the current UCS-plane before being
evaluated.
Orientate: This option permits to rotate the shape around its insertion axis immediately after
insertion. For this purpose, click somewhere in the model with the left mouse key, and the shape
will be rotated in increments of 90°.
Dynamic: The shape is “hanging“ on the mouse pointer during insertion. Normally, the points are
seized first and then the shape is inserted.
Reference Points: The insertion points of the shape are entered as reference points into the shape.
This permits later tracing back of the original insertion points and, if need be, their dimensioning.
3 Point Method: This option permits the insertion by means of two planes.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-43
Insert Shapes
As 2D-Shape: After insertion, the shape is projected as 2D-shape onto the current UCS-plane. You
can scale the shape for a depiction related to scale.
Close Dialog: After the insertion is finished, the dialog is closed. If this option is not activated, the
dialog returns and has to be closed explicitly.
This behaviour of the dialog permits direct modification of already inserted shapes.
Keep Length: The entry in the Length input field is restored at next opening of the dialog.
Group Girder Position
These setting are only important if the command “Girder Position” is activated.
Connect AEC-Lines: The AEC-lines (static effect lines) of the inserted subordinate girders are
automatically connected with the AEC-lines of the main girders.
Notch: The subordinate girders have a notch at the main girders.
Notch Template: Select the desired notch template from the available templates.
Click this button to jump directly into the dialog ‘Notch’ where you can specify the settings for the
notch and create new templates.
SHAPE SERIES
AutoPLANT Structural is delivered with a great number of different international shape series (shape
catalogues). Certainly, you will only need a part of them frequently for your work.
Shape CataloguEs
Click this button to limit the displayed catalogues at shape selection to the types important for you.
In addition, you can freely determine the order of the entries to find frequently used types on top
position in the selection list
Available Shape Series: In this list (on the left) all country specific shape series available in the
program are listed sorted according to countries. You can completely activate or deactivate the
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-44
Insert Shapes
shape series of a certain country.

The registration of a country is effected via a *.cfg file in the shape data directory.
Available Shape Classes: In this list (in the middle) all shape classes registered by the activated
country specific shape series are listed.
The registration of possible shape classes of a country is effected via the entries in the
corresponding *.cfg file in the shape data directory.
Current Shape: In this list (on the right) all shape classes are displayed which are available in the
commands as entry.
These are displayed there in exactly this order.
The database entries of the corresponding shape file define which shape sizes are available for the
shape class.
Metric: The metric shape names are displayed.
Imperial: The imperial shape names are displayed.
Automatic: The shape names corresponding to the setting of the current drawing are displayed.
This means that in a metric drawing only metric shape names will be displayed.
Preferred Level: In the different shape files it is provided that the data records can have a certain
priority.
If this field is checked, only the shapes are displayed the preference value of which is smaller or
equal the value selected here.
ADD: The shape class selected in the middle list will be added to the end of the selection list.
INSERT: The shape class selected in the middle list will be inserted at the currently marked
position of the right list.
DELETE: The shape class marked in the right list will be removed from the selection list.
INSERT ALL: All shape classes of the middle list will be taken over into the right list.
DELETE ALL: All shape classes of the right list will be removed from there so that the list will be
empty.
Note Please note that in all AutoPLANT Structural functions only the shape classes in the right
selection list are offered for selection.
CRANKED SHAPES
A shape can also be executed as a so-called cranked shape. For this purpose, bent or straight segments
will be added to a straight or already cranked shape. shape segments
After this button has been clicked, the main dialog disappears and the following dialog opens.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-45
Insert Shapes
You are prompted to pick a straight or already cranked shape at the end to be extended. Then, the
segment is added at this end.
You are prompted to pick a cranked shape at the end to be deleted. The last segment at this end is then
deleted.
You are prompted to pick a cranked shape at the end to be processed. The data are read and can be
modified within the dialog.
Straight Segment
Length: The length of the straight segment to be added.
Bent Segment
Radius: The radius of the bent segment
Angle: The opening angle of the bent segment
Rotation: The current rotation angle of the segment with regard to the X-axis (longitudinal axis) of
the shape
The segment is additionally turned positive (to the left) using the neighbouring angle.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-46
Insert Shapes
The segment is additionally turned negative (to the right) using the neighbouring angle.
Turn Angle: Angle by which the segment has to be turned additionally.
GIRDER POSITION
It often occurs that girders have to be inserted between two main girders (change). Instead of inserting
the individual girders manually or instead of copying them, you have the possibility to insert
subordinate girders at main girders using the girder position option.
Multiple Subordinate Girders
After the command has been selected, you are prompted to click the first main girder at the starting
point of the laying. Here, it is important to pick the correct end because the laying will start at this end.
After selection of the second girder another dialog opens where you can define the distribution.
Here you can continuously indicate individual distances or series of equal values.
(number*distance). A comma separates the individual data.
Now the subordinate girders are in any case inserted in a way that they are aligned to the upper edge of
the main girders (the position setting in the dialog for shape insertion doesn’t matter).
Depending on the setting, they are immediately notched as well.
If the option ‘Connect AEC-lines’ has been activated, the static effect lines are automatically linked
with those of the main girders.
This saves you some work during transfer to a static program.
Individual Subordinate Girders
It is of course also possible to insert an individual subordinate girder, e.g. to create a diagonal.
After selection of the command, you have to pick two main girders at the corresponding end in
question. Then, the following dialog opens:
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-47
Insert Plates
Here, you define the desired distances to the corresponding shape ends; a line displays the position of
the shape.
Now the subordinate girder is in any case inserted in a way that it is aligned to the upper edge of the
main girders (the position setting in the dialog for shape insertion doesn’t matter).
For the static effect lines and notches, the same is valid as already described above under ‘Multiple’.
INSERT PLATES
INSERTION OF STRAIGHT PLATES

Apart from given standard shapes and freely defined special shapes of any kind, you can insert plates
of any shape into the model – in the program, such plates are called poly-plates. Such plates are flat
plates of equal thickness such as gusset plates or other types of connecting plates.
The other plate types commonly used for steel structures such as base plates, end plates or stiffeners
can be created by the program using automatic functions. The program also names them. These
functions are explained later in the user’s guide; here you find a general explanation of plates of any
thickness.
Length: plate length at rectangular insertion
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-48
Insert Plates
Width: plate width at rectangular insertion
Thickness: plate thickness; it is indicated in list form. The list can be edited to add certain
thicknesses not included in the list.
To do so, open the file ..\Prg\pro_st3d.ptt with an editor and complete it with the desired
thicknesses. Alternatively, you can switch on overwriting with any values in the ’Global
Settings/Plates’. Otherwise, you can only take values from this list.
Insertion Height: This is the height of the plate above the current UCS.
X-Offset: X-offset of the plate related to the selected insertion position. You can either enter this
value or define the insertion point by means of the points on screen.
Y-Offset: Y- offset of the plate related to the selected insertion position. You can either enter this
value or define the insertion point by means of the points on screen.
Item No.: Here you can directly use an item number.
Grid: If this value is activated, an additional grid is visible at the upper side which can be set. By
this way you can show that this isn’t a plate but a component part such as e.g. gridirons. In the
settings/plate, you can enter a reduction of weight in % for this case.
Insertion Plane: Indicates the user coordinate system to be used. The option Object-ECS is only
possible if you want to enter the plate by means of a selected contour. Then, the plate is situated in
the plane of the poly-line. The option Selected Areas is only possible at insertion of ’Rectangular
Plate’ and ‚Insertion Point’. Then, you can define a UCS to be used by indicating two lines.
For all other insertion options the current UCS-system in question is decisive.
Insert Edge: Indicates the vertical position of the plate related to the current UCS or ECS system,
depending on the selected input form.
Label: You can take the name of your plate from an editable file. The content of this file is
displayed in this list. The file is ..\Prg\pro_st3d.pdc. In addition to the name, you can
define a weight as well which has to be indicated in plain text. After selection of a name, the
material is directly set as well.
Material: List of all available materials.
Part Family: If part families are defined, you can set them here. The selection of part family can
influence the colour of the component part.
Detail Style: If detailing styles are defined, you can determine them here.
Display Class: If display classes are defined, you can determine them here.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-49
Insert Plates
Area Class: If area classes are defined, you can determine them here.
Description: If general part descriptions are defined, you can determine them here. The selection
of the description can influence the colour and the layer.
Layer: Here, you can specify on which layer the plates have to be stored.
This option permits free picking of a polygon. This polygon is used to form a poly-plate after the
dialog was closed.
No construction lines or similar things are necessary. Take care that no crossings are generated by your
input. Then, plate creation will not be possible.
This option permits to form a plate on the base of an existing contour. The contour can be a poly-plate,
a circle or an arc which is not closed.
The plates can alternatively be created on the current UCS or on the contour ECS.
A rectangular plate with the desired dimensions is created at the selected insertion point using this
option. The form of polygonal plates can be modified as you like whereas rectangular plates always
remain rectangular unless you change this status using Change Properties.
Insert a plate at any line using this option. The length of the line determines the plate length; the width
and the thickness are defined by your input.
After having realized this insertion, you can select the position, rotation and the insertion point via the
dialog. The rotation can either be modified in 90° increments or in freely selectable increments. The
plate then is rotated around the insertion line.
+Phi: The plate is rotated in positive direction using the entered angle.
- Phi: The plate is rotated in negative direction using the entered angle.
+90: The plate is rotated in positive direction by 90 degrees.
-90: The plate is rotated in negative direction by 90 degrees.
Rotation: The value used for rotation in the first two options.
This option permits creation of a plate by means of four points. These points don’t have to be situated
in the current UCS. The first three selected points specify the plane. The order is: bottom left; bottom
right, top left, top right.
A flat is transformed into a poly-plate using this option. All processing actions will be adopted.
C: After insertion, the plates are still connected with the dialog. Further modifications are still
possible. Use this button to interrupt this connection.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-50
Insert Plates
INSERT BENT PLATES

By using this option, you insert a bent plate on the base of an arc.
By using this option, you insert a bent plate on the base of three points.
=0: Use this option if you want to return to the original position of your plate after rotation.
ADDITIONAL SETTINGS
Always ECS: If you want to insert a plate after an existing contour, you can insert it either
according to the current UCS or according to the object contour.
This button has the effect that you always insert according to the object ECS. The settings on the
first page will be ignored.
Close: The dialog is closed after insertion of a plate.
DIALOG-COMMANDS
SURFACE GRID
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-51
Insert Solids
Click on this button to define the alignment of the surface grid. Usually this grid is aligned to the plate
ECS, it can be modified using this button.
PLATE DIMENSIONS
Click on this button to define the calculation direction. First select the plate and then the direction
according to which calculation has to be made. You can cancel the manual specification of direction in
the plate properties.
ANALYSIS OF DIMENSIONS
The calculation of plate dimensions is either carried out according to an automatic pattern or it can be
specified manually. At automatic calculation, the following order is respected:
1. Are there any parallel edges and is their distance sufficient?

2. Is there any rectangular corner?
3. Search for the longest side
Depending on the geometry, the found direction is recognized as length direction and the plate
dimensions are aligned to this direction.
INSERT SOLIDS
Command Name: see individual commands
For volume modelling, AutoPLANT Structural does not use the AutoCAD solid command ACIS, but
rather a modified version, which works faster and produces smaller graph files.
Consequently, you cannot combine AutoPLANT Structural objects and AutoCAD 3D solids (e.g.
subtract their volumes). In case you do combine objects, there will be no errors, but nothing will
happen! In order to give you the same performance range as with AutoCAD, all solids have been
redefined.
As these solids are real AutoPLANT Structural objects, they can be processed with the help of
AutoPLANT Structural commands (e.g. drilled). These solids can be detailed as normal component
part.
Please note that the component parts need a clear direction for detailing. The X-axis of the UCS valid
at insertion is taken as standard. You can, however, determine the axis anew by means of the context
menu „Change PS Properties“.
CUBE/RECTANGLE: PS_SOLID_BOX
This command creates a rectangular object.
You determine the edges by clicking the two diagonally opposed corner points or by entering their
coordinates. In case the volume cannot be determined by using the points you entered (maybe you
clicked on two points on a UCS plane), the program prompts you to enter the missing dimensions.
SPHERE: PS_SOLID_SPHERE
This command creates a sphere.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-52
Insert Solids
First, you have to enter the central point of the sphere and then the diameter of the sphere or click it.
CYLINDER PS_SOLID_CYLINDER
This command creates a cylinder.
First, you have to enter starting and end point of the cylinder and then the radius or click it.
CONE PS_SOLID_CONE
This command creates a cone or truncated cone.
First, you have to enter starting and end point of the cone axis or click it and then the starting and end
point radius.
TORUS PS_SOLID_TORUS
This command creates a torus.
This requires that you first click or enter the rotation axis and then enter the outer and inner radius.
ROTATIONAL SOLID PS_SOLID_ROTATE

This command creates a rotational solid from within any poly-line. This requires that you first click the
poly-line and then on the rotation axis. You can also indicate a rotational angle, around which the poly-
line is rotated. Another option is that the poly-line can also rotate around the last drawn line segment, if
you press the ESC-key when prompted for the ‘Rotation Axis’.
CONICAL PIPE PS_SOLID_CONICPIPE

This command creates a pipe that is conical on the inside and outside.
First, you have to enter or click the longitudinal axis. Then you can enter the outer and inner radius at
the respective starting and end point.
PIPE->RECTANGLE PS_SOLID_RECT2CIRCLE
This command creates a transition from a circular to a rectangular cross-section.
First, you have to enter or click the lower left and upper right point of the rectangle and then click the
circle.
ENVELOPING SOLID PS_SOLID_HULL

This command creates an enveloping solid formed by any points.
This requires that you click the points that are to form the envelope. Using this command, you can
create almost any shape (without arcs).
EXTRUSION PS_SOLID_EXTRUDE
This command creates a volume by extruding a poly-line, which you have drawn beforehand.
You first click the poly-line and then enter the desired height. The poly-line is then extruded along
positive Z-direction of UCS.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-53
3D-Modifications
3D-MODIFICATIONS
Command Name: PS_MODIFY
It may be necessary to correct the length of shapes and plates already inserted or to provide bevels,
notches, etc.
When inserting the component parts, you have paid attention to inserting the shape at the correct
position using the correct alignment, e.g., you have positioned the axis on a system line. Very often
component parts overlap and must be adapted subsequently. Additionally, it may be necessary to
rework your model due to modifications...
AutoPLANT Structural offers a large range of commands for the modification of component parts. Some
operations can (also) be executed using the standard AutoCAD commands, and the grips. Others,
require the corresponding AutoPLANT Structural commands.
There are many different commands for a modification depending on purpose. In the following
chapter, these commands are explained in detail. The modifications are divided into commands for all
parts, commands only for shapes or only for plates, etc.
When you select the command, the following main dialog appears with the commands for all parts.
DIVIDE / COMBINE
CUT AT LINE
This function allows complete shapes to be cut or extended at boundaries, just like the AutoCAD
command for the stretching and cutting of lines. For this purpose, you first have to click the shape at
the end to be cut and then select the line.
The boundary is formed only by a construction line, which is arranged vertically to the active UCS,
plane and thus creating a cut plane. If the plane is slanted, the modified shape will have a slanted plane,
too. By using this function, shapes that are too long or too short can be adapted to fit after their
insertion.
When you have typed a value in the Distance field of the main dialog, the shape will be shortened by
this value after it has been cut. Please note that the distance refers to a vertical distance between shape
and cut plane.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-54
3D-Modifications
The shape is cut at an imaginary plane, the line being oriented vertically to the active UCS-plane.
Working in a view simplifies your work, since the shape is cut “at this line”. If the shape could
intersect with the line (i.e. you consider the line to be of infinite length!), the shape is cut. To extend
the shape, hold down the ALT key while clicking the end to be extended.
CUT AT SHAPE
The shape is cut or extended at another shape. When the shape is cut, the shorter section is always cut
off.
Click the shape to be cut and then the shape along which this shape is to be cut.
The plane actually hit by the centerline (or the extended centerline) of the shape to be cut will be the
cut plane. If the centerline does not meet any surface, no cut can be made!
Please note that a logical link is created between the parts if this option is applied. The result will be
that if one part is modified, the cut will be automatically updated.
DIVIDE A SHAPE
By using this function, you can divide a shape at a cutting line into two shapes. A single shape, a plate
or several elements can be divided into two independent elements.
To start with, select the shape to be divided. Then, click the cutting line. When you have entered a
distance in the main dialog Distance, both new ends will be shortened by this value. Depending on the
setting, you can divide several elements at the same time.
However, please note that the distance refers to a vertical distance between shape and cutting line.
Distance: The two new shapes are shortened by this value at the cutting line. The arising gap has
the double distance value.
At Plane: If this option has been activated, you are asked for three points, which have to form a
plane. The parts are divided along this plane.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-55
3D-Modifications
The cutting line may be any line. If the line is slanted, the shapes are divided accordingly. If you
indicate only one point, it will be used perpendicular to the centerlines.
The information for the parts lists is identical for both parts with that of the initial shape, except for the
length. In order to master the course of the cut line better, it is recommended to work in one of the
view.
Example for Platform Design
For example, you can easily create changed girders at platform constructions by first laying the shapes
to be changed as a whole and then dividing them at their bottom trains. Vice versa, bottom trains can
be removed rapidly and the changes at this position can be cancelled.
Let us assume that you want to design a platform using the following shapes: platform beams IPE 300,
platform edge girders IPE 200, headers HEA 120.
Create a working area with these dimensions and insert the shapes at the construction lines Overlaps
can be ignored!
Change to the top view and use the dialog box for the processing of the elements. As an alternative,
you can also process the Y-axes of the general overview in the front view.
Since IPE 300 has a flange width of 150 mm, enter the value 75 in the Separation Distance field and
click the button DIVIDE. Zoom the points of intersection one after the other, select the uncut part of
the cross girder to be separated, and the construction line as cutting line.
In the figure on the left, you see that you have several shape parts now that can be connected.
You need not insert each partial shape and the risk for dimensional errors is eliminated. If you want to
remove beams, you can easily close the gaps between cross girders and create a continuous shape by
clicking the function “Combine”.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-56
3D-Modifications
COMBINE TWO SHAPES

This function allows shapes of the same length to be combined, provided that they are exactly aligned!
Click the two shapes to be combined. If they are not in alignment, the function will be aborted. The
information for the parts lists of the new shape is identical with that of the first selected shape, except
for the length.
If you keep the ALT key pressed, the shape and the position are not checked. Then, you can combine
any shape with any shape.
OUTLETS (MILLING OUT)

Using this function, you can insert simple geometrical shapes of outlets and countersunk parts into
your shapes.
You can create square, wedge-type, and circular shapes. The dimensions are entered via a dialog box.
After selection of the part and the insertion point at the part, the following dialog appears. Select the
desired basic form by selecting the corresponding page.
Rectangular Outlet
Width: Specifies the width of the outlet.
Height: Specifies the height of the outlet.
Depth: Specifies the depth of the outlet.
Position Width: Select the width position related to the insertion point.
Position Height: Select the height position related to the insertion point.
Position Depth: Select the depth position related to the insertion point.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-57
3D-Modifications
Wedge-Type Outlet
Depth: Specifies the depth of the outlet.
Horizontal: Select the position of the wedge tip in horizontal direction.
Vertical: Select the position of the wedge tip in vertical direction.
Circular Outlet
Radius: Specifies the radius of the outlet.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-58
3D-Modifications
Angle: Specifies the angle of the outlet.
Radius: Select whether the outlet has to be carried out as outer circle or as inner circle.
Position
You still have the possibility to rotate the inserted notch or cut-out by any of the three coordinate axes.
Just click the +90/-90 button, if you want to rotate the cut-out in 90° steps. If you require a different
angle just enter the value into the Rotation Angle field and then click the +PHI/-PHI button.
The outer edge of the top flange is the cut-out insertion point, the expected cut-out is defined by edges.
Repeated use creates more complex millings.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-59
3D-Modifications
POLYGONAL CUT-OUTS
Using this command, you can cut out shapes along any freely drawn contour (poly-line). Thus, you can
e.g. create notches that are not covered by the program via the special notch function.
You can also subtract one shape from another to create penetrations, e.g. to obtain slotted tubes,
penetrated handrail posts or others.
If you have entered a value in the Gap Spacing input field of the main dialog, the cut-out is regularly
extended to all directions by the indicated value to gain some “space” for inaccuracies of production.
In any case, the created polygon will be extended to the top and to the bottom in the UCS Z-plane.
Therefore, please pay attention that your UCS has been selected accordingly. In case of a direct use of
this function via the command bar, the current settings of the main dialog apply.
Click this button if you have not yet a contour in form of a poly-line or circle or arc.
You can enter the different points as you like, but be careful that the lines don’t overlap in the polygon.
Click this button if you have already a contour in form of a poly-line, etc.
Click this button if you want to subtract the contour of another solid from the selected object
(penetration or solid to be subtracted).
Complete: Here, you select whether the solid to be subtracted has to penetrate the selected object
completely or partially. This is not valid for solids to be subtracted.
Gap Spacing: Here, you can indicate a gap by which the cut contour is increased before the
subtraction.
If you have ‘divided’ a shape using this function, you will not obtain two shapes. This has to do with
the volume modeller of AutoCAD. You must take care not to create two parts of a shape - e.g., by prior
shape shortening.
If you want to obtain two shapes, please use first the function ‘Divide’ and divide the shape at a
suitable point.
In the following you can see two examples for the working of polygonal cut-outs: on the left, there is a
normal poly-cut and on the right, there is a milling via a solid to be subtracted.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-60
3D-Modifications
Create a Penetration
Here is still another example for creating a penetration of tubes:
On the first two pictures, you see the situation in the front view and in the top view (the cutting planes
are switched off so that you can see the depth.
Put the selection for ‘Poly-Cuts’ on Remove and click the button POLY-CUT.
Now click the big tube, then one of the small tubes in order to cut out the volume, Click the big tube
again and then the other small tube, in order to cut out its volume, too.
in the third picture, you see the cut-outs in the big tube (the two slanted tubes have been omitted in this
representation).
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-61
3D-Modifications
MODIFY SHAPES
SHORTENING AND EXTENDING
Shortening
Click this button to shorten a shape by picking two points. Their perpendicular distance to the center
line specifies the shortening value.
Click this button to shorten a shape by explicitly indicating the value.
Click this button to shorten the shape by the value indicated under default.
Default: Enter the value of shape shortening according to default.
In all three cases, you have to pick the shape at the end to be modified. If you pick in the middle third
of the shape length, each end is shortened by half the specified value.
Extend
These functions can be used analogously to shape shortening in order to extend a shape. However, this
doesn’t work if the selected end has been modified by a cut.
CUT AND CUT OUT

Notches
This command permits a parametric notch of a shape at another shape. Another dialog appears.
Since you can also select this function directly, you will find the description in one of the following
chapters under the command ‘Notches’.
Mitered Cut
Using this command, you can combine two shapes by means of a mitered cut, which can also be
carried out as 3D-cut.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-62
3D-Modifications
The bisecting line determines the cutting plane. If the height of the two shapes differs, the outer edges
are not aligned.
Using this command, you can also carry out a mitered cut. The intersection points of outer and inner
edges determine the cutting plane here.
This means that even shapes of different height are correctly cut aligned.
This function cuts two shapes in a way that an arc element of the shape type picked first can be
inserted with the specified radius.
Radius: The radius of the arc element to be inserted; this radius can either be entered as absolute
value or as many times the maximum diameter of the first shape. In this case, you enter e.g. *2.
Gap: A gap of this thickness is kept between the shapes at mitered cuts.
Please note that a logical link is created between the parts at these cutting commands. The result will
be that if one part is modified, the cut will be automatically updated.
Here, you see some examples for mitered cuts, which have been created using different variants:
MODIFY CONNECTIONS OF STRUCTURAL STEEL WORK
Using the 3D-modifications, you also can modify the connections of AutoPLANT Structural by
means of the connection-editor. Click this button to open the corresponding dialog.
You will find the description of the connection-editor in a separate chapter of this manual so that you
can refer to it for more detailed information.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-63
3D-Modifications
MODIFY PLATES
MODIFY CONTOUR
Use this function to add another edge to the plate. For this purpose, you have to pick the plate at the
position to be inserted.
Now, a new contour point will be created at the picked position, which can be moved using the grips.
Use this function to delete an edge from the plate.
Use this function to transfer the contour of a plate to other plates.
This function permits to adapt the basic polygon of a plate processed by cuts to the current form. The
corresponding modifications become superfluous and are deleted.
If may sometimes be easier to modify the edges of a non-processed plate. In addition, this can be
useful for data export if modifications of the contour are not supported there.
Mitered Cut
These functions permit mitered cuts between two plates. Since they are identical with those of the
shapes, you can refer to this chapter for more detailed information.
Gap: A gap of this thickness is kept between the plates at mitered cuts.
CHAMFERS AND EDGES

These dialog pages and modification options correspond to the identical pages of the plate editor.
Please refer to this chapter for more detailed description for processing of chamfers and edges.
PROCESSING BY MEANS OF THE PLATE EDITOR
Using the 3D-modifications, you also can modify the plates by means of the plate-editor. Click
this button to open the corresponding dialog.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-64
3D-Modifications
You will find the description of the plate-editor in a separate chapter of this manual so that you can
refer to it for more detailed information.
ADDITIONAL SETTINGS
Multiple Selection
Cut at line: You can cut several parts simultaneously at one line without having to select the
function once again.
Cut at Object: You can cut several parts simultaneously at another part without having to select
the function once again.
Divide: You can divide several parts simultaneously without having to select the function once
again.
Polycuts: You can cut an object simultaneously at several poly-lines without having to select the
function once again.
Loop
Cut at Lines: The command ‘Cut at Line’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.
Cut at Object: The command ‘Cut at Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.
Divide: The command ‘Divide Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.
Connect: The command ‘Combine Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.
Shorten: The command ‘Shorten Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.
Lengthen: The command ‘Extend Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.
Poly-Cuts: The command ‘Polygonal Cut-Outs’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-65
3D-Modifications
Mitre Cut: The command ‘Mitered Cut’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.
Insert Corner: The command ‘Insert Corner’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.
Delete Corner: The command ‘Delete Corner’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.
Miscellaneous
Close Dialog: The dialog is immediately closed after an action. Otherwise, you have to quit it
manually, but you could at once select another command instead.
NOTCH
Command Name: PS_NOTCH
Notches and shape cuts can be created automatically using pre-selectable distance dimensions. You
may select from various variants and track your input directly in the drawing and change in “real time”
if needed.
PRODUCING A NOTCH
For this purpose, you first have to click on the shape, which has to be notched, and then the shape
specifying the contour.
When you select the command, the connection is created on the base of your last setting. Now you can
fit the connection in the appearing dialog; you can check the result immediately in the model.
Layout: Here, you select the shape of the cope. The different variants are shown in the picture
below:
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-66
3D-Modifications
On the upper left, the initial situation before coping is shown (the shapes are still overlapping),
and on the upper right you see the contour. Pictures below from left to right: Fit Shape Start (the
normal cope), Fit Shape Middle and Fit Shape End.
Corner Layout: Edge – The copes at the shape radii are carried out with a beveled edge.
Radial – The copes at the shape radii are carried out with adapted radii. In the Radius input field,
the determined radius can be modified later.
Access Holes – The holes are drilled in the inner corners of the cope. In the Radius input field, the
radius of the drill holes can be preset.
Reference: If Outer Edge (upper field) is activated; the dimensions for the distance between top
and bottom flange inside resp. outside refer to the outside of the flanges.
If Inner Edge is activated, the dimensions refer to the inside of the flanges.
If Outer Edge (lower field) is activated, the dimensions for the distance between top and bottom
flange edge refer to the outside of the flanges.
If Center is activated, the dimensions for the distance refer to the shape end (the exact position
depends on the ‘Web Distance’ value).
Group Distances
Distances: The following dimensions can be set for upper flange and bottom flange separately:
In the Radius input field, you can indicate the radius of ‘Drill Holes’ or ‘Radial’ option.
Clicking this button allows an unknown shape to be clicked. The flange thickness is then entered in the
input fields for Top and Bottom Flange Inside. If you have entered a value in the +Distance field, this
value will be added.
Using this function, a flange distance can be swiftly determined without knowing the shape. As
reference, you should select the setting ‘Outer Edge’.
+ Distance: This value is added to the result in the function GET FLANGE THICKNESS.
By clicking this button, you can transfer the data of the current cope directly to several copes, which
have to be created anew. You have to click all shapes first which have to obtain the cope. Then you
have to click the shapes to be coped.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-67
3D-Modifications
STANDARDIZED NOTCHES
List: This List shows previously defined notches from a database. You can create these database
files using any DBASE editor you like. You can previously define a certain number of the most
frequent notches.
In the different List Fields you can have a look on the data, which are the base of the connection.
Apart from this you can select the desired notch by clicking an entry.
OUTLET
Command Name: PS_OUTLET
Using this function, you can insert simple geometrical shapes of outlets and countersunk parts into
your shapes. With repeated use, any complex structure can be created.
You can create square, wedge-type, and circular shapes. The dimensions are entered via a dialog box.
Since the entered data can be directly checked on screen, the entries are not described in detail.
CREATION OF OUTLETS
When selecting the function you are prompted to indicate the shape to feature a cut-out. First, click the
shape and then select the cut-out insertion point.
The following dialog box appears where you enter the dimensions of the cut-out and its relation to the
insertion point. In the model, the current shape of the cut-out is shown in red colour. After quitting the
dialog box, the displayed cut-out will be cut from the shape.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-68
3D-Modifications
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-69
3D-Modifications
Apart from rectangular contours, cut-outs can also be created with a wedge-shaped or with a
cylindrical (radial) contour.
POSITION
The dialog box ‘POSITION Folder’ also offers you the option to rotate the inserted notch or cut-out by
any of the three coordinate axes.
Just click the +90/-90 button, if you want to rotate the cut-out in 90° steps. If you require a different
angle just enter the value into the Rotation Angle field and then click the +PHI/-PHI button.
Here, you see the example for creating a cut-out in a shape or in a plate:
The outer edge of the top flange is the cut-out insertion point, the expected cut-out is defined by edges.
The corner has been cut from the flange.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-70
3D-Modifications
Repeated use creates more complex millings.
BOOLEAN OPERATIONS
Command Name: See Individual Functions
For volume modelling, AutoPLANT Structural does not use the AutoCAD volume modeller ACIS but
the modeller which is used in Architectural Desktop as well. This modeller works faster and produces
smaller graph files.
Consequently, you cannot process AutoPLANT Structural objects with the Boolean operations of
AutoCAD (e.g. subtract their volumes). In case you do combine objects, there will be no errors, but
nothing will happen! In order to give you the same performance range as with AutoCAD, all Boolean
operations were redefined (see also the command → ’Basic Solids’). Another option is to use the
AutoPLANT Structural properties to convert the AutoPLANT Structural objects into ACIS volume
models and then to process them with AutoCAD. Your drawings will then become larger and more
sluggish.
Add PS_ADD
This command creates a new volume by adding two existing volumes.
You have to click both objects and the newly created object receives all parts list information of the
object you clicked on first.
Subtract PS_SUB
This command creates a new volume by subtracting one or several volumes from an existing volume.
First, you have to click the object from which the other volumes are to be subtracted. Then click the
objects whose volume is to be subtracted (these will be deleted in the process!).
The new object receives all parts list information of the object you clicked on first. Please note, that
you will not create two independent objects in case you “split” the first object in the process.
Cut-Set PS_COMMON
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-71
Plate Editor
This command creates a new volume by using the cut-set of two existing volumes, i.e., the new
volume is the part the two objects shared.
You have to click both objects and the new object will receive all parts list information of the object
you clicked on first.
Subtract Cut-Set PS_COMMON_SUB
This command creates a new volume by subtracting the cut-set of two existing volumes from the first
volume.
The first part is brought into line with the second, while preserving the second part.
PLATE EDITOR
Command Name: PS_PLATE_EDITOR
A special plate editor is available for processing of plates. This editor allows for modifying the contour
by adding or separating poly-lines in a fast and comfortable way. You may see the poly-line as a plate
of the same thickness and position like the plate to be processed.
In addition, you can add chamfers and edges. All commands can also be carried out via the normal
manipulation. The use of the plate editor is recommended when poly-plates have to be processed in
complex situations because it can hide the other component parts and it automatically enters the plate
level.
When loading the function, click the plate to be modified first. Then a dialog appears where you can
enter further indications with regard to the desired processing.
BOOLEAN OPERATIONS
Boolean Opera: Here, you specify what kind of processing has to be carried out: either add,
subtract or common.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-72
Plate Editor
Side: Select from which side of the plate the processing has to be carried out.
Contour: You can use a polygon either as complete solid or as contour line. Please pay attention
that the poly-line has to be closed, even if it is used as contour.
Distance: If the poly-line is used as complete contour, you can enter an offset towards the contour.
Milling Width: If the poly-line has to be used as milling contour, you can enter the width of the
contour here.
Depth: Here, you enter the depth of processing if the poly-line is not used completely continuous.
Hide Parts: If this option is activated, all other component parts are hidden at plate selection. This
is valid from the next selection onward.
Continued: The poly-line is used as solid with the plate thickness, i.e. continuous.
Click this button to determine the contour via the different contour points.
Click this button to determine the contour by picking a poly-line, a circle or an arc.
Click this button to add another edge to the plate.
Click this button to delete an edge from the plate.
Example for different Boolean Operations
Example for different contours
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-73
Plate Editor
CHAMFER / ROUNDING OFF
CHAMFER
Use this button to select the corresponding corner of the plate if you want to add a chamfer to a plate.
Then, the input fields are released.
Layout: Here, you select which kind of chamfer has to be carried out: straight, convex or concave.
Radius/1st. Edge: Here, you indicate the radius at convex/concave version or the length of the first
edge at straight version.
2nd. Edge: Here, you indicate the length of the second edge of the straight chamfer.
Example for a plate with all possible three chamfer types
ROUNDING OFF
Use this button to select the corresponding plate edge to round off an edge. Then, the input fields are
released.
You can define the rounding off either via the radius or via the height of the rounding above the
straight edge.
Radius: Specify the rounding radius.
Min. Radius: Here, the program shows you the minimum radius that is possible.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-74
Plate Editor
Height: Specify the height above the straight edge.
Max. Height: Here, the program shows you the maximum height that is possible.
Example for a plate with rounded off edge before and after the rounding off has been effected
EDGE PROCESSING
This function serves for processing of one or more edges. The edges can be chamfered, rounded off,
been equipped with a radius or seamed.
Use this button to select the corresponding plate edge to process an edge. Then, the input fields are
released.
Layout: specifies the kind of processing.
Top Side: The processing is made at the upper side of the plate.
Bottom Side: The processing is made at the lower side of the plate.
Top Edge Var1: This value is either the length of the first edge, the rounding radius or the depth of
the seam.
Top Edge Var2: This value is either the length of the second edge or the height of the seam.
Selected Edge: Here, you indicate from which edge to which edge the processing has to be made.
When you click the edge and the side is switched on, the edges are displayed in a numbered way.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-75
Drilling / Bolted Connections
You can select the processing area. If the starting value is equal to the end value, the processing
will be carried out all around.
Select here for the edges 0-1,2-3 to be processed, if you want to process the two opposite sides in
our example.
Possible ways to process the edges
DRILLING / BOLTED CONNECTIONS

Command Name: PS_DRILL
Shapes and plates can be provided with different drill holes. Existing drill holes of a shape can be
transferred to another shape, and oblong holes, countersunk holes or step borings can be created as
well. Now, it is also possible to create thread holes.
In addition, you can use this command to bolt component parts directly without having to generate drill
holes first. Then, you can carry out the ‘Bolt’ command. The distribution of bolts is indicated in the
same way as for drill holes but the bolts automatically create the necessary drill holes in all
participating component parts.
The program manages drill holes in the form of Drill Hole Fields. This means that groups consisting,
for instance, of 2 x 2 holes will be drilled in one operation. In the dialog box you enter the individual
hole pitches and then insert the complete hole group.
The drilling depth is always along the Z-axis of the active UCS plane. A description of the drill hole
field is given in the X/Y plane of the active UCS. Although it would be possible to drill holes in the
general overview (global view), it is easier to work in one of the views.
After selection of the command, a dialog box appears where you can set the basic behaviour of the
command and other default parameters. Depending on the selection, the displayed content may differ.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-76
DRILL HOLES / DRILL HOLE FIELDS
Layout: Select the general form of the drill hole field here.
Rectangular – In a rectangular drill hole field, the drill holes are arranged in a rectangular way
around the insertion point forming rows and columns.
Radial – In a radial drill hole field, the drill holes are arranged in a complete or partial circle
around the insertion point. Additional input fields are displayed allowing you to define round drill
hole fields.
Single Holes – The position of each single hole can be determined individually.
Rectangular Drill Hole Field
Definition: In general, drill hole fields are described as follows:

Number1*Pitch1, Intermediate Pitch1, Number2*Pitch2, Intermediate Pitch2,...
Shape/X Dir: Description of drill hole field in shape direction, for plates in X-direction of the
UCS.
Cross/Y Dir: Description of drill hole field perpendicular to the shape direction, for plates in Y-
direction of the UCS.
Rectangular drill hole fields are described by indicating number*pitch of the drill holes and
any existing Intermediate pitches (separated by a comma). At a number = 1 you can omit the pitch.
Radial Drill Hole Field
Number: Number of drill holes
Radius: The radius of the circle where the drill holes are arranged around the insertion point
Area: The angle area throughout which the drill holes are distributed.
Start: The starting angle from which on the drill holes are distributed.
Further Default Parameters
Diameter: The bolt diameter is specified. It is taken from a list that can be edited, as you like. This
list is stored in the directory.. \prg under pro_st3d.hdr. If you activate the option for
individual diameter input in the global settings, you can also enter values not included in the list.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-77
Addition: If you don’t insert any thread hole, you can enter here the clearance between bolt
diameter and hole diameter. In the above list, you can also define a Workloose for the bolt
diameters. However, you have to activate the use in the Global Settings / Bolts. You can enter any
value here.
Rectangle Hole Axis: If rectangle holes have to be inserted, you enter the length of the rectangle
hole axis here.
Layout: Drill Through –Drill holes are created from one material edge to the other.
Drill Blind Hole – The holes have only a certain length.
Weld Crack – This is a small marking.
Depth: Specify the depth of the drill hole for the layout ‘Drill Blind Hole.
Flange: Indicates the flange to be drilled. You may either drill holes into the upper or lower flange
or into both flanges. Upper/Lower flange results from the position of the component part and from
the current Z-axis.
Shape Center: The insertion point is perpendicular to the shape center before use. Thus you will
always obtain symmetrical drill holes related to the shape center.
CREATION OF DRILL HOLES

Click this button to insert drill holes into a component part. Select a part, which is then drilled
accordingly.
Click this button to insert drill holes into several component parts simultaneously. You can select
several parts at the same time; alignment is made according to the first picked part.
Click this button to adopt the drill holes of one component part into another one.
First click all shapes with holes to be transferred and then all shapes to adopt the hole. Using this
function, drill holes from a copied connecting plate may be rapidly transferred to a shape. This option
is only available if you didn’t select the option ‘Bolted Connection’.
You can also adopt a drill hole field with simultaneous bolted connection into a new shape so that the
new shape is drilled first and then bolted. First select the properties of the shape and click on the EDIT
button in the “Drill Holes” tab.
The drill hole dialog described here will be displayed and you can adopt the drill holes with bolts using
‘Bolts/Add’.
Monitor: Here you can see the creation of the drill hole field and define the insertion point.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-78
RECTANGULAR DRILL HOLE FIELDS

The drill hole field is always entered in shape direction (from starting point to end point of insertion).
The developing drill hole field is directly displayed among other things in the shape field of the
“Insertion Position” tab of the dialog for control purposes.
This hole group is entered in the drill hole description as follows:
Input field ‘shape / X Dir’ 2*60,200,1*,200,3*40
Input field ‘cross / Y Dir’ 2*100
If you only want to insert a hole group with single holes in longitudinal direction, just leave the box for
crosswise direction empty.
If you want to insert a hole group in the crosswise direction only, you have to enter 1* in longitudinal
direction in any case (for one hole).
One single drill hole field cannot cover mixed groups consisting of one and two holes in crosswise
direction!
You can enter the predefined marking gauges of the shape by typing the letter W instead of a pitch, e.g.
2*W. If no specific marking gauge has been defined for the current shape, the program will prompt you
to enter one.
BOLTED CONNECTIONS
Alternatively to drilling option, you can directly add a bolted connection to the component part. For
this purpose, you have to select at least 2 component parts the distance of which is not bigger than
specified in the gap input field.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-79
All settings with regard to drill hole field, diameter, etc. are made on the first page.
Bolt Style: Select the desired bolt style here.
Gap Maximum distance of one contact surface to the other; if the distance is bigger, no bolted
connection will be created
Length Addition: Length addition for the bolts
Touch Plane: Normally, drill holes are created along the Z-axis of the current UCS.
At bolted connection option, however, the program can be prompted to search for contact surfaces.
Normally, these are the surfaces where a bolted connection is inserted. For this purpose, the UCS
doesn’t have to be placed normally on these surfaces.
In this example, the plate can be bolted to the shape although the UCS is not aligned normally to
the drill hole direction.
Single Hole Bolt: The insertion of bolts into a part is allowed as well.
Turn: the bolts are turned before insertion.
Update auto: The connection is automatically updated if a component part has been modified. A
logical link is created between the participating component parts.
CREATION OF BOLTED CONNECTIONS

Click this button to bolt several component parts with each other. Now, you are prompted by
AutoPLANT Structural to select the participating component parts and then to indicate the insertion
point of the bolted connection (similar to a normal drill hole).
Then, the bolts are automatically inserted and the necessary drill holes are created. You don’t have to
specify in which flanges this has to be done because this is automatically determined by AutoPLANT
Structural.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-80
Please note that the element, which was selected, first represents the main element of the connection.
All others are only bolted elements. If you want to modify the bolted connection at a later time, you
have to modify the properties of this main element. Since the drill hole fields of the bolted elements
depend on the drill hole field of the main element, these cannot be modified independently.
Please remember as well that the bolts are not assigned to a group. This assignment has to be made
later using the command ‘Group’ if desired.
Click this button to add new component parts to the bolted connection. Necessary drill holes are
automatically generated.
Click this button to remove component parts from the bolted connection. Drill holes are automatically
removed as well.
ADDITIONAL SETTINGS
Hole Type: Here, you specify the kind of bolt to be inserted.
Normal Drill: The drill hole has one diameter at each position.
Countersunk: The hole is drilled as countersunk hole. In this case, you can set the countersunk
Depth and the opening Angle.
Step Hole: The hole is drilled as step hole. You can determine the Depth of the step and the upper
diameter additionally. The figure below shows you all three available layouts one beside the other.
Hole Type: This setting influences the later 2D-depiction.
Offset: You can influence the insertion point of the drill hole using an offset related to the selected
insertion point.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-81
Rectangular: In this case you can enter the offset separately for X, Y.
Polar: In this case you can enter the offset by means of distance and angle related to the insertion
axis. In the case of shapes, the insertion axis is the longitudinal axis instead of the X-axis.
Shape Center: The insertion point is perpendicular to the shape center before use. Thus you will
always obtain symmetrical drill holes related to the shape center.
Pitch Lines: During drilling, the crack lines of the participating shapes are displayed. After end of
drilling they disappear again.
Center Lines: During drilling, the center lines of the participating shapes are displayed. After end
of drilling they disappear again.
Ignore Inner...: If this field is checked, the drill hole is not interrupted at concave chambers, which
occur due to inner contours. Thus, it is possible to drill through a square tube completely.
Otherwise, only one side would be drilled.
Create Thread : The drill hole is executed as thread hole. No Workloose is used and the drill hole
is correctly displayed as thread hole in 2D depiction. In 3D depiction, additional lines are
displayed to make the thread hole visible.
EDGE DISTANCES
AutoPLANT Structural can automatically verify the admissible edge distance during drilling of
component parts. It is also possible to carry out this control manually for certain parts.
If an automatic control has to take place, which is activated directly during drilling, you have to switch
on the corresponding option in the global settings.
You can specify the admissible edge distances of shapes and plates for each hole diameter in a table.
The corresponding drill hole then will be verified by means of this table and the part will be marked in
colour if the distance is too small. If the automatic control is activated, an info window appears during
drilling. However, the drilling will be realized nevertheless.
In this table, you can assign the corresponding minimum distances for any existing drill hole diameter,
separated according to shapes and plates.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-82
Bolts
Click this button to start controlling the edge distances. You are prompted to select the parts. If the drill
hole distances of a part are smaller than the selected distances, this part will be highlighted in colour.
You can remove this marking using the command PS_REGEN.
If you suppress any further display during automatic control, any existing smaller distances will not be
displayed any more. This button serves for removing the lock of the display.
If you have activated the ‘Expert’ mode in the global settings, this button will be additionally
displayed. It permits editing of the diameter table.
EDITING THE TABLE

After double-clicking on a line, an input dialog appears where you can define the values:
Dia: The corresponding diameter
Shapes: The specified edge distance for shapes
Plates: The specified edge distance for plates
When you quit this dialog with OK, the indicated values are adopted into the table and this list is sorted
anew according to the available diameters.
AUTOMATIC CONTROL
If the automatic control of the edge distances has been activated and the program detects smaller edge
distances during an operation, a warning message will be displayed.
Note However, this warning is only a hint; the corresponding drill hole will nevertheless be inserted
into the component part. Please note that this message might not appear before end of the
action.
BOLTS
Bolting of component parts is the easiest form of automatic connections provided by AutoPLANT
Structural. In previous versions, the components to be bolted had to be drilled first (see function →
’Drilling’). Now, this is not necessary. Of course, it is still possible to continue working with the
existing combination of drilling/bolting.
Another option is the creation of user-defined bolt styles as well as the check and update of the bolting
via logical links (please refer to ->'Logical Links'). In some connection dialogs, a lot of settings are not
necessary and you can set the bolts exactly according to your requirements.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-83
Bolts
After all component parts, to be bolted with each other are selected, the program checks the position of
the parts with regard to possible bolting (if need be, with regard to drillings which are situated one
above the other and having an allowable tolerance; but it does not check possible mounting).
Necessary bolt lengths are calculated and the bolts are inserted according to your default settings with
regard to type and possible washers. Then, the bolts are adopted into a bolt list for later parts list.
CHANGES TO OLDER VERSIONS

From version 17 onwards, AutoPLANT Structural is able to adopt existing bolts and component parts
in a new connection/bolting (back to back bolting). This permits e.g. to bolt automatically 2 web angle
connections which are connected on the left and on the right of a girder and this bolting is designed
completely and correctly. This process is running completely in the background; the only prerequisite
is that bolts and connection parts are connected with each other via logical links. As an option, this
process may be switched off in Global Settings/Bolts because it possibly requires a considerable
amount of calculation time.
Bolt management is still effected via styles, which may be created by the user. There is however one
important modification: the necessary data from which the bolts are generated are not summed up any
more but they have been divided into the corresponding components. This allows you to put together
the components of a bolting completely; and length calculation is designed on the basis of the selected
component parts. The result is considerably more flexible and bolt definitions more accurate.
BOLTING PARTS
The components are bolted automatically after part selection and selection of the bolt style. The holes
in the component parts are analysed and the corresponding bolts are selected and inserted.
After having loaded the function, you will get the following screen display:
Bolt style: Here you select the bolt style to be used.
Single hole Bolting: Normally, at least 2 component parts are required for a bolting. Sometimes
you only want to insert bolts without bolting them. This option creates bolts for each hole of the
selected component parts without requiring a second part.
Create dynamic Connection: The selected component parts are connected with each other via
logical links. The bolting is automatically updated in case of modification.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-84
Bolts
Diameter: Indicates the virual hole diameter if you want to create a single bolt manually. This
process was chosen to preserve the compatibility with standard bolting function.
Work loose: Indicates the virtual free play if manual insertion has been selected.
Length Addition: Indicates the value by which the bolts are extended. This is valid for all kinds of
insertion.
Gap distance: Indicates the maximum distance between two holes which are assumed to belong to
the bolting. If this value is exceeded the holes cannot be bolted.
Angle difference: This is the difference of the angles of the drilled holes in degrees. If this value is
exceeded, the holes don't align and cannot be bolted.
Colours: bolt= indicates the colour of the bolt on the monitor,

monitor= indicates the colour of monitor background
This button allows bolting of component parts. Select the desired parts and the bolts will be inserted
into these component parts according to the existing holes.
This option permits manual insertion of a bolt. Select start and endpoint of grip length and the bolt will
be inserted.
This button allows rotation of one or several bolts. Select the corresponding bolts and they will be
rotated.
When the cursor is placed on one of the colour input boxes, the colour may be selected interactively.
BOLT STYLE MANAGEMENT

The second page permits the manipulation of bolt styles.
Bolt style: Here, user selects the bolt style, which is to be modified.
This button opens the dialog for bolt definition.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-85
Bolts
2nd washer: Activate this option if your style definition is to be equipped with a 2nd washer.
This button opens the dialog for definition of the 2nd washer. It is only available if this option has been
activated.
Tapered Washer:Activate this option if your style definition is to be equipped with a wedge
washer.
This button opens the dialog for definition of the wedge washer. It is only available if this option has
been activated.
2nd Tapered washer: Activate this option if your style definition is to be equipped with a 2nd wedge
washer.
This button opens the dialog for definition of the 2nd wedge washer. It is only available if this option
has been activated.
Washer: Activate this option if your style definition is to be equipped with a washer beneath the
nut.
This button opens the dialog for definition of the washer. It is only available if this option has been
activated.
Nut: Activate this option if your style definition is to be equipped with a nut.
This button opens the dialog for definition of the nut. It is only available if this option has been
activated.
Safety nut: Activate this option if your style definition is to be equipped with a safety nut.
This button opens the dialog for definition of the safety nut. It is only available if this option has been
activated.
The current definition is stored in the drawing and in a file. If the style is modified and you leave this
page without having saved the modifications, you are asked whether you want to save.
Permits loading of the current style definition from a style file. All current definitions of the current
style will be overwritten.
BOLT DEFINITION
When the button for bolt definition is pressed, the following dialog opens:
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-86
Bolts
Style name: Indicates the current style
Data file: Indicates which data files are used for bolts with this style. Only bolt files are displayed.
Parts list entry: Here you specify the entry of these bolts, which are to be written into the parts list
and position flag. Two variables may be used: $(D) stands for bolt diameter, $(L) stands for bolt
length. In addition, the following two variables are possible: $(GLM) for min grip length and
$(GLX) for max grip length.
Export name: This name is used for data export. The above-mentioned conditions are valid as
well.
Material: Here the bolt material is selected. Only those materials are listed which have been
defined as bolt materials.
Tension: Enter the tension as a percentage.
Length Addition: Enter the additional length of the bolts. The bolt will be extended by this value
after length calculation.
Layout: Specify whether the bolt has to be a shop bolt or an assembly bolt. This specification has
influences on the parts list. When an assembly list is created, only assembly bolts will be taken
into consideration.
Units: Specify the units the data file is based on.
Coating: Select the coating of the bolt.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-87
Bolts
Colour: Select the colour of the bolt in the model.
Bitmap: You may select a bitmap that is used in the selection lists of this style style.
Countersunk head: The bolt is displayed as countersunk bolt.
Parts list entry: The bolt is adopted into the parts list.
No DM Check: For this bolt, a diameter check will not be carried out. Normally, all entered
diameters which are found will be reduced to standard values; e.g. a bolt with bolt diameter
DM=12.5mm cannot be created.
NUT DEFINITION
Data file: Indicates which data files are used for nuts with this style. Only nut files are displayed.
Partlist entry: Here you specify the entry of this nut, which are to be written into the parts list and
position flag. Two variables may be used: $(D) stands for bolt diameter, $(L) stands for bolt
length.
well.
Material: Here the bolt material is selected. Only those materials are listed which have been
Partlist Entry: The nut is adopted into the parts list.
Definition of safety nuts takes place analogously.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-88
Bolts
WASHER DEFINITION
Data file: Indicates which data files are used for washers with this style. Only washer files are
displayed.
Parts list entry: Here you specify the entry of this washer, which is to be written into the parts list
and position flag. Two variables may be used: $(D) stands for bolt diameter, $(L) stands for bolt
length.
well.
Material: Here the washer material is selected. Only those materials are listed which have been
Partlist entry: The washer is adopted into the parts list.
WEDGE WASHER DEFINITION
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-89
Bolts
Data file: Indicates which data files are used for washers with this style. Only washer files are
displayed.
Parts Entry U-washer: This definition is used in case U-shapes are applied. The same is valid for I-
washers.
Here, you specify the entry of this washer, which has to be written into the parts list and position
flag. Two variables may be used: $(D) stands for bolt diameter, $(L) stands for bolt length.
Export name: this name is used for data export. The above-mentioned conditions are valid as well.
Material: Here, the washer material is selected. Only those materials are listed which have been
defined as bolt material.
Partlist entry: The washer is adopted into the parts list.
SORT
The third page serves for management of bolt lists and for creation of new styles.
Serves for creation of new bolt styles. After selection, you are asked for the name of the new style.
Then, the style is created and is equipped with the settings of the current style.
Allows loading of a style from the file. The style is inserted at the current position.
The currently checked style is deleted without further query.
The currently checked style is moved upwards in the list.
The currently checked style is moved downwards in the list.
All style definitions stored in your corresponding files will be updated. The styles are stored as objects
in the drawing. When the style definition is modified on the hard disk, normally the modifications are
not transferred to the internal objects. They are carried out for all styles by this function. Insert
Stiffeners
Command Name: PS_RIP
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-90
Bolts
AutoPLANT Structural offers an automatic command for the insertion of a stiffener into a shape.
Although stiffeners are common poly-plates or flats, the program already calculates their dimensions
according to the shape and user specifications. You may select from a number of variables and track
the result immediately in the drawing, modifying it in “real time”.
In the case of symmetric shapes such as HEA, HEB, etc., two opposite stiffeners are created between
the web and the two flanges. When only one stiffener is needed for the structure, just delete the other
one. However, it will not be restored during an update.
INSERTION OF STIFFENERS
You can insert stiffeners either in views or in the global view. When you have selected normal
stiffeners (i.e. stiffeners running vertically to the shape axis), you are prompted to specify the shape
where the stiffeners are to be inserted.
After selection, the program prompts you to specify the center of the insertion point of the stiffeners.
Click the point you want on the shape or on a construction line. Your pick point is generally placed
perpendicular to the shape axis.
When you have selected ‘Full Stiffener’, the stiffener is inserted to fit. When you have selected ‘Half
Stiffener’ or ‘To Measure’, you are prompted to specify the fastening side of the stiffeners. Click the
flange side with which the stiffeners are to be in contact.
Let’s assume that you have drawn the construction lines on the upper flange in the top view as shown
on the left. If you click the line at any point, the pick point is always positioned perpendicular to the
axis and used as the insertion point of the stiffeners.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-91
Bolts
DIMENSIONS
Layout: Here you select the shape of the inner corners of the stiffeners.
Use Flat.: A flat steel is used instead of a poly-plate. The flat is processed by Boolean operations
in a way as if its shape would be identical with a poly-plate.
Length: Here, you specify the length of the stiffeners.
Full Stiffener: The stiffener height extends over the complete web height of the shape.
Half Stiffener: The stiffener height stretches over half the web height of the shape where the side
is determined by the picked side.
By Length: The stiffener is given the height specified by you. Only values between 10-90% of the
web height can be used.
Square: The height of the stiffener is determined according to the specifications, but the layout is a
triangle shape.
Thickness: Thickness of the stiffener plate; this value is taken from the table or it can be entered
freely if this setting has been activated.
Flange Offset : When calculating the stiffener dimensions, this is the distance to the flange side,
i.e., the stiffener height is slightly reduced.
Web Distance: When calculating the stiffener dimensions, this is the distance to the web side, i.e.,
the stiffener width is slightly reduced.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-92
Bolts
Length : This is the value for the stiffener length when you have selected the stiffener length ‘To
Measure’.
Offset: When calculating the stiffener dimensions, this is the distance to the outer edge of the
flanges, i.e., the stiffener width is slightly reduced. If the stiffener is to slightly project towards the
outside, type a negative value.
Round to: The Round to value describes a rounding accuracy applicable to the width of the
calculated stiffened plate. Rounding is carried out after calculation of the projection.
Using this command, it is possible, e.g., to permit only dimensions divisible by 5, so that flat steel
bars can be used.
Radius: In the Radius input field you specify the radius of the ribbed plate at the shape radii. If this
value is 0, the shape radius is imported. If you have selected the create ‘Insert at Slant’, the radius
is bridged by a slanted edge.
Click this button to move the stiffener with respect to the insertion point.
After insertion, the stiffener first is placed in the middle of the insertion point. However, you can also
align it to the upper or lower edge of the stiffener by clicking repeatedly on it.
CONNECT
On this page you specify the weld style in the case the stiffeners have to be welded directly. You can
also attach weld cracks to mark the stiffeners in the shape.
Weld Style: Specify the weld style to be used.
Flange Side: The flange side of the stiffeners will be welded.
Thickness: If you want to overwrite the thickness of the selected style, you may do this here.
Web Side: The web side of the stiffeners will be welded.
Thickness: If you want to overwrite the thickness of the selected style, you may do this here.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-93
Bolts
Weld Mark: Here, you specify whether small drill holes serving as weld marks have to be inserted
into the shape after insertion of the stiffeners. These weld marks then can be output in the
workshop drawings or in the NC-data.
None – No marks are fixed.
At Center - A mark is fixed at the center of the stiffener.
At Edges - A mark is fixed at each of the outer edges of the stiffener.
Create Group: If this field is checked, the stiffeners and the shape are arranged to create a group. If
the shape is already part of another group, the stiffeners are allocated to that other group.
OPTIONS
Angle insertion: If this field is checked, stiffeners can be inserted in the shape using a slant. At
insertion, you are prompted for a line specifying the direction.
The necessary extension of the stiffener width is automatically calculated.
Angle: Here you can enter the position angle related to the centerline.
2D-Section: If this field is checked, an automatic 2D section is inserted directly at the stiffener.
This section can be displayed during detailing.
The cutting plane is situated slightly in front of the stiffener and it ends slightly behind the
stiffener; the cutting direction is always in shape direction.
ASSIGNMENTS
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too it is possible to carry out all
assignments directly for each single shape. Select the component part and then select the settings.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-94
Plate Connections
OBLIQUE STIFFENERS
In principle, the insertion of oblique stiffeners is the same as described above, except for the fact that
you are prompted to define a position line of the stiffeners. Click a (construction) line showing the
orientation of the stiffeners.
Now, the stiffeners are inserted into the shape in an oblique position. The distances refer to the outer
corners of the stiffener plates.
If you select the command via “PS_RIP_ANGLE”, you will be prompted for the position line right
during input and can then click it.
Show the center line of the shape in the top view and use the ‘virtual point of intersection without Z’,
in order to get an exact center point of insertion using the ‘point of intersection’ of the axis and the
construction line.
PLATE CONNECTIONS
Command Name: PS_ENDPLATE
AutoPLANT Structural automatically creates any plate connections such as stiff or rigid plates according
to DAST (ocal standard), jointed plates, etc. but also completely freely definable connections.
The program determines the type of possible connections based on the shapes to be connected and
offers these to the user as well. In addition to the actual connection plate other components such as
stiffeners, backer plates, bolts and even reinforcement haunches can be created with this command and
assigned to the proper component groups directly.
An entire plate connection can be created with just one single command.
Hint: All possible plate connections are now contained in this shared dialog and, e.g., you can specify a
stiff connection first and subsequently process this connection the same way you would a free plate.
CREATING PLATE CONNECTIONS

When selecting the plate connection command you are first prompted for the shape to be connected,
which you have to click at the end to be connected. Then you have to click the supporting shape (the
shape to which you want to connect) or you have to ignore it with RETURN.
No supporting shape is considered when pressing RETURN or the right mouse button and you can
create a simple end plate at the shape to be connected.
No further action on your part is required because the program does the rest for you. The shape to be
connected is cut to the proper length and is fitted with the connection plate. The plate and supporting
shape are drilled and bolted together and – depending on your selection – the additional components
for the stiffeners are attached.
Then you will see a plate connection with the default values of the last connection created with this
function followed by the display of the dialog for the parameter settings.
If you want to create e.g. a plate resistant to deflection instead, just switch to the dialog tab for plates
resistant to deflection and select the desired plate. On screen, the connection changes immediately to
display the current settings.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-95
Plate Connections
Switch back to the layout tab to see the current dimensions, which can be dynamically adjusted.
FREE PLATE CONNECTIONS
LAYOUT AND DIMENSIONS
This dialog opens when selecting the command after the shapes to be connected have been picked.
You can enter the dimensions of any freely defined plate connection.
This dialog tab is also the basic dialog of the other plate dialogs. Any selection from such objects as
e.g. the plates resistant to deflection can still be changed here because any of the parameters on which
the connection is based is entered and imported in this dialog from where they can be modified further
at any time.
Layout of Plate: Specify the layout of the connecting plate. The following figure displays different
connection types, which can be created.
If you selected the ‘Automatic’ option, the program decides which type to be used depending on
the position of the shapes.
The critical angle, which differentiates between, spliced and standard plate connection is
approximately 45°. If you want to obtain the ‘Flange’ type, you have to set this option explicitly
because otherwise always a plate connection at the web will be created.
Group Dimensions
Width: means the width of the plate (in case of I shapes: parallel to the shape flange).
Thickness: means the thickness of the plate.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-96
Plate Connections
Length: means a fixed length of the plate independent of the shape height.
Entering the value 0 for the length, you can enter the plate length variably in the Offset Top and
Offset Bottom fields as distance from the upper and lower edge of the selected shape.
Gap: means that an indicated space is left between the supporting shape and the plate. This allows
you to consider e.g. finishing tolerances.
Offset Top: means the distance from the upper shape edge. Positive values reduce the plate
dimensions towards the middle. Negative values increase the plate dimensions beyond the shape.
Offset: means the distance from the lower shape edge. Positive values reduce the plate dimensions
towards the middle. Negative values increase the plate dimensions beyond the shape.
Doubler Plate: Here, you can create a second plate with different dimensions than the first one.
The input fields for the dimensions of the second plate are released after the option has been
clicked.
As Poly-Plate: The inserted end plates are not created as flats but as poly-plate.
Rotate Connection: In case of asymmetric plates you can define the plate position here. Use this
option to turn the complete connection by 180° around the insertion axis, if upper and lower side
were exchanged at generation of the connection.
Equal Plates: If you want to insert two identical plates, you have to activate the option Double
Plate and set the option Equal Plates.
Now the dimensions of the second plate are the same as for the first one and two identical plates
are inserted.
Click this button to adjust the first plate to the cross-section of any existing shape.
Click this button to copy the data of the first plate into the input fields of the second plate.
Plate Offset: Horizontal means that the complete plate connection is shifted parallel to the flange
of the connecting shape.
Vertical means that the complete plate connection is shifted parallel to the web of the connecting
shape.
Direct Call of Plate Functions
The different default types can be called directly as well. If you have selected the connection type
‘Splice’, you can define a separation line for a continuous shape by pressing RETURN or the right
mouse button when you are prompted for the supporting shape.
Normal: PS_ENDPLATE_NORM
As Splice: PS_ENDPLATE_SPLICE
At Flange: PS_ENDPLATE_FLANGE
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-97
Plate Connections
DRILL HOLES
Without Holes: The connection plate is created without drill holes.
Group Vertical
The drill hole spacing in a vertical direction (height) is determined. Depending on the entry, the values
have different meanings. Examples are given at the end of the command description.
Upside: Here, you enter the distance of the upper row of holes from the plate’s upper edge. If this
value is 0, and the value in the box Downside is also 0, the only entry that will be used is in the
Middle field.
Middle: Here, you enter the distance of the first and second row of holes from the upper and lower
plate edge. The holes will be distributed uniformly between the two outer holes if this value is 0.
The other rows of holes will be arranged in the same manner if the number is greater than 4.
Downside: Here, you enter the distance of the lowest row of holes from the plate’s lower edge. If
this value is 0, and the value in the box Upside is also 0, the only entry that will be used is in the
Middle field.
Offset: Here, you enter a simultaneous shifting of all rows of holes with respect to the plate upper
edge. If you enter a negative value, shifting will be carried out with respect to the plate lower
edge.
Asymmetrical: If you have selected this option, the structure of the hole pattern input changes and
a list with an input field appears. Depending on the number of holes, you can determine each
distance individually by clicking the position in the list and by specifying the distance in the input
field.
Measured from: Here you can specify at asymmetrical distribution from which position the
distribution of drill holes starts.
Group Horizontal
The drill hole spacing in a horizontal direction (width) is defined here. Examples are given at the end
of the command description.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-98
Plate Connections
Left: Here, you enter the distance between the outer left row of holes and the central left row of
holes, if the number of rows is 4.
Middle: Here, you enter the distance between the two inner rows of holes. The rows of holes are
generally arranged centrally, unless they are offset by an entry in the Offset field.
Right: Here, you enter the distance between the outer right row of holes and the central right row
of holes, if the number of rows is 4.
Offset: Here, you enter a simultaneous shifting of all rows of holes with respect to the right plate
edge. If you enter a negative value, shifting will be carried out with respect to the left plate edge.
CONNECT
Bolt Settings
Bolt style: You can select the type of bolts (e.g., DIN 7990) to be used for the connection using
this list.
Dia : Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection.
Workloose: Here, you enter the required clearance of the bolted connection, in most cases 2 mm.
Click this button to process the bolt style or to create a new one.
Weld Settings
Weld Style: Specify the kind of weld seam.
Weld...: You can specify which weld seams have to be created in the model using the options
Weld Flange Side or Weld Web Side. The Thickness of the different weld seams is specified in the
corresponding input fields.
Click this button to process the weld style or to create a new one.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-99
Plate Connections
STIFFENING PLATES
As Poly-Plate: All kinds of stiffening plates described here which normally are carried out as flats
can be transformed into a poly-plate using this option.
Backer Plates: You can specify additional backer plates automatically or according to certain
dimensions. Thickness, width and length can be specified separately.
Top Plate: A cover plate can be created According to Girder in an automate way. The cover plate
can be adjusted even further via thickness, edge distance and offset.
Web Plates
Web Plates: Additional web plates can be generated as well. Indicate the position of the web plate
by means of the option web plate left and web plate right.
Dimensions: The size is specified by thickness, width and length.
Drill Holes: No/Dia. indicates the number and the diameter of the drill holes. The Hole Distance
and the horizontal and vertical offset of the web plate to the plate center can be specified as well.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-100
Plate Connections
STIFFENERS
Stiffener: On the side of the end plate, stiffeners are inserted into the supporting shape at the level
of the flanges.
Inner Stiffeners: Use this option to create additional stiffeners between the already created
stiffeners. In the input fields, you specify the number and the distance to the upper and lower edge
of the plate.
Support Stiffeners: Here, you can insert additional diagonal ribs into the supporting shape. With
the Height entry, you define the distance of the lower insertion point to the inner side of the flange.
The prerequisite for generating this stiffeners is the use of a bottom train having a rib on the side
of the bottom train an a cover plate.
Click this button to select the command for insertion or edition of stiffeners. Here, you can modify the
values and create new templates.
Note Please note that the settings for stiffeners cannot be made independently here. You
only select a template containing the necessary parameters.
The advantage is that you have to define a certain kind of stiffener only once and then
only select it by using its name. However, you mustn’t forget that in case of modifying
this page after having modified this stiffener template the existing stiffeners are
updated as well (i.e. they will obtain the dimensions of the modified template).
Stiffeners at Bottom Train
Supporting Shape: Here, you specify the stiffener in the supporting shape at use of a bottom train.
Connecting Shape: Here you specify the stiffener in the connecting shape at use of a bottom train.
Here, you see an example of an end plate connection with bottom train, cover plate and diagonal
stiffener in the supporting shape:
BOTTOM TRAIN
You can add additional haunches and further stiffeners to each of the previous connections and create
a strengthened connection. Bolted knees, etc. can be generated in a relative fast way.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-101
Plate Connections
Select Haunch: If the entry Top Haunch is checked, the haunch will be created on the upper side
of the shape to be connected. If the entry Bottom Haunch is checked, the haunch will be created on
the lower side of the shape to be connected.
Haunch Length: the length of the bottom train
Cut Width: the width of the bottom train at the intersection side
Top Height: the width of the bottom train at the top side
Flange Width: the width of the bottom train flange
Flange Thickness: the flange thickness of the bottom train
Plate Thickness: the thickness of the web plate of the bottom train
Facet Size: chamfer preset at the supporting side of the web plate
Facet Horizontal: specification of the horizontal part of the chamfer at the connection side
Facet Vertical: specification of the vertical part of the chamfer at the connection side
Cropped Shape: A cropped shape is used as bottom train instead of a haunch of flat steel or plate.
Additional stiffening plates can be inserted for a cropped shape. The dimensions are defined as
follows:
Stiff. Plate...: Indicate the dimensions of the stiffening plate: Width, Length and Thickness.
... as Plate: The stiffening plate is not carried out as a shape but as a plate.
Rectangular Plate: A rectangular plate is inserted as bottom train.
Perpendicular to Support: A rectangular plate is inserted with the edges parallel to the support.
As Poly-Plate: The inserted shapes of the bottom train are transformed into plates.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-102
Plate Connections
Rib Support : In the supporting shape, stiffeners are inserted on the level of the bottom train.
Select the style under Ribs.
Rib Connection: In the connecting shape, stiffeners are inserted on the level of the bottom train.
Select the style under Ribs.
Form Group
Form Group
Create Group: At insertion of the end plate connection, groups are automatically created out of the
inserted parts.
With Bolts: Bolts and weld seams are added to the group as well.
Notches
Safety Copes..: For the end plate connection, you can specify at which position a safety notch has
to be inserted. This is a standard process in Northern America.
You can choose whether you want to attach the notch on the Top left, on the bottom left, on the
top right or on the bottom right.
ASSIGNMENTS
CONNECTIONS RESISTANT TO DEFLECTION / SHEAR FORCES

In the selection list, you can see the connections according to DAST, which is available for the
selected shapes. You can control the basic connection data in this list, and the necessary shape
stiffeners are displayed as well.
Tension, Shear...: Here, you can enter a maximum load for the connection (in KN) for the
corresponding load type. In the list, only the connections suitable for these loads will be displayed.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-103
Plate Connections
Plate List: In this list, the possible connections according to DAST are displayed. Select the
desired connection by clicking it.
The individual list fields display the data on which the connection is based. You might have to
shift the column size to view all data. After the selection, the connection is immediately updated
with these data and the values are transferred to the other dialog tabs for possible adaptation.
No Connection Possible
If - according to the guidelines - no connection is defined for the selected shapes, no dialog folder will
appear after selection of the shapes to define the connection. In this case, you have to define yourself
the dimensions of the connection.
CONNECTIONS RESISTANT TO DEFLECTION
Meaning of the List Entries
Designation: the standard designation of the connection
Width: the width of the plate (parallel to the flange of the connecting shape)
Thickness: the thickness of the plate
Length: the length of the plate (parallel to the web of the connecting shape)
Horizontal: the number of drill holes in direction of the plate width
Vertical: the number of drill holes in direction of the plate length
Diamete: the used bolt diameter
Bolt Standard: the used bolt type
Stiffeners: additional stiffeners are required for this connection
Backer: additional backer plates are required for this connection
Strengthening: Strengthening is required for this connection.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-104
Base Plates According to DSTV
Projection: the projection of the plate beyond the shape to be connected
Af: thickness of the weld seam at the flange
As: thickness of the weld seam at the web
Tension, Shear,..: Maximum loading of the connection
SHEAR FORCE CONNECTIONS

The meaning of the entries in the data fields corresponds to those for connections resistant to deflection
so that you can refer to this chapter for information.
USER-DEFINED CONNECTIONS
Just as the data for plates resistant to deflection and those subject to shear forces is recorded in
databases, you can also create a database containing user-defined plate connections and later load
these stored types using a selection list.
In principle, this serves the same purpose as storing and then loading free plates with the template
function. User-defined plate connections can display a larger amount of data in a more clearly
organized structure because all parameters are visible in the view.
You can also process or export the data with any standard DBASE editor.
Hint Take advantage of this option by creating a database with frequently utilized and maybe
company-specific connections, which are then always available to all program users within
your company.
Since the dialog and process after creation of the database is almost identical – except for the selection
- with those for the plates resistant to deflection, you can refer to this chapter for the meaning of the
settings (see ‘Plates Resistant to Deflection‘). How to create the database is listed in the technical
supplement or just ask AutoPLANT Structural dealer.
BASE PLATES ACCORDING TO DSTV

Attach base plates to supports according to the specifications of the standardized connections used in
the steel construction industry (DAST) using this command (with 2 holes). By indicating an additional
distance, you have also the possibility to create base plates with 4 holes. In addition, you can define
another hole field seizing any kind of drilling in a 2D grid.
INSERT BASE PLATES

After clicking a support and entering marginal specifications (e.g. load to be transmitted, concrete
quality, etc.) a list of suitable base plates is displayed. Select a plate from the list and AutoPLANT
Structural will automatically carry out the complete processing and create the base plate.
Since you have access to all plate dimensions, you can modify the defined values any time. Inclined
support connections are also possible.
Please note that the data concerning the load to be transmitted, refer to the vertical supports and
connections according to DAST!
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-105
LAYOUT
Selected Column: Display which Selected Column is processed at the moment.
Plate Width: Width of the base plate
Plate Height: Height or length of the base plate
Plate Thickness: Thickness of the base plate
Grout Thickness: In this input field, you can enter an additional space between the "Base Plate"
(point of reference) and lower edge base plate. Once you have entered the supporting shape from
the "Base Plate", all length dimensions will be adjusted correctly.
Group Options
In Shape Direction: If this option is activated, the plate is always attached normally beneath the
shape. If the shape is slanted in the space, the plate is slanted as well.
Shorten Column: The column is shortened by the lining value.
Form Group: The shape and the plate are arranged to form a group.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-106
As Polyplate: The base plate is not formed as flat bar but as poly-plate.
DRILL HOLES
Group Inner Drill Holes
Hole Distance: Distance of inner drill holes to the X-axis of the shape.
Hole Distance: Distance of inner drill holes to the Y-axis of the shape.
Hole Diameter: Diameter of inner drill holes
Group Outer Drill Holes
Hole Field Width: Number of drill holes of the outer hole field in the X-axis of the shape and
intermediate distance of the drill holes of the outer hole field in the X-axis of the shape.
Hole Field Height : Number of drill holes of the outer hole field in the Y-axis of the shape and
intermediate distance of the drill holes of the outer hole field in the Y-axis of the shape.
Hole Diameter: Diameter of outer drill holes.

Outer drill holes are only created if both axes have a valid description.
BOLTS
On this page, you make the settings of anchor bolts or welds. Anchor bolts are only displayed as
symbols and cannot be detailed.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-107
Group Bolts
Tie Bolts: Anchor bolts are inserted for the inner drill holes.
Label: The designation of anchor bolts for the parts list; this name can contain two variables,
$(ID) for inner diameter and $(OD) for outer diameter.
Outside: Anchor bolts are inserted for the outer drill hole field as well, if defined.
Group Weld Settings
Weld Style: Style name for the welds if a weld has to be effected.
Flange Side: Welds are inserted at the flange of the shape.
Thickness: If you want to overwrite the style thickness, you can enter the desired thickness for the
flange side here.
Web Side: Welds are inserted at the web side of the shape.
Thickness: If you want to overwrite the style thickness, you can enter the desired thickness for the
web side here.
STANDARD DEFINITIONS
Data base entries are saved for certain DIN shapes. If you have selected a shape having such entries,
these will be displayed in this window.
You can influence the selection by means of different selection criteria. Only data records
corresponding to these criteria will be displayed.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-108
Web Angle
Support Load: Enter the minimum load of supports which is known. The program searches the
entries supporting this load or a higher load.
Hole Dia.: The desired drill hole diameter for anchor bolts.
Concrete Quality: Quality of concrete foundations
Select a displayed data record by double-clicking on it. All data are set accordingly. Please note that
only the plate dimensions and the inner drill holes are set. Other settings are not modified.
ASSIGNMENTS
As it is the case for each dialog creating component parts, here too, it is possible to make all
assignments for each individual shape directly. Select the component part and then select the settings.
WEB ANGLE
Command Name: PS_WEB_ANGLE
This command creates steel web angles in three types of shapes IPE, HEA and HEB. Two web angles
will be fastened opposite of each other on the ends of the shape to be connected when a support shape
is not selected.
The shape to be connected is cut to length after the exact definition is entered. The connection, drilling
and bolting is carried out automatically. You can also select web angle connections according to the
standard DAST guidelines.
CREATE WEB ANGLE CONNECTION

First click the shape to be connected and then the supporting shape to connect the plate. Press the
ENTER key or the right mouse button, if there is no supporting shape.
The web angle command retains the last connection settings. Using this setting creates the connection.
In the appearing dialog, the dimensions may be modified and the results checked in the model.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-109
Web Angle
SHAPES
Shape Class: Here you can specify the angle shape of the selected connection. Only shapes that are
equal-sided angles and unequal-sided angles can be selected.
Use Flat: The web angle will be made from bent plate steel instead of angle steel.
Enter the required dimensions in the Thickness, length of Long Leg, length of Short Leg and Bent
Radius input fields.
The program will determine the actual length of the steel plate.
Position: Here you determine the side of the shape (Left or Right) to be connected to the web
angle. If both have been checked, a web angle is created at each side of the web.
Turn Angles: The long and short side of the web angle are exchanged so that the long side is
situated at the connecting shape.
Gap: Here you indicate the distance to be kept between the end of the connecting shape and the
supporting shape.
Side Offset: Here you indicate the distance between the web of the connected shape and the web
angles (normally 0 or a slight clearance).
Vertical Offset: Here you indicate the distance the web angle is shifted from the axis of the shape
to be connected, upwards or to the right (depending on the position). A negative entry will cause
shifting in the opposite direction. Selecting one of the following options permits you to make
additional specifications referring to the dimension.
From Edge: Means that the vertical offset is measured from the upper edge of the shape up to the
upper edge of the web angle.
Lower Edge: The vertical offset refers to the lower edge of shape and web angle instead of to the
upper edge.
Up to First Bolt : The vertical offset refers to the centre of the first bolt instead of to the edges of
the web angle.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-110
Web Angle
DISTANCES
Number (All Directions)
Shape Direction:The number of drill holes in both sides of the web angle cross-wise to the shape
to be connected (in the original position parallel to the connecting shape).
Connect. Shape: The number of drill holes in the long side of the web angle (in the original
position parallel to the shape to be connected).
Support Shape..:The number of drill holes in the short side of the web angle (in the original
position cross-wise to the connecting shape).
Distances (All Directions)
Inner Distances: These distances refer to the outer edge of the angle shape for each direction.
If you indicate an additional Slot Length in the input fields beside Number, the drill holes are
carried out as slotted holes with the indicated slot length.
If you have checked the field Absolute Inner Distance, the inner distance of the holes in the short
leg means the distance between the holes.
Dist. Between: These distances specify the distance between two holes for each direction.
Connect
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-111
Web Angle
Bolt Settings
Bolt Style: Select the bolt style (e.g. DIN 7990) for the connection in the list
Dia.: Specify the bolt diameter for the connection.
Workloose: Enter the desired clearance for the bolt connection, usually 2 mm.
Diagonal Offset: A shift of the bolt axes between support and connecting bolts.
Gap Spacing: Distance between the web of the supporting shape and the web angle.
Click this button to edit the bolt style or to create a new one.
Weld Settings
Weld Style: Specify the kind of weld seam.
Weld...: You can specify which seams have to be created in the model via Weld Side of
Connecting Shape or Weld Side of Supporting Shape. The Thickness of the different weld seams is
specified in the corresponding input fields.
Click this button to edit the weld style or to create a new one.
COPE
In addition, you can add a cope to the connecting shape. Here, you enter the specifications of the cope.
Cope: Select an already stored cope template or you enter the cope data directly.
Connect. Shape: Here you define how the connecting shape has to be coped. You can select Upper
Side, Lower Side or Both.
Specify the necessary gap distance for the cope in the Gap field.
Click this button to create or modify the cope template.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-112
Web Angle
Safety...: Here you can specify whether a safety cope has to be carried out. In addition, the inserted
angle can be shortened.
STANDARD DATA
In the selection list, you can see the web angle connections available in the database. In this list, you
can verify the basic parameters of the connection data.
H(kN), Hz(kN): You can select a web angle according to the DAST guidelines. Enter the desired
load in the input fields. The possible connection angles will be displayed in the selection list.
List: In this List, the possible connections filed in the database are displayed. Select the desired
connection by clicking an entry.
The basic data of the connection are displayed in the different List Fields.
Shape: Web angle shape
Bolt: Bolt type used
Dia: Bolt diameter used
Material: Material designation of the web angle
Shape Direction: Number of drill holes along the shape to be connected
Transversal Dir.:Number of drill holes cross-wise to the shape to be connected
W1,W2,W3,...: The meaning of the distances can be seen on the illustration of a cut-up web angle
connection.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-113
Shear Plates
FORM GROUP
Create Group: An insert of the web angle connection, the inserted parts are automatically arranged
to form a construction group.
With Bolts..: Bolts and weld seams are added to the construction group as well.
Each Angle: An individual construction group is created for each inserted web angle.
ASSIGNMENTS
SHEAR PLATES
Command Name: PS_SCHEARPLATE
This command creates a plate connection (shear plate connection) made from plate steel and attached
to a support shape. If you do not select a support shape, only one or two web plates are attached to the
end of the shape to be connected.
After you have indicated the specifications the shape to be connected is cut to fit and the connection is
created by the program automatically including all drill holes and bolt connections.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-114
Shear Plates
You also can select connections from an editable database. How to create the database is listed in the
technical supplement or just ask your AutoPLANT Structural dealer.
CREATION OF SHEAR PLATE CONNECTIONS

First you have to click the shape to be connected and then the support shape, each one at the
connection point (or use the enter key or the right mouse button if you don’t have any support shape).
If you select the shear plate command, it is based on your last settings and the connection is created
with these settings first. In the appearing dialog you can adjust the dimensions and verify the result in
the model immediately.
SHAPES
Thickness: Here, you indicate the thickness of the web plate.
Cut Plate: If this field is checked, the plate is cut at the connecting shape in case of bevelled
shapes to be connected.
Normal to...: If this field is checked, the plate is not inserted in shape direction at bevelled
connecting shapes but always perpendicular towards the connecting shape.
Poly-Plates: Poly-plates are inserted instead of flats.
Position: Specify the web side of the shape to be connected (left or right), which is to be used for
attaching the web plate. If Both is checked, a plate is attached to both sides of the web.
From Edge: means that the vertical offset is measured from upper edge shape to upper edge web
plate.
Lower Edge: The vertical offset refers to the lower edge of shape and web plate.
Up to 1st. Bolt: If you have checked the field Up to 1st. Bolt, the vertical offset doesn’t refer to the
edges of the web plate but to the center of the first drill hole.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-115
Shear Plates
Gap: In the input field Gap you enter the distance to be adhered to from the outer edge of the
support shape to the outer edge of the shape to be connected.
Vertical Offset: In the input field Vertical Offset you enter the distance of the offset for the web
plate from the axis of the shape to be connected towards top or to the right (depending on
position). Negative values effect an opposite offset.
DISTANCES
Group Division in Shape Direction
Number: Number of drill holes in shape direction
End Offset…: Distance of the last center of a drill hole to the end of the web plate on the side of
the connecting shape.
Connection…: Distance of the last drill hole to the end of the connecting shape on the side of the
support shape.
Dist. Between” Distance between two drill holes in the direction of the connecting shape.
Group Division in Transversal Direction
Number: Number of drill holes in transversal shape direction
Edge Distance: Distance of the drill holes to the outer edge of the web plate.
Dist. Between: Distances between two drill holes in the transversal direction of the connecting
shape.
CONNECT
Bolt Settings
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-116
Shear Plates
Bolts: Select the bolt style (e.g. DIN 7990) for the connection in the list
Dia : Specify the bolt diameter for the connection.
Workloose: Here, you enter the desired clearance of the bolted connection, mostly 2 mm.
Click this button to process the bolt style or to create a new one.
Weld Settings
Weld Style: Here, you specify the kind of weld seam.
Weld...: Specify which seams to be created in the model using the option Weld Flange Side or
Weld Web Side. The Thickness of the different weld seams is specified in the corresponding input
fields.
Click this button to process the weld style or to create a new one.
COPE
In addition, you can notch the connecting shape. Enter the corresponding specifications in this dialog
box.
Notch: You can either select an already stored notch variant or you enter the data directly.
Cope Connect…: Here, you specify how the connecting shape has to be notched. You can select
Upper Side, Lower Side or Both.
Define the necessary gap distance for the notch in the Gap field.
STANDARD DATA
In the selection list, you can see the shear plate connections available in the database. In this list, you
can verify the basic parameters of the connecting data.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-117
Shear Plates
H(kN), Hz(kN): Here, you can select a shear plate according to the loads. Enter the desired load in
the input fields. Then, the available connection plates will be displayed in the selection list.
List: In this List the possible connections filed in the database are displayed. Select the desired
connection by clicking it.
In the different List fields, you can see the basic data of this connection.
Designation: Connection name
Thickness: Thickness of the web plate
Material: Material descriptions of the web plate
Dia: The utilized bolt diameter
Bolt: The utilized bolt type
Shape Direction: The number of drill holes along the shape to be connected.
Crosswise: The number of drill holes in perpendicular (crosswise) direction of the shape to be
connected.
MaH, MaHz: Max. Load for this connection
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-118
Splice Joints
W1, W2, W3,...: The following picture illustrates the meaning of the distances:
FORM GROUP
Create Group: At insertion of the shear plate connection, the inserted parts are automatically
assigned to a construction group which is created.
With Bolts...: The bolts and weld seams are also added to that group.
Each Plate: An own construction group is created for each inserted shear plate.
ASSIGNMENTS
SPLICE JOINTS
Use this command to create a web and/or flange plate joint between two shapes out of flat steel. Both
of the shapes have to be in alignment along the surfaces to be connected. If you do not select a second
shape, plates are attached to the end of the first shape. After you have indicated the specifications, the
shape to be connected is cut to fit and the program, automatically including all drill holes and bolt
connections, creates the connection.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-119
Splice Joints
You can also select connections from an editable database. How to create the database is listed in the
technical supplement or just ask your AutoPLANT Structural dealer.
HINT: Take advantage of the dialog templates and save frequently required connections as templates.
These templates can then be easily loaded. However, if you are working with a great many
connections, we recommend using a database with user-defined types.
OPTIONS
Gap Distance:Here you indicate the distance between the two shapes to be respected.
Bolts: Specify the desired bolt style for the connection.
Dia: Specify the desired bolt diameter from the list or enter the value directly if this option has
been activated.
Workloose: This field is used to specify the hole clearance of the desired drill holes, which usually
consists of 2 mm.
Upper Side: If this field is checked, a plate connection is attached to the upper side of the shape.
Lower Side: If this field is checked, a plate connection is attached to the lower side of the shape.
Single Side: If this field is checked, the splice joint is attached to the side of the second shape to be
connected in the form of a welded connection.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-120
Splice Joints
Upper Inside: If this field is checked; an additional plate is attached to the inner upper side of the
shape.
Lower Inside: If this field is checked, an additional plate is attached to the inner lower side of the
shape.
Diagonal: Use this option to create a bolted connection at one upper side and a welded connection
at the other. For the lower side, it is just the opposite.
Left: If this field is checked, a plate connection is attached to the left side of the shape.
Right: If this field is checked, a plate connection is attached to the right side of the shape.
Create Group: If this field is checked, the web plate is assigned to a construction group together
with the shape to be connected. If the shape is already part of another component group, the web
plate will be assigned to the same group.
With Bolts: If this field is checked, the bolts of the shape to be connected are also added to that
group.
TOP/BOTTOM
On the second page, you can enter the settings for the upper and lower splice.
Number Shape: Indicates the number of bolts in shape direction
Edges Outside: Indicates the projection of the splices beyond the last bolt
Edges Inside: Indicates the distance from the starting point of the shape to the first bolt
Dist. Between: Indicates the distance from one bolt to the other
Number Cross.: Indicates the number of bolts transversal to the shape direction.
Edge Outside: Indicates the distance of the plate beyond the outmost bolts
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-121
Splice Joints
Inner Distance: Indicates the distance from one bolt to the other.
Dist. Between: If there are more than 2 bolts in transversal direction, this value indicates the
distance from one outer bolt to the other.
Thickness: Select the plate thickness from the list. If you have activated the free selection option,
you can enter this value directly.
Vertical: This value moves the splices in transversal direction to the shape.
Weld: If this setting is activated, no bolts and drill holes will be inserted, but the parts will be
welded with each other. Length settings are still valid.
As: Enter your value here if you want to overwrite the thickness using the desired weld style.
Weld Style: Select the weld style to be used.
Left/Right
On the third page, you can enter the settings for the left and right splice.
Number Shape: Indicates the number of bolts in shape direction at each side
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-122
Purlin Connection
Edges Outside: Indicates the projection of the splices beyond the last bolt
Edges Inside: Indicates the distance from the starting point of the shape to the first bolt
Dist. Between: Indicates the distance from one bolt to the other
Number Cross: Indicates the number of bolts transversal to the shape direction.
Edges Outside: Indicates the distance of the plate beyond the outmost bolts
Inner Distance: Indicates the distance from one bolt to the other.
Dist. Between: If there are more than 2 bolts in transversal direction, this value indicates the
distance from one outer bolt to the other.
Thickness: Select the plate thickness from the list. If you have activated the free selection option,
you can enter this value directly.
Vertical: This value moves the splices in transversal direction to the shape.
Weld: If this setting is activated, no bolts and drill holes will be inserted, but the parts will be
welded with each other. Length settings are still valid.
As: Enter your value here if you want to overwrite the thickness using the desired weld style.
Weld Style: Select the weld style to be used.
DATA
When you have defined a database for the selected shape, another page will be displayed. There, you
can select the desired entry.
ASSIGNMENTS
PURLIN CONNECTION
Command Name: PS_PURLIN_CONN
This function permits the connection of purlin courses to roof girders. Different kinds of connection
are possible. The connection can either be carried out as standard bolted connection, as connection
with a purlin socket made out of a bent flat steel or by means of a splice or a shape.
The assignments can be managed in a data base to allow the selection of the suitable connections for
the different shape sizes (e.g. the correct size of a purlin socket). When the command is selected, the
specified connections available for selection are offered in a list.
As to how to create the data base, please refer to the technical supplement or ask your AutoPLANT
Structural dealer.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-123
Purlin Connection
BOLTED CONNECTION
Number Transv: Here, you enter the number of drill holes in transversal direction of the purlin
shape.
Distance Transv.: Here you can indicate the axis distance at two or more drill holes.
Number Length: Here, you enter the number of drill holes in shape direction of the purlin course.
Distance Length : Here you can indicate the axis distance at two or more drill holes.
Bolts: Select the bolt type (e.g. DIN 7990) for the connection in the list
Workloose: Enter the clearance for the connection.
Offset Here, you can indicate an offset value for the bolted connection in longitudinal direction. If
you enter positive values, the drill holes are moved in shape direction of the purlin course;
negative values move them in the opposite shape direction.
List: Any possible connections filed in the data base are displayed in this list. Select the desired
In the different list fields, the data on which the connection is based are displayed.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-124
Purlin Connection
PURLIN SOCKET
Drill Holes: Here, you specify the dimensions of the purlin socket as well as the drill holes of the
connection.
The meaning of the distances is displayed in the figure below:
Dia : Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection between roof girder and purlin socket.
Dia Side: Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection between purlin socket and purlin
course.
Create Group: The purlin socket and the roof girder are assigned to a construction group. If the
roof girder is already belonging to another construction group, the purlin socket will be assigned
to this other group.
With Bolts: The bolts are assigned to the roof girder belonging to the construction group as well.
Opposite Side: The purlin socket is attached at the opposite side of the purlin course.
Backer Plates: Specify the dimensions of backer plates in the corresponding input fields. These
plates have to be used between roof girder and purlin socket. If you enter the value 0, no backer
plates will be created.
Offset: Here, you can indicate an offset value for the bolted connection in longitudinal direction. If
List: Any possible connections filed in the database are displayed in this list. Select the desired
In the different list fields, the data on which the connection is based are displayed
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-125
Purlin Connection
CONNECTION PLATE
Drill Holes: Here, you determine the dimensions of the plate as well as the drill holes of the
connection.
The meaning of the distances is displayed in the following figure of a purlin connection. If you
enter the value 0 for w2, only one hole will be created in longitudinal direction of the purlin
course.
Length – length of plate in shape direction of the purlin course.

Height – height of plate in vertical shape direction.
Thickness - thickness of the connecting plate.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-126
Purlin Connection
Create Group: The plate and the roof girder are assigned to a construction group. If the roof girder
is already belonging to another construction group, the plate will be assigned to this other group.
With Bolts: The bolts are assigned to the roof girder belonging to the construction group as well.
Opposite Side: The splice is attached on the opposite side of the purlin course.
Weld Seam: The plate is welded to the roof girder. In the Af input field, you can specify the
thickness of the weld seam.
In the different list fields, the data on which the connection is based are displayed
CONNECTION SHAPE
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-127
Gusset Plates
Length: The length of the shape in shape direction of the purlin course
Number: Here, you enter the number of drill holes in shape direction of the purlin course. In the
input field w3 you can indicate the axis distance in the case of two or more drill holes.
Base Drill Holes:Specify the distance of the roof girder holes to the outer edge of the purlin
course.
Lateral Drill: Here, you indicate the distance of the drill holes in the purlin course to the upper
edge of the roof girder.
Dia: Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection between roof girder and shape.
Dia Side: Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection between shape and purlin course.
Perpendicular: The shape is positioned in a perpendicular way in order to insert e.g. a U-shape
vertically.
Turn: The shape is rotated by 90° around the longitudinal axis.
Create Group : The shape and the roof girder are assigned to a construction group. If the roof
girder is already belonging to another construction group, the shape will be assigned to this other
group.
With Bolts : The bolts are assigned to the roof girder belonging to the construction group as well.
Opposite Side: The shape is attached at the opposite side of the purlin course
Backer Plates: Specify the dimensions of backer plates in the corresponding input fields. These
plates have to be used between roof girder and shape. If you enter the value 0, no backer plates
will be created.
Shape Type: Here, you can select the shape to be used for the connection. Special shapes can be
used as well.
In the different list fields, the data on which the connection is based are displayed.
GUSSET PLATES
Command Name: PS_GussetPlate
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-128
Gusset Plates
This command is used to create a gusset plate which combines several shapes with each other. The
form is optimally defined on the base of the shapes to be connected and further limiting edges. The
shapes and the gusset plate are automatically drilled and combined with each other by bolts.
To create a gusset plate, you first have to select the shapes to be connected and then you can select
even further shapes serving as additional limiting edges. These limiting edges influence the form of the
gusset plate. For example you can connect three shapes with a support using a gusset plate and it is
guaranteed that the gusset plate is fit tightly to the web of the support.
Plate Thickness: Specify the thickness of the gusset plate.
Bolt Style: Enter the bolt type.
Dia: Indicate the hole diameter.
Workloose: Indicate the hole clearance.
Offset: Here, you specify the value by which the gusset plate has to extend beyond the shape edges
in transversal shape direction.
Gusset Pos: Here, you specify the position of the plate to be created, related to the connected
shapes.
If you have selected ‘Plate Center’, the gusset plate will be created in the center of the shapes.
If you have selected ‘Plate Upper and/or Plate Lower’, a gusset plate will be created at the upper
edge and/or at the lower edge of the shapes, depending on the selection. It is possible to connect
shapes with two plates as well.
Limiting Shape: If this field has been checked, it is not the edge of a limiting shape situated next
to the gusset plate, which is used as borderline, but the opposite line.
Iit is possible to design a gusset plate in a way that it overlaps e.g. the complete flange of a
limiting shape.
Weld Bracing: If this field has been checked, the shapes and the plate are not drilled. It is possible
to combine them with each other using a weld.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-129
Gusset Plates
Form Group: If this field has been checked, a group will be formed on the base of the gusset plate
and the connected shapes.
With Bolts: If the 'With Bolts' field has been checked as well, the bolts of the shape to be
connected are also added to that group.
Click on this button to add further shapes to the gusset plate connection. Now, the form of the gusset
plate is calculated anew and the new shapes are also connected with the plate.
Click on this button to remove a shape from a gusset plate connection.
Click on this button to add further shapes as limiting edges for gusset plate calculation. You can e.g.
extend a gusset plate up to a support.
Click on this button to remove an additional limiting edge.
DRILL HOLE DISTANCES
Number Shape: Number of drill holes in shape direction.
1 Edge 1 Hole: Distance of the shape edge to the first hole.
Hole – Hole: Distance of one drill hole to the other in shape direction.
n Hole – Edge: Distance of the last drill hole to the edge of the plate.
Number Transv. Dir.: Number of drill holes in transversal shape direction.
Transversal Distance: Distance of drill holes in transversal shape direction.
Drill Hole Pos.: Insertion axis of drill holes.
Please note that you can indicate all distances either as absolute values or as many times the amount of
bolt diameter. Enter e.g. *2 for the double value to obtain many times the amount of bolt diameter.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-130
Bracings
ASSIGNMENTS
As it is the case with each dialog of the component parts, here too it is possible to carry out all
BRACINGS
Command Name: PS_Bracing
This command supports you when bracings have to be created. You can add bracing rods, drill and
design the appertaining gusset plates, or have them designed automatically.
The program always enters bracings in the active UCS plane, i.e. you should place the UCS with its
origin into the desired bracing plane and align it parallel.
Since the rods are aligned in accordance with the system lines, they should have been created
previously. In case of a cross-stay with uniformly staggered rods, the middle of the system will be
sufficient. The rods can be arranged alternatively.
In contrast to the dynamic bracing, this bracing here doesn’t react to modifications. However, it can be
created individually piece-by-piece.
SETTING
SHAPE DEFINITION
Shape Type: Here you select the type of shapes to be used.
Resolution: Here, you specify the resolution.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-131
Bracings
Shape Class: Select the desired shape class from the selected types.
Shape Size: Select the desired shape size of the selected shape class.
UCS-Position: Select the alignment of the gusset plates and thus of the bracing shapes with regard
to the current UCS-system.
Rod Position: Determine the position of the bracing rods with respect to the gusset plate. Front
means on the positive Z-axis, Back means on the negative Z-axis, Both means on both sides and
Centered means that a rod is positioned in the middle of the axis.
Rod Insertion: Here you specify the position of the rod with respect to the insertion line (system
line). You can insert the rod in the middle, on the gravity line or on the root line.
Rotation: You can insert the rod in its normal position or rotated by +90 degrees or -90 degrees.
You can check the selected mode in the shape window of dialog field.
Mirror: You can insert the rod in its normal position or in a mirrored way. You can check the
selected mode in the shape window of dialog field.
Plate Thickness: The thickness of the gusset plates
BOLTS
Bolt Style: The bolt style to be used
Dia: The diameter from the bolt diameter table
Workloose: The clearance between bolt and hole diameter
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-132
Bracings
Number Shape: The number of bolts in shape direction
Number Cross: The number of bolts transversally to the shape direction
Drill Hole Pos.: Here, you specify the position of drill holes in the rod.
Distance Cross: The distance from one bolt to the other in transversal direction.
Weld Bracing: If this field is checked, the shapes and gusset plates are not drilled. The dimensions
of the gusset plates, however, are determined as if drill holes existed.
Plate Without..: If this field is checked, the corners of the gusset plates are not bevelled but a
rectangular plate is created.
Create Group: A group is formed for each rod.
With Bolts: The bolts are also allocated to the group.
EDGE DISTANCE
The third page serves for managing the edge distances depending on the bolt diameter which have to
be respected when the bracing shapes are installed.
List:: You can directly click on the corresponding entries and the processing mode will be
switched on. Then you can directly enter the value.
Edge- 1st Hole: Distance of the outermost hole axis in the bracing rod to the rod front edge.
Hole – Hole: Spacing of the hole axes in longitudinal direction
Hole – Edge: Spacing of the outermost hole axis in the gusset
Limit Edges: Specify the desired distance of the bracing rods to the limit edges.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-133
Bracings
Bracing Rod: Specify by which value the bracing rod has to be shortened after its insertion. Thus,
the rod will be kept in tension.
CREATION OF BRACING PARTS

To a large extent, you can make the program automatically create the components of a bracing.
However, it is possible as well to generate single components such as gusset plates, etc. individually.
For this purpose, several individual functions are available which will be described in the following.
BRACING
Click this button to generate bracing rods and gusset plates in one operation.
However, this function is not suitable for the connection of several rods from different systems. In this
case, you should use the individual functions instead. After the action has been finished, you return to
the dialog.
SINGLE ROD
Click this button to insert single bracing rods that are directly drilled.
DRILL ROD
Click this button to drill existing shapes on their ends, according to the definitions in the dialog field.
You must select the shapes for this purpose. You will return to the dialog field afterwards.
PLATE AUTO
Click this button to create a gusset plate automatically.
Select the drilled bracing rods that have to be connected and then click boundary lines for the plate
edges. The program will try to find a suitable plate dimension by keeping the edge distances and the
boundary lines.
PICK PLATE
Click this button to determine yourself the shape of the gusset plate.
Select the drilled bracing rods that have to be connected and pick a point on the planned bracing end.
Click the approximate position of the gusset plate. The edge distances will be displayed.
UCS
If you have not yet aligned the UCS before using the command, you can do this subsequently: the
active UCS plane (and consequently the plane of the bracing) will be determined by clicking 3 points.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-134
Bracings
You will return to the dialog field afterwards.
CREATING A BRACING
Let’s start out from the fact that you want to design a simple roof bracing. The diagonals are to
intersect (without the gusset plate in the middle).
Select the command for bracing and select the ’Plate Middle’ for the UCS position.
Determine the position of the shape and the settings for bolts, plate thickness, etc. Since the two rods
are to intersect, select the ‘Front’ rod position beforehand. Then click the BRACING button.
The program will prompt you to enter the system line of the bracing rod. Click one of the two system
lines, e.g., the one leading from down below on the left to the top on the right.
You must determine the limit edges of the bracing rod (i.e. the edges from which the outermost rod
edge is to have the distance as defined in ‘Options’).
Click the inner web line of the roof girder - as shown on the left.
Repeat this on the other rod end. If you have clicked the wrong line, you can cancel this by entering the
letter b (Back).
When you have selected both limit edges, confirm this by pressing the ENTER key or by using the
right mouse button. A dialog field will be displayed, which shows exactly the calculated rod length.
You can round the value in the desired rod length field.
The rod is now displayed with drill holes. You must now determine the gusset plates.
GUSSET PLATES
The program will prompt you to enter the boundary line for the gusset plate. You can control the shape
by selecting these lines - some variants are shown on the left side depending on selection.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-135
Haunches
You may need construction lines which have either been created beforehand or which can be ‘shown’
using two points. You can confirm by pressing the ENTER key or by clicking the right mouse button.
The next gusset plate can be created afterwards.
The first bracing rod is complete. The second rod is created in the same manner with the exception that
you select the rod position ‘Rear’ (to avoid intersecting rods).
If you want to create a bracing with a gusset plate in the point of intersection, do not stagger the rods.
Open, shorten, and drill the rods manually at the point of intersection. Create a single gusset plate with
the function for the bracing (button PLATE AUTO or PICK PLATE).
HAUNCHES
Command Name: PS_HAUNCH
AutoPLANT Structural automatically generates haunches by clicking two shapes or by picking points
on a construction line.
For instance, after having inserted a column and roof girder in the model, all construction lines that are
necessary for a normal haunch have been created. In addition to the actual haunch, you can also create
additional stiffeners using this function. These stiffeners then can be directly assigned to the
corresponding groups (see ‘Groups’ command).
This command enables the creation of tapered haunch connections, i.e. adaptation of the upper and
lower haunch chord to the support / connecting shape. Therefore the complete haunch creation is
limited to one single function call.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-136
Haunches
Upper Chord: Enter width and thickness of the haunch top chord.
Lower Chord: Enter width and thickness of the haunch bottom chord.
Web: Enter the thickness of the haunch web plate.
Coped Shape: If this field is checked, and you selected Bottom Train as haunch type, the haunch is
not made from individual plates but from a coped shape. The shape size corresponds to the
connection shape; all other shape size fields are then ignored.
In the neighbouring input field, you can specify the distance from the bottom train at the end of the
cropped shape (analogue to the ‘Haunch Head Width’).
Bottom Stiffener: If this field is checked, a stiffener is attached to the base point of the haunch of
the support shape. You can select a stiffener type in the list displayed here. Just select a stiffener
template, which you previously saved using the command ‘Stiffeners’.
Top Stiffener: If this field is checked, a stiffener is attached to the head point of the haunch of the
connected shape if you selected ‘Bottom Train’ as haunch type. You can select a stiffener type in
the list displayed here. Just select a stiffener template, which you previously saved using the
command ‘Stiffeners’.
Length,..: In the following figure, you can see the meaning of the inputs for haunch length, roof
pitch, bottom width, head width and offset.
A modification in the input field roof pitch has only an effect if a haunch has been created without
supporting shape.
In the input field Cone Width you enter a width to which the haunch tapers if required.
Create Group: If this field is checked, top flange, bottom flange and web plate are arranged to
form a group
Bottom Train: If this field is checked, no top flange is created, e.g. for the construction of frame
corners.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-137
Haunches
Cone: If this field is checked, a tapered haunch is created by fitting the width of the haunch
flanges to the support and connection shape and then tapering them. Use the ‘Cone Width’ field to
specify a cone width if you have a specific value in mind. However, the ‘Fixed Size’ field cannot
be checked as well.
Fixed Size: If this field is checked, the head width and any existing cone width are fitted to the
shape to be connected. Inputs in these fields will be ignored in this case.
Turn: If this field is checked and ‘Bottom Train’ has been selected as haunch type, the haunch on
the topside of the shape is selected.
If the connection appears to be turned, you can rotate it here.
Click this button and the data of an existing connection are transferred to the connection to be created
now. You have to click the existing haunch connection to achieve the transfer.
CREATING HAUNCH CONNECTIONS

When using the haunch connection command, the first prompt is for the shape to be connected. Click
the shape near the end to be connected. If the ALT-key is pressed while clicking the shape to be
connected, the haunch connection is directly created as a bottom train.
Then, you are prompted for the supporting shape (the shape to connect to) that has to be clicked as
well. No supporting shape is considered when pressing RETURN or the right mouse button, and a
simple haunch can be created at the shape to be connected.
When using the haunch command, the last settings are used to create the connection. Adjust the
dimensions in the open dialog and track any changes immediately in the model.
If you keep the ALT-key pressed when clicking the supporting shape, the dimensions of the haunch
flanges and of the web plate are fitted to the dimensions of the supporting shape.
UNRESTRICTED HAUNCH POSITIONING

Another option is to specify a user-defined position for the haunch. Just press the ESC-key after the
command has been selected. The program prompts you now for the intersecting point of the base
boundary line with the upper flange that you have to select by clicking it (consider using the virtual
intersecting point without Z). Finally, click the approximate direction of the haunch.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-138
Connection Editor
The haunch is now created at the specified position and you can dynamically adjust any of the settings
in the dialog. Any shape adjustments have to be carried out manually, of course.
ASSIGNMENTS
CONNECTION EDITOR
Command Name: PS_EDIT_CONNECTIONS
AutoPLANT Structural permits you to edit and exchange all connections of a construction in a
comfortable and clear way. A separate editor dialog is available for this purpose.
If you select the function via the command name or by clicking on the CONNECTIONS button, you
first have to select all parts of the connections of which have to be edited. Then, these parts are
displayed in a uniform marking colour (for better orientation) and all other parts are hidden.
If a connection exists between the selected component parts, this connection is displayed as coloured
symbol. You can select the complete connection for further processing by picking the symbol. You
avoid having to look for the connection via the shape properties.
After the command has been selected, the following dialog opens, the modifications will not be valid
before re-opening of the command for a second time.
Group Display
Length: Here, you specify the length of the 3D-arrow for the connection symbol.
The direction of the arrow shows from the connected part to the component to which it was
connected.
Diameter:Here, you specify the diameter of the 3D-arrow for the connection symbol.
Colour:Here, you specify the marking colour for the surrounding construction as AutoCAD-colour
number.
Since the construction only has to serve for your orientation, you should select a “weak” colour
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-139
Connection Editor
here so that the symbols can be easily recognized. The symbols themselves are displayed in green,
red and yellow.
Group Options
Hide...: The selected object is hidden to increase a clear view. You can hide work frames and
structural elements (the construction lines of structural elements). Bolts are always hidden.
Standard Connections: All standard connections are displayed as symbol. These are the normal
connections such as end plates, etc. which are integrated in AutoPLANT Structural.
Cut Connections: All cut connections are displayed. These are the cuts at objects or mitred cuts.
COM-Connections: All external connections realized via the COM-PlugIn‘s are displayed.
DIALOG-COMMANDS
DELETE
Click on this button to remove the selected connections completely, i.e. all component parts and
processing actions created by means of these connections will be deleted as well. To do so, you have to
select the connections by clicking on the symbols.
EDIT
Click on this button to edit the selected connection. After the desired connection has been clicked via
the symbol, the corresponding dialog of this connection opens and the values can be modified.
CLONE
Click on this button to transfer the settings of a connection to another one.
It is also possible to change the connection type if this is reasonable (e.g. you can replace a plate
connection by a web angle connection).
First, you have to select the connection the data of which have to be transferred to another one. All
connections not being able to seize these data are hidden. Then, you have to select all connections
having to take these data.
VERIFY CONNECTIONS
If the ‘Verify Connections’ option has been checked, all connections are verified with regard to
collisions and marginal distances before being displayed as symbol. The status of this verification is
displayed by means of the colour of the symbol. They have the following meaning:
Green: The connection is correct
Yellow: The hole distances are not observed
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-140
Groups
Red: The connection has collisions
EDIT SINGLE CONNECTION

If there is only one connection in a component part, such as e.g. a connected cantilever, you can easily
edit it via the context menu of the right mouse button. Select the component part and click on the
MODIFY CONNECTION entry in the context menu.
This entry doesn’t exist if the part has no or several connections. A connection is also if there are other
parts connected to the component part in question.
GROUPS
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT GROUPS

Command Name: PS_GROUP
Various single components, bolts and special parts can be combined to form groups - i.e. a support
with welded endplates and stiffeners.
Certain functions apply to the complete group, even if you only select one part of the group. The group
structure is taken into account for the parts lists and when the model is automatically detailed and
transformed into 2D workshop drawings. Many of the settings can be done separately for material
groups and single components.
After the command has been selected, the main window opens where the available functions can be
selected. Click on the corresponding button to apply them. Most of the commands can be directly
selected via a separate menu command.
To permit rapid processing of several groups one after the other, some functions are self-loading (loop
version). If you want to cancel the function, you have to press the ESC-key or the right mouse button.
In the settings, you can specify for which group commands a loop version is required and for which
not.
STRUCTURE
AutoPLANT Structural-material groups consist of a main part and the associated accessory parts. You
can choose any assignment, or it is automatically set for some commands on request.
In practise, these groups mostly correspond to the dispatched parts that are delivered to the site in a
preassembled condition. Such a combination is recommended but not mandatory. You can decide how
to best combine the parts.
CREATION AND PROCESSING OF GROUPS

Parts can be combined to form groups, and you can detach such groups by using the functions
described here.
It is also possible to store material groups as block and to take them over into other drawings – the
structure will remain unchanged. Please note that special functions are needed in this case. The
AutoCAD standard commands for blocks cannot be used.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-141
Groups
CREATE AND DELETE

CREATE: Click on this button to assign individual parts to material groups.
Click on the main part of the material group and then select the parts to be assigned. The
accessory parts to be assigned can also be selected in a field.
The parts that may have been selected twice are ignored. Only steel or special parts can be selected
for a group.
Main Part Data..:The parts list data of the main part are accepted as group data for the parts lists.
Release: Click on this button to dissolve a group. To do so, click any part of the group.
DELETE: Click on this button to delete all parts of the selected group from the drawing. To do so,
click any part of the group.
EDIT: Click on this button to add or edit the parts list data. After the group has been clicked, the
following dialog opens:
You can enter the parts list data of the selected group in the input fields. The position in the field
Posnum has been taken over from the main part provided the “Take Main Part Info” field was
selected. In addition, the outer dimensions and the overall weight of the group will be displayed.
This input field can also be accessed via the context menu ‚Change PS Properties“, when you
select a part that belongs to the group.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-142
Groups
PROCESSING OF STRUCTURE
Subsequent adding of parts to a group or removal from a group is possible as well.
ADD: Click on this button to add new parts to a group.

The complete group will be selected when you click any part of the group. Further accessory
parts can be added by clicking them.
REMOVE: Click on this button to remove existing parts from a group.

The complete group will be selected when you click any part of the group. Then, click the parts to
be removed.
EXPORT AND IMPORT

EXPORT: Click on this button to store a group as external block (like an AutoCAD-‘WBLOCK’)
in a file. It can be inserted into another drawing by using Import Groups. The group structure will
remain unchanged. The procedure is the same as the AutoCAD command “wblock”. When
prompted select objects, click on any part of the group.
IMPORT: Click on this button to insert a stored group into your drawing.
The group structure will remain unchanged, when the field Explode Blocks after Insertion has
been clicked, or if you explode the imported block using the command PS_EXPLODE.
Do not use the standard AutoCAD command for this task!
Dissolve Blocks: The inserted block is automatically exploded after the import of groups. The
structure of the group remains unchanged.
MISCELLANEOUS
SELECTION: Click on this button to choose whether the whole group has to be selected by
selecting only one part of the group, or whether the parts have to be independent of each other. To
do so, click any part of the group. Then, the mode will be switched over correspondingly and the
current status will be displayed in command line.
AutoCAD group mode is modified here in the group. This means that you can e.g. move the whole
group using standard AutoCAD commands by clicking only one part. .
You can switch on or off this behaviour using the AutoCAD-command for groups.
COUNT: All groups existing in the drawing are counted and the number is displayed in the
Number input field.
CHECK GROUPS
Using the commands available here you can check the created groups, make the settings and modify
the group data for the parts list.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-143
Groups
CHECK GROUPS: This function checks whether all the groups have a main part. When a group
without a main part is detected, this group is dissolved.
In addition, when using the command ’Highlight Orphans’ you can make display the parts which
don’t belong to a group. Groups without a main part may occur when the main part was deleted
and the group has not been detached.
ORPHANS: If this field is checked, all valid groups are hidden according to the specifications
when checking a group. Parts that belong to no group are marked in colour.
Coloured markings are removed once you select the command ‘Regenerate’ or when you assign
the parts to a group.
SEARCH: You can search different groups by highlighting and zooming found groups or by
hiding the other groups.
Enter the position numbers of the groups to be searched in the input field and click the SEARCH
button. Select the parts to be searched (in most cases, you will select all of the parts in one field)
and confirm your selection by pressing the ENTER key or the right mouse button.
Only those groups the position numbers of which you have entered will remain visible or they are
highlighted in colour or zoomed.
Several position numbers can be entered at the same time, provided they are separated by a
decimal point. Complete position areas must be separated by a hyphen. If you search e.g. the
positions No. 5 and 7 resp. 17 through 28, you enter the value 5,7,17-28 in the Search Numbers
field.
When you use the command ‘Regenerate‘, the other groups can be made visible again resp. the
marking in colour is removed.
HIDE: Use this function to hide all parts of a group (depending on the parameters for hiding). To
do so, click any part of the group.
When you use the command ‘Regenerate’ or Display Parts, the parts of the group can be made
visible again.
Main Parts: Only the main part will be hidden, when the hiding function is applied.
Single Parts: All accessory parts will be hidden, when the hiding function is applied.
All Parts: The whole group will be hidden, when the hiding function is applied.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-144
Positioning
DISPLAY: Use this function to display all hidden parts of a group. Alternatively, you can apply
the command ‘Regenerate’.
DISPLAY IN AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL-PROPERTIES

When you process the parts of groups via the AutoPLANT Structural properties and you change to the
tab “Group”, the complete group will be highlighted in colour for your information.
You can choose different colours for main part and accessory parts. Use the global settings of
AutoPLANT Structural to specify what colours to apply.
SETTINGS
This page specifies the behaviour of the commands for group function. You can control the behaviour
of each single command.
Part Selection: Here, you can specify the behaviour of part selection at the different functions.
Multiple – Each part has to be selected separately.
All – You select the whole group.
Loop Version...: For the marked functions the command is repeated in a loop without having to
display the dialog again after each run.
Operation of the different functions is facilitated in case of several parts.
End Dialog: The dialog is automatically closed after the selected function s finished.
POSITIONING
Positioning of the existing parts is one of the last steps before final detailing of the 3D model for
workshop drawings.
AutoPLANT Structural can do this automatically for you. It searches parts of the same type and
defines their number in the model. Of course, you can also assign position numbers manually.
In the first step before detailing, only the number of pieces (quantity) and their position numbers must
be defined. This data record is the basis for the parts lists, which can then be generated and printed at
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-145
Positioning
once. Later, when preparing the 2D parts, the position flags with the user-defined layout are attached to
single parts and groups.
In this version, the position flags as well as the height indicators and weld marks are related to the
style. This means that the pre-setting how the position flag looks like can be set with a style. This style
specifies the geometry and the display properties of the flag.
AUTOMATIC POSITIONING
Automatic positioning is an important means for the creation of parts list. Separate position numbers or
shipping numbers according to your specifications are automatically added to component parts and
groups via this function.
You can even integrate additionally bought or own software (a so-called “PlugIn”) into the positioning
of AutoPLANT Structural.
PlugIn: You can select a PlugIn to carry out positioning in AutoPLANT Structural. This PlugIn
carries out the positioning exactly according to the guidelines of your company if you don’t find
an appropriate setting in AutoPLANT Structural.
Activate it using the button ‘Use external PlugIn’ and the automatic positioning then will be
exclusively carried out by this external program and not by AutoPLANT Structural.
Type: Here, you enter the type of the position number.

Numerical – The position numbers are composed of numbers only.
Alphanumerical - The position numbers are composed of letters only. The order then is
A,B,...,Z,AA,AB,... etc.
Mixed - The position numbers are composed of a numerical and an alphanumerical part. The
numerical part is following the alphanumerical part, the order is A1,A2,...,A9,B1,B2 etc.
The number of numerical positions can be preset under ‘Limits‘.
Filter: If you want to position only certain component parts, you can apply a filter defining which
elements of your construction have to be equipped with a position number or with a shipping
number.
Last Single: Here, you see the single part position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the
value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.
Last Group: Here, you see the group position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value
0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-146
Positioning
Next: Enter the single part position number that has to be added to the first part to be positioned
anew.
Increment: Enter the automatic increase in numbers (normally the increment is 1).
Send Number: The automatic positioning either adds position numbers or shipping numbers. Use
this button to select whether the function has to add position numbers or shipping numbers.
Use PlugIn: If you have selected an external PlugIn for positioning, you can add it using this
button. The internal positioning of AutoPLANT Structural is deactivated in this case.
Click this button to reset the settings of all fields to standard values.
Click this button to add the position number for the individual component parts. For this purpose, you
have to select the parts to be positioned. The program checks whether they are of the same type and
adds a position number according to your specifications.
Click this button to make further specifications for seizing the shapes etc.
POSITIONING RESULTS
When positioning is finished, a dialog opens where the position number and further parts list
information is displayed for each part.
Now, you can still edit the proposed position numbers by double-clicking the position number of the
component part. Modifications are immediately adopted into the parts.
When single part positioning including the modifications is finished, the position numbers of the
groups are processed. Double-clicking the position number in the column New Number can also
modify the positions displayed.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-147
Positioning
SPECIFICATIONS FOR POSITIONING
The pre-settings define how the automatic positioning of component parts has to be carried out.
You determine which parts are equipped with a position number at all and according to which
guidelines the positioning is carried out. If the proposed position numbers don’t meet your
requirements, you will find a solution here in most cases.
Filter and Sorting
Filter: These kinds of parts are taken into consideration during automatic positioning. Check all
kinds of parts (standard shapes, special shapes, poly-plates, bolts, miscellaneous and concrete) that
have to be equipped with a position number in one process.
If you have added parts list data to any graphical elements, these are seized vie ‘Miscellaneous’.
1st Sorting List: Here, you determine the order of positioning.

The selected parts are sorted in the indicated order according to the type of component part
(shapes, plates, etc.).
Put the type of part that has to be positioned first to the top, the next type to the second position
and so on. In the example dialog of positioning, all shapes are seized first, then all special shapes,
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-148
Positioning
and finally the concrete parts.

If there are several parts of the same type, these will be sorted according to the settings for the 2nd
criteria. Change the order of criteria by using the arrow keys.
2nd Sorting List: Here, you specify a subordinate order. Within each part type, sorted according to
the 1st criteria, the parts will be sorted according to the order specified here.
If you have e.g. seized more than one shape - with the settings of the example dialog - these
shapes then are sorted according to the length first; if the length is identical, they are sorted
according to the weight, and so on. Then, the special shapes again are sorted in the same way, etc.
Sort Flats…: Flats (which actually are ‘shapes’ as type of part) are treated like any plates at
positioning. Therefore, they are displayed together with any plates when a parts list is sorted
according to the 1st criterion.
Further Options
Overwrite Exist…: Existing position numbers are overwritten when assigning new ones.
Equal Part Del...: Single parts are checked for equality. If they are identical, they are assigned the
same position number. Parts are considered identical when deviations with respect to dimensions
and drill diameter are within the values given as reference tolerances.
Group Detection: The groups are checked for equality as well. Groups are considered identical
when identical single parts are arranged in the same mounting position.
However, single parts are only compared using their position number because positioning has
already been carried out before.
If parts are identical but have different position numbers, the groups will also be assigned
different position numbers.
Weld Marks: The attached weld marks are taken into consideration as well when the single parts
are checked for equality. Weld cracks are small drill holes with parts that have to be mounted.
First Main Par: First, all main parts of groups are positioned (and sorted according to the sorting
criteria within the groups), followed by the accessory parts (also sorted according to the sorting
criteria).
This can be deemed as an additional, even higher ranking sorting criterion. If this field is checked
and you have entered a position number in the input field Start Accessory Parts at, positioning of
the accessory parts will start at the defined position number. You may for instance start with 1 for
main parts and with 100 for accessory parts.
Groups
Differentiation: When the group is assigned the position of the main part (normal case), it may
happen that two different groups having the same main part are assigned identical position
numbers. In such cases, the program will check in a second run whether or not the groups are
really identical. If not, it will change the group position number.
25 → 25.1 – The changed group positions are identified by the index .1 etc. following their
position number (i.e. 100.1 , 100.2 , ...).
25 → 25A - The changed group positions are identified by the index A etc. following their position
number (i.e. 100A, 100B, ...).
25 → MAX+1 – Positioning of the changed group positions is continued after the highest position
currently assigned.
When the last group was position 50, the changed groups now have the positions from 51 onward.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-149
Positioning
Take Over Mai: The position of the main part is taken over as group position. If necessary, the
group position is changed afterwards during second check.
If this option is not requested, but you rather prefer a separate number area, the numbers will start
at the position entered in Start Groups at.
Prefixes
Here, an explanatory text can be entered before the group positions. It is possible to differentiate
between support beams, girders and other groups, the differentiation always being related to the main
part of the group.
Support Beams: Here, you enter the designation for all vertical shapes. In the attribute field
Position Tolerance, you enter an angle within which the shape is still considered to be vertical.
Girders: Here, you enter the designation for all horizontal shapes. In the attribute field Position
Tolerance, you enter an angle within which the shape is still considered to be horizontal.
Vertical and horizontal are always related to the model, i.e., to the XY-plane of the WCS.
Other Groups: Here, you enter the designation for all other groups.
Family Prefixes: The family classes prefix is set in front if the component part belongs to a family
class and a prefix is planned.
Recognize Equal Parts
There are two different methods to recognize equal parts. The first one is the recognition via geometry
like it is known from previous versions. The second, new method is a real comparison of volume.
Geometry: At recognition via geometry, all outer edges of a component part are determined and
individually compared with each other. In the following, you will find a description of the
tolerances specifying that two parts are recognized as identical.
Tolerances: Here, you specify the tolerances for recognition of identical parts. You can positively
exclude that e.g. rounding errors in the case of bevel cuts or notches lead to different parts.
Minimum Line Length - Lines up to the specified length are not considered for a comparison.
Length Tolerance – Length deviations of two lines up to the specified length are not considered
for a comparison.
Drill Hole Tolerance – Deviations of the drill hole axes up to the specified length are not
considered for a comparison.
Volume: A second method to recognize identical parts is the real comparison of volume.
Recognition of equal parts is carried out based on the volume of the component part.
For this purpose, the necessary tolerances can be set as relative value to the volume to be
compared for groups and single parts (e.g. 0,1 percent for component parts and 0,2 percent for
groups).
MANUAL INSERTION
After a position number has been attached to the component parts, no matter whether it has been
attached automatically or manually, you can display this number and further parts list information at
the part using a position flag.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-150
Positioning
If a position number has not yet been attached to the parts, you can specify new numbers and enter
them into the part.
The dialog tab mostly corresponds to the tab of automatic positioning. Please refer to this section for a
detailed description.
Style: Select the style of the position flag to be inserted if no separate style has been specified for
the corresponding part type (or the command). This is the default-style.
Type: Here, you enter the type of the position number.

Numerical – The position numbers are composed of numbers only.
Alphanumerical - The position numbers are composed of letters only. The order then is
A,B,...,Z,AA,AB,... etc.
Mixed - The position numbers are composed of a numerical and an alphanumerical part. The
numerical part is following the alphanumerical part, the order is A1,A2,...,A9,B1,B2 etc.
The number of numerical positions can be preset under ‘Limits‘.
Last Single: Here, you see the single part position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the
value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.
Last Group: Here, you see the group position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value
0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.
Next: Enter the single part position number that has to be added to the first part to be positioned
anew.
Increment: Enter the automatic increase in numbers (normally the increment is 1).
Click this button to reset the manual positioning to standard values.
Click this button to assign the corresponding position flag styles to the selection commands described
below.
This style describes the depiction of the position flag, i.e. which information is depicted in which way.
Then, the following dialog appears, the assignments of which are self-explanatory.
Scale: Enter the scale for display scaling of the position texts and other things. The scale should
correspond to the scale of the detail.
If a global scale has been defined, it will be automatically taken over here.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-151
Positioning
Paper Area: Here, you specify whether a position flag has to be created in the paper area.
Shipping No: In AutoPLANT Structural, you have the possibility to add a position number and a
shipping number to a component part. If this option is activated, the shipping number will be
displayed in the position flag.
Enter: The number specified here will be taken over as position number or as shipping number
into the parts properties.
ATTACH POSITION FLAG

Different selection commands are available for attaching the flag. The corresponding position flag
style of the pre-settings is assigned to the commands.
SINGLE PART
Select the part to which a position flag has to be attached. Then, the position flag is created with the set
style for single parts.
GROUP
Select the part to which a group position flag has to be attached. Then, the position flag is created with
the set style for groups.
GROUPS-SINGLE PART
Select the part of a group to which a position flag has to be attached. Depending on the part hierarchy,
the position flag is created with the set style for main part or accessory parts.
BOLT
Select the bolt connection to which a position flag has to be attached. Then, the position flag is created
with the set style for bolts.
SHORT POSITION
Select the part to which a position flag has to be attached in form of a short position. Then, the position
flag is created with the set style for short position.
MOUNTING POSITION
Select the part to which a position flag has to be attached in form of a mounting flag. Then, the
position flag is created with the set style for mounting.
FREE
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-152
Positioning
Select the insertion point to which a position flag has to be attached. Specify the position flag
properties such as style, position number, etc. in the following dialog.
Attaching the position flag via FREE permits you to create position flags even without direct reference
to a component part. You can make use of this option e.g. for position flags in 2D drawings the parts of
which have been dissolved or drawn manually.
AUTOMATIC INSERTION (DISTRIBUTION)

This command serves for automatic distribution of position flags in views or in detail drawings. The
properties stored in the component parts are displayed in a position flag according to the set style.
Scale : The scale specifies the size of the position flags to be entered. If e.g. the text height in a
position flag style is indicated with 3,5, the position flag will be created with a text height of 3,5 *
scale.
Shipping No.: The shipping number is selected instead of the position number of the part and
entered into the position number.
Paper Area : The distribution is made in the paper area and the position flags are created there.
Click this button to start the automatic distribution of position flags. Select the parts to which position
flags have to be attached. Then, the program starts distribution.
Click this button to exchange the position of two flags.
Click this button to make further specifications for automatic distribution.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-153
Positioning
OPTIONS FOR DISTRIBUTION

Specify the pre-settings for the automatic distribution of position flags by pressing this button. You can
define the position flag styles and different optimizations.
Filter: Here, you specify to which parts position flags have to be attached. After having selected a
part type, you can choose a position flag style for this part type which has to be used to display the
flag.
Sorting
Iterations: This value indicates how often a new position has to be searched for a position flag.
The higher the value, the better the positioning result will be, but the longer the search for a
suitable position of the position flag.
Insertion Point: The minimum distance between the insertion point and the end of the position
flag’s guideline
Local Centre: Your model is divided into different positioning sections with so-called local
centres. The position flags are arranged in a circle around these centres and inserted. This value
sets the minimum distance between two local centres.
Offset Flags: This value indicates the projection of the flag beyond the edge of the visible
geometry.
Free Hold: This value specifies the minimum distance between two neighbouring position flags.
Delay: During distribution, it is possible to look at the distribution procedure on screen. For this
purpose, you have to switch on the ‘Animation’ option. Here, you specify how much time has to
be (in ms) between the insertion and moving of a position flag.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-154
Positioning
Options
One Part per: Only one position flag is inserted for a part having the same position or shipping
number (depending on the setting).
One Part per: Only one position flag is inserted with the same position or shipping number
(depending on the setting) for each local centre in the drawing.
Place Only Out: The position flags are attached outside of the model geometry.
Break Lines At: The guidelines are interrupted in the case of collisions with dimensions or texts.
Animation: You can follow positioning procedure on screen if this option is activated.
Group Flags: Position flags referring to parts with identical position or shipping number are
arranged to form a common flag.
The insertion points mustn’t exceed the maximum distance to form a group.
Group Distances: The maximum distance up to which identical parts can be arranged to form a
group.
Always Create: A separate guideline to the flag is created for each identical part of a group.
Show Count: If you have arranged position flags to form a group, you can select which number of
parts has to be displayed in the ‘Part Number’ of the flag.
Normally, the sum of the combined parts is inserted. However, you can alternatively enter the
entire number of all parts in the model having this position number.
Flags for Main Parts and Groups
Different kinds of depiction are possible when a flag has to be attached to the main part of a group or
to the corresponding group. Since the settings are more complex, we will display the combinations
here.
A “normal group flag” is attached to the main part, containing the data of the corresponding
construction group.
A group flag is attached to the main part, containing the single part data of the main part.
A single part flag is attached to the main part, containing the single part data and a group flag,
containing the group data is attached to it as well.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-155
Positioning
A single part flag is attached to the main part, containing the single part data, containing the data of the
main part is attached to it as well.
No flag is attached to the main part.
A normal single part flag is attached to the main part.
OTHER AUXILIARY COMMANDS

Here, you will find different commands for processing the position flags and for checking or searching
for the position numbers.
Use this button to search for the highest group or part number in the selected component parts. The
result is displayed in the neighbouring input fields.
Click this button to search for component parts in the model. Enter the position you are looking for in
the field Search Number. Use the options Hide, Check, Zoom Extents to select how the found result
has to be depicted in the model.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-156
Positioning
Use this command to delete position numbers in component parts and groups. For this purpose, select
the parts the position numbers of which have to be deleted.
You can specify in which part the number is deleted using the filters Single Parts and Groups.
This command enters the current position number of the part as original position number. The original
number can only be modified using this command.
Use this command to search in the model and to enter how often each part or group exists in the model.
Use this command to add a second part to a common position flag.
Use this command to remove the arrow to a component part from a position flag.
Use this command to interrupt the guideline of a position flag by specifying two points e.g. to
overwrite a text. Only one interruption per guideline is permitted.
Use this command to remove the interruption from the position flag’s guideline.
Use this command to take over the current part properties into the position flag.
Use this command to look at the position numbers of the selected parts and to modify them.
Use this command to compare two parts with each other. Select the two parts and the result is
displayed in a dialog box.
Here, you see two results for comparing the position. In the left figure the parts are identical. In the
right one they are not identical. In the dialog window, you can see in detail where the parts differ from
each other.
DEPICTION OF POSITION FLAGS

You determine the depiction of a position flag by specifying a position flag style where the geometry,
the content and the colours of the position flag are defined.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-157
Positioning
Style: Use this box to select the style you want to use for the depiction.
Click this button to save the current settings.
Click this button to load templates via the templates management and to use them again.
Create Geo: The depiction of position flags is specified in this dialog by preset parameters.
Block Geometry: The depiction of position flags is specified by an AutoCAD-block. You can
select any block you like.
Block Path: In this field, you define from which path the blocks for selection of position flag
geometry have to be read.
Bitmap: You can set a separate bitmap for a style to facilitate the recognition. This bitmap then is
displayed in the selection box as well.
Click this button to set the defaults of the depiction.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-158
Positioning
SETTINGS FOR DEPICTION
Geometry
Line Type: Here, you define the kind of guideline to be used.

None – No guideline will be displayed.
Line – Only one line will be displayed.
Arrow – A line with an arrow will be displayed.
Point - A line with a point will be displayed.
Bubbleform: Here, you define the kind of position number.

None – Only the number is displayed.
Round – The number is displayed in an oval.
Rectangular Bubble – the number is displayed in a field.
Hexagonal Bubble – The number is displayed in a hexagon.
On Line - The number is displayed on the construction line.
Text Type: Here, you set the type of shape designation in case of length indication.
U100..160 - The designation is as follows IPE270..7890.
U 100 160 – The designation is as follows
IPE270–7890.
U100x160 - The designation is as follows IPE270x7890.
Format Template – The designation is as indicated in the ‘Format Template’ input field.
Alignment: Here, you determine the direction of the construction line with respect to the position
text.
Shape – The alignment is parallel to the shape.
Line – You are prompted to enter a reference line by clicking. The text will be aligned
accordingly.
Horizontal – The alignment is in horizontal direction.
Vertical - The alignment is in vertical direction.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-159
Positioning
Text Style: Specifies the text style for the text of the position flag.
Default Format: Specifies the format for the user-defined shape designation if you have selected
‘Format Template’ as text type. The following parameters are available.
$(N) for part name

$(L) for part length
$(W) for part width
$(T) for part thickness
The result of the format string $(N) $(T)x$(W) would e.g. be plate 5x380
Prefix / Postfix: In the input field Prefix or Postfix you can enter a text which is displayed in front
of or after the position or shipping number of the position flag.
The default can be set independently of each other for both numbers.
Separator: Specifies a text which is written between position number and shipping number, if both
numbers have to be displayed as position number entry in the position flag.
Layout: Here, you determine which part information to be displayed in the position flag.
Total Number – The number of these parts is displayed, e.g. 17 x IPE 270.
Part Name – The designation is displayed (e.g. the shape designation).
Comment – The comments of the parts list information are displayed.
Length/Scale – The length in the selected text type is displayed.
Position Number – The position number is displayed.
Shipping Number – The shipping number is displayed.
Material – The material designation is displayed.
Item Number – Any existing item number is displayed.
Orig. Posnumber – The fixed (former) position number is displayed.
Options
No Line: No line is drawn beneath the text of the position flag.
Dynamic: The depiction of the position flag is dynamically adapted to the current view.
Length For Group: The entire length of the group is output instead of the part length.
Sizes: Here, you define the text sizes in mm for general lettering (Text Size) and for position
numbers (Pos. Size). For printing, the AutoCAD text sizes are scaled according to selected scale.
Colours: You set the corresponding colour for the flag as AutoCAD colour number using the
fields Line, Number, Bubble und Text. If you enter -1 as value, the pre-setting will be used.
When you click a position flag via the context menu ‘Change PS Properties’, you can subsequently
modify the properties of each single position flag. This tab will not be described here in detail because
the possibilities for setting correspond to the parameters explained above.
MANAGEMENT OF STYLES
In this part of the dialog, you maintain your position flag styles. You can create new styles, load ,
update or delete styles.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-160
Drawing Information
Use the displayed button to create a new position flag style.

The style will be stored as *.sty-file together with the pre-settings in the directory for position flag
styles. Now you can work with this style on all other pages of this dialog.
If you want to work with a special style which is not stored in the drawing but on the hard drive, you
can load this style using this button.
Select the corresponding *.sty file in the directory of position flag styles and load the file. The style
will be available at once.
Use this command to remove a style that you don’t need any more in the drawing.
Click this button to change the display order.

The display order of the style list is not sorted. You can specify the order yourself. For this purpose,
use the two arrow keys to move the checked style up or down in the order.
If you want to update the styles loaded in your drawing, use this function. Now, all styles in the
drawing are replaced by the styles stored on the hard drive.
DRAWING INFORMATION
Command Name: PS_DWG_INFO
When using this command, you can add drawing information to your drawing. This information will
be directly taken over into the parts list. By this way it is also possible to fill in the title block of 2D
drawing when having entered a drawing border by means of ‘Drawing Border’ command.
Always enter the order drawing number and the modification index, if present, since this information is
evaluated during the 2D detailing process. You can later query the Detail Center to find out, which
drawing contains the parts and will receive the file path as well as the probably more useful drawing
number.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-161
Create Parts Lists
All Text Fields: In the different text fields you enter general information on the project and on the
drawing. Since these fields are self-explanatory, they are not explained in detail.
Project Name: Here, you select a block using the SELECT button for entering data in its block
attributes via the entry fields, provided you have assigned such entry fields to the variables of the
block attributes.
When the drawing border for the 2D workshop drawing has been entered as block using the
AutoPLANT Structural command ‘Drawing Borders’, you can select the block of the drawing
borders. The entries may either be taken over into the title block (export), or the entries can be
taken from the title block into the dialog (import).
Click on this button to retrieve the data of the entry fields into the block attributes of the selected
block.
Click on this button to retrieve the block attributes of the selected block into the entry fields.
Click on this button to define the variables assigned to the block attributes of the different entry fields.
An identical dialog box will be displayed, where the variable names of the block attributes are entered.
When you have selected the Prepared On, Checked On, or Released On fields and click this button, the
current date will be entered.
CREATE PARTS LISTS

After having positioned a model or a detailed workshop drawing, a parts list can be created based on
the part data.
The creation of parts lists by AutoPLANT Structural is divided into two sections, i.e., the actual
creation of the list of materials on the basis of the parts, and the processing of the list of materials for a
printout.
By separating these two functions, the data of the parts lists is also available to other programs.
For ‘Creating the Parts Lists’ a file is written in the dBASE format as a *.dbf file. This database format
is compatible with many other applications. You can import, further process and read out the file (in
this case, this would finish the work on the parts lists by using AutoPLANT Structural).
As a matter of fact, AutoPLANT Structural also provides the most important functions for
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-162
Create Parts Lists
processing and reading out of the data according to your requirements with the ‚Processing Parts List’
command.
In fact, you need no further programs but you have the possibility of using them. This is the reason for
separating the two functions.
CREATE PARTS LISTS

Command name: PS_PARTLIST
When creating a parts list, you first select the parts to be processed, preferably parts of a group or, in
addition, independent single parts.
You can decide whether or not parts of your selection are to be included in the list - either collectively
via the filter function during creation of the parts lists or individually for each part. If the ‘Select’
button has not been clicked in the corresponding parts properties, the part will not be included in the
parts lists, even though you have selected it.
Since further processing and printing of the parts list is carried out with an extra function, you can
register all required parts lists first and store them under different names.
Part Selection:Here, you select the parts on the basis of which a parts list is to be created.
3D-parts – you select the parts from the model. 2D-position flags – the parts list will be deducted
from the position flags of a detailed workshop drawing. From modified 2D drawings you can
generate new bills of materials.
Options
Verify Position: Only those selected parts will be taken over into the parts lists that have a valid
position number.
Only Group Parts: Only those selected parts will be taken over into the parts lists that are assigned
to a group.
Start Part List: Parts list processing is started immediately after creation of the parts list file.
You needn’t use this function separately if you want to continue your work directly.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-163
Create Parts Lists
Calc. NC-Cut..: The angle of intersection is calculated by AutoPLANT Structural according to the
NC-guidelines of the DSTV.
Straight End: The parts are rotated that the straight end is situated at the front.
With Welds: Information about welds is written into the parts list file.
Combine Welds: Identical welds are summed up to one single entry.
Group Bolts
Bolts without: Bolts will be included in the parts lists, even if they have no position number.
... Extra: The additional parts for the bolts are separately specified in the list of materials.
Output File: The file for the list of materials is stored in the file displayed in the Name field in
‘dBASE-format’.
By clicking the FILE button you can set the directory in the same manner as you use to do under
Windows.
DIALOG-COMMANDS
WITH BOLTS
By clicking this button, you start part selection. The selected bolts will be considered as well.
WITHOUT BOLTS
By clicking this button, you start part selection. Bolts will not be considered, even though they have
been selected.
MOunTing LIST
By clicking this button, you start part selection. Only the main parts of groups including bolts will be
considered.
IMPORTING THE PARTS

If you select the command for the first time, a display field with drawing information will be
displayed. You should complete it already, since in this case the information on drawing numbers will
be known for all entries in the parts list (see → ’Drawing Information’).
After having set the filters and selected the function concerned, the program will check whether or not
the specified file for the parts lists already exists. If the file already exists, you are given a warning, and
you can decide whether to overwrite or to cancel the function.
Then you select the parts to be imported. You can select all parts, since only the defined type of parts
will be imported. You also have the possibility of manually excluding parts. For checking purposes, all
parts imported into the parts lists are hidden. Using the command ’Regenerate’, you can recall them
again.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-164
Create Parts Lists
Hint If a part is not imported and should have been, use the context menu “Change PS Properties“
to check if the “Takeover“ button was not clicked.
PROCESS PARTS LIST

Command name: PS_CREATE_PARTLIST
After you have created one or several parts lists using the command Æ ‘Create Parts List‘ you can
further process the bills by using this command. The files of the parts list can be loaded, modified,
formatted, and printed using this command.
Here, we would like to point out a special feature: a utility program called “List & Label” developed
by Messrs. combit GmbH performs the actual print output and list formatting. This form generator
makes it possible to freely design the formatting and layout of any parts list, add company logos, and
preview the parts lists. You do not need any special knowledge about this utility since its normal
operation is smoothly integrated into AutoPLANT Structural's program environment. However, if you
would like to customize the enclosed parts list forms to your individual needs, please read the online
help of the “List & Label Designer”, which will explain the customization of existing and creation of
new forms in easy to understand steps. Of course, you can also obtain a printed documentation from
your dealer.
The following sections will describe how to generate and output a parts list first before discussing the
individual options of the parts list processing method.
PARTS LIST OUTPUT

In the FILE menu click the menu option OPEN FILE and select the *.dbf-file you want to process. The
directory and the file name should be known to you (have been previously defined with the command
Æ ‘Create Parts List‘).
The dialog box now fills with the parts list data. Each part (even construction group descriptions) is
listed individually and unsorted; equal positions are not combined until the time of output.
If there is an error in the parts list file (such as for example components with the number=0 or different
parts with the same position number) the program creates and opens a file named stkerr.dbf
where these errors are displayed. These parts won't be listed in the standard parts list.
In the SETTINGS menu, click the menu option SET PARTS LIST HEADER and then enter the data
for the parts list header. If you have defined order data previously (command Æ ‘Drawing
Information‘), these data can be imported into the parts list header.
Finally, click the OUTPUT menu and select the parts list variation (e.g. parts list of individual parts),
which you would like to print. Depending on the settings, the program now prompts you for the layout
for the parts list formatting and can then generate a print preview. All or specific pages are printed
from within this preview.
PREVIEW
Here, you can see an overview about the most important functions required for printout and navigation
within the preview. As the actual printout is completely taken over by the additional application “List
& Label”, please refer to the online help of this program for more detailed information.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-165
Create Parts Lists
Page selection
Zoom
Print page
Print All
Exit
Other Output Targets
You can, however; also directly print the parts list without preview or you can convert it into other
formats like e.g. the Rich-Text Format. To determine the output target, select in the output dialog of
“List & Label” under Output on ... the desired target in the selection list and click on START
afterwards to output the parts list.
PARTS LIST PROCESSING MAIN WINDOW

If you select this command, the main window for the parts list processing will open – first without any
entries. This dialog has its own program menu offering you most of the utilized commands for this
command.
If you have selected one or several files for processing via the menu Æ ‘File‘, the window will show
the following information. The left column displays the currently open files. Clicking a file name
makes this file your current working file and all components of that file – mostly unsorted – are listed
in the right list of the dialog.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-166
Create Parts Lists
The component parts list offers only a draft display of the entries. By double-clicking an entry, another
dialog opens listing all parts lists data for this entry. You can modify any data at this point, which are
saved in the corresponding file immediately once you exit the window with the OK button. This
means you are not working with just a working temporary buffer copy but with the actual file!
FUNCTION SELECTION MENU OPTION FILE

OPEN FILE: By clicking this button, you can open one or several files of a parts list for
processing. The open files are displayed in the list on the left of the main dialog. When being
clicked, the selected list becomes the current working file.
DELETE FILE: By clicking this button, you can delete a stored file.
CLOSE FILE: By clicking this button, the current working file is closed and removed from the
list.
SORT FILE: By clicking this button, you can sort the current working file according to two layers
of a parts list in an ascending or descending order.
For this purpose, a further dialog box will be displayed, where you can select a primary and a
secondary layer. The data will first be sorted according to the contents of the primary layer and
then, in case of equal contents, according to the contents of the secondary layer.
Data content is modified according to the sorting.
CANCEL: By clicking this button, the parts list processing is terminated.
FUNCTION SELECTION MENU OPTION DATA RECORDS

ADD: By clicking this button, you can manually add a new data record to the end of the file. An
empty dialog box will be displayed; where the parts list data can be entered.
DELETE: By clicking this button, the data record currently selected in the part list on the right
will be deleted from the file.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-167
Create Parts Lists
ADD FROM FILE: By clicking this button, you can add the data of a second parts list file to the
current working file. You have to select an additional file.
Please note that the content of the current file is permanently changed when using this
option!
FUNCTION SELECTION MENU OPTION SETTINGS

LIST DEFIN: Click this option to edit an existing print layout or create a new one.
The print layout specifies which parts list data to print in what format. You can freely design your
layout and also add text and logos. The following dialog box opens where you can edit the
template:
Now you will see a list with the existing form layouts in the form of templates as well as a
description and preview of the form. If you would like to edit a form just double-click the file
name and the utility program „List & Label“ (see intro to this chapter) opens. A detailed
description of the functionality would extend beyond the scope of this manual. Please see the
online help of this utility program for further details.
If you would like to create a new form, enter a new file name, which will return an empt form
ready for editing.
LIST HEADER: By clicking this option, you can edit the header of your parts list. The program
will give you first the opportunity to import data from the drawing information (see command Æ
‘Drawing Information‘) into the parts list header.
FILTER: Click this entry to set the filter conditions if you want to output a parts list with filtered
data Only data meeting the filter condition are output in the parts list.
LIST NAMES: By clicking this button, you can preset standard print templates for single part,
group and bolt lists.
A dialog opens where you enter the print template files to be used as standard selection. You can
also select these files by a File Selection Dialog. In addition, you can switch off error check here.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-168
Create Parts Lists
If the field Switch off Posnum Equal Part Detection has been checked, their position number only
recognizes identical parts. If this field has not been checked (recommended), the parts are
additionally compared with regard to name, length, etc. If these values don't match for component
parts having the same position number, an error message is created.
FUNCTION SELECTION MENU OPTION OUTPUT

GROUP LIST: Click this entry to output a construction group list.
If you have imported parts using the ‚Assembly List‘, you should select this output format. If
you used the command Æ ‘Create Parts List‘ to import parts that do not belong to a group,
these parts are added to the list.
After selecting the command, you have the option to change the current Windows system or
default printer. The data is now formatted according to the selected standard template (see -
>‘Preselection Parts List Names) and, if desired, presented in a preview before. You can now
print the list.
Please note that the selected form also fits a construction group list. Of course, it is possible to
print a group list with a list form for individual parts but this output might not meet your
expectations.
Also remember that only those parts can be printed, which have been defined/imported
previously (command Æ ’Create Parts List’.
SINGLE PART: Click this entry to output a list featuring individual parts. The remainder of the
process is the same.
BOLT LIST: Click this entry to output a bolt list. The remainder of the process is the same.
FILTERED LIST: Click this entry to output a list featuring individual parts, with only those parts
that match the current filter conditions. Use the command ‘List Definition/Filter‘ to set these
conditions. The remainder of the process is the same.
FREE ...LIST: By clicking on one of these three entries the corresponding parts list will be output.
The proceeding is identical with the group list. The only difference is that you have to select a
format template here instead of using the set standard template.
The following figure shows you an example of an individual part list displayed as preview in “List &
Label”:
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-169
Drawing Parts List
DRAWING PARTS LIST
PARTS LIST CREATION

Command Name: PS_DWG_PARTLIST
This command permits the creation of a parts list and its output in the drawing. It is suitable for
drawing-dependent parts lists in plans showing e.g. only one single group.
Since this parts list is an "intelligent" object, modifications in the model can be automatically seized
and displayed in the parts list. In addition, various formatting options are available which can be
controlled directly.
After having selected the command, select the desired parts first and then determine the desired
insertion point of the list in the drawing by clicking a point. Then the following dialog appears where
you can make the basic settings.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-170
Drawing Parts List
Style:Here, you select the name of the output style.

This output style specifies the appearance of the output, i.e. which values are displayed in which
lines, the size and position of the columns, etc.
The ‘Standard’ output style is created by the program and therefore is always available. You can
create and manage as many styles as you like. You select a style and thus re-structure the list by
selecting a list entry.
Tolerances: This value indicates in which tolerance ranges the length of component parts is
compared and considered as identical.
Scale: The scale of the output is specified. The size of the complete list output can be increased or
decreased.
Origin: Here, you select whether the data have to be taken from normal 3D component parts or
from 2D position flags.
List Type: Select the type of parts list here.

Single Parts List – An own entry is created for each element. The data don’t have any reference to
each other; the quantity of output parts corresponds to the seized parts. The determined number of
groups is not (!) taken into consideration for selection.
Group List – Output as group list; here the data are output separately according to groups and the
quantity of single parts is output as parts per group.
Dissolved Group List – A "real" single parts list is output taking into consideration the number of
parts depending on the quantity of the corresponding group.
Insertion Point: Here, you specify the position of the parts list related to the previously selected
insertion point.
Current Layer: If this button is activated, the list is generated on the current layer. Otherwise, it is
generated on the layer specified by PS_TEXT in the configuration.
Autom. Update: If this button is checked, AutoPLANT Structural is controlling all activities with
regard to their influence on the parts list. When you delete an element or you modify the size of an
element adopted into the parts list, the list will be calculated anew and updated.
Please note that this option may require some time for calculation. Therefore, you should
thoroughly consider whether you want to make use of this possibility and risk the inconveniences
of speed. You have always the possibility to update the list manually.
Check Position: If this option is activated only parts having a valid position number will be
evaluated.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-171
Drawing Parts List
Only Groups: If this option is activated only parts belonging to a group will be evaluated.
Total Amount: If quantities are used, the total amount will be displayed.
Number*QuantityGroups: The displayed amount results from the number of parts multiplied by
the quantity of these groups in the model.
Bolts: If this option is activated, bolts having no valid position number will be evaluated as well.
Washers: If this option is activated, washers will be evaluated and listed as separate parts.
Nuts: If this option is activated, nuts will be evaluated and listed as separate parts.
Safety Nuts: If this option is activated, safety nuts will be evaluated and listed as separate parts.
Wedge Washers: If this option is activated, wedge washers will be evaluated and listed as separate
parts.
Welds: Welds are displayed in the parts list.
Add: Identical types of welds are added in the parts list to a common length.
Click on this button to add further component parts to the component parts list of the parts list. You
then have to select the parts to be added.
Click on this button to remove component parts from the component parts list of the parts list. You
then have to select the parts to be removed.
Click on this button to calculate anew and update the parts list.
Here, you can force an update of the list if the automatic update option has not been activated.
PROCESSING OF PARTS LIST STYLES

Move to the second tab “Display” to edit a new created or existing parts list style and select the style to
be edited.
EDIT
Click on this button to edit the selected style.
EDIT LIST PROPERTIES

In the display list you can see any kind of information, such as e.g. which columns are output in which
order and with which settings in the parts list. In addition, you can make general settings concerning
the list format.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-172
Drawing Parts List
Style Name: The name of the current style; all modifications are related to this style.
Display List: Here, you see an overview of all displayed columns of the parts list. They are
displayed in this order from the left to the right in the drawing parts list
Click on this button to modify the line selected in the display list (parts list column). Then, another
dialog opens.
Click on this button to add a new line (parts list column) to the end of the list. Then, another dialog
opens.
Click on this button to add a new line (parts list column) in front of the checked line. Then, another
dialog opens.
Click on this button to delete the selected line (parts list column) from the list.
Click on this button to save the parts list style. Please remember to save the style after modifications;
otherwise all modifications will be lost.
Click on this button to modify the formatting of the summated text of the parts list. Then, another
dialog opens.
Text Size: Determines the text size in mm at a scale 1:1
Height Scaling: Increases the height of the lines in question by a factor. Depending on the text
style, the readability of the parts list is increased.
Left Margin: Distance of the signs to the left margin at left-justified insertion.
Right Margin: Distance of the signs to the right margin at right-justified insertion.
Offset: Distance of the group list entries of group parts to the main part.
Rotation: Rotation of the whole list by the indicated degrees
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-173
Drawing Parts List
Block Size: Indicates after how many lines a horizontal line has to be inserted. This only serves
for a clearer overview.
Move Up: If this field is checked, the list is running from the bottom to the top, i.e. the column
headers are below.
Divide Groups: At group lists, the groups are divided by horizontal lines. The settings under
'Block Size' don’t have any influence in this case.
Align Numbers: All numerical values are aligned to the right margin.
Fill up with Noughts: All numerical values are filled up with noughts according to the indicated
format length and digits after the decimal point.
Text Style: Select the desired text style. Please refer to the AutoCAD manual for more detailed
information about AutoCAD text styles.
Sort: Depending on the field selected here, the output is sorted in rising order from the column
header onward.
Invert: Causes a sorting in descending order from the column header onward.
The display colours can be globally selected for all elements of the parts list. In addition, individual
colours can be assigned to the different columns as well.
Enter the colour directly by indicating the AutoCAD colour number or click on the desired input field
and then on the SELECT button. Then, you can select the colour in the dialog as usual.
Header: Colour of column headers
Label: Colour of column texts
Frame: Colour of list frame
Hor. Lines: Colour of the horizontal separation lines of the list
Ver. Lines: Colour of the vertical separation lines of the list
PROCESSING OF COLUMN PROPERTIES

Each column of the parts list styles can be adapted and formatted in many different ways. After an
entry to be modified or created has been selected in the display list of parts list format dialog, the
following dialog opens:
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-174
Drawing Parts List
Field Name: Select the desired field from the data fields.
Name1: This is the name of the column header resp. the first name if an entry has been indicated
in input field ‘Name2’ as well. Two rows are available altogether.
Name2: This is the second name of column header.
Length: Here, you enter the desired column width in text signs. The exact column width depends
on the selected text style.
Dec. Point: Number of desired positions after the decimal point.
Text Size: Enter the text size of the column. If you have entered the value 0, the general text size
of the list style is used.
Enter the colour of the column text (colour number). If you have entered the value -1, the text colour of
the list style is used.
Position: Enter the alignment of the column: Left, Center, Right or Automatic. If 'Automatic' has
been selected, all texts are aligned to the left and all digits are aligned to the right.
Units: Enter the unit format Metric, Imperial or Automatic. If 'Automatic' has been selected, the
default units of the drawing are used.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-175
Drawing Parts List
PROCESS SUM TEXT BLOCK
The overall weight or similar data can be indicated in a sum text block (foot lines), which can be output
below, or above the parts list.
Up to ten lines are available for that purpose where you can insert additional variables, which then will
be replaced by the current values.
Footer: Enter the desired foot lines. You can use pre-defined variables as well. The following
variables are available as foot lines:
$(N): The number of lines is indicated.

$(F): Multiplication factor addition in %
$(L): Overall length of all parts without addition
$(LF): Overall length of all parts with addition
$(W): Overall weight of all parts without addition
$(WF): Overall weight of all parts with addition
$(P): Overall area to be painted of all parts without addition
$(PF): Overall area to be painted of all parts with addition
Addition: Percentage by which the determined values have to be increased. These increased values
can be output by means of the variable $(xF).
Dec. Point: Number of desired positions after the decimal point.
Offset: Distance to the corresponding margin.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-176
Drawing Parts List
Enter the colour of the text (colour number). If you have entered the value -1, the text colour of the list
style is used.
Position: Enter the alignment of the text: Left, Center, Right or Automatic. If 'Automatic' has been
selected, all texts are aligned to the left and all digits are aligned to the right.
Group Row: In the Prefix input field, you can indicate a prefix for the position numbers of group
lines.
In the Colour input field you can specify the colour of the group line. If the value -1 has been
indicated here, the normal text colour will be used.
MANAGEMENT OF PARTS LIST STYLES

The management of the existing parts list styles is organized in the third tab “Order”.
Click on this button to load the selected style from the hard drive into the drawing.
Click on this button to create a new list style. To do this you have to enter a style name (please pay
attention that the name does not exist already).
Then, this style is created with the settings of the style, which is current at the moment, and it will be
used as new current style. The settings of the style can be individually modified afterwards.
Click on this button to create a new folder for a clearer structure of your parts list styles.
Click on this button to delete the selected style.
PROCESSING THE CONTENT OF PARTS LIST

Move to the forth tab “Content” to look at the content of the parts list and to modify it manually. To
modify an entry, double-click the corresponding field and you can easily edit the entry.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-177
Containment List
CONTAINMENT LIST
CREATION OF CONTAINMENT LIST

Command Name: PS_DWG_CONTAINLIST
After having created groups in a drawing, you can make lists and insert them into the drawing. These
lists can display the belonging of certain parts to component part groups. You can insert these drawing
containment lists in the DetailCenter Express as well.
First select the desired parts after having selected this command. Then, specify the desired insertion
point of the list in the drawing by clicking a point. The following dialog appears displaying the basic
settings.
Style: Here, you define how the list has to look like on the base of a style. The list templates are
saved as template via the template management.
Insertion Point: Here, you specify the insertion point of the created list. You can choose between
several insertion points.
Current Layer : The list is placed on the current layer of the drawing instead of on the
configuration layer.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-178
Containment List
Scale: Specifies the insertion scale of the list. The scale affects text heights and distances within
the list.
Click on this button to add further parts to the component parts list of the drawing containment list.
You have to select the parts to be added.
Click on this button to remove parts from the component parts list of the drawing containment list. You
have to select the parts to be removed.
Click on this button, to calculate anew an update the drawing containment list.
Yyou can force an update of the list if automatic update has not been activated.
PROCESSING OF LIST STYLES

Move to the second tab “Display” to edit a new created or existing list style. Select the style to be
edited.
EDIT
Click on this button to edit the selected style.
EDIT LIST PROPERTIES

In the display list you can see any kind of information, such as which lines are output in which order,
with which settings in the drawing containment list. In addition, you can make general settings
concerning the list format.
Style Name: The name of the current style; all modifications are related to this style.
Display List: Here, you see an overview of all displayed columns of the drawing containment list.
They are displayed in this order from the left to the right in the drawing containment list.
Click on this button to modify the line selected in the display list (column of drawing containment list).
Then, another dialog opens.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-179
Containment List
Click on this button to add a new line (column of drawing containment list) to the end of the list. Then,
another dialog opens.
Click on this button to add a new line (column of drawing containment list) in front of the checked
line. Then, another dialog opens.
Click on this button to delete the selected line (column of drawing containment list) from the list.
Click on this button to save the style of the drawing containment list. Please remember to save the style
after modifications; otherwise all modifications will be lost.
Text Size: Determines the text size in mm at a scale 1:1
Height Scaling: Increases the height of the lines in question by a factor. Depending on the text
style, the readability of the drawing containment list is increased.
Left Margin: Distance of the signs to the left margin at left-justified insertion.
Right Margin: Distance of the signs to the right margin at right-justified insertion.
Offset: Distance of the group list entries of group parts to the main part.
Rotation: Rotation of the whole list by the indicated degrees
To the Top: If this field is checked, the list is running from the bottom to the top, i.e. the column
headers are below.
Separating Lines: The groups are divided by horizontal lines.
Header : A column description is displayed for the columns of the list.
Text Style: Select the desired text style. Please refer to the AutoCAD manual for more detailed
information about AutoCAD text styles.
The display colours can be globally selected for all elements of the drawing containment list. In
addition, individual colours can be assigned to the different columns as well.
Enter the colour directly by indicating the AutoCAD colour number or click on the desired input field
and then on the SELECT button. Then, you can select the colour in the dialog as usual.
Header: Colour of column headers
Label: Colour of column texts
Frame: Colour of list frame
Hor. Lines: Colour of the horizontal separation lines of the list
Ver. Lines: Colour of the vertical separation lines of the list
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-180
Containment List
PROCESSING OF COLUMN PROPERTIES

Each column of the list styles can be adapted and formatted in many different ways. After an entry to
be modified or created has been selected in the display list of list format dialog, the following dialog
opens:
Field Name: Select the desired field from the data fields.
Name1: This is the name of the column header resp. the first name if an entry has been indicated
in input field ‘Name2’ as well. Two rows are available altogether.
Name2: This is the second name of column header.
Length: Here, you enter the desired column width in text signs. The exact column width depends
on the selected text style.
Decimal Pt:Number of desired positions after the decimal point.
Text Size: Enter the text size of the column. If you have entered the value 0, the general text size
of the list style is used.
Enter the colour of the column text. If you have entered the value -1, the text colour of the list style is
used.
Position: Enter the alignment of the column: Left, Center, Right or Automatic. If 'Automatic' has
been selected, all texts are aligned to the left and all digits are aligned to the right.
MANAGEMENT OF LIST STYLES

The management of the existing list styles is organized in the third tab “Order”.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-181
Containment List
Click on this button to load the selected style from the hard drive into the drawing.
Click on this button to create a new list style. To do this you have to enter a style name (please pay
attention that the name does not exist already).
Then, this style is created with the settings of the style, which is current at the moment, and it will be
used as new current style. The settings of the style can be individually modified afterwards.
Click on this button to create a new folder for a clearer structure of your list styles.
Click on this button to delete the selected style.
PROCESSING THE CONTENT OF DRAWING CONTAINMENT LIST

Move to the fourth tab “Content” to look at the content of the drawing containment list and to modify
it manually. To modify an entry, double-click the corresponding field and you can easily edit the entry.
Bentley
12/22/2005 2-182
3
3 Detailing
DETAILCENTER 3-2
DETAILING STYLE 3-46
DETAILCENTER EXPRESS 3-85
AUTOMATIC 2D-CUT 3-103
CRANKED 2D-VIEW 3-104
NORTH SYMBOL 3-105
MANUAL DIMENSIONING POINTS 3-109
MANUAL COMPONENT PART LINK 3-110
GLOBAL SCALE 3-110
DRAWING BORDER 3-111
MANUAL CUT 3-113
MANUAL DIMENSIONING 3-115
ELEVATION FLAGS 3-123
WELD SYMBOLS 3-127
SHORT2D 3-133
2D-CUTOUT 3-134
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-1
DetailCenter
DETAILCENTER
THE 2D-DETAILING
Once you have created the model, finished editing of the model, have positioned all of the necessary
components,, and may have issued a (preliminary) parts list, the Finishing or Detailing of the 3D
components can commence.
DETAILING 3D MODELS
The program generates the usual 2D views of the components for the workshop plans using the model,
which means that the program will disassemble the model into its components, analyse the geometry of
all the individual parts, and ascertains any existing but invisible edges. Then – depending on the
requirements or your selections – the shape is displayed in several views and dimensioned and the
position flag is attached.
All of this takes place in a split second and in the background. Once the program has finished with one
component, this component is deposited in a library in the form of a block – clearly organized
according to the individual construction groups and design sections.
After this procedure has concluded you can use the program to help you with the layout of the parts on
your drawing sheets. From here on, you can treat the parts as if they were the usual drawings generated
with a CAD program – but AutoPLANT Structural offers you a few extra functions, which facilitate
your work.
INTERVENTION OPTIONS
You do not have to worry that you are going to be at the mercy of the program and that from now on
all your drawings will reflect the wishes of the software designers.
A vast number of parameters help you to specify the appearance of your mapped design. These
parameters can be saved as data records and re-imported depending on the type of drawing (overview,
life-size, 1: 10 workshop details, etc).
This saves you time by being able to detail several parts at once applying one of these styles – that
might already be enough to satisfy the requirements of your assignment. However, you can also detail
small groups of components – one after the other – or even a single part. You always have access to
the smallest detail.
BASIC DETAILING PRINCIPLE

In general, the program distinguishes between two basic detailing methods: automatic and manual
detailing.
Automatic detailing takes place within the open model, and you tell the program to detail a certain part
using a certain style. You have previously defined or selected this suitable style. The rest is out of your
hands (for now). The result is a block with the views as interpreted by the program according to your
specifications.
Manual detailing requires that you determine the respective model section yourself. You are working
within a work frame and may use the auxiliary functions of the program to attach and assign dimension
chains, position flags, height indicators, etc. You can also use such standard AutoCAD elements as
lines, texts, etc. The program only displays the invisible edges correctly and saves the details as a block
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-2
DetailCenter
– nothing more. This does indeed offer you the greatest level of influence on the appearance of the
details but you have to carry out each step manually.
The following chapters discuss the AutoPLANT Structural detail center and all of the tasks described
shortly in the text.
DETAILING WITH THE DETAIL CENTER
WHAT IS THE DETAIL CENTER

Users control the complete 2D drawing and plan generation from within the Detail Center – from a
first overview of the components to the workshop drawing with multiple changes and manipulations.
Think of the Detail Center as a program within the program because it offers vastly more possibilities
and options than one can see at first glance.
When you open the Detail Center for the first time, a clear dialog box will be displayed with only a
few settings. There is nothing more required after the adaptations to your personal requirements were
made. As you know, you „only“ want to get your shop drawings from the model. However, if need be,
you can at any time penetrate deeply inside the drawing derivation. You can make a great number of
settings, ask for information, check drawings.
The philosophy behind this development is that you can get the same result in various ways, that you
can make a lot of modifications – but you do not have to!
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-3
DetailCenter
GENERAL DIALOG INFO

The Detail Center is accessible via a dockable dialog which can be linked on the left or on the right of
AutoCAD and which you can change in size. Double-clicking on the header line toggles between the
freely moveable and the docked status of the dialog.
Most of the work within the detail center is carried out using the context menus of the right mouse
button or using drag & drop, where you drag an entry onto another entry. You will also work with tree
lists that resemble Windows Explorer trees. Since these functions are similar to standard Windows
functions, they will not be described here.
Most of the dialogs that can be selected from within the Detail Center are non-modal dialogs. These
dialogs are not always closed once a function has been selected but can remain open.
This has the advantage of saving you a few mouse clicks and you can adapt these dialogs to the current
situation, which means you are always informed about the status of the work. You can change settings
and watch the changes immediately on the screen – just as you can do with many of the AutoPLANT
Structural commands. All dialogs of the Detail Center are synchronized with one another as much as
possible.
Since this means that it does not take very long to accumulate a great many open dialogs on the screen,
the Detail Center will here support your work as well. Any non-required dialogs are hidden whenever
necessary. They are exchanged with others if the command association changes. Dependent
subordinate dialogs are closed automatically if you close a parent dialog.
DETAIL CENTER SURFACE

The following page will give you an overview over the work area of the Detail Center. This chapter
includes an introduction and explains some of the basic detailing terms. The individual function areas
are described later in special chapters.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-4
DetailCenter
In general, the Detail Center is divided into three main work levels. Usually, your building part or
component will pass through all three levels until it is visible on the workshop plan in the form of a
detail. However, your work in the different levels is limited to only a few mouse clicks, if all the basic
settings of detailing are adapted to your requirements.
If even these works seem to be too awkward and involved for you, because you do not need the
flexibility of the Detail Center, you can use the Detail Center Express!. This part of the program once
again combines the remaining steps until a workshop plan is created. Detailing is worked through
according to a pre-determined pattern. „Detailing by one single mouse click“ became a reality.
Level 1: Component Overview (Prepare)
Here you will obtain an overview of the parts of the model and their functional associations and
relationships. You can view construction groups, single parts or whole areas of the model – all clearly
structured in tree format. This is the place where you can manage and change detail styles and link
your components with these styles as well as manage the modification mechanism. In addition,
DetailCenter Express! Is started here.
Level 2: Display Views Overview (Detailing)
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-5
DetailCenter
The second work level offers you an overview of the component or model views created by the
program. You can add or remove views, display a preview and fine-tune the detail style.
In this overview you decide what exactly is to be processed as a detail block and start the actual
detailing process.
Level 3: Detail Block Overview (Import)
The third and last level features the detailed parts, which are located on your hard drive in the form of
detail blocks. You receive an overview of the detail blocks of the current model (or other models) and
decide which parts to import or integrate into which drawing.
Placing the parts on a drawing sheet finishes the workshop plan, unless you would like to carry out a
few adjustments manually.
CONSTRUCTION PARTS LIST

Each of the three levels offers access to a window with the settings for the display of construction parts
lists using the function button bar.
Here you can specify which components are displayed in which logical sorting in the tree structure of
the display. You can set any filter you like and store these settings in their own templates for each
work level separately. In addition, a standard display is available for each level, which allows
reasonable working already from the beginning.
WORK TOOLS
Each of the three levels offers access to a window with work tools using the function button bar. These
tools are assigned to the corresponding area. In order to keep the display area of the construction parts
lists as large as possible, many of the infrequently used functions and settings have been delegated to
these subordinate dialogs.
INFORMATION WINDOW
In addition, the context menu offers access to another dockable information window. All three-work
levels are subordinate to this information window, which shows the current status of the selected entry.
Depending on the list, this window displays the name and type of the part, data of detailing, insertion
location, current status, and much more.
CONTEXT MENU
A supplement to every level is a level-specific context menu accessible through the right mouse button,
which lists only those functions that are significant to the respective list. You will probably use the
context menus quite often because they represent the fastest way to access a command.
TEMPLATES
As you already know from the other AutoPLANT Structural functions, the basic settings of the Detail
Center can be saved as template for each level. The settings of work tools and of construction parts list
are stored.
These templates (as reference) may again be stored in a parent template together with the global
settings for the Detail Center. This allows individual configuration of the complete DetailCenter.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-6
DetailCenter
DETAIL STYLES
The detail styles are the cornerstone of the entire detailing process. They describe how a part is to look
as a workshop detail or how the model is to appear as an overview. The content of the styles is
described in detail in the chapter 'Detailing Styles'. The management and modification of a style is
described in detail in the chapter 'Component Overview'.
Just a preliminary note: A component without detail style cannot be processed and is ignored by the
program when it comes to detailing!
PREVIEW
The detailing of a selected part can be previewed from within the views overview or directly from
within the model. This will create a small AutoCAD drawing displaying the exact result of the detail
style settings applied to this part. The small drawing shows how the part will be detailed. This window
and its drawing can be zoomed or queried for information because it is an independent AutoCAD
drawing.
Since you can now open this part's detail style, you can track the effects of different style settings in
„real time“. We call this fine-tuning of the detail style. If you open the preview for another part, you do
not have to close this window first. The content is updated automatically. After viewing the detail, the
window must be closed manually. While the preview is open, most of the functions of the Detail
Center are inaccessible. Please remember: The preview might be hidden behind some other drawing
because so many windows can be open simultaneously. Also consider the speed of your computer
when viewing a great many details such as construction groups or entire overviews. Do not become
impatient if your computer seems to be busy calculating for what seems like a long time. Even fast
computers need a little computation time, but some of the latest computers will surprise you with the
speed of the update.
GENERAL INFORMATION – SCALE AND DIMENSION STYLES

There are two options for detailing a part when working with the Detail Center: Either the part keeps
its original size and the surrounding text (e.g. dimensions, labels, etc.) is scaled to fit the part or the
part is scaled and the text keeps its original size. This is to support both of the methods typical for
AutoCAD.
SCALES
The first method allows for a simple – and unscaled – processing of the drawing and does not generate
the scale until the time of plotting. Components can also be inserted (unlabeled!) into other plans easily
and comfortably. The disadvantage of this method is that this involves some thinking, to keep different
scales and the same text sizes within one drawing and still have to copy parts from other drawings.
This is where the second method is more practical: You always plot using the scale 1:1, always use the
same text size, and scale the parts to fit the plotting scales – just as you would do when drawing by
hand. This allows you easy management of different scales within one drawing.
AutoPLANT Structural permits both methods when detailing, but you have to stick to one or the other
method within one drawing. Because the dimensioning styles are the problem.
DIMENSIONING STYLES
You define certain AutoCAD dimensioning styles in your model, which you can use within the detail
styles for dimensioning. When detailing, the program creates a copy of the style, and from your
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-7
DetailCenter
settings determines the required text and length scaling. This style is assigned a new name indicating
the length scaling and is used in the detail block.
Although the program does set the dimension text into the dimension permanently, e.g. to evaluate
contractions, you do want to receive an AutoCAD associate dimensioning after the detailing has been
concluded; thus the copy. This also keeps your original style intact and you do not need to create
separate styles for each individual scale.
If you want to work with the first method using a scale of 1:10, you will obtain a style with a text
scaling=10 and with a length scaling=1. The name could be, e.g., PS_STD_1_10. Process another
detail with different settings of the AutoCAD dimensioning style and you will obtain the same name
for the style.
No problems occurred up to now. Now insert both details into a drawing and the first one will „win
out“ because the name is identical. However, this is typical for AutoCAD and AutoPLANT Structural
has no intention of changing that.
If you have problems with the dimensioning styles, you can be assured that this is due to not being
consequent in this case.
This is the reason you should make sure that your prototype file, into which you want to import the
details, does not contain any dimensioning styles (if possible), and that the basic styles with the same
name are also identical in different models if you want to mix together the details of different models.
Do not change the size by only changing the scale (e.g., when manually dimensioning), but rather
define a new style with a new name.
This is the way it should be when using AutoCAD „pure“ because there is a good reason for it: If you
rescale the parts manually, you are simply exchanging the dimensioning style and all is well again.
INTELLIGENT 2D-DETAILS
If you have inserted the results of the detailing into a drawing and want to further process this drawing
manually, you have to observe a few things described in the following section.
INTELLIGENT DETAILS
The result of the detailing process is a detail, as you would draw it with standard AutoCAD. You can
see centerlines, visible and hidden edges, holes, etc. and the part is still not a true „flat line graphic“.
Intelligent details are still displayed as three-dimensional details when viewing the page containing
individual parts or construction groups at a slant. However, when you print the part it appears
completely two-dimensional
The advantage is that you can subsequently add cuts or dimensions while taking any possible shape
shortening into account.
If you want to change the geometry subsequently, that is in the detailed part, you have to import the
changes with the AutoPLANT Structural functions if you still require the intelligent features.
However, if you want to dissolve the detail in its entirety, you have to „explode“ the component like a
block. This gives you a group, which can be ungrouped to reach the lines.
Of course, the consequence is that all of the intelligence is lost. Thus, omit this if at all possible.
Overviews and manual details are an exception – those are already non-intelligent line depictions.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-8
DetailCenter
SHAPE SHORTENING
During the detailing you can select whether you want to shorten any parts that are especially long.
Contracted sections are then attached to those sections of a component that do not show any
manipulations in a longer stretch and are actually of no interest. This gives you the opportunity to
display the sections that are important for the detailing in an optimal size (because you can select
larger scales) or show more components on a given page.
The picture below clearly illustrates the difference. Both shapes are detailed with the same scale and
scaled to the same length.
Difference Between Original Shape and Shortened Shape
The problem of shortening is the subsequent dimensioning with AutoCAD. However, if you work with
the AutoPLANT Structural dimensioning, you can consider any shortening at a later time because your
work is object-related.
This requires that the components are not dissolved down to the lines after detailing because then this
property is lost!
PICK HELPERS
The intelligent components of groups have the disadvantage that the individual parts of a detailed
construction group are inaccessible if e.g. you want to move them subsequently. It would also not help
to activate or deactivate the group using the AutoCAD-groups.
This is why AutoPLANT Structural features the "Pick Helpers”, which you might view as a grip
variation. If you do not have any part selected in the drawing and you access the context menu using
the right mouse button, you will see the option AutoPLANT Structural SETTINGS and the entry Pick
Helpers.
Use this entry to toggle the pick helpers on and off. Small little triangles now appear on the
components, which you can now use to select and e.g. move the parts of a group.
When working with the pick helpers, don't forget the following special feature: If a building
component of a construction group is moved, a new drawing of the group is only created when you
keep the ALT-key pressed during the movement. Otherwise, the drawing has to be regenerated to
obtain the modified display.
Direct Use: PS_PICKHELPER
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-9
DetailCenter
DISPLAY OF CONSTRUCTION COMPONENT LISTS

Construction component lists are most substantial within the three work levels. In these lists, the
construction components or detail blocks are displayed in a tree structure that can be used for working
in the selected work level.
Sorting and filters of the parts can be freely configured by the user. Thus there can be different
displays for different tasks.
DISPLAY SORTING (STRUCTURE)

Select the dialog for the display structure via the STRUCTURE button to modify the display sorting.
After modification of preset values and closing of the dialog box, the display will be restructured.
However, it is also possible to select your individually created template for the different work levels in
the global settings of Detail Center.
Group Display Type
Display Type: Here you select the fundamental type of display.

AutoPLANT Structural Standard – the component parts are displayed in the usual group/single
part structure. In addition, loose single parts and model views will be displayed as well.
User defined – you determine the hierarchy of the display individually, i.e. you specify in which
order the parts have to be sorted according to which properties.
Available.: Select the desired property field of a part, which has to be added to the tree structure.
Selected: The currently selected property fields of the structure. The order corresponds to the
hierarchy level in the tree display (sorting order).
The property field corresponds to the type of this property. It depends on the data of the parts to be
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-10
DetailCenter
represented which entries will actually be displayed.

If you have e.g. selected the length as property, an entry will be created on this hierarchy level for
each existing shape length and all components having the same length will be subordinate to this
property.
Group Display Filter
Use Filter: Only those parts will be displayed that meet the specified filter condition.
The selected properties for the structure and those for the filter don’t have to be identical. It is for
example possible to display a sorting only according to the length but filter out the component
type rib completely.
Selection List: Select one of the filter templates that you specified in the list. Select Current
Settings when you haven’t created any template and you want to use the current settings of the
filter dialog instead.
EDIT: By clicking on this button you can edit the display filter or store/select a filter template.
Use Prefilter: An additional second filter. This filter is linked with the actual filter logically by
AND. The component has to fulfil both conditions.
Group Options
Sort Order: here, you select the order of the entries.

Ascending – The entries are displayed in an ascending numerical or alphabetical order (1,2,3,4...).
Descending – The entries are displayed in a descending numerical or alphabetical order
(...4,3,2,1).
No Sorting – The entries are not sorted.
Entries only 1x: each component part is displayed only once in the whole tree structure. The
position numbers serve as criterion of comparison, separated in groups and single parts.
If a part having the same position (e.g. a rib) is situated in two different group positions, this is
only displayed in the first group.
> New per group: each component part is displayed only once in the whole tree structure, but each
single part of a group will be registered anew per group.
If a part having the same position (e.g. a rib) is situated in two different group positions, this is
displayed exactly once in each group.
Group Display: Here, you select the way group parts will be displayed.
As Group Structure – The building components and bolts of a group are subordinate to the group
entry. This allows an easy selection of any part of a group.
Only Single Parts – Only the actual parts of a group are displayed, but not the group itself.
Group and Single Parts – The group (as an entry without subordinate parts) and the actual parts of
this group are displayed of equal value side by side.
The advantage of this separation is that in case of a user-defined sorting you can arrange the
group and the component parts separately. Otherwise, it wouldn’t be possible to register the
single parts in the case the group has not been registered. Nor would it be possible to separate
e.g. in groups and building components of equal value side by side.
Pre-sort: The entries are preliminarily sorted according to views, groups, if need be, main parts
/building components (depending on the group display) and loose single parts, if you have selected
AutoPLANT Structural standard sorting.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-11
DetailCenter
No empty: The entry of preliminary sorting is not displayed if it doesn’t contain any further entry.
DISPLAY FILTER
The display filter allows a very detailed filtering of component parts according to their properties. You
can describe any logically nested filter condition on the basis of the existing properties (there are no
limits with regard to the complexity of the query).
You may store these filter conditions as templates which can be easily selected. This allows you to
prepare frequent filter conditions that are perfectly adapted to your application.
Two filters of equal value are available (preliminary filter and main filter) which are linked by the
logical AND.
Although each filter is logically nested by any condition such as 'All shapes longer than 5000, but no
IPE270 or IPE240', it sometimes is easier to work with the preliminary filter, too.
If e.g. no sheet metal plates are required for a task, you can exclude them permanently already via the
preliminary filter. The standard filter then serves for your daily work and you can modify this filter
without having to add the condition 'No sheet metal plates' each time.
Group Comparative Term
List: Here, you see all property fields of the parts that may be used for the filter criteria. Each field
can be used as often as you like.
Select the desired field by clicking on it in the list. Then, the field name will appear in the display
on the right.
Display Fields: Here, you specify a single comparative condition consisting of field name,
comparative operator and parts’ data.
Several comparative conditions may be combined with logical operators to build the complete
filter condition.
> Left Side: The current property field that can be modified by clicking on it in the list.
> Center: Here, you select the comparative operator that links the property field and the parts’ data
(content of the field) to build a comparative condition.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-12
DetailCenter
> Right Side: Possible parts’ data (contents of the field) of the selected property field in a
dropdown-list. Thus, impossible comparative conditions are avoided.
When all of the three components of a comparative condition have been preset, you can add them to
the complete filter condition by clicking on the INSERT button. Depending on the existing conditions
and on the selected logical link, the appropriate brackets will be set.
Group Filter Condition
Display Field: The complete filter condition as logical link consisting of several comparative
conditions. When you have already inserted a comparative condition, the active logical operator of
the next comparative condition will be displayed, too.
DIALOG COMMANDS
OPERATOR AND
By clicking on this button, you select the logical operator AND as logical link for the next comparative
condition.
OPERATOR OR
By clicking on this button, you select the logical operator OR as logical link for the next comparative
condition.
BRACKETS
Clicking on this button forces the program to manually add brackets to the filter conditions existing up
to that moment.
Brackets are always necessary if you want to link the complete result of a (partial) condition with
another one, because the combination of (A AND B) OR C is different to A AND (B OR C).
INSERT
By clicking on this button you add the current comparative condition to the complete filter condition.
DELETE
By clicking on this button you delete the comparative condition that was added last.
DELETE ALL
By clicking on this button you delete the complete filter condition.
USE FILTER TEMPLATES

As you already know from nearly all AutoPLANT Structural functions, you can store the filter
conditions as templates, too. This filter can be applied in the settings of the display via the name of this
template.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-13
DetailCenter
Don’t forget that this is only a hint. If you should modify the template of the filter, the template of the
display, where this filter was used and will produce another result as well.
COMPONENT OVERVIEW
Since the component overview constitutes the starting page of the Detail Center, the functions
described here also apply to the other work levels. These are especially the individual sorting of list
display and the use of filters.
When selecting the Detail Center command, this tab will always be active first, and the current
drawing is „scanned“ by the Detail Center.
All model parts are searched according to predefined criteria and then displayed. This might take some
time when large models are involved. All detail styles are also searched and displayed.
A great number of the described functions may be selected via the context menu of the right mouse
button. Look there whether the corresponding entry is available if there should be no hint in this
documentation.
If you need only a section of a model, use the visibility classes to hide the unneeded parts. Any parts
hidden with the visibility class command are not recognized by the Detail Center. Please note however
that these parts are then no longer recognized by any of the details.
DIALOG COMMANDS
This is the function bar of the component overview. Buttons no. 1-4 are available in each work level
with the same function.
RECURSION (1)
By clicking on this button, recursive processing is alternatively switched on or off.
If it is switched on, any processing applied to a parent entry in the component parts list (e.g. assign
style) is also applied to all subordinate entries. Otherwise, only the selected entry is processed or all
entries on the same level, if this option is activated in the “model“.
STRUCTURE (2)
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-14
DetailCenter
Click on this button to open the dialog for display sorting of component parts list. Here, you can select
the standard display or an individual structure and set user-defined filters.
SETTINGS (3)
Click on this button to open the dialog for the work tools where you can specify additional settings
only for this work level.
Depending on the work level, the global settings are valid, too, which can be defined separately.
TEMPLATE (4)
Click on this button to store your settings for the Detail Center in a template or to select this template.
UPDATE (5)
Click on this button to search the selected drawing once more.
This is required if you activated a different drawing in the MDI environment or if changes were made
to the current drawing (e.g. new position).
EXPRESS (6)
Click on this button to start the Detail Center Express, to carry out a complete detailing according to a
specified pattern.
ASSIGN (7)
By clicking on this button, you can link model parts with a detail style. This requires that you select a
detail style first.
After selecting the command you can pick on the model parts to be linked or select them in a window.
All not write-protected parts are then assigned this style.
PREPARE (8)
Click on this special action button to import all parts selected in the parts list into the view list and
determine the views pre-selected in the detail style.
Component views can be generated only for parts linked with a detail style.
WORK LEVELS (9)
Switch on a different work level by clicking on the corresponding tab. Any open dialog is updated
accordingly.
Here, you can switch over to the page for the global settings of the Detail Center where you can
specify the settings, which are valid for the whole Detail Center or for several work levels.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-15
DetailCenter
TITLE BAR (10)
If you double-click on this area, the dialog switches from docked to free moving. Alternatively, you
can also grab the dialog and “pull it out” while keeping the left mouse button depressed.
SEPARATOR (11)
Use this separator to enlarge the docked dialog. The drawing next to it will decrease in size
accordingly.
In addition, there is a scrolling bar between the two display lists (if two lists are available), which you
can use for modifying the scale of the two lists.
CLOSE (12)
Click on this button to close the Detail Center.
DETAIL STYLE LIST

This list displays all available detail styles. The selection consists of the styles saved in the drawing as
well as the style files saved on the hard drive.
View and Modify Detail Styles
Double-click on the desired list entry to open the dialog for the detail styles where you can modify the
entries. Alternatively, you can also use the context menu option Edit Detail Style.
Modifications apply only to the current session. If you want to save your changes permanently, you
have to save the model or export the detail style to the hard drive by means of the detail style dialog.
Clicking on another list entry while the detail style dialog is open updates the display of the detail style
dialog.
Copy Detail Styles
Select the detail style you want to copy from the list. Then select the context menu option Copy Detail
Style.
You are now prompted for a new name. Then you can also specify a description, which will appear in
the detail style dialog for better differentiation.
The new detail style is now displayed in the list and can be edited directly if the detail style dialog is
open.
Delete Detail Styles
Select the detail style you want to delete from the list. Then use the context menu option Delete Detail
Style. The detail style is now deleted from the list and the drawing. You can also delete the style from
the hard drive.
Please note that this deleted detail style is then no longer available for later sessions.
Set and Remove Default Detail Styles
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-16
DetailCenter
Some detailing functions such as manual detailing require a default detail style. Use the context menu
to set or remove a default detail style. Just select the desired style, followed by the corresponding
function in the context menu. The current default detail style is identified with an asterisk (*).
Load Detail Styles
At first loading of the Detail Center, only those detail styles are displayed in the list, which were saved
in the drawing.
You can, however, load additional style files (e.g. the defaults of certain customers), when you start
detailing. If you then save the drawing, these additional styles will be permanently available in the
drawing and will be displayed at the next loading. To load an additional style select the context menu
option Load Detail Style. Now, you can select a style file by the file selection dialog.
If you directly want to load all existing style files from the standard folder, then you select the entry
Load all Detail Styles instead.
This additional loading of styles is reasonable if you require a great number of different styles in your
company all in all, but only a part of them has to be used per order. If you load a detail style existing in
the model, the existing style will be overwritten.
COMPONENT PARTS LIST

This list is the primary working list of the Detail Center because it displays all parts of a model for
current status verification. Display and sorting of the list depends on the display settings.
Status Indicator
Depending on the component status, the entries feature small pictures. Only entries with such pictures
consist of parts that can be detailed. All other entries are only parent sorting entries.
Symbol Colours
Gray: Parts without any special status. Probably, these parts have not yet been processed with the
help of the Detail Center.
Blue: A detail block of this part has already been created. However, it has not yet been inserted
into a 2D drawing.
The original part in the model has not been modified compared with the detail block so that this
block can be inserted.
Yellow: A detail block of this part has already been created. However, it has not yet been inserted
into a 2D drawing.
The original part in the model has however been modified compared with the detail block so that
this block has to be detailed anew before it can be inserted.
Green: A detail block of this part has already been created and inserted into a 2D drawing.
The original part in the model has not been modified compared with the inserted detail block so
that this detail is currently valid in the 2D drawing.
Red: A detail block of this part has already been created and inserted into a 2D drawing.
The original part in the model has however been modified compared with the inserted detail block
so that this detail has to be updated in the 2D drawing.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-17
DetailCenter
Additional Checkmarks
Checkmark: A detail style has been assigned to the component part.
Asterisk (*): the part in question is the main part of the associated group.
Information about the Component Parts
The meaning of the different entries can be easily differentiated by means of the symbols, because
single parts, sheet metal plates, groups, views, etc. have their own typical symbol.
In addition, you can open a dockable information window via the entry Display Information in the
context menu. This window informs you in detail about the status and additional properties of the part
selected at that moment.
The content of this window is automatically adapted to your current selection.
Multiple Selection and Drag&Drop
Use the SHIFT and CTRL keys to select multiple entries. This is a Windows-specific function, which
will not be explained here.
Many operations can also be carried out using drag&drop. For example, by dragging a component list
entry on a detail style, you can link the two.
Selection of AutoPLANT Structural Properties
Via the Detail Center, the properties of component parts can be directly modified in the model. Select
the entry PS3D Properties in the context menu after having selected the desired list entries. For more
detailed information about parts properties, please refer to the corresponding chapters of this manual.
In principle, selection is as if you select the part(s) in the model and then load the properties. In
combination with the sorting possibilities of the component parts list, however, it is possible here to
modify e.g. only the material of head plates. If you are working with a big model, using the traditional
way would be much more complicated.
Don’t forget to update the Detail Center after a modification was made because the program doesn’t
carry out an automatic update deliberately.
Reference to the Model (Search)
The component parts list has a direct reference to the model in both directions, which allows an easy
and fast orientation.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-18
DetailCenter
On one hand, the components of the entries selected in the list can be displayed in the model. This
allows you to see directly which parts belong to a group, to a view, etc. To do this, select the option
Display Parts Selection in the Model in the work tools. Now, select an entry in the component parts list
and the assigned parts are colourfully checked in the model. Choose the entry ,Model’ to remove the
marking.
On the other hand, a part selected in the model can be checked in the component parts list (and
selected). To do this, pick the part in the model and select the menu point Search in Detail Center via
the context menu of the right mouse button. Now, the list scrolls to the position with the assigned
entry, the entry is checked and selected. The parent entries such as group list nodes etc. are "opened“.
Sorting
Sorting of the component parts list always depends on the work tools settings. The numerical sorting of
position within the sorting according to groups, part types, etc. is always carried out in three steps:
At first, sorting is effected according to the main position number. This number again is sorted
according to an existing position index. If additional prefixes are available, theses are sorted in the last
step. Position numbers, which only consist of letters, are displayed at the beginning in an alphabetical
order. If the filter 'Display Each Part only 1x’ is checked, only those positions are assumed to be
identical which only differ in their part prefix unless the button 'Don’t Use Position Number Prefix' has
been activated.
Standard Pos AA with Filter: Pos AA
Sorting: Pos BC Pos BC
Pos 1-1 Pos 1-1
Pos 1-2 Pos 1-2
Pos TR 1-2 (lapses)
Pos 2-2 Pos 2-2
Pos ST2-3 Pos ST2-3
Pos TR2-3 (lapses)
Pos 2-4 Pos 2-4
ASSIGNING DETAIL STYLES

Partial views and thus details can be created from every component part with a style. The different
sortings help you to link the correct parts with the necessary style in a rapid way.
You can only detail parts having a detail style. Which details to get can already be determined here.
Associate a Style
In the list, select the parts and then use drag&drop to pull them onto the detail style – and you are
finished! You can also select the parts and use the context menu to select the option Link with Detail
Style.
If you want to pick the parts directly from the model, you have to select a detail style first. Then press
the button ASSIGN (7) followed by picking the parts in the model. However, you can assign only single
parts with this method.
Recursive Association
If a single part has a detail style, this part is detailed with this style in the form of a single part detail.
If, however, a construction group has a detail style, this style becomes the detail style for the entire
construction group detailing.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-19
DetailCenter
If you want to generate only group details, the associated single parts do not really require their own
detail style because the group style also applies to the parts within that group.
Use the recursive or non-recursive association to assign styles to the parts you want to detail. If you
selected the recursive association (the 'Recursive Processing’ button is pressed) and you assign a style
to a group, this style also applies to the single parts of that group. If in this case you pull the entire
model onto the detail style via drag&drop, all groups and all single parts are assigned the same style.
If you assign style "A" to the model and 'Recursive' is activated, every entry is linked with this style. If
'Recursive' is deactivated, only the entries Outline, Complete Plan View, BG 100 and BG 101 are
linked with this style, because they are located hierarchically immediately underneath the model. Since
the model itself is only a sorting entry, it passes the association along to its subordinate entries.
If you assign style "B" to the BG 101 and 'Recursive' is activated, every single part of this group is
linked with this style as well. If 'Recursive' is deactivated, only this construction group is assigned
style "B".
Separate Detail Styles
Select the parts in the list and then use drag&drop to pull them towards the top and away from the
Detail Center – and you are finished! You can also select the parts and use the context menu to select
the option Separate from Detail Style.
Remember that parts without a detail style cannot be processed unless the parts belong to a group and
you want to detail only the group views.
Write-Protection
Use the Set Write-Protection command in the context menu to write-protect certain entries. The entries
are highlighted and cannot be overwritten with a new style or separated from a style. You have to
remove the write-protection before change or delete the style of such an entry.
The combination of recursive processing and write-protection facilitates assigning different styles to
groups and single parts: Deactivate recursive and active write-protection and drag the "model“ entry on
the group style. Only the groups are assigned a style (due to the recursive setting) and are then saved.
Activate recursive and drag the "model“ entry on the single part style. The style association is passed
on to all parts but the groups themselves are write-protected.
Hide Parts
You can temporarily remove undesired parts from the component parts list to get a better survey. To do
this, select the corresponding parts and then activate the menu point Remove Entry in the context
menu.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-20
DetailCenter
Visibility only refers to the component parts list. Don’t mix up this function with the visibility classes
in the 3D-model, which really hide the parts and switch to permanently invisible parts.
When the Detail Center is started anew or when you use the command UPDATE (5), all hidden entries
will be visible again.
IMPORT FOR DETAILING

All parts with a detail style can be imported for detailing, which means that the corresponding views
are created. The import for detailing concludes your work in this work level and you can switch to the
next level.
Create Partial Views
To import parts into the view list just drag the desired parts on the action button PrePare (8) using
drag&drop. The button will then temporarily turn red so that you know it is active. Let go off the
mouse button and the parts are transferred. You can also highlight the parts and click on the action
button with the mouse.
If you have checked the ‚Import Directly to Views’ option in the settings, you do not need to do
anything else because the style association also transfers the parts. If you separate parts from their
style, they are also removed from the view list.
When the part already exists in the view list, the entries will be corrected correspondingly. When the
corresponding group already exists in the view list, the single part will be assigned to this group.
Process and Delete Partial Views
It is always possible to add or remove partial views by modifying the detail style correspondingly and
importing the part anew.
However, if you want to add a partial view only for a certain component part and the detail style has to
remain unchanged, you can add or remove partial views in the second work level 'Views’ independent
of the style settings.
The manual details where the 2D-details are generated largely independent of the part hierarchies and
detailing automatisms are also created in this work level.
SPECIAL SETTINGS
You have access to the hereafter described settings via the button settings (3).
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-21
DetailCenter
Group Behaviour during Style Association
Overwrite: The entry is protected at once after association of a detail style and is shown in bold. It
cannot be modified unless the protection is removed.
Hide: The entry is hidden from the list after association of a detail style. Only the parts without
association of a detail style are shown.
The Detail Center has to be started anew or updated to make the entry visible again. Remember
that in case of hiding a group its single parts will be hidden too – even if they do not have any
style yet.
Take over: The entry is immediately imported to the next work level (views) after association of a
detail style. It is available for detailing.
Group Behaviour during Update
Manual: During automatic update of 2D-drawings, the program tries to restore modifications
which were made later in the details.
Otherwise, the detail is displayed as completely new detailed according to the detail style.
> Deleted: Dimensions or position flags deleted by the user are deleted again.
You will find a more detailed description of automatic 2D-Update in a separate chapter of this
documentation.
VIEWS OVERVIEW
If you have imported all of the parts for detailing, the generated views are displayed in this work level,
the views list.
Since most of the important points have already been discussed under Component Overview, here are
just a few special commands of this work level.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-22
DetailCenter
DIALOG-COMMANDS
ADDITIONAL VIEW
Click on this button to add additional views to the selected component part or to create manual details.,
another dialog then opens.
After an entry has been checked in the views list, the corresponding parts for the manual detail are
automatically selected. On the other hand, when you select the first entry (‘Detail Views’) of the list,
you can select any part by clicking on it in the model.
DETAILING
Click on this special action button to detail all of the parts selected in the views list, including the
mentioned partial views, and to store them on the hard drive as detail blocks.
The created detail blocks then can be inserted in your 2D-drawings.
VIEWS LIST
Here, you will see all views of the imported parts in the form of entries, which can be checked for their
current status. The display and sorting of the list depends on the settings of the display templates.
Status
The significance of these pictures matches the component part overview; please refer to that section for
further details. If the view has already been detailed it is marked with a checkmark.
Preview
Before detailing you can display a preview of the detail or of a single view. Detailing will take place as
it is displayed there.
If you choose only one view you will see exactly that view in the preview. However, if you select the
entire component or group, you will see all existing views of the part in an order determined by the
program.
To activate the preview, just select the corresponding entry and then select Preview via the context
menu. After some computing time displayed by the status indicator, a drawing window opens
containing the possible detailing as a preview.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-23
DetailCenter
If the detail style dialog and the preview are open, you can now change the different detail style
settings and check the effects of the modifications. If the detail style is not yet open, you can open the
dialog via the context menu. The correct detail style belonging to this view is then already selected.
Add and Remove New Views
Should you notice that the views displayed are too few or show an unfavourable line of vision on the
part, you can add or remove any view.
Just drag the view to be removed towards the top and away from the Detail Center using drag&drop. If
you select an entire component, the entire component will be removed; if you select the “Detail
Views” entry, all generated views are removed.
To add a view to a component just select the corresponding part and then select Add View via the
context menu. A dialog will open where you can add views.
DETAILING
To start the detailing just drag the desired parts onto the action button using drag&drop. The button
will then temporarily turn red so that you know it is active. Let go off the mouse button and the parts
are transferred. You can also highlight the parts and click on the action button with the mouse or select
the entry Detailing via the context menu.
A detail block with the date and time of the detailing is created and saved on your hard drive every
time the detailing process is activated. Every variation of the same type is thus still accessible later
during the insertion process.
You must save the model after the detailing has finished, since the modification management requires
information that has to be written to the drawing. If you do not save the model, this information is lost.
SPECIAL SETTINGS
You have access to the hereafter described settings via the button settings.
Group Behaviour during Detailing
Hide: The part is hidden in the model after detailing. You can e.g. at a detailing via direct part
selection see directly from the model which parts still have to be detailed
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-24
DetailCenter
DEFINITION OF MAIN VIEW

Within AutoPLANT Structural, there are different variants to specify the main view (front view) of a
shape for detailing.
Experience showed us that in most of the cases it isn’t enough to assume a firm guideline here because
this specification is individually made by the executive design engineer and mostly also depends on the
constructive environment. As it is a matter of component parts in the space, you cannot clearly define
top/bottom or left/right.
Front View based on the Parts Coordinate System (A)
Since each component part has its own coordinate system, a clear and constant main view can be
specified with the help of this coordinate system. In case of standard shapes, the Y-axis of this
coordinate system is always aligned parallel towards the web so that it can serve as reference axis for
the plan view.
This guarantees that – independent of the shape position – the front view always shows one of the two
web sides and the plan view shows a flange. The position in longitudinal direction, however, depends
on the insertion direction of the shape. The starting point of the part is always situated on the left or at
the bottom.
In case of non-symmetrical shapes (e.g. L-shapes), the coordinate system is rotated around the Y-axis
so that you can look inside the shape.
The figure on the left shows the part coordinate system of an L-shape (X, Y, Z) with the starting point
S and the endpoint E. For detailing, the coordinate system now is rotated around the Y-axis by 180°
(X', Y’, Z’ and S' resp. E'). Now, the front view has been defined along this new X-axis.
Front View based on the Global Front View (B)
To avoid exchanging up and down you can determine two global front views. The view in the direction
of the ”nearest” part coordinate axis is assumed as front view of the corresponding shape. To avoid the
view on a cross-section you can define an alternative front view, which sensibly has been rotated by
90°.
You obtain the result that the position is always independent of the insertion direction of the part (base
plates are always „at the bottom“), but the front view once can show the web and once the flange –
depending on the rotation of the shape in the view. Tough, parts which are situated further back in
construction are displayed as seen from inside.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-25
DetailCenter
Select the entry Set Global Reference View in the context menu of the component parts list to specify
the global front views. Then, you have to click into the model to get the cross hairs for selection. After
that, you select the desired view direction of the front view and then the alternative view direction.
When you press the ESC-key instead of selection the views are reset to the default values (0,-1,0) and
(1,0,0). The current values are displayed in the information window.
Front View based on the Outside of the Model (C)
This variant is similar to the global front view. The difference is that instead of specified reference
views you always choose the part coordinate axis, which show most clearly from the center of
construction to the outside. This means that the front view is always what you would see from the
outside if you looked towards the center of the whole construction.
This method largely corresponds to human imagination, but, depending on the rotation of the shape,
once the web and once the flange can be displayed.
The following example shows the effects of the selected main view on the 2D-display of a shape:
Positions 1-4 have been inserted at a rectangular, the Y-axis of the part is showing to the top and the Z-
axis is showing in shape direction. The views A and B are the specified global front views.
Depending on selection, you will get the front view displayed on the right.
Specify Individual Front View (D)
The last variant is that you can specify for each individual part separately which part coordinate axis
has to serve as front view. In general, you can decide to use variant (B) or (C) and align unfavourable
parts individually and independently.
Select the entry Set Individual Reference View in the context menu of the component part list to
specify an individual front view. Then, you have to select the desired part to get the cross-hairs for
selection. After that, you choose the desired view direction of the front view.
When you press the ESC-key instead of selection the individual front view of the part is deleted. The
current value is displayed in the information window. Select the entry Reset Reference Views in the
context menu of the component parts list to delete the specifications for all component parts
simultaneously.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-26
DetailCenter
OTHER VIEWS
You have the option to add additional views to a part or to create manual details from entire model
areas. Since the manual details are actually free views, they too are controlled via this dialog.
You have access to this function via the button ädditional view or via the entry Additional Views in the
context menu. The following dialog window is also a non-modal dialog which means that you can
change your part selection in the views list of the Detail Center at any time.
Group Given Views
Input Field: Here, you can change the names for free views.
List: The available views, which can be added to the part, are displayed here.
Select the desired view by clicking on it in the list. Already existing views are highlighted and
cannot be selected.
Group Selection
Selection Field: The detail style, which has to be used for a manual detail. When you select the
option 'From Component Part', the style assigned in the component part list will be used.
By clicking on the small button on the right side of this field, you can edit the selected detail style.
PICK VIEW: Click on this button to define the view level for free views by picking in the model.
ADD : Click on this button to add the selected view to the selected part.
MANUAL DETAIL: By clicking on this button, you can create a manual detail of the selected
part or of any part selection from the model.
Only Plane: The points picked during definition of a view plane are projected onto the current
view plane.
Add View
If you want to add one of the six basic views, just select the corresponding view from the list and click
on the Add button.
To add a free view just select one of the free views 'View A-A to Cut C-C' from the list. The input field
above can be used to change the name.
Then, click on the PICK VIEW button to specify the UCS (origin, X- and Y-axis) to pick any view or use
the ESC key to import the current view on screen. Finally, click on the ADD button.
The added views are treated during detailing just like directly created views and automatically further
processed.
Manual Detail from the Model
Select the first entry 'Detail Views’ in the views list of the Detail Center to create a manual detail with
any part selection from the model.
Now, click on the MANUaL DETAIL button and enter a name for the detail in the then opening input
field. Then, pick any view by specifying the UCS (origin, X- and Y-axis) or use the ESC key to import
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-27
DetailCenter
the current view on screen.

After that, you are prompted to select the parts, which are to be processed for this manual detail.
A window similar to the preview opens, which displays the parts as 3D objects for now. You can now
dimension manually, attach position flags or any 2D-lines and texts. Manipulations of these 3D-parts
are possible as well since they are only copies from the model.
Then you click on the modified CREATE 2D button, and the 2D-projection calculation for the 3D-parts
is carried out. Of course, you can continue to work in this window, but you will not have the intelligent
properties of the components available.
Once you have finished your additions, save the window without renaming it. If you do rename it, the
unique allocation for the Detail Center is no longer active.
Manual Detail from Components
You can also create a manual detail from construction groups or single parts without having to select
the parts specifically in the model.
Just select the entry of the desired part in the views list. The rest is the same as for the manual detail
from the model apart from parts selection.
DETAIL BLOCK OVERVIEW (INSERT)

If you have detailed all of the parts you can then insert the generated detail blocks into the workshop
plans. You will see the saved detail blocks in this last work level, the insert list.
Since most of the important points have already been discussed under Component Overview, here are
just a few special commands of this work level.
DIALOG COMMANDS
UPDATE
Click on this button to search the current output directory of the Detail Center once more.
This is required if you detailed a new model drawing or if a manual copy of a complete detail folder
was entered into the output directory.
EXPRESS
Click on this button to start the Detail Center Express for automatic insertion into the workshop plans
according to a specified pattern.
LIST OF DETAIL FOLDER

The default setting fills this list with the folder names, which are located in the detail folder of
New details are always saved to a folder. The name of that folder corresponds with the associated
model drawing. Users should leave this structure as it is. However, add additional folders so that you
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-28
DetailCenter
can access to other directories outside of the output path (detail path) created by AutoPLANT
Structural.
Add Detail Library
Select the entry Add Detail Library in the context menu to add a detail library. You can then select an
additional folder via the Windows file selection dialog, which is added to the list.
If normally you are working locally, you also have e.g. access to detail blocks saved on a network
server by using this function.
Delete Detail Library
To delete a detail library, click on the corresponding list entry and use the context menu to select the
entry Delete Detail Library. All detail blocks including the folder are then deleted.
Please remember that the program doesn’t take into consideration possibly existing foreign files!
AutoPLANT Structural assumes that the detail libraries only contain detail blocks for insertion and that
no finished drawings or other files are contained in these libraries.
LIST OF DETAILS
Here you will see all of the generated detail blocks as their own entries with date and time when they
were created and you can check their current status. The display and sorting of the list depends on the
settings of the work tools.
Status
The significance of these pictures matches the component part overview; please refer to that section for
further details. If the detail block has already been inserted, the entry is marked with a checkmark.
Preview
Before inserting the detail block, you can display a preview. To activate the preview, just select the
corresponding entry and then select the entry Detail Block Preview via the context menu.
A new drawing window opens displaying the result of the detailing in the form of a preview. This
detail block can be processed as well.
In case of modification, you mustn’t change the name of the drawing on any account. Otherwise the
detail block cannot be identified any more.
INSERT DETAIL BLOCKS

To insert detail blocks just drag the desired details onto the action button using drag&drop. The button
will then temporarily turn red so that you know it is active. Let go off the mouse button and you can
start inserting blocks. You can also highlight the parts and click on the action button with the mouse or
select the entry Insert via the context menu.
Insertion
Every inserted detail block first appears in the current target drawing in its origin and can then be
moved to the desired position within the drawing („sticking to the checkmark“). You can open several
drawings and click on a drawing to set it as the active one before inserting the blocks. Any details will
then be displayed there.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-29
DetailCenter
You can track the parts you have just inserted if you have opened the info window. You can ignore this
part insert or cancel the entire insertion process.
Target Drawing
In order to activate the modification mechanism the program has to know, into which drawing you are
inserting the details. You cannot insert parts until the drawing has been saved. You should refrain from
making any subsequent drawing name or folder changes as well.
Although the Detail Center has a verification function for “lost” drawings or details, you will save
yourself a lot of time and effort by just leaving the plans where they are. The location for saving the
plans should be considered beforehand.
Revisions
Once the details have been inserted into the drawing you can manually revise the drawing. Please
remember that the single parts and groups are intelligent details. For further information please read
the comments in the corresponding chapter of this manual.
Ideally, you should optimize the detail style of the detailing in such a way as to eliminate any
revisions. Only then the modification mechanism can function correctly, since subsequent changes in
the details are otherwise lost if you select the modification function.
US-Mark Numbering
During insertion, you can issue component part numbers according to a US drawing standard. These
marks (mostly consisting of sheet number, component part code and a continuous index) serve for
identification of the workshop drawings of the parts within the model and within the parts lists.
As in practice, each of these marks has an individual structure; they are based on a definition file
describing the structure and value range of the marks. In the settings, you can select the current
definition file to be used under 'US-Mark Numbering”.
At first insertion, a small dialog opens if the 'US-Mark-Numbering' option has been activated. This
dialog can be docked beside the Detail Center. The active fields depend on the default settings in the
definition file.
For each new inserted detail a component part index is counted up according to definition file.
However, this index can be changed at any time.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-30
DetailCenter
The resulting number (e.g. a1) will now be entered in the model into the field ’Shipping Number’ of
shape characteristics and in the 2D drawing into the field ‘Shipping Number of Position Flag’. The
position flag display is changed to ‘Shipping Number’.
Click on the button NEw drawing to count up the index for the drawing number and the component part
index will be reset to its start value. You can continue insertion in another drawing sheet.
Drawing Synchronization
When you are inserting the detail blocks, the insert information is saved to special files of the detail
library. After all, it could be that you did not open the model when inserting blocks and opening the
drawing in the background can be quite frustrating because very large models especially require a long
computing time for this operation.
Every time you open the model, the model drawing is compared and synchronized with these data.
You should never delete these files until the synchronization process is finished and you have saved
the model. The modification mechanism cannot function reliably if the program lacks the information
telling it which part has been inserted into which drawing.
Your work is better protected, if you do not delete the blocks and folders until after the assignment is
completed.
SPECIAL SETTINGS
You have access to the hereafter described settings via the button settings.
Group Behaviour during Insertion
Remove Block: Each inserted detail block will be deleted on the hard drive immediately after
insertion.
However, this is only possible if the model drawing is open at the same time, as the program has
to make some entries here. Please remember that the model drawing has to be saved afterwards.
US-Mark Numbering: You can issue mark numbers as they are usually used in the USA at
insertion.
Display Fields: Here, you see the definition file used for mark numbers including a short
description. This file includes the format description of the numbers.
If the program or project path is an element of the information, the part will only be displayed
there as <prg> or <prj>.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-31
DetailCenter
GLOBAL SETTINGS
In addition to the settings of the different work levels, you can use this page to make the fundamental
settings of the Detail Center. However, you will also find special default settings, which are valid for
several work levels at the same time and which are set centrally.
DIALOG-COMMANDS
TEMPLATE
Click on this button to save your settings of the Detail Center in a template or to select one of these
templates.
In this template, the settings of all work levels as well as the global settings are saved. You can process
or select this template file on each work level.
Group Behaviour during Opening
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-32
DetailCenter
Load Model: When the Detail Center is opened, the model is automatically analysed and the
component part structure is displayed according to all default settings in the component parts list.
Since this process may require some time in the case of big models, this function can be
deactivated. You also can select the analysis of the model structure manually at a later moment
via the button UPDATE in the component parts list.
Recompute: The group dimensions are calculated anew when the model structure is analysed.
If you created e.g. a parts list before and the data therefore are current data, you may reduce
loading time of the Detail Center by switching off this option.
With Bolts: When the model structure is analysed, all bolts of groups existing in the component
parts list will be displayed as well.
This allows an easy check of the used bolts, but the resulting great number of parts has a negative
effect on the speed. This setting doesn’t, however, influence the information about the bolts in-
group details.
Workframes: When the model structure is analysed, the view levels of the working areas are also
displayed as entries in the component part list and analysed.
Standard: When the model structure is analysed, horizontal projection, plan view and anchor plan
are also displayed as entries in the component part list and analysed.
Group Behaviour during Selection
Show in the Model: The part (or complete groups) clicked in the list is (are) highlighted in the
model. When another entry is selected, marking switches over to the new part.
Detail
Style Sync: The program selects exactly the detail style the currently checked entry has in the
component part resp. views list. When the dialog window for processing of detail style parameters
is open, the corresponding settings are also directly displayed there.
> Parameter: The displayed parameter pages in the detail style dialog depend on the type of the
checked component part. If you have e.g. checked a single part, the pages for groups will not be
displayed.
Model Sync: The Detail Center is always updated to match with the active model drawing, if
several drawings are open. Since this process may require some time, you can switch off this
option in the case of big models. Update can be selected manually via the UPDATE button in the
component parts list.
In addition, you often don’t want to update the lists while you are only looking up something in
another drawing.
Group Others
Preview: The preview of a detail is automatically updated when you modify a parameter in the
detail style dialog window. In case of many modifications, it is however reasonable to deactivate
the update first and to select it manually afterwards.
PlugIn's: External plugIn's will be integrated which allow an individual adaptation of the detailing
results. A plug In-manager and additional dialog windows allow you to control further defaults
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-33
DetailCenter
which may be completely different depending on the supplier.

At the moment, there are no plugIn's supported.
Tolerance: Here, you set the tolerance for contour calculation of the modeller.
In some rare cases it may be that the contour cannot be determined correctly at 2D-derivation.
This especially occurs when component parts having very small angles are rotated towards view
direction. If you detect an incorrect behaviour or if the error message "Can't calculate Extents" is
displayed in the command line of AutoCAD, you can set here a smaller tolerance value.
Height Level: Here, you enter the height level which correspond to the X-Y-plane in the model
with the height Z=0 (world coordinates). For detailing of groups and overviews it is thus possible
to display correct height dimensions.
Group Display Templates
Parts: Here, you set the desired template for sorting and filter of the component parts list.
In the display field, the currently selected template is displayed. Click on the small button (...) on
the right side of the display to select another template. Click on the small button (x) to reset the
display to standard display.
Only the templates you created before via display sorting of component parts list will be offered
for selection. If, in the mean time one of these templates has been changed, the modified display
will be shown, too.
Views: Here, you set the desired template for sorting and filter of the views list. Selection is
analogously to the one for component parts list.
Insert: Here, you set the desired template for sorting and filter of the insertion list. Selection is
analogously to the one for component parts list.
Group Configuration Files
Output: Here, you can see on which path the details will be stored later. A subordinate directory
with the model name is created there. You can modify the path by double-clicking on the field.
It is however recommended to avoid modification of the path unless it is absolutely necessary!
Program Path: Here, you see the complete path of your AutoPLANT Structural installation. If
other displayed paths are further subordinate directories of this program path, the corresponding
part is only displayed there as <prg>.
Project Path: Here, you see the complete path of your current project in the case that project
management is used. If other displayed paths are further subordinate directories of this project
path, the corresponding part is only displayed there as <prj>.
Translation: Here, you see the desired translation file for drawing labelling.
In the display field, the currently selected file is displayed. Click on the small button (...) on the
right side of the display to select another file. Click on the small button (x) to reset the display to
standard default.
If the program or project path is an element of the information, the part will only be displayed
there as <prg> or <prj>.
US-Mark-Numbering: Here, you see the definition file used for US-mark numbers. This file
includes the format description of the numbers. Selection is analogous to translation file.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-34
DetailCenter
AUTOMATIC TRANSLATION
AutoPLANT Structural permits a multilingual labelling of drawings, which is controlled by a
translation database. This database can be freely edited so that it is possible to add any language you
like. The form of the translated terms (e.g. only as abbreviation) can also be adapted to the
corresponding requirements.
Before you can work with the translation database, it has of course to contain the currently used terms.
For this reason, the model can be searched automatically for new terms of the object properties (like
name, note, etc).
EDIT DATA BASE

Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the Detail Center and click on the entry
Edit Translation. The following dialog opens.
List:: Here, you can see the terms of the database, which have to be translated. If you click on one
of these terms, it will be displayed in the Original Text field and you can add or revise the
translation.
Please note that only those terms are displayed, which exist in the database at the very moment.
Therefore you have to update the database after having modified the model.
Language: Here, you select the language, which has to be translated.
Original Text: Here, the current entry from the list will be displayed the translation which you can
edit.
Translation: Here, you can enter the translation of the currently selected term. Click on the
INSERT button and the entry is accepted as translation into the selected language.
If the term has already been translated into the selected language before, the translation will be
displayed. Click on the MODIFY button and the translation will be modified correspondingly.
All Entries: If this field has been checked, all entries available in the database are displayed in the
list of the terms, which have to be translated.
All Unknown: If this field has been checked, only those entries are displayed in the list of which a
translation into the selected language is not yet available.
Select File: Here, you see the path of the translation database. Click on File button to modify the
database.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-35
DetailCenter
Click on this button to modify (select) the translation database.
Click on this button to save the translation database.
Click on this button to add a new language to the database.
Click on this button to add the entry in the Translation input field as translation of the Original Text
entry in the selected language.
Click on this button to replace the current translation in the Translation input field as translation of the
Original Text entry in the selected language.
Click on this button to delete the current translation of the Original Text entry in the selected language.
UPDATE DATA BASE

After having modified the model, you should search the model for new terms for the translation
database. These terms are taken from the object properties so that own comments or component part
names for the position flags etc., which were inserted there, can be translated.
The program tries to synchronize the entries with those of the shape database of AutoPLANT
Structural so that not modified shape names are not displayed in the translation.
Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the Detail Center to search in the model.
Click on the entry Enlarge Translation from Model. The model is searched for new terms and these are
imported.
TRANSFER DRAWING PATHS

This function permits you to transfer the drawing numbers saved in the drawing database or the file
paths of the workshop drawings to the component parts properties of the model drawing.
It is possible to display the drawing numbers of the processed details in the position flags of an
overview. In addition, it would also be possible to export the parts data via AutoPLANT Structural
standard interface and to have them evaluated by foreign programs.
START TRANSFER
Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the Detail Center to click on the entry
Take over file Paths. Then, you still have the possibility to verify the drawing database of the model, if
in the meantime you moved some details or modified the drawing numbers.
After the drawing verification was finished (or if you don’t want this option) the following dialog
opens:
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-36
DetailCenter
Group Data Selection
Data Selection: Here you specify which data have to be transferred into the component parts
properties. In addition, you can still add any extra text.
Drawing Number – The drawing number of the corresponding 2D drawing will be transferred.
Only File Name – Only the file name of the 2D drawing is transferred (without specification of the
path).
File Path – The complete file path including the drawing name of the 2D drawing will be
transferred.
Only Text – Only the specified text of the 'Prefix' input field would be transferred.
Prefix: Here you can specify a text which has to be placed in front of the real data or which has to
be transferred as only text (option Only Text).
Postfix: Here you can specify a text, which has to be placed behind the real data.
Group Target
Target: Here you specify into which property fields of the parts the data have to be transferred.
Note 1 – The data are transferred into the note field 1 of the parts properties.
Note 2 - The data are transferred into the note field 2 of the parts properties.
Groups: Only the data of the corresponding group are transferred to each part in the model; e.g.
detailed stiffeners are marked with the reference to the corresponding group drawing.
All Equa: The data are transferred to all component parts having the equal position number
(separated according to single part and group) and this even if only the workshop drawing to one
of these positions exists.
Remove before: In all component parts, the contents of the selected property field are removed
before transfer is started.
All existing entries are overwritten, this would, however, permit to transfer and display the
drawing numbers of all parts first and then only the drawing paths of the groups (the drawing
numbers of the single parts would thus be deleted again).
Now, click on the OK button to transfer the current entries of the drawing database in the component
parts properties.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-37
DetailCenter
DRAWING VERIFICATION
Each time when you insert some details in a drawing, a dependence of the component part on the
workshop drawing and vice versa will be saved in the drawing database of the model drawing. These
saved dependences later permit an automatic update of the workshop drawing or the transfer of
drawing numbers to the component parts properties of the model.
These links are the reason for your having to enter a valid drawing name of the destination drawings
before insertion of details. It is also the reason for your having to save the model after insertion.
Nevertheless it may be that you have to modify the physical position of the 2D-drawings after the
complete detailing was finished. This is the case if you have to save them in an assembly folder of the
order in the network. In addition, it may be that you want to move some details from one drawing to
the other in order to add some completions or just because there is not enough place in the drawing any
more.
However, if the model has saved the wrong dependences, and the Detail Center thus cannot function
completely as it should, you can correct this subsequently. This correction partly is carried out
automatically, partly by means of your manual support. It is divided into the two areas Drawing Path
Verification and Detail Verification.
START OF VERIFICATION
Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the Detail Center and click on the entry
Check Dependences. After the note that this function may require some time and that if need be you
can cancel the function the verification starts.
At first, it is verified whether all paths of workshop drawings saved in the drawing database still exist.
Then, the drawings, which were not found, are displayed in the dialog. Now, you have the possibility
to set the paths or drawing names anew.
Group Invalid Drawing Paths
Click on this button to change the path of all displayed drawings at the same time and start a new
search. Then, the list either contains the remaining drawings, which are still lacking or the verification
function changes to detail verification.
If you only changed the physical position of the plans on the hard drive, you don’t have to make any
further corrections.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-38
DetailCenter
Click on this button to change the path and/or file name of a certain drawing selected before in the
displayed list.
If a drawing was renamed or if a certain drawing was saved on another physical place, you can thus
make the necessary corrections.
Click on this button to ignore the selected drawing during the following verification. Thus you can also
remove deleted drawings.
Please note, however, that you cannot add further drawings. If therefore you copied and renamed a
drawing, please assign the new name to it instead of ignoring the drawing.
After verification of paths was finished, and any necessary corrections were made, the program passes
on to the verification of the details contained. It is now verified whether all details are contained in the
original or now modified drawings.
All the details, which were not found, are now displayed in the list. You have thus the possibility to
link any moved details anew or to remove deleted details.
Group Details not Found
Search Path: The current search path used for the ‚Search Detail' option is displayed in this field.
You can modify the path by clicking on the right button beside the display.
Click on this button to search for any details not found in the drawings of the current search path. For
this purpose, each drawing will be opened in the background and searched for all listed details
individually.
Please note that each file having the extension *.dwg will be opened, as it could be a workshop
drawing.
This means that also any existing AutoPLANT Structural-models or other AutoCAD-drawings will be
opened. You should therefore take care that only 2D-plans with details are in the list to avoid
unnecessary waiting periods.
Click on this button to specify the new drawing where a certain detail is which was selected before in
the list. Then, it is verified at once whether the detail is really situated on the new drawing.
Click on this button to ignore the selected detail; the original entry is kept. Thus you can also remove
deleted details as you can remove the detail hints from the drawing database after end of verification.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-39
DetailCenter
Please note, however, that you cannot add further details. If therefore you moved a detail, please assign
the new drawing to it instead of ignoring the detail.
END OF VERIFICATION
After the verification has been finished, the assignment is structured anew and the drawing database is
updated. You still have the possibility now to remove the ignored or invalid detail hints from the
drawing database. If you refrain from doing this, the original entries of these details will be kept and
you can repeat the verification at a later moment.
Ignored: If this field has been checked, the detail hints on ignored drawings will be taken into
consideration, too for correction (all details giving a hint of these drawings are set as ignored
details).
Otherwise, these are not affected in order to avoid destroying hints to temporarily moved
drawings.
2D-References: if this field has been checked, the hints of 2D-drawings of all ignored details will
be removed as well. The data base entry with possible further information is however kept.
Invalid: If this field has been checked, the data base entries of any details, which were not found,
will be completely removed. Otherwise, only the hints of 2D-drawings of these details will be
removed.
When you click on Cancel in this dialog, the data base will not be modified. You can repeat the
verification process at any time you like by means of correction.
Thus you can first look at the result of drawing verification in a text file (model
name_LogFile.txt) which is situated in the subdirectory ..\detail of your AutoPLANT
Structural installation. There, you will find a list of all workshop drawings linked with the model as
well as the status of the details expected to be there.
Drawing Verification
; -------------------------------------------
[HEADER]
Verification file=h:\testmodel.dwg
[drawing file: h:\testmodel_views.dwg]

Status=moved or deleted
view hall_FRONT=can not be found
[drawing file: h:\testmodel_details.dwg]

Pos 2 (HE 140 B)=valid
Pos 47 (PLATE 10x137...191)=not found
BG 3 (HE 200 B)=valid
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-40
DetailCenter
BG 9.1 (HE 200 B)=valid
DIRECT DETAILING
The AutoPLANT Structural Detail Center can also be used to detail parts directly from within the
model or display a preview of the detail. This means dimensions of construction groups can be
checked, or only a few selected parts within a complex building, which are urgently needed, can be
detailed.
Perhaps area classes have not been used, but it is now desired to detail a special truss. Large models
pose the problem of being able to identify this part directly.
The Detail Center offers a few helpful tools, but the following method is even easier:
To detail a component part directly from within the model, select a default detail style first, so that
parts without a detail style can be detailed.
Now highlight the parts to be detailed within the model and then select the context menu via the right
mouse button. Depending on the parts selected, a preview can be created from a single part or a group
or these parts or groups can be detailed directly. Select the desired function from the context menu.
A group can be detailed or displayed in the preview whenever the main part of the group has been
selected.
DIRECT DETAILING
If you want to work with direct detailing, you will be prompted to specify if all of the selected parts
without a detail style are to be linked with the default style first. If you confirm this question, these
parts will be highlighted in the Detail Center as well since the linking is permanent. If you answer no
to the question, only those parts are detailed, which already have a detail style.
The parts will then be directly detailed or the preview is displayed.
Direct Detailing with Insertion
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-41
DetailCenter
If additionally valid and saved 2D-workshop drawings are open, the parts can even be inserted into the
drawings directly after detailing.
In the context menu, a list of the valid drawings will be displayed in a subordinate tab of the
corresponding detailing selection (respectively the entry Detail Library for 'Not Insert'). If such a
drawing is selected, you will directly reach the insertion mode fort he selected drawing after detailing
has been finished. The parts can be placed there.
MODIFICATION MANAGEMENT
The modification management is one of AutoPLANT Structural’s special Detail Center features. Once
the model has been detailed and any resulting detail blocks have been distributed to the different
workshop plans, the detailing or processing is considered finished.
The next time you load the model most of the entries will appear in green – this colour signifies that
the detailing of these parts matches the original parts of the model.
However, if you have changed parts of the model they will be shown in red. This tells you that the
detail blocks (and thus maybe the workshop drawings as well) are no longer current and have to be
updated. The program performs this update.
OPEN A DRAWING FROM WITHIN THE DETAIL CENTER

Just click on a part in the component list of the Detail Center to have a quick look at a certain
workshop drawing.
Now select the context menu and use the entry Open 2D drawing to automatically open the drawing
containing this detail – presuming it has been inserted.
UPDATE DRAWINGS
Any parts highlighted in red can be updated automatically. Select a specific component or a parent and
only the parts contained in these are updated. If you select the "Model" entry, all parts are updated.
Selecting the context menu after having selected the part, use the entry Update only modified 2D-
drawing to activate the modification mechanism. However, if you want to force also an update of non-
modified (green) parts to replace e.g. the detailing by another detail style you have to select the entry
Update 2D-drawing in the context menu.
One by one, all of the affected drawings are opened in the background, the parts are newly detailed and
inserted directly into the original drawing position, replacing the old ones. Should you have one of
these drawings open at the time, you can watch this replacement happen “live” right in front of you.
Subsequent Modifications
Depending on the settings in the work tools of component overview, modifications of the details which
you carried out later will be adopted again. This is of course only possible to a limited extent.
At the very moment, moving of position flags, weld marks, height indicators and of dimension texts in
all 2D-drawings as well as modifications of sketch display at overviews are adopted. If a dynamic
drawing parts list possibly exists, it will also be updated in the case the component parts have changed.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-42
DetailCenter
Please note, however, that only the position of the dimension text can be restored (in the case that you
“sorted out” unfavourably placed texts), but not the dimension itself or modifications of the dimension
text. To avoid a reset of such modifications, you can protect them against update.
This procedure might take some time to complete; then all plans are once again current and the latest
detail blocks are ready for insertion. Use the ‘Display only Latest Blocks’ option for the insertion to
place the details.
You should remember, however, that the modification mechanism functions optimally only if the tips
and notes from the previous chapters are observed. You should, therefore, work through those chapters
very diligently.
PROTECTION AGAINST UPDATE

To exclude modifications of dimensions, position flags, weld marks or height indicators completely
from being updated, you may protect them or set them free again. This is recommended for example
for subsequent modifications of dimension texts or in the case dimensions were completely moved.
During automatic update of the 2D drawing, the program now checks whether e.g. a dimension has
been protected. If this is the case, this dimension is kept exactly as it is and the corresponding „new“
dimension is deleted from the updated detail. The result may be that the position or the dimension text
won’t match any more. Therefore, this option should only be used in the case you assume slight
modifications (such as modifications of display or of position numbers) which only have few
influences on the dimension.
Since in future versions keeping of modifications will become more and more efficient, this protection
against update is only a temporary help, which will become superfluous again later. The adoption of
modifications combined with the efficiency of the automatic mechanisms of AutoPLANT Structural
requires an enormous amount of time and energy in program development. This is the reason why
modification management will only become perfect according to our requirements step by step.
Select the entry Protection against Update in the component parts list of the Detail Center to protect the
dimension or the position flags; weld marks, etc. against update or to release them again. Then, the
following dialog opens which is described below.
Group Selection-Filter
Selection-Filter: Here, you can enter the filter for automatic object selection. Only those objects
will be taken into consideration, which meet the filter condition.
Select Objects – You specify manually by your selection, which objects have to be protected or
released. No filter will be applied in this case.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-43
DetailCenter
All Objects – All objects in the drawing are automatically selected without applying a filter.
Processing of course only refers to dimensions, position flags, weld marks and height indicators.
Dimension – Only dimensioning objects are automatically selected in the drawing.
Each Flag – All position flags, weld marks and height indicators are automatically selected in the
drawing.
Only Position Flags – All position flags are selected in the drawing.
Only Weld Marks – All weld marks are selected in the drawing.
Only Height Indicators – All height indicators are selected in the drawing.
Click on this button to activate the protection against update for the selected objects unless it already
exists. If you have checked the entry ‘Select Objects’ as selection filter, the desired objects have to be
selected first.
Click on this button to remove the protection against update for the selected objects if they have one. If
you have checked the entry ‘Select Objects’ as selection filter, the desired objects have to be selected
first.
Of course, this function has to be applied in the 2D-workshop drawings and not in the 3D-model.
Please also remember that you cannot compare the protection against update with a blocked layer. If
the dimension to be protected was only on a blocked layer, it would be kept there, but the newly
created (synonymous) dimension would not be deleted.
RESET MODIFICATIONS
Before the first detailing takes place, the drawing should be initialized, i.e. it should be set to „zero“.
This will ensure that the modification mechanism functions optimally.
As the component parts in the model remember their modification even during modelling, it may be
that the corresponding markings have already been set. This could cause some irritations.
Select the entry Reset Modification Flags via the context menu of component parts view to reset any
existing information about model modification.
The entries, which details are situated on which drawings that are kept, as well as the already detailed
detail blocks. Please select the entry Initialize All Anew from the context menu to reset the model
completely.
Please note, however, that now any information will be deleted (unless the assigned detail styles)! It
will then no longer be possible to ask the model where the different component parts were inserted or
to insert component parts already detailed but not yet inserted.
This complete initialization is reasonable if you made some detailing beforehand „as a test“ or for a
meeting and you now want to create the final workshop plans.
DRAWING LIST
At any time, AutoPLANT Structural can create a drawing list giving you a survey on the inserted
details and their status of modification. This drawing list is based on the current entries in the drawing
database and on the status of the so-called “modification flags” of the component parts.
Therefore, it is recommended to verify the drawing first. The program automatically offers this
drawing verification after the function has been selected. It is of course also possible that hints which
were recognized as invalid shall nevertheless remain valid because the drawings have only been moved
temporarily.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-44
DetailCenter
Creation of File
Select the context menu of the component parts list and click on the entry Output of Drawing List. A
text file (Modelname_DrawingList.txt), will be created in the subdirectory.. \detail of your
AutoPLANT Structural-installation containing first a survey on all 2D-drawings and the number of
inserted details.
If one of these details has been checked as modified in the Detail Center, this drawing is reported as
being modified. Therefore, this statement doesn’t mean that the drawing has actually already been
modified. It means that it still has to be modified. In addition, you will find a detailed list per drawing,
which details (position numbers) are contained and which of them has already been modified in the
model.
On the following page, you will find an example of a drawing list. Since an external program via code
words might evaluate the content of this list, the output of these key words is always in English.
As you can see in the example, there are 6 single parts (2 of them modified) and 2 groups in the
drawing with drawing number ABC_PL03. Therefore, the drawing is checked as being modified.
; Drawing List
; -----------------------------------------------------
[HEADER]
Created=02-04-2003 * 11:34 AM
ModelFile=h:\testmodell.dwg
FileContent=Drawing list and object reference
Drawings=3
DrawingNumber|Changed |Parts |Groups |Views |DrawingFile

=============|========|========|========|========|========================
ABC_AN01 |no | | |2 |h:\testmodel_view.dwg
ABC_BG02 |yes | |5(3) | |h:\testmodel_bg.dwg
ABC_PL03 |yes |6(2) |2 | |h:\testmodel_plates.dwg
[h:\testmodel_views.dwg]
DrawingNumber=ABC_AN01
Changed=no
Parts=
ChangedParts=
Groups=
ChangedGroups=
Views=Hall_SEI_R,Hall_X_1
ChangedViews=
[h:\testmodel_bg.dwg]
DrawingNumber=ABC_BG02
Changed=yes
Parts=
ChangedParts=
Groups=3,7,10,31,49
ChangedGroups=3,7,31
Views=
ChangedViews=
[h:\testmodel_plates.dwg]
DrawingNumber=ABC_PL03
Changed=yes
Parts=35,38,40,43,45,46
ChangedParts=40,46
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-45
Detailing Style
Groups=50,55
ChangedGroups=
Views=
ChangedViews=
DETAILING STYLE
WORKING WITH DETAILING STYLES

The detailing style offers you some decisive influence over the style of the detailing because it is here
that you determine what is to be dimensioned, how to dimension it, what texts to include, whether to
attach position flags, and much more.
More than 350 parameters are available to specify the appearance of your drawing. You can save and
load these styles individually and even import or export them from third parties. Since it is possible to
manage entire parameter records you can create specific styles for specific detailing tasks (e.g. for
overviews, workshop plans, life-sized displays, etc.) and just select them later.
Your main task consists of defining the suitable styles once. The program offers the option to
immediately check each change using a preview feature (see Detail Center/Preview) – until details
look exactly like you want them to be.
This chapter will discuss the setting options first with an example of a detailed component at the end of
the chapter. The chapters describing the detailing process also describe how to work with styles.
SAVING STYLES
Normally, the detailing styles are saved together with the drawing. This means that you always have to
save your model if the modifications of detailing styles are to be kept permanently.
In addition, there is the possibility to write a detailing style as text file on the hard drive and to re-
import it. This permits you to exchange, update or even transfer the detailing styles of different
models. Furthermore, you can create a collection of detailing styles and use in the model only a
selection of those styles, which are required for that moment.
GENERAL INFO
When you select the detailing style, a dialog with a tree structure appears on the left where the
different dialog pages are sorted hierarchically in groups according to different areas.
When you click on an entry in the tree, the assigned dialog page opens on the right and you can modify
the values. If you move to another entry, your previous entries are saved and the new page will be
displayed.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-46
Detailing Style
To allow a clear view, some of the tabs have subordinate tabs themselves which are accessibly via a
button and which are used for special settings. These are usually infrequently used settings and cannot
be reached directly via the tree structure.
The commands of the dialog frame are the ones all dialog tabs have in common. Only the new specific
commands will be described here. The other commands are found in the general description of
AutoPLANT Structural-dialogs.
Description: Here, you can specify a description of the detailing style to explain its function in
detail.
Style Class: Here, you can assign the detailing style to an existing style class. The style then will
be displayed in the selection list of the Detail Center together with a colored icon. You can
identify the essential task more rapidly (e.g. detailing style for single parts, groups, etc.).
The detail styles available for selection are sorted by different functions on the base of these style
groups.
DIALOG-COMMANDS
SAVE
When you click on this button, the complete detailing style is saved in a text file on the hard drive.
This file has the name of the style and the file ending *.sty.
It is possible to load this file later into this or into another model or to transfer it to thirds.
SAVE AS
Click on this button to save the detailing style under another name on the hard drive. Your detailing
style copy automatically gets the name of the style pre-set here as file name. It is possible to load this
file later into this or into another model or to transfer it to thirds.
UPDATE PREVIEW
When you click on this button, preview detailing of a detail is calculated anew and updated if the
window is open.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-47
Detailing Style
Within the Detail Center you can look in a preview on the effects of a detailing style for detailing of a
detail. Normally, this preview is automatically updated at each modification of the detailing style.
However, if you have e.g. a very complex overview the detailing of which requires a lot of time or if
you want to modify a lot of parameters, you can switch off the automatic update and release it
manually.
GLOBAL SETTINGS
This is the tab for global default settings ranking higher than all other tabs. If, for instance,
dimensioning is deactivated, no dimensioning will be carried out - independent of the setting in the
dimensioning tab.
COMMON TAB
Group Display
Projection: Here, you specify the system according to which the different part views (front view,
plan view, top view, etc.) are aligned towards each other.
DIN – Distribution of the views is effected according to DIN.
American – Distribution of the views is effected according to American standard.
Alignment:: Here, you specify the alignment of the details at detailing.

Horizontal – The parts are aligned horizontally when detailed.
Vertical – The parts are aligned vertically when detailed.
Align as – AutoCAD aligns the parts during detailing according to their WCS position, which
means that a slanted support remains slanted.
Front View: Here, you indicate how the front view of a component part has to be specified. The
other views then derivate from this front view.
From Component – The element coordinate system of the component part is used for the
determination of the front view.
From Global Views – The global views are used for the determination of the front view.
Outside Model – The view from the outside into the model is used for the determination of the
front view.
Individually per Part – The individually fixed front view of a part is used for the determination of
the part’s front view. If it has not been defined, the element coordinate system will be used
instead.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-48
Detailing Style
Like Group: Single parts views are displayed according to the views of the corresponding groups,
if existing. The left view of a stiffener is e.g. the view onto a plate (normally this would be the
plan view), because the left view of the group would show the stiffener in this way.
> First View: Only the first view of the part is displayed corresponding to the group; all other
views are tilted according to standard related to this modified view.
Real 2D-lines: The details are transformed into pure AutoCAD line diagrams. Intelligent
properties of the 2D-details of course won’t be available any more.
ACIS if Plates: Poly-plates are always temporarily transformed into ACIS elements for detailing
to allow for better dimensioning of radii.
The plate properties in the model are not affected by this.
Don’t scale: The parts keep their original size and only the text is scaled for output on a printer
/plotter.
Scale: Here, you set the scale of your details. Depending on the selection under ‘Don’t Scale Parts’
either the part or the text size is scaled.
Please remember the hints under 'Detail Center/Generalities Concerning Scale and Dimensioning
Styles'.
Group Add
Dimensioning: Dimensioning texts and lines are scaled according to the settings entered in the
DIMENSIONING tab.
> US-Style: Dimensioning is affected according to American default settings (AISC) if these
differ from other default settings.
> Cross-Section Y: At diagonal dimensioning according to American standard, the intersection

point of the center line of the connected shapes and the shape axis of the supporting shape is
viewed for the calculation of system points. Otherwise, this is the point on the centerline of the
supporting shape which is situated next.
Position Flags: Position flags are attached according to the settings entered in the POSITION
FLAGS tab.
Weld Flags: Welding symbols are attached according to the settings entered in the WELDING
SYMBOLS tab.
Labels: Additional label texts are attached according to the settings entered in the ADDITIONAL
TEXTS tab.
PARTIAL VIEWS TAB

Here, you specify which views of a part will be displayed and whether these are limited in their visual
depth. However, you can also make use of the automatic process of the program, which determines the
required views due to the processing.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-49
Detailing Style
Group Partial Views
Automatic: The program automatically displays the required views according to the existing
detailing processes of the part. Thus, all detailing processes can be displayed and dimensioned.
Cut: A cut is made in this view frame for any model views you like. Position, cut depth and
displayed parts are determined by means of this frame.
Default: You can choose the views to be generated from the six existing basic views.
Here, you also pre-set the desired views for the overviews of detailed points; for standard
overviews, however these settings haven’t any meaning,
> Selection: Here, you pre-select which views have to be created during the detailing process. In
the Detail Center, you also have the possibility to delete views or to add further views.
Min. Distance: Here, you specify the distance of the views (incl. dimensions and text) if several
views of a part are to be generated within one detail block.
Insertion Position: Here, you specify the grip point for the later insertion of detail blocks. Select
where to position the detail block from the 9 striking insertion points below-left up to above-right
(also for 2D-Update).
Group Visual Depth
Max. Depth: Here, you can indicate a visual depth up to which the subordinate parts are seized at
construction group display. This filter can be switched on separately for the different views to
limit the depth only at left and right views.
Limit for : When displaying construction groups, the visual depth for the selected view is limited
to the value specified under 'Max. Depth'.
Please note, however, that unlike cut areas at views nevertheless the complete component part will
be displayed. The specification of this value only serves as depth filter for seizing of the complete
component part.
SELECTION CLASS TAB

The automatic assignment of detailing styles is available in the DetailCenter Express as well as in other
commands of the Detail Center or of AutoPLANT Structural. Here, you can define where the
corresponding detailing style has to be visible to limit the selection to a few reasonable styles.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-50
Detailing Style
Group Single Parts
Single Parts: The detailing style is visible everywhere where single parts are concerned.
Otherwise, it will not be displayed.
If this option is deactivated, the visibility can be limited even further to certain types. However, if
the style is e.g. only limited to end plates, it will also be displayed when the corresponding
function doesn’t permit any filtering (e.g. other single parts).
> Straight Shapes: The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of straight shapes.
> Bent: The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of bent shapes.
> End Plates: The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of end, base or other
connection plates.
> Sheet Metal Plates: The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of poly-plates (except
for stiffeners).
> Stiffeners: The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of stiffeners.
Group Component Groups
Component Groups: The detailing style is visible everywhere where it is a matter of component
groups. Otherwise, it will not be displayed.
the style is e.g. only limited to supports, it will also be displayed when the corresponding function
doesn’t permit any filtering (e.g. other shapes or groups).
> Straight Shapes: The detailing style is only visible when the main part of the group is a straight
shape.
> Bent: The detailing style is only visible when the main part of the group is a bent shape.
> Supports: The detailing style is only visible when the main part of the group is a straight shape
and a support (longitudinal direction parallel towards the global Z-axis).
> Cross Girder: The detailing style is only visible when the main part of the group is a straight
shape and a cross girder (longitudinal direction parallel towards the global X/Y-plane).
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-51
Detailing Style
Group Views
Views: The detailing style is visible everywhere where it is a matter of views. Otherwise, it will
not be displayed.
the style is e.g. only limited to anchor plans, it will also be displayed when the corresponding
function doesn’t permit any filtering (e.g. other views).
> Standard: The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of the model views from the
working areas.
> Anchor Plans: The detailing style is only visible when it is a matter of anchor plans.
Others
Always selectable: The detailing style is not submitted to a certain filtering and is visible
everywhere.
2D-DISPLAY
These dialog tabs offer the opportunity to specify the display type of the component parts (centerlines,
drill holes, hidden edges, etc.), which line types have to be used and which special default settings
have to be valid for the different detailing types.
COMMON TAB
Group Add
Visible Lines: All visible lines are displayed. This field should always be checked.
Invisible: The invisible lines are displayed according to their line type.
Bolts : The put in bolts are depicted by a bolt symbol.
> Real: The bolts are depicted as real view with nut and bolt head.
Weldmint: The welding joints imported to the model are depicted as weld symbol.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-52
Detailing Style
Elevation symbols: The height indicators imported to the model are depicted.
Cross-Sections: The shape cross-sections are depicted with their exact radii – otherwise, the
simplified depiction in the form of straight lines is selected.
> Dimensioning: At dimensioning, all edges and radii of cross-section display are used.
Otherwise, only the outside dimensions are depicted.
With Radii: Arcs and circles are depicted as such AutoCAD elements – otherwise, they are
approximated using many small continuous lines. The generation of actually curved lines will
slightly affect on the overall processing speed.
Bearing Ba: A symbol for the bearing bar direction is attached (which corresponds to the
lengthwise direction of the grid) if it is a matter of plates having a grid.
> Symbol Size: Here, you enter the size of the symbol, which is used for the direction of the plate
grid.
Group Shape Shortening
With Shortening: Shapes are “compressed” in areas without detailing and a shortening symbol is
attached. Whether a shape can be shortened depends on its detailing processes and on the limits
specified by you hereafter.
Symbol-Distance: The gab in the shape or the distance between the lines if a shortening symbol
with two lines is used.
Min. Shape Length: Shortenings are to be attached starting at this length. You can use your page
optimally by displaying the shapes as long as possible.
Min. Shortening: The shape has to be shortened by at least this value to even activate any
shortening.
Max. Number: The maximum number of shortenings inserted into the shape.
Edge distances: Shortenings cannot start at the edge or margin area but can only start this indicated
distance from the edge. This prevents shortening a shape without detailing too much.
Symbol: Here, you select the symbol, which has to be inserted into the shape at shortening
position.
Single Line – The shortening symbol is a simple straight line.
ZigZag Single Line – The shortening symbol is a serrated, wave-like line.
Double Line – The shortening symbol is a double straight line with the gap set in the 'Symbol-
Distance' input field.
ZigZag Double Line - The shortening symbol is a serrated, wave-like double line with the gap set
in the 'Symbol-Distance' input field.
Gap without Line – There is no symbol depicted, but only a gap with the distance set in the
'Symbol-Distance' input field.
Group Others
Hatching Size: Here, you specify the hatching scale. This is the line distance for line hatching.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-53
Detailing Style
Hatching Angle: Here, you enter the angle of hatching.
Hatching Pattern: Here, you enter an AutoCAD hatching pattern to be used for cross-section
hatching.
SINGLE PART DIALOG TAB
Group Add Cross-Sections
Standard Shapes : Additional cross-sections are added to the views of standard shapes.
Special Shapes: Additional cross-sections are added to the views of special shapes.
Roof-Wall: Additional cross-sections are added to the views of roof-wall-shapes.
Combi Shapes: Additional cross-sections are added to the views of combi-shapes.
Weld Shapes: Additional cross-sections are added to the views of weld shapes.
At End Plates: In the plan view of a base or end plate, the cross-section of the welded shape is
displayed.
Position Transversal: In the selection list, you define on which side of a partial view the cross-
section of the shape has to be displayed.
Left – The cross-section is displayed on the left.
Right – The cross-section is displayed on the right.
Group Others
Origin: The zero point reference of coordinate dimensioning of the single part is displayed as
reference point or at American dimensioning option as special symbol for “Running dimension”.
> Symbol Size: Here, you enter the size of the symbol.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-54
Detailing Style
COMPONENT GROUPS DIALOG TAB
Group Cuts
Display: 2D-cuts (manual or automatic at e.g. stiffeners) inserted into the main part are added as
additional view to the group.
Here you have to differentiate between 2D-cuts in the model and 2D-cuts in the details: 2D-cuts
inserted in the model only define whether and how a detail has to be cut at detailing process.
Only manual: Only manually added cuts are displayed. Cuts automatically determined by the
program are not depicted.
Identical 1x: Cuts having an identical display are only depicted once.
Arrange Below : The cuts are not depicted on the left and/or on the right of the main view (mostly
the front view), but beneath the last views, one beside the other.
Symbol Outside : Cut arrows are displayed outside of the last dimensioning chains. Otherwise,
they are fixed directly at the part even in front of the dimensioning chains.
Labeling: here, you indicate the cut designation (without the code letter for cut) that has to be used
for labeling the cut views.
Cut Symbol: Here, you can select a template describing the display of cut labeling. These
templates can be defined within the command “Insert 2D cut”.
Code: Here, you enter the code letter (or number) that has to be used to describe the first cut of a
group. All other cuts of this group will be counted accordingly in increasing order.
Group Neighboring Parts
Display: The neighboring parts of a group are also depicted. These are the parts where the group is
connected, which however don’t belong to this group any more.
Position Flag: The position flags of the neighboring parts are also inserted in the view.
Detailing Style: The detailing style used for displaying the neighboring parts.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-55
Detailing Style
Search Area: The size of an imaginary box around the whole group. Everything inside of this box
will be displayed as neighbouring part up to the edges of this box.
You may define the box in the three input fields separately for X-, Y- and Z-direction of the group.
Group End Plates:
Display: A single part detail of the end plates will be depicted with displayed connection shape on
the corresponding side of the group, if end or base plates exist.
Detailing Style: The detailing style used for displaying the end plates.
View: Here, you specify the view direction of the end plate detail related to the group.
Inside – The shape to be connected is depicted as cut.
Outside – The shape to be connected is depicted as hidden.
Distance: The distance of the end plate details towards the other views of the group.
Group Others
Origin: The zero point reference of coordinate dimensioning of the group is displayed as reference
point or at American dimensioning option as special symbol for “Running dimensions (RD)”.
> Symbol Size: Here, you enter the size of the reference point or of the symbol.
Benchmark: A mark is displayed at the group showing the alignment with regard to a global
northern direction.
In the global settings, the American dimensioning style has to be activated.
US-Mark-Numbering: The US-part number or position number as well as the quantity of pieces is
shown together with the longitudinal dimension chain.
However, the US-part number has to exist already, i.e. the option is not activated unless an update
has been made.
Mounting Position: In the case of stiffeners and web angles, it is specified whether these are
situated on the front or back side of the web or on both sides of the web (in case of identical parts).
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-56
Detailing Style
VIEWS DIALOG TAB
Group Part-Filter
Shapes: Shapes are displayed in the view unless it is a matter of the types that are set separately in
the filter. Normally, this option should be activated.
Distinguishing between the different component parts is of course possible only if these have been
generated with the associated functions as well. Otherwise, a web angle created as manually
drilled angle steel would be interpreted as a normal shape.
Poly-Plates: Poly-plates are displayed in the view unless it is a matter of stiffeners or bracing
plates.
Stiffeners: Stiffeners are displayed in the view.
Bracing Plate: Bracing plates (gusset plates) are displayed in the view.
Web Angle: Web angles are displayed in the view.
End Plates: End plates are displayed in the view.
Base Plates: Base Plates are displayed in the view.
Special Parts: Special parts are displayed in the view (e.g. ACIS-3D solids).
Only in Frame: Only those parts are taken into consideration which are situated completely or at
least up to their half within the work frame.
Thus you can make a special selection out of the area – otherwise, all parts are shown which are
situated on the level of the work frame (i.e. in the way you would see them in reality.
Base Plate at: Head and base plates are displayed if the option ‘Sketch’ or ‘System Lines’ has been
selected under display variant. Otherwise, they are always displayed.
Use XRef: The parts added to the model via XREF’s are displayed and dimensioned as well. The
above mentioned display filters are also valid for these component parts. Please refer to your
AutoCAD documentation where you will find a description how to work with XREF’s.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-57
Detailing Style
Min. Part Size: Here, you can exclude small parts from selection by specifying the distance of the
most distant and farthest removed, opposing corners. If the corner distance is smaller than the
indicated value, the part will not be recorded. This setting is unimportant if the value 0 has been
entered here. None of the parts are then filtered with this function.
Group Display Variant
Standard: The overview is displayed as standard 2D-depiction where all hidden edges are correctly
determined.
'Sketch: The construction components are only hinted at as sketch drawing. It is not absolutely
necessary that this sketch drawing has to be seen from the beginning till the end of a component
part. It is possible that only the center line is displayed.
> Offset Edge: Here, you specify the distance the beginning of the sketch drawing has to have
from the insertion point of the shape. If you indicated a relative length smaller than 100%, this is
also the beginning of the center line.
> Rel. Length: Here, you specify the length of the sketch drawing as relative value related to the
shape length. The rest will only be displayed as center line.
Objects: These component parts are displayed as intelligent 2D-objects. At this method, however,
the hidden edges are only displayed correctly in relation to the corresponding part. Hidden edges,
which are created due to other components, cannot be calculated.
This method is suitable if you want to attach position flags later. By means of shape
characteristics, it is also possible to indicate individual depictions per component part if an exact
display of hidden edges is not so important e.g. in overviews for discussions.
System Lines : Only the center lines of shapes are displayed as static system, plates and similar
component parts are not displayed.
Anchoring: An anchor plan with alternatively two different scales is generated. Display of the base
plates can thus be depicted in an enlarged display.
> With Supports: In addition to the anchor details, the supports are also displayed as cross-section.
> As Object: The supports in the anchor plan are displayed as intelligent 2D-Objects.
> Details 1: Here, you enter the scale of base plate details in the anchor plan.
However, an anchor plan can only be generated if you have linked the view “Anchor Plan” in the
component parts list with this style setting.
Group Visual Depth
View Frame: The visual depths assigned to the work frames are used for views.
Dialog Default: The visual depths specified in this dialog are used for views.
> Front/Back: Enter the visual depths Front and Back, which have to be used for the views.
Max. Distance: Enter the maximum distance another work frame is allowed to be removed from
the current view to be interpreted there as construction axis for axis display and dimensioning.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-58
Detailing Style
DIALOG-COMMANDS
FILTER
By clicking on this button, you can define a filter of your own from other parts properties apart from
the previously defined filters of the group Part Filter. Then, a dialog opens for entering the filter
condition.
Description: The shape description can be used as filter criterion. The terms available for selection
are displayed in the list.
Part Family: The part family can be used as filter criterion. The part families available for
selection are displayed in the list.
Include: The part is displayed if it corresponds to another type in the second list (logical OR).
Exclude: The part is not displayed if it corresponds to another type in the second list (neg. OR).
When you click on this button, the selected entry of the first list will be adopted in the second list.
When you click on this button, the selected entry in the second list will be removed again from this list.
CONSTRUCTION AXES IN OVERVIEWS

The figure below shows the connections between current view and construction axes.
In the current view (gray) work area 1 and the construction axes A, B and C would be displayed. The
corresponding work frames contain the information about axis description and text display. As,
however, the construction axis C is situated outside the displayed construction, it could be hidden with
the “Axes only within” option.
The axes of the small work area 2 would only be displayed if the smallest distance of the
corresponding relevant work frame was smaller than the preset value of ‘Max. Distance’ for the visual
depth.
If different values have been indicated for the left and right axis description, the value is used which is
next to the current view.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-59
Detailing Style
CONNECTION DETAILS AND CRANKED VIEWS OR CUTS

In addition to standard views on work areas, AutoPLANT Structural can also generate cranked views
and detail point overviews (connection details). The kind of view is determined by the kind of work
area defining the view.
If a depth has been indicated for the work area, it is a matter of detail point overview allowing you to
display several views on this area simultaneously (front view, plan view, etc.). Detailing is effected
like that of a standard overview, i.e. all parts are exported as AutoCAD lines and dimensioned
according to the settings for overviews.
If a cranked cut has been inserted, you can display a cut though the model which is situated in different
levels. You can hide undesired sections or refrain from an additional view. Depending on the position
of the cutting line, the parts are cut or displayed as view.
The neighboring figure shows you the different variants:
The standard front view shows the supports 1, 2 and 3 as view unless the visual depth of the work area
reaches up to support 4.
The cranked view only shows the supports 1 and 4 in the area of the indicated visual depth. If there
were parts on the thick, black cutting line, they would be displayed as cut.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-60
Detailing Style
The detail point overview shows the construction 5 in the selected views (here front view and view
from the right), the cutting depth results from the corresponding 3rd dimension of the cube.
The result of detailing process is displayed in the following figure. The display of dimensions, position
flags, etc. depends on the selected detailing style:
DIALOG TAB LINE DISPLAY
Group Colour and Line Type
Definition: Here, you select the source of the definitions for the display of Line Type. It describes
the line type and the colour of the lines of a component part in the 2D-depiction.
Detailing Style – The definitions result from the settings on this page.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-61
Detailing Style
Configuration – The definitions result from the configuration file of AutoPLANT Structural.
From File – The definitions result from a separate definition file.
Colour: Enter here, which colour has to be used for the three kinds of lines of the component part
(visible, invisible and center line).
Use the AutoCAD-colour numbers for this.
Line Type: Enter here, which line type, has to be used for the three kinds of lines of the
component part (visible, invisible and center line).
DIALOG-COMMANDS
CHOOSE COLOUR
When you click on this button, the AutoCAD standard dialog for colour selection opens where you can
choose the colour number graphically.
DIALOG TAB LINE DISPLAY CENTER LINE
Group Generalities:
Center Line: The center lines are displayed for the parts selected on this dialog tab.
Offset:: Here, you set the extension value by which the center line is extended beyond both shape
ends.
Group Special Shapes
Special Shapes: Center lines for special shapes are displayed.
Roof-Wall: Center lines for roof-wall-shapes are displayed.
Combi Shapes: Center lines for combi shapes are displayed.
Welded Shapes: Center lines for welded shapes are displayed.
Group Others
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-62
Detailing Style
Shape List: By checking in the list you choose for which one of the different types of standard
shapes the centerlines have to be displayed.
DIALOG TAB DRILL HOLES
Group Hole Axes
In View: A hole view will display the axis.
> Projection: Enter the extension of the axis beyond the outside edges of the shape.
In Plan View: A plan view on the hole will display the two axes (horizontal and vertical).
> Projection: Enter the extension of the axis beyond the hole display.
> Rotate by 45°: The two axes lines are rotated by 45° to prevent dimension line overlaps.
Group Hole Display
Hidden: The hidden (invisible) holes are displayed using a dotted line in plan view.
Otherwise, only the axes are displayed if these are chosen for display. However, if you selected
'Old Standard' the axes are always displayed.
Real Holes: The holes are depicted aaccording to their diameter as either circular holes or hidden
edges.
Otherwise, only the axes are displayed if these are chosen for display.
> Filled: The hole displayed is completely filled.
Old Standard: The holes are depicted in a plan view with the former DIN steel construction
symbol specifying the diameter.
> Symbol Size: The symbol size according to old standard.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-63
Detailing Style
DIMENSIONING
Here, you can indicate all of the settings for the dimensioning of the components. Since this is a rather
complex area, the settings are distributed among several subordinate dialogs within this main group. In
addition, you will find completing dialog boxes which can be opened from the different pages.
DIALOG TAB GENERALITIES
Group Dim Chains
Normal: Customary relative dimension chains are attached.
Coordinates: Dimension chains are attached with continuous dimensioning to a reference point
(coordinate dimensioning).
Both: Relative dimension chains and – here included – the corresponding coordinate dimensions
are attached at the same time. You have the option to exclude certain parts of construction groups
from coordinate dimensioning.
Associative: The dimensioning is created as really associative dimensioning without text

overwriting as far as possible. In case of manual manipulations dimensioning is automatically
adapted to the measured values.
Optimization: The program will position the dimensioning texts in a better way according to the
settings on the page ‘Optimization’. Optimization can be switched off later if you want to displace
the dimensions manually according to another method or if you do not expect overlaps. You will
then obtain the dimensions on the position where AutoCAD would place them as default position.
Complete (hor.): Always complete dimension chains lengthways to the component part are built.
The missing dimensions are added to the overall length.
Complete (vert.): Always complete dimension chains transversely to the component part are built.
The missing dimensions are added to the overall width.
Divide: At hole dimensioning each individual hole diameter gets its own dimension chain. The
dimensioned hole diameter then is indicated on the dimension line.
Coord. Extra: Only one common coordinate dimension chain is attached per dimension chain
block ((above, below, left or right of the part).
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-64
Detailing Style
Weld Cracks: Small welding cracks will be assigned their own dimensioning line. This is a minor
option if ‘Divide Hole Rows’ has been selected because here a distinction is made between
diameters anyway.
Diameter: At hole dimensioning the hole diameter is indicated on the dimension construction line.
This is a minor option if ‘Divide Hole Rows’ has been selected because the hole diameter is
indicated on the dimension line.
Label : The things located by dimension chain (stiffeners, holes, etc.) are written as text to the
dimension line.
> Text Size: The text height of the dimension chain labels (mm).
Length of Construction Lines: The construction lines have exactly the length specified in the input
field 'Distance Construction Line'. If this field has not been checked, the dimension chains are cut
at each other with the distance specified in the input field 'Length Construction Line'.
Group Standard Dimensioning Style and Coordinate Style
Selection List: Here you can select the dimensioning style (AutoCAD) to be used for the
dimensioning in question. This style is going to control all properties such as text colour, text size,
etc. For radii and angles the corresponding subordinate style of an AutoCAD dimensioning style
can additionally be used.
Variant 1 / 2: Here, you can indicate two alternative styles to be assigned as style variant to
different dimension chains.
If you have selected the entry ‚Auto Smaller', a copy with smaller text sizes (factor 0.7) is
generated from the basic style. If you have selected the entry ‚Auto Larger', a copy with larger text
sizes (factor 1.4) is generated from the basic style.
Style variants allow you e.g. to emphasize overall dimensions or to use smaller texts when space is
limited.
Group Distances
Min. Distance: Here, you enter the smallest distance to be dimensioned. If this distance is smaller
than the value, it is added to the next dimension.
First Dim. Chain: Here, you enter the distance from the outer limit of the component up to the 1st
dimension line. If you selected the option ‘First Position Flags’ in the FLAGS dialog tab, this field
contains the distance from the outermost position flag.
Between Dim: Here, you enter the distance between the individual dimension lines.
Dim. Construction Line: Here, you enter the length of the dimension construction lines, if you
selected ’Fixed Construction Line Length’. Otherwise, enter the distance from the start of the
construction line up to the previous dimension chain. In this case, entering the value 0 will not cut
the construction lines at the previous dimension chain but they are extended to the point to be
dimensioned.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-65
Detailing Style
DRILL HOLES DIALOG TAB
Group Holes in Plan View
Long. Direction: Drill holes appearing in plan view (vertical drill holes) are dimensioned
lengthwise of the component part. Vertical drill holes mean the drill holes you see as plan view
when looking at the hole (“vertical to the screen”).
Transv. Direction: Drill holes appearing in plan view (vertical drill holes) are dimensioned
crosswise of the component part. Vertical drill holes mean the drill holes you see as plan view
when looking at the hole (“vertical to the screen”).
> Hole Groups: New dimension chains within the component part are created in case of modified
transversal distances.
Otherwise, a common dimension chain is positioned beside the component part. The dimensions
of the first and last hole group, however, are drawn to the outside if they are near enough at the
end of the component part.
> Axes: Common axis lines are displayed within the hole groups if the ‘Divide Hole Groups’
setting has been checked.
> No at outside: The dimensions of the first and last hole group are not drawn to the outside at
‘Divide Hole Groups’ setting. They are also positioned near by the hole group. This setting is e.g.
reasonable if apart from the component part additional dimensions for secondary parts of
component groups are to be expected.
> As Back Pitch: Symmetric hole distances around the center line are summed up to a common
measure.
Only Visible: Only those holes are dimensioned which are visible in the corresponding view. At a
plan view for example, the holes of the shape’s bottom flange are not dimensioned unless they
were visible due to gaps in the upper flange.
Individual Flange: The drill holes of upper and bottom flange are dimensioned in an individual
dimension chain each unless excluded from dimensioning by ‘Only Visible Holes’ command.
Diameter: The hole diameter is written beside the hole groups. If the value does not change, the
diameter is only indicated once per hole line or complete hole group.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-66
Detailing Style
> Text Size: Enter the text size for diameter labeling.
> Distance: Here, you can indicate the distance of diameter labeling from the edge of the hole.
Positive values signify a labeling on the right above the center, negative values signify a labeling
on the right below the center.
New Dimensions: Here, you enter the distance from one hole group resp. drill hole dimensioning
to the other at which a new (redundant) dimensioning has to be carried out. This permits a clearer
dimensioning of far away positioned identical hole screen dimensions as the dimension chains
resp. the indications of diameters are repeated.
Group Holes in View
Long. Direction : Drill holes in view direction (parallel drill holes) are dimensioned lengthwise of
the component part. Parallel drill holes mean the drill holes you see as view when looking at the
hole (“parallel to the screen”).
As Back Pitch: You enter the back pitches including the diameter of the parallel drill holes.
Continous constant back pitches are displayed as a group.
> Marking: Beginning and end of a group are displayed by a marking.
> Text Size: Here, you enter the text size for back pitch labeling.
> Distance: Here, you can indicate the distance of back pitch labeling from the edge of the
component part. Positive values signify a labeling outside the component part, negative values
signify a labeling inside the component part.
New Dimensions: Here, you enter the distance from one back pitch to the other at which a new
(redundant) dimensioning has to be carried out. This permits a clearer dimensioning of far away
positioned identical back pitches as the indications are repeated.
DIALOG TAB SINGLE PARTS
Group Generalities
Coord. Transv: Coordinate dimensioning is also displayed in transversal direction of the

component part (e.g. at hole groups).
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-67
Detailing Style
Reference Point The dimensioning of drill holes is related to the reference point of the component part.
Otherwise, it is related to the outside edges.
Style Variants In the list, you can see to which dimension chains the style ‘Variant 1’ or ‘Variant 2’
has been assigned by means of the variants.
LIN-2 signifies e.g. that variant 2 has been selected for normal (linear) dimensioning.
Group Dimension Chains
Length: The length of the single part is dimensioned.
Width/Height: The width or height of the single part is dimensioned (depending on the view).
Outer Contour : Copes or other outside polycuts of the single part are dimensioned.
Inner Contour: Inside polycuts of the component part are dimensioned (e.g. penetrations.
Radius: Circle radii of component contours are dimensioned. If defined, the subordinate radius
style of the selected AutoCAD dimensioning style is used.
> Center: The center points of radii are checked and dimensioned in a separate linear dimension
chain.
Cut Angle: All angles are dimensioned which were created by line cuts or polycuts. If defined, the
subordinate angle style of the selected AutoCAD dimensioning style is used.
Group Miscellaneous
Distance System: The distances of the ends of the component parts are dimensioned related to the
system points of the construction (these are the theoretical intersection points between the center
axes of connected shape and the corresponding support shapes).
Gradient: Measures of angle as triangle with indication of length and reference height instead of
usual angle measures if US-dimensioning is used.
US-Cope: Copes at the ends of the component parts are indicated with length and depth if US-
dimensioning is used.
DIALOG-COMMANDS
STYLE VARIANTS
Click on this button to open the dialog for the style variants. You can then assign a different style
variant to the individual dimension chains.
This subordinate dialog can also be accessed via the dimension settings for groups or views. Here, you
can assign a style variant to (almost) any dimension chain, separately for standard linear dimensioning
as well as the coordinate dimensioning.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-68
Detailing Style
List: Int he List, you click on the desired dimension chain to which you want to assign a style
variant.
Variant ½: Here, you assign a style variant to the selected dimension chain. If you click e.g. on
variant 1, the dimension chain receives the style defined by you in the basic dialog for the variant
1.
Standard: The allocation of a style variant is cancelled and the dimension chain is displayed with
the basic dimensioning style.
The allocation of style variants shows a more clearly structured dimensioning. Outer dimensions can
be emphasized with larger text or different dimension ranges can be colored. You could also use
dimension chains with tolerance specifications for hole dimensions or, in case you anticipate many
“tight” dimensions, you could also work with smaller text. There are many ways to use this option to
your advantage.
If you want to vary only the text sizes, you can also use the setting “Auto” bcause this will
automatically adjust the necessary text sizes (factor 0.7 or 1.4). If you would also like to change colors
or select other text sizes, you have to select a different AutoCAD dimensioning style.
DIALOG TAB GROUPS
Group Generalities
Complete (hor.): All dimension chains are completed lengthways to the overall length of the
group.
Complete (vert.): All dimension chains are completed crossways to the overall width of the group.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-69
Detailing Style
Flat Steel as: Flats (e.g. fishplates) are included in the dimension chains of the poly-plates and not
dimensioned as shape.
Reference Point: The dimensioning of subordinate parts is related to the reference point of the
main part. Otherwise, it is related to the outside edges of the main part.
Style Variants: In the list, you can see to which dimension chains the style ‘Variant 1’ or ‘Variant
2’ has been assigned by means of the variants.
Length: The overall length of the group is dimensioned.
Width/Height: The overall width or height of the group is dimensioned.
System: The distances between the group and the system points of the construction are
dimensioned.
Diagonals: Diagonal shapes are dimensioned over the longest length.
> System: The distances related to the system points of the diagonal are dimensioned additionally.
> Total Measure: The distance from one system point to the other is dimensioned.
Manual Dim: The dimensioning points manually attached in the model are dimensioned as well
according to their default settings.
Group Main/Subparts
Main Part: In addition, the main part is dimensioned with the most important dimensions like a
single part.
Coordinates: The main part is dimensioned with coordinate measures if you define to dimension it
like a single part of the group. Thus, you can limit coordinate dimensioning only to the weld
measures of the subparts in case of mixed dimensioning of main and subparts.
Subparts: The position of subparts is dimensioned.
> Dimension 1x : If several views of the group are displayed, subparts are only dimensioned 1x
per dimension in the most suitable view. Otherwise, the subparts are dimensioned redundantly in
each view.
> Repeat: Within this view, identical part dimensions are dimensioned only once in transversal
direction. Otherwise, each subpart is again dimensioned redundantly.
> Coordinates: Coordinate dimensioning of subparts is also attached in transversal direction if they
are dimensioned with coordinate measures.
Main Part First : The inner dimension chains of the construction group view are the dimension
chains of the main part; otherwise the dimension chains of the subpart.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-70
Detailing Style
Group Miscellaneous
Connected Shape: The system points of the connected shapes are dimensioned and the
dimensioning of subpart or mainpart shape holes is related to this dimensioning.
> Reference Point: The reference points of the connected shapes are used to determine the system
points; otherwise, the center axis is used.
> Coordinates: The connected shapes are additionally dimensioned with coordinate dimensioning.
> Search Area: Here, you can specify the maximum distance up to which a hole in the
subpart/main part is assigned to the corresponding system point of the connected shapes.
DIALOG TAB GROUPS REFERENCE POINTS
Group Shapes
No dimension: The position of the shapes in a group is not dimensioned.
Outer Edge: The position of the shapes is dimensioned on the base of their outer edges.
Shape Center: The position of the shapes is dimensioned on the base of the geometrical shape
center (center axis).
Drill Holes: The position of the shapes is dimensioned on the base of their drill holes, if existing.
Otherwise, dimensioning is based on the outer edges.
Outer Edge/Hole: The position of the shapes is dimensioned in a common dimension chain on the
base of their outer edges and drill holes.
One Hole: If the option Dimensioning on Hole or Dimensioning on Outer Edge/Hole is activated,
the shape is only dimensioned on the base of the drill hole, which is situated extremely outside.
One Edge: If the option Dimensioning on Outer Edge or Dimensioning on Outer Edge/Hole is
activated, the shape is only dimensioned on the base of the edge that is situated at the very front.
One Dim. Chain: The length dimension chains of shapes are summed up to a common dimension
chain, if they are situated on different sides of the part.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-71
Detailing Style
Coordinates: The shapes are dimensioned with coordinate measures. Thus, you can exclude certain
parts from coordinate dimensioning in case of mixed dimensioning.
Input Field: Here, you can indicate the position of the generated dimension chain related to the
other subpart dimension chains if these are situated on the same side of the part.
Group Polyplates
Settings: All settings correspond to those described under shapes. Thus, they haven’t to be
mentioned in detail once again. Here, you define the behaviour of the dimensioning for all
polyplates existing in the construction (e.g. gusset plates) apart from the stiffeners.
Please note that a separation of the stiffeners from other plates is only possible if these have been
created using the stiffener command or as selection of additional component parts when creating
plate connections.
Group Stiffeners
No dimension: The position of the stiffeners in the group is not dimensioned.
Stiffener Center : The position of the stiffeners is dimensioned on the base of the geometrical
stiffener center.
Outer Edge: The position of the stiffeners is dimensioned on the base of their outer edges.
One Edge: If the option Dimensioning on Outer Edge is activated, the stiffener is only
dimensioned on the base of the edge which is situated at the very front.
Coordinates: The stiffeners are dimensioned with coordinate measures. Thus, you can exclude
certain parts from coordinate dimensioning in case of mixed dimensioning.
Input Field: Here, you can indicate the position of the generated dimension chain related to the
other subpart dimension chains if these are situated on the same side of the part.
Group End Plates
Please note that a separation of the end and base plates from the other shapes is only possible if these
have been created using the corresponding commands.
No Dimension: The position of the end plates in the group is not dimensioned.
Outer Edge: The position of the end plates is dimensioned on the base of their outer edges.
Drill Holes: The position of the end plates is dimensioned on the base of their drill holes, if
existing. Otherwise, dimensioning is based on the outer edges.
Bent: The bent or folded end plate details are dimensioned as well like a single part.
One Dim. Chain: The length dimension chains of end plates are summed up to a common
dimension chain, if they are situated on different sides of the part.
Coordinates: The end plates are dimensioned with coordinate measures. You can exclude certain
parts from coordinate dimensioning in case of mixed dimensioning.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-72
Detailing Style
Group Miscellaneous
ORDER: Click on this button to apply the order of the dimension chains indicated in the input
fields. It is not possible to use the same order number several times.
DIALOG TAB GROUPS CUT
Please note that the dimensioning settings of subparts also influence the dimensioning of cuts. If e.g.
the dimensioning of polyplates has been deactivated, no dimensioning will be effected in the cut, too.
Dimension: Automatic 2D-cuts are dimensioned.
No Poly: Polyplates of cuts are not dimensioned even if they are activated in general.
No Stiffeners: Stiffeners of cuts are not dimensioned even if they are activated in general.
Reference Point: Dimensioning of cuts is related to the reference point of the main part.
Coordinates: The values of cuts are dimensioned with coordinate measures if ‘Both’ has been
selected for the dimension chain type. Thus, you can exclude the cuts from coordinate
dimensioning in case of mixed dimensioning.
REFERENCE POINTS
In the shape properties, you can assign so-called reference points or axes to a shape. After insertion,
they first are identical with the insertion axis of the component part.
This permits you to force dimensioning on a specified reference to allow e.g. to relate all important
hole dimensions symmetrically to the center axis or to “Upper Edge Steel” for plateform girders.
In overviews, the most important dimensions of the construction are also directly displayed by means
of these reference points. Since these reference points can be modified later, a shape can for example
be inserted on its center line in the grid, dimensioning, however, can nevertheless be related to the
upper edge of the shape.
SYSTEM POINTS
The system points here are the theoretical intersection points of the center lines of a shape and the
shape to which it is connected.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-73
Detailing Style
A logical link has to be activated between these component parts, which is the case in the most
construction situations (such a link is e.g. also generated by the cut at welded diagonals of a roof truss).
If a logical link doesn’t exist, a dependence can be defined later via a “manual link”.
DIALOG TAB VIEWS
Group Generalities
Collect: Similar dimension chains in horizontal and vertical direction are collected in one common
dimension chain (e.g. all horizontal shapes and vertically dimensioned cross-sections). Even
dimension chains situated on different sides are collected in one common dimension chain.
Elevation: At coordinate measures in vertical direction, the reference height for Z=0 indicated in
the settings of the Detail Center will be applied.
To constr. Axes: The dimensioning of component parts is related to the construction axes (work
area views) running next to the parts.
Axes display has to be activated in the label settings.
Only Hole: At anchor plans, dimensioning of the base plate holes is only related to their drill holes
and not additionally to the center of the base plate.
Min. Shape Length: Here, you enter the minimum length of the component part from which the
parts are dimensioned, if these are visible in one of the complete views. Parts, which are smaller
than the indicated value, are not taken into account.
Min. Cross-section: Here, you enter the minimum dimensions of the component part from which
on the parts are still dimensioned, if these are visible as cross-section. Parts, which are smaller
than the indicated value, are not taken into account.
Style Variants: In the list, you can see to which dimension chains the style ‘Variant 1’ or ‘Variant 2’
has been assigned by means of the variants.
Total Dimensions: The overall length and width or height of the view is dimensioned. Any
possible construction axes situated outside will be taken into consideration at calculation of
dimensions.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-74
Detailing Style
Construction Axes: The existing construction axes (work frame axes) of the view are
dimensioned.
Axes display has to be activated in the label settings.
Outer Edge: The outside dimensions of the steel construction are dimensioned and related to the
possibly existing outer construction axes.
Diagonals: Diagonal shapes are dimensioned over the longest length.
> System: The distances related to the system points of the diagonal will be dimensioned
additionally.
> Overall Dimension: The distance from one system point to the other will be dimensioned.
Manual Dim: The dimensioning points manually attached in the model are dimensioned as well
according to their default settings.
Group Filter Overall Dimension
Here, you have the possibility to exclude certain parts from the calculation of overall dimensions to
prevent it from increasing e.g. by the projection of base plates.
Endplate hor: End and base plates in horizontal direction (width) are not taken into consideration.
Endplate ver: End and base plates in vertical direction (height) are not taken into consideration.
Polyplates hor: Polyplates and stiffeners in horizontal direction are not taken into consideration.
Polyplates ver: Polyplates and stiffeners in vertical direction are not taken into consideration.
Opposite Type hor: The shape type opposite to the view (i.e. at views the shapes in cross-section
display and at plan view the shapes in view display) in horizontal direction is not taken into
consideration.
Opposite Type ver: he shape type opposite to the view (i.e. at views the shapes in cross-section
display and at plan view the shapes in view display) in vertical direction is not taken into
consideration.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-75
Detailing Style
DIALOG TAB VIEWS REFERENCE POINTS
Group Supports
No Dimension: The position of vertical shapes is not dimensioned in horizontal direction.
Outer Edge: The position of vertical shapes is dimensioned on the base of their outer edges in
horizontal direction.
Shape Center: The position of vertical shapes is dimensioned on the base of their center axis in
Edge/Center: The position of vertical shapes is dimensioned in two separate dimension chains in
horizontal direction, one on the base of their outer edges and the other on the base of their center
axes.
Reference Point: The position of vertical shapes is dimensioned on the base of their reference axis
in horizontal direction.
Coordinates: The vertical shapes are additionally dimensioned with coordinate measures in
horizontal direction. Thus, you can exclude certain parts from coordinate dimensioning in case of
mixed dimensioning.
Group Cross-Girders
No Dimension: The position of horizontal shapes is not dimensioned in vertical direction.
Outer Edge: The position of horizontal shapes is dimensioned on the base of their outer edges in
vertical direction.
Shape Center: The position of horizontal shapes is dimensioned on the base of their center axis in
vertical direction.
Edge/Center: The position of horizontal shapes is dimensioned in two separate dimension chains
in vertical direction, one on the base of their outer edges and the other on the base of their center
axes.
Reference Point: The position of horizontal shapes is dimensioned on the base of their reference
axis in vertical direction.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-76
Detailing Style
Upper Edge: The position of horizontal shapes is dimensioned on the base of the upper edge of the
shape in vertical direction.
Coordinates: The horizontal shapes are additionally dimensioned with coordinate measures in
vertical direction. Thus, you can exclude certain parts from coordinate dimensioning in case of
mixed dimensioning.
Group Cross-Sections (horizontal)
These are the shapes which are visible as cross-section in the view and which are dimensioned in
Settings: All settings correspond to those of the supports. Thus, they don’t have to be mentioned in
detail.
Group Cross-Sections (vertical)
These are the shapes which are visible as cross-section in the view and which are dimensioned in
vertical direction.
Settings: All settings correspond to those of the cross-girders. Thus, they don’t have to be
mentioned in detail.
In the following figure, you will see an example for dimensioning a view including construction axes
display. The first dimension chain from the top is showing the dimensioning of the shapes related to
the construction axes. The second dimension chain is showing the dimensioning of the construction
axes and the third is showing the dimensioning of outer edge steel (2600). The overall dimension
(3000) is measured over the outside axes.
The construction axes 1 and 3 could be hidden in the overviews settings and would not be dimensioned
in this case.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-77
Detailing Style
DIALOG TAB OPTIMIZATION
Group Text Position
No Alternating: The text remains on its original height on the dimension line and is only
optimized according to the other default settings.
Only Above: The text is moved only above the neighboring text so that they overlap horizontally,
but not vertically.
Alternate: The text is moved above and below the dimension line so that they overlap horizontally,
but not vertically.
Along Constr. Lines: The text is moved across the construction lines if it does not fit in between
above the dimension line (even if otherwise not colliding with any other neighboring dimension).
Avoid Text between: The text is supposed to be colliding and optimized if it does not fit in
between above and below the dimension line (even if otherwise not colliding with any other
neighboring dimension).
Outer Dimensions: The two outer dimensions are moved beside the dimension line in horizontal
direction.
Inner Dimensions: The inner dimension texts are moved beside the dimension line in horizontal
direction and inside of a neighboring dimension if the required space exists.
Group Build Groups
Identical Dimensions: Several consecutive identical distances are combined into one shared
dimension. E.g. 3 dimensions à 100 are combined into one dimension with the dimension text
3x100.
Min. Number: Here, you specify the number of identical dimensions from which on they are
combined in a group.
Similar Dimensions: Dimension chains containing few dimensions (e.g. one single drill hole) are
integrated into another dimension chain. It may be that something different has been dimensioned
this other dimension chain (e.g. outer contour). The overall dimensions are excluded from this.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-78
Detailing Style
Max. Number: Here, you specify from which number of dimensions on a dimension chain doesn’t
have to be mixed with another one.
Group Text Display
No Inch: The inch signs are suppressed at dimensioning in the imperial system (inch/foot).
Text Size: A dimension chain is automatically changed to the dimensioning style variant 1 Auto
smaller (x0.7), if thus collisions can be avoided.
If the dimension chain has already this style variant, no modification takes place. If a
dimensioning style has been explicitely assigned to style variant 1, this style will be used instead
(even if it wouldn’t have such a favourable text height – which might be).
Rotate Coord.: The dimensioning style for coordinate measures is changed to get a dimensioning
which can be optimized with each other and related to the linear measures (e.g. rotation by 90°).
Otherwise, the AutoCAD-setting is used and a special optimization cannot be carried out.
DIALOG TAB OPTIMIZE DISTANCES
Group Distances
Min. Distance: Here, you enter a value indicating how close together dimension texts within a
dimension chain may be without triggering the collision alarm.
Between: Here, you enter a value indicating how close together dimension texts of different
dimension chains may be without triggering the collision alarm.
Edge Distance: Here, you enter a minimum distance between the dimensioning of the hole group
or subpart and the end of the component part which is admissible before it is moved outside.
Max. Together: Here, you enter the maximum distance up to which subpart dimension chains in
transversal direction at groups are combined to one single dimension chain.
Group Diagonals
Angle: Here you enter the minimum and maximum angle the shape must resp. is allowed to have
towards main dimensioning direction to be recognized as diagonal.
This option permits you to prevent that e.g. a roof girder is dimensioned as diagonal.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-79
Detailing Style
Min. Length: Here, you enter the minimum length the shape must have to be recognized as
diagonal.
Flat Steel: Shapes of flat steel are not recognized as diagonal and excluded from diagonal
dimensioning.
You can thus prevent that e.g. a top chord of a haunch is dimensioned as diagonal.
The picture below shows the different optimization settings for dimension chains:
LABEL SETTINGS
Use this dialog tab to specify if and what type of position flag or welding symbol to attach to the
construction parts. In addition, you indicate how the details and views have to be labeled.
DIALOG TAB POSITION FLAGS

Group Generalities
Flag First: The position flags are attached before part dimensioning so that they are near the part.
Only 1st View: In case of several partial views of a detail, the position flags are only attached to
the first view (except for possible 2D cuts and folded end plates).
Also Cuts: Position flags are also attached to all 2D-cuts.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-80
Detailing Style
No Cross-Section: Position flags are not attached to component parts, which are visible as cross-
sections in the view.
Plate in View: A position flag is also attached to polyplates and stiffeners in model-views
(overviews).
Alignment: Here, you select the aligment of the position flags in the detail drawing.
Horizontal - all position flags are aligned horizontally.
Group Position Flags
Main Parts: A position flag is attached to the main parts of construction groups.
Subparts: A position flag is attached to the subparts of construction groups.
Single Parts: A position flag is attached to the component parts not belonging to a group.
Bolts: A position flag is attached to the bolts of a construction group.
Template: Here, you select the template for automatic distribution of position flags. The template
controls what has to be displayed in the individual position flags, how the flag is structured and
according to which criteria the distribution in the detail or in the view is effected.
You create a distribution template in the positioning command and only load it here.
DIALOG TAB WELDING SYMBOLS

Group Generalities
End Plates: The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are displayed in single parts views
for base and endplates, if the connection shape is shown, too.
Groups: The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are displayed in group views.
> Folded: The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are displayed in-group views for
folded end plates.
Group Welding Symbols
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-81
Detailing Style
Template: Here, you select the template for automatic distribution of welding symbols. The
template controls what has to be displayed in the individual welding symbols, how the flag is
structured and according to which criteria the distribution in the detail or in the view is effected.
You create a distribution template in the positioning command and only load it here.
DIALOG TAB ADDITIONAL TEXTS
Group Detail Labeling
Partial View: The name of the partial view is displayed.
Scale: The detailing scale is displayed.

If you have selected ‘Partial View’ and ‘Scale’, both are used to create an entry in the form of
"Front View (M1: 10)".
Number: The total quantity of component parts in the model is displayed. Of course the quantity
of parts is only valid after previous positioning.
Name: The name of the component part or view is displayed.
Shape Length: The length of the component part is displayed.
Material: The Material designation of the component part is displayed. If you have simultaneously
checked ‘Shape Name', 'Shape Length' and ‘Material' , all are used to create an entry in the form of
"HE 200 B...7800 RST-37-2".
Modification: The modification status of the component part is displayed.
Position No.: The position number of the component part is displayed.
> Prefix: Here, you specify which text has to be positioned in front of the position number.
Shipping No.: The shipping number of the component part is displayed.
Note: Comments are displayed, which have been assigned to the part e.g. with "Change
Properties".
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-82
Detailing Style
Text Style: In the selection list, you choose the text style (script) to be used for displaying the text
entries.
Group Language
Standard: The drawing is exclusively labeled in the original language of the program installation.
One Language: The drawing is labeled in the language chosen as ‘First Language’ in the selection
list.
Two Languages: The drawing is labeled in the two languages chosen as ‘First Language’ and
‘Second Language’ in the selection list. The two terms are displayed separately, divided by
oblique stroke, e.g. "Ansicht A / view A". The selection 'Standard' as language corrsponds to the
original language of the program installation.
The translation of the terms is based on a translation database with a translation 1:1. If the
corresponding term is not defined there, the original language of the program installation is used
instead. If there are identical terms at bi-lingual labeling, only one term will be displayed.
Group Text Sizes
Normal Text: Here you enter the text size for the label.
Text Scale: Here, you enter the text size for the position number, view and scale text.
Text at Shape: Here, you enter the text size for the text label at shapes in overviews.
DIALOG TAB ADDITIONAL TEXTS VIEWS
Group Construction Axes
Display: The axes descriptions of the work frames perpendicular toward the current view are
displayed. Text sizes and display form are adopted from the work frame properties.
> Axis Line: The actual axis is also displayed as 2D-line in the corresponding view.
> Only Inner: Only those axes are displayed which are situated within the determined overall
dimensions of the view including a snap range.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-83
Detailing Style
Length: Here, you enter the relative length of the axis line in (%) related to the overall dimensions.
Normally, the axis line is running towards the outer edges of the display (= 100%). If you enter a
value bigger than 100, the lines will be extended over these edges. If you enter a value between 1
and 100, the line will only partly be displayed from the bottom resp. from the left, e.g. to hint only
at it in views.
Text Distance: Here, you enter the distance of axes label towards the last outer dimension chain.
Display beyond: Here, you enter a snap range up to which the axes situated outside the overall
dimensions are still displayed.
Group Shape Label
Display: Component part name and material are written to the corresponding shape at overviews.
> End Plates: Base and end plates are labeled as well.
> Flat Steel: Shapes out of flat steel are labeled as well.
> Plane: The relative position of the upper edge or front edge of the shape is added to the
corresponding view plane unless being situated at the same level.
Text Default: Here you can indicate an additional text for the elevation. The variable $(E) will be
replaced by the current measured value. The text O.K.=$(E) will then e.g. be displayed as
O.K.=+50.
DISPLAY OF RELATIVE ELEVATION

Shape labels can only be attached if the variant ‘Sketch’ or ‘System Lines’ has been selected as display
mode of the overview. The determined text is then entered in the shape properties ’Note 2’ of the
displayed component part, unless the corresponding part in the model has a separate entry there.
Otherwise, the entry is taken from the component part in the model and the variable $(E) possibly
existing there will be replaced. You can define the label for each component part individually. If a text
was neither indicated in the shape nor in the detailing style, only the measured value will be added.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-84
DetailCenter Express
EXAMPLE – DETAILING OF A SINGLE PART

The picture below displays the example of detailing a single part with optimized settings. The example
is based on the following main settings:
Front and plan view are processed in one detail.
The parallel holes are created with the ‘Separate Hole Tracks’ option.
The ‘Separated Hole Tracks’ option is activated.
The ‘Shape Shortening with Zigzag Double-Line’ option is activated.
The ‘Combine Same Dimensions’ option is activated; min. = 3.
Length and width were specified with the variant ‘Auto Larger (x1.4)’.
The effects of the settings can be seen in this detail; no further revisions were required:
DETAILCENTER EXPRESS
The DetailCenter-Express! is an extension of the Detail Center to carry out recurring detailing tasks as
fast as possible.
In the actual Detail Center, you can make exact detailing settings and you can decide for each
component part separately whether and how it has to be detailed and placed on drawings. On the other
hand, the DetailCenter Express! works off the complete detailing according to a pre-set pattern. Start
such a detailing pattern with the preparation of the model for detailing and complete it with clearance
work functions after insertion of the 2D-details in the workshop plans.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-85
You can define the patterns for different tasks by means of templates and then carry out the detailing
with a single mouse click.
As you perhaps know already from the installation assistants of this and other programs, the
DetailCenter Express! will guide you through the necessary settings for the detailing pattern. You only
can start detailing after having made all necessary settings.
For this purpose, the dialog offers you different pages one after the other which can vary depending on
your default settings. In this manual, we can therefore only describe any possible pages in the order of
their being displayed. It can, also be that one or more pages don’t exist due to your default settings.
START THE DETAILCENTER EXPRESS

The model has to be saved under a valid drawing name first to be able to work with the DetailCenter
Express!
Now click on the EXPRESS button in the component parts list of the DetailCenter or select the context
menu. Here, you click on the entry DetailCenter Express! And the following dialog opens:
Click on this button to display the previous page.
Click on this button to display the following page.
Click on this button to start detailing. Detailing will be worked off according to your current settings.
In the selection pages, you can watch in a display what is in process at the very moment.
It is true that you can work with AutoCAD or other applications during detailing process, depending
on the computing capacity of your hardware. We recommend, refraining from this!
After the DetailCenter Express! has completed its work, you are informed about it in an info box.
SELECTION PAGES
In the following, you will find a description of the different possible selection pages. The pages are
displayed in the main dialog box after having been selected with the buttons MORE and BACK.
Each following page depends on your previous settings. If the previous settings are modified, you can
ignore already filled in pages again. Nevertheless, the program will remember the specifications for
later activation.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-86
Click on the PROCEED button with the mouse and you can start the process at any time you like, if
your specifications are complete.
STARTING PAGE
This page is always displayed first. Here, you will set which tasks have to be done for you by the
DetailCenter Express!
Prepare: Here, you specify which corrections have to be made first before style assignments and
detailing will be started.
Single Parts: Here, you can connect loose single parts and group parts with detail styles.
Groups: Here, you can connect groups with detail styles.
Views: Here, you can connect views of work fields as well as plan and top views and anchor plans
with detail styles.
Detailing: here, you can have the parts detailed as detail blocks.
Single Sheet: Here, you can insert detailed detail blocks into workshop plans or activate the single
sheet drawing output of details.
If single sheet drawing has been selected, the parts will be detailed in any case. Detailing
therefore has not to be activated extra.
Clean Up: Here, you can set which corrections still have to be made after end of detailing.
To give you an example: If you want to put out all stiffeners and plates as well as the groups as DIN A-
4 single sheet drawings, independent of already existing style assignments, select the following entries
on the starting page: Prepare Detailing (to delete former assignments), Connect Single Parts with
Detail Style, Connect Groups with Detail Style and Insert Detail Blocks/Single Sheet Drawings. There
you will make the further settings.
Note Please note that the DetailCenter Express! always works off the complete component parts
list. The list is worked on as if you had transferred the complete model for detailing.
PREPARE DETAILING
On this page, you will set which tasks have to be done before starting all further steps.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-87
Cancel Write Protection: Any existing markings are cancelled. Thus you can be sure that all
component parts will be seized by the following actions, if desired.
Delete: All detail styles, which have already been assigned before, will be separated from the
parts. Thus you can be sure that a detail style will be assigned only to the component parts selected
in the DetailCenter Express!.
Reset: All modify flags set by the program will be reset to initialize the model.
Delete links: all pointers referring to detailed or inserted detail blocks entered in the model
drawing will be deleted.
Delete Blocks: Former detail blocks in the detail library of the model will be deleted.
If all fields on this page have been checked, your model drawing will be completely initialized. It is the
same as if a detailing never took place before.
Depending on the time of application of the DetailCenter Express! it is, however, also reasonable to
exclude some points.
DETAIL STYLE FOR SINGLE PARTS

On this page, you make the default settings, which single parts have to be connected with which detail
styles. Both group parts and parts without group are treated here.
The same defaults are valid for automatic connections and for the manual connections in the
component parts list of the Detail Center.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-88
Selection Lists¨Here, you choose the desired detail style to assign to the corresponding component
part type. The parts can of course only be recognized as such if they were created, with the
corresponding AutoPLANT Structural functions.
At style selection, you can differentiate between the detail styles currently existing in the model
drawing and the detail styles saved on the hard drive. If you select a detail style from the hard drive
(marked with a [HD:] put first, e.g. [HD:] plates), it will be automatically loaded and it will replace the
style possibly existing in the drawing.
DETAIL STYLE FOR GROUPS

On this page, you make the default settings, which groups have to be connected with which detail
styles. Only the groups as such are used for assignment, but not the corresponding single parts (non-
recursive connection).
Selection Lists: Here, you choose the desired detail style to assign to the corresponding group
type. The type depends on the main part of the group.
(marked with a [HD:] put first, e.g. [HD:] supports), it will be automatically loaded and it will replace
the style possibly existing in the drawing.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-89
DETAIL STYLE FOR VIEWS

On this page, you make the default settings, which views on the model have to be connected with
which detail styles.
Selection Lists: Here, you choose the desired detail style to assign to the corresponding view.
(marked with a [HD:] put first, e.g. [HD:]view), it will be automatically loaded and it will replace the
style possibly existing in the drawing.
DETAIL STYLES ADDITIONAL TASKS

On this page you make further settings, which have to be valid for the connection with detail styles for
single parts, groups and overviews.
Part Family Single Part: At the connection of single parts, the program first uses the style of a part
family assigned to this part. If there isn’t any part family assigned, or if this part family hasn’t a
detail style of its own, the standard assignment will be used.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-90
Part Family Group: At the connection of groups, the program first uses the style of a part family
assigned to this group. If there isn’t any part family assigned, or if this part family hasn’t a detail
style of its own, the standard assignment will be used.
Assignment: An already existing style assignment of the part will not be overwritten. A detail
style is only assigned to parts without any detail style.
WORK OUT
On this page, you make the default settings, how the component parts have to be worked out. If you
choose the automatic single sheet output, you don’t have to make any additional settings here.
Position once: Only one detail block is created of each position number, divided into single parts
and groups.
Overwrite: Detail blocks of the same part existing in the detail library are overwritten.
Overviews: Overviews are worked out if a detail style has been assigned to them.
Groups: Groups are worked out as group drawing if a detail style has been assigned to them.
Main Parts: The main parts of groups are worked out as single parts.
Sub Parts: The subordinate parts of groups are worked out as single parts.
Single Parts: All single parts not belonging to a group are worked out.
INSERT DETAILS
On this page, you make the default settings, how the worked out detail blocks have to be inserted into
the drawing.
In addition to the actual insertion task, the DetailCenter Express! also permits to fill in the frame field
of the drawing frame as well as to create a parts list. You can select the drawing frame etc. on the
following pages.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-91
Single Sheet: A drawing will be created for each single detail block.
> Scale: At single sheet output, the existing detail scale is adopted to the drawing sheet (the
default setting of the detail style is ignored).
> Sheet Size: At single sheet output, a suitable drawing frame is searched for the existing detail
block.
Arrange: several details are automatically arranged on a drawing sheet according to your default
settings.
Groups: Groups are worked out as group drawing if a detail style has been assigned to them.
Main Parts: The main parts of groups are worked out as single parts.
Subordinate Parts: The subordinate parts of groups are worked out as single parts.
Single Parts: All single parts not belonging to a group are worked out .
Frame Field: The frame field of the drawing frame is filled with the corresponding specifications.
Belonging to: on the drawing frame, a list is created displaying the information about belonging of
the parts (e.g. in which groups a certain single part is contained).
Parts List: A parts list of the displayed details is created on the drawing frame (parts list related to
the drawing).
Mark Numbering: At insertion, the mark number is directly created according to the current
setting in the Detail Center.
For more detailed information about the drawing frames and how to prepare them for output of frame
field and parts lists, please refer to the chapter 'Automatic Single Sheet Output'.
SINGLE SHEET OUTPUT...GENERALITIES

On this page, you make the further default settings for the automatic single sheet output. Depending on
the selected output type (optimized scale or optimized size) certain fields are not accessible. For more
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-92
detailed information about single sheet output of AutoPLANT Structural, please refer to the chapter
'Automatic Single Sheet Output’.
Don’t scale: The parts are displayed without scale. The detail style settings are ignored.
Different...: Different drawing frames can be set for groups and poly plates.
Vertical Format: Details in vertical format can be equipped with another frame.
Scale File: The file is displayed which is the base for the drawing scales if the option ‘Optimized
Scale’ has been selected.
Frame File: The file is displayed which is the base for the drawing frame definitions.
Mark Number File: The file is displayed which is the base for the definitions of US-mark number
if the ‘Use US-mark numbering’ option has been selected.
Output Path: The folder is displayed where the completed workshop drawings will be saved.
Note If you click on the small button on the right beside the corresponding display, you can modify
the files and paths of the defaults.
SINGLE SHEET OUTPUT...DRAWING BORDERS

On this page, you select the desired drawing border(s) for the single sheet output.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-93
Selection Lists: Here, you choose the desired frame type for the output. Only the borders defined
in the sheet pattern file will be displayed.
It is always the standard frame which will be used unless there is an exception for the
corresponding detail.
FILL FRAME FIELD...DRAWING NUMBER

On this page, you make the default settings for filling in the frame field including the generation of a
drawing number. You can also pre-set under which file name the completed workshop plans have to be
stored.
Model Data: The order data for the frame field are transferred from the drawing information table
of the models. Otherwise, another page will be displayed where you can specify the most
important order data.
Store Drawing Number: The file name of the workshop drawing is identical with the drawing
number in the frame field. Otherwise, the current position number is used at single sheet output or
a describing name at compilations.
Drawing Count: Here, you enter the page number for the drawing which has to be created next.
User Variable: Here, you can enter any text you like which will be entered into your drawing
number, depending on whether you make use of the corresponding variable or not.
Drawing Number: Here, you can indicate another definition of the number if you temporarily want
to modify the default of your sheet pattern file.
Template: Here, the current definition of the drawing number of the sheet pattern file is displayed
for your information.
Sheet Number : Here, you see the current continuous number for your information.
The variables at the drawing number permit you a mixed structure of fixed and current values.
Please refer to the chapter 'Automatic Single Sheet Output' for a description of the drawing number
template and the used variables.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-94
FILL HEADER...ENTRIES
On this page, you enter the order data for the fill header. 'Adopt Model Data’ option has to be
deactivated.
When some data have been entered in a field, the corresponding input in the drawing information – if
existing – will be overwritten. If it is a blank field, the specification of the drawing information will be
used.
Input Fields: Here, you can enter the desired data. Then, they are inserted into the frame field.
CLEAN UP DETAILING
On this page, you make the default settings, which tasks have to be done after end of detailing or style
assignment.
Remove: All detail styles, which are not connected with a detail, will be removed from the model
drawing. Copies on the hard drive are saved.
Delete views: Entries existing of manual assignments in the view list of Detail Center will be
deleted.
Detail Blocks: All inserted detail blocks existing in the detail library will be deleted. If this field is
not activated, the detail blocks e.g. of the single sheet output can still be used for other purposes.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-95
Save: The model drawing is saved after completion of the DetailCenter Express! Otherwise, you
have to save it manually to avoid that the information about the worked out and inserted details
will be lost.
SINGLE SHEET OUTPUT

The automatic single sheet output permits to create an individual drawing for each detail to obtain e.g.
a handy compilation of all bracing plates on DIN A-4 sheets or a compilation of documents. Two
variants are offered which have only one difference in procedure.
The first variant is the optimized scale. Here, the program decreases scale until the detail is completely
displayed in the selected drawing border. Scale setting of detail style is ignored and a file with the
available scales is used instead. This avoids use of scales which are not based on practical work or
which are not customary in the corresponding workshop.
The second variant is the optimized size. Here, the component part is worked out as usual with the
scale of the corresponding detail style. Then, the smallest drawing frame will be specified where this
part can be completely displayed.
If the optimization cannot be carried out due to unfavourable defaults (e.g. a 1:10 scale overview on a
DIN A-4 sheet), the best possible variant will be carried out nevertheless and the program hints to the
fact that the detail doesn’t match completely.
SCALE FILE
If you selected the Optimized Scale option, the scale selection of the program is based on the entries in
the scale file.
You can thus create specific files for different customers and be sure that no other scales will be used
at the output. In the DetailCenter Express! you can create specific defaults with different files for your
customers.
The file is a text file having the extension .scl, which can also contain some comments marked with a
semicolon at the beginning of the line. The default file is in the subordinate folder of your AutoPLANT
Structural installation.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-96
Structure of a Scale File
The desired scales are entered per line one after the other, a special order is not required.
; Scale Definition File
; --------------------------------------------------------
; Customer: Messrs. XYZ, Hamburg
1:2.5
1:5
1:10
1:20
1:50
1:100
SHEET PATTERN FILE

If you select the drawing borders of the selection pages or the Optimized Size option, this selection is
based on the entries in the sheet pattern file.
You can create specific drawing borders and insertion definitions for different customers and be sure
that no other frames will be used at the output. In the DetailCenter Express! you can create specific
defaults with different files for your customers.
The file is a text file having the extension .frm, which can also contain some comments marked with a
semicolon at the beginning of the line. The default file is pro_st3d.frm in the subordinate folder of your
AutoPLANT Structural installation.
Structure of a Sheet Pattern File
The file is divided into the areas header, frame field attributes and the actual frame definitions. All
entries consist of a group name in pointed brackets and the data group of keyword, equals sign and the
following data.
[GROUP NAME]
Keyword1=Data1
Keyword2=Data2
...
You needn’t fill in entries, which are not required, or the complete entry can be omitted.
1) Header Area, Group Name [HEADER]
You enter a short name under the keyword Name (for later program options) and a short file
description under the keyword Description. The description will then be displayed in the selection page
of the DetailCenter Express!
2) Frame Field Attributes, Group Name [TITLEBLOCK]
Here, you specify which current program data will be transferred into which block attribute of the
frame field at running time. You can thus even specify your own defined frame fields with your own
attributes. For more detailed information about how to assign block attributes to blocks, please refer to
your AutoCAD- documentation.
You can assign block attributes to the following keywords. Depending on the settings in the
DetailCenter Express! these are filled with the current values (Express) or with the drawing
information of the model drawing. In addition, you can connect some of the properties of the
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-97
corresponding detail with block attributes. This allows you e.g. to refrain from a position flag or detail
labelling at single parts and thus to obtain more space for display.
FileName: complete path of the created 2D-drawing (Express).
Customer: client (Express).
ProjectName: project name of the model
ProjectNumber: project number of the model
JobName: order (Express) or order name of the model.
JobNumber: order number (Express) or number of order number of the model.
DrawingName: component part description with position number (Express) or drawing name of
the model.
DrawingNumber drawing number (Express) or drawing number of the model.
DrawingPage: sheet number (Express).
DrawingIndex: drawing index (Express) or drawing index of the model.
DrawingScale: scale (Express).
DoneBy: 'done by' (Express) or 'signed by' of the model.
Date: 'done on' (Express) or 'signed on' of the model.
CheckedBy: 'checked by' of the model.
CheckedDate: 'checked on' of the model.
ClearedBy: 'cleared by' of the model.
ClearedDate: 'cleared on' of the model.
Specification 1-4 : 'LV Pos 1' etc. of the model.
Note 1–4: 'comment 1' etc. of the model
DetailPosNumber: position number of the detail
DetailShipNumber: shipping number of the detail
DetailName: designation of the detail
DetailMaterial: material designation of the detail
DetailLength: length of the detail
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-98
DetailWeight: total weight of the detail
DetailCount: total number of the detail
DetailNote: note field 1 and 2 of the detail
DetailFamilyClass: component part family name of the detail
3) Drawing Number Definition, Group Name [DRAWINGNUMBER]
Here, you define according to which pattern the drawing number and the file name of the drawing have
to be structured. You can mix fixed and variable parts and build the designations of variables as you
like, (in order to avoid e.g. identical names with used terms).
In the first two entries Drawing Number Template and Filename Template you indicate the definition,
consisting of fixed values and the variable symbols which are mentioned in the following. You may
use your own template for the file name if your drawing number has to contain signs, which mustn’t be
used in a Windows-file name. If you don’t fill in the field 'Filename Template', the specified drawing
number will be used instead as file name.
DrawingNumberTemplate: definition for the drawing number
FileNameTemplate: definition for the file name
ProjectNumberSymbol: variable for the project number
JobNumberSymbol: variable for the order number
DrawingNumberSymbol: variable for the drawing number of drawing information
DrawingPageSymbol: variable for the continuous sheet number
DrawingIndexSymbol: variable for the modification index
DwgNumberCodeSymbol: variable for the frame code of the frame definitions
PositionNumberSymbol: variable for the position number of the detail
GroupPositionNumberSymbol: variable for the position number of the parent group
ObjectNameSymbol: variable for the component part name
ObjectTypeSymbol: variable for the component part type
YearSymbol: variable for the current year
MonthSymbol: variable for the current month (numeric, 1-12)
DaySymbol: variable for the current day (numeric, 1-31)
DrawingTypeSymbol: variable for the drawing-type
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-99
UserVarSymbol: variable for the free text from the fill frame field dialog
DefaultObjectType: text for component part type, Others except the following types
ColumnObjectType: text for component part type, Support
BeamObjectType: text for component part type, Horizontal support
StiffenerObjectType: text for component part type, Stiffener
WebAngleObjectType: text for component part type, Web angle
StandardPlateObjectType: text for component part type, Poly-plate
ConnectionPlateObjectType: text for component part type, Head-plate
BasePlateObjectType: text for component part type, Base plate
MainPartDrawingType: text for drawing type, single part drawing for main part of group
SubPartDrawingType: text for drawing type, single part drawing for subordinate part of group
GroupDrawingType: text for drawing type, group drawing
SinglePartDrawingType : text for drawing type, single part drawing without group
OverviewDrawingType: text for drawing type, overview drawing
If you want e.g. to obtain a drawing number containing your company’s name "ABC", the year, the
drawing type "BG" for groups or "ET" for single parts as well as the position number (each one
separated by points, such as e.g. ABC.2002.BG1000), you have to define the following fields. All
other fields don’t have to be filled in.
DrawingNumberTemplate=ABC.#J#.#DWG##POS#
FileNameTemplate=ABC.#J#-#DWG##POS# ...(additionally because of the points)
PositionNumberSymbol=#POS#
YearSymbol=#J#
DrawingTypeSymbol=#DWG#
MainPartDrawingType=ET
SubPartDrawingType=ET
GroupDrawingType=BG
SinglePartDrawingType=ET
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-100
As already mentioned before, you can define the designations of the variables, as you like. Of course it
is recommended to use special symbols there, too for better identification or in order to avoid a wrong
replacing of text. (#POS# instead of only POS).
4) Frame Definitions, Group Name [NAME1], [NAME2] etc.
Here, you enter which drawing frames are used and specify the insertion areas of details and parts list.
Each available frame obtains an own group. The group names then will be displayed in the selection
lists of the DetailCenter Express! .
Please note: The keywords Path, SizeX, SizeY and Area1 have to be assigned with current values;
otherwise the frame will not be accepted for selection.
Path: complete path of drawing frame;

if you enter a file name without path, the file will be expected in the subordinate
folder of AutoPLANT Structural
SizeX: the dimensions of the drawing frame in X-direction
SizeY: the dimensions of the drawing frame in Y-direction
Area1: the insertion area of details as 2D-points; specify the lower left and the upper right
corner of the area in the format (x1,y1)-(x2,y2)
DwgNumberCode: the code of the drawing frame; this code can be adopted into the drawing number
ListStyle: the name of parts list definition for the drawing parts list
ListInsertPoint: insertion point for the drawing parts list as 2D-point

enter this point in the format (x, y).
The following two entries describe the position of the point related to the list (on the left at the top,
etc.). The list is extended according to this default.
ListHorizontalStart: description of the position of the parts list’s insertion point in horizontal direction;
Enter left or right.
ListVerticalStart: description of the position of the parts list’s insertion point in vertical direction;
Enter top or down.
If you define your own frames, please note that the lower left point of the drawing frame has the world
coordinates (0, 0) and that you store the drawing in top view on the frame. The positive X-axis is
showing to the right, the positive Y-axis to the top.
Enter the frame field as a block with the name of the drawing file (i.e. as block 'dina4', if the drawing
frame has to be saved as 'dina4.dwg'.
Insertion Areas of a Sheet Pattern File
The following example once again shows you the most important specifications of a frame definition:
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-101
DRAWING LIST
At single sheet output, a drawing list is automatically created as text file (*.txt) and as DBASE-file
(*.dbf). The file is saved in the AutoPLANT Structural detail folder under the drawing name of the
model.
You can see the position of the corresponding part and the file name of the created drawing in this file.
The drawing number, scale (and whether it is suitable) and drawing frame are displayed as well. The
data depend on the selected type of single sheet output.
DetailCenter Express! drawing list
----------------------------------
Output date: 13.02.2001

Output path: d:\ps2000\detail
Output mode: Best scale
Job number:
Model drawing: e:\dwg\halle.dwg
1.) created group drawings

Pos |Scale |Max |Dwg-Number |Dwg-File
====|======|====|=============|==========
100 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A3-Bl.7 |BG100.dwg
101 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A3-Bl.23 |BG101.dwg
103 |1:15 | |DWG-A3-Bl.20 |BG103.dwg
104 |1:10 | |DWG-A3-Bl.4 |BG104.dwg
105 |1:15 | |DWG-A3-Bl.18 |BG105.dwg
2.) created single part drawings

Pos |Scale |Max |Dwg-Number |Dwg-File
====|======|====|=============|==========
1 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A4-Bl.6 |Pos1.dwg
5 |1:10 | |DWG-A4-Bl.3 |Pos5.dwg
7 |1:5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.16 |Pos7.dwg
8 |1:10 | |DWG-A4-Bl.14 |Pos8.dwg
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-102
Automatic 2D-Cut
12 |1:10 | |DWG-A4-Bl.8 |Pos12.dwg

14 |1:5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.1 |Pos14.dwg
15 |1:2.5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.21 |Pos15.dwg
16 |1:2.5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.2 |Pos16.dwg
As you can see, the groups Pos 100 and 101 as well as the single parts Pos 1,2 and 6 don’t match the
pre-set frame size. The scale 1:50 was the smallest scale pre-set in the scale list.
AUTOMATIC 2D-CUT
Command Name: PS_Add2DCut
This function helps you to define 2D-cuts in components of the model. When detailing, these cuts can
be displayed and dimensioned automatically as separate details. You may exactly define where cuts are
required unless they had been inserted automatically during modelling (see ->'Stiffener' command).
This function doesn't create the cut itself. You only define where, which direction and how deep a cut
has to be displayed later. In contrast to the manual cuts which are inserted in a finished detail by means
of the command->'Insert 2D-cut', here you have the advantage of automatic positioning and
dimensioning of the cuts. They will be up-dated together with a drawing-update.
ADD CUT
After having loaded the function, you first have to select the shape, where a cut is to be inserted. Then,
you have to click a point on the cutting plane. The cutting plane will always run through this point
perpendicular to the center line.
Finally, you are asked for depth and direction of cut, which will be defined by clicking on another
point. On one hand, you indicate the view direction of the cut and on the other hand, you determine its
depth (this point will also be perpendicular to the center line). The resulting cutting planes will be
displayed dynamically during selection for control reasons.
The depth of the cut decides how much of the components situated behind the cutting plane is to be
displayed.
MODIFICATION OF CUT
Cuts can be modified or deleted from Shape Properties.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-103
Cranked 2D-View
Actual ... From:: Here, you see the number of cuts existing in the shape as well as the number of
the current cut.
Active: If this field is checked, the cut will be taken into account during detailing. It is possible to
exclude a cut without having to delete it.
Cut Depth: Here, the depth of the cut can be modified. Alternatively, this can be done by using the
AutoCAD-grips on the cut-symbol which are displayed when the cut is selected.
Alignment: If the Shape direction field is checked, the cut is runs from the indicated cutting plane
in shape direction.
If the Opposite direction field is checked, the cut is runs from the indicated cutting plane opposite
to the shape direction.
Cutting plane always remains at the same position.
Click on this button to delete the selected cut from the shape.
This button exchanges insertion point and back limit point. The cut is displayed from the other side.
If you defined more than one cut, you can change to the next cut by using this button.
If you defined more than one cut, you can change to the previous cut by using this button.
CRANKED 2D-VIEW
Command name: PS_CRANKEDVIEW
You can insert cranked views into the model if you require cuts and views through your models that
are not situated on one plane. During detailing, they are treated like standard plane views; they show,
different depths of the model simultaneously in one view and allow hiding of un wanted or less
interesting areas.
Example for a cranked view (here only as view):
In the view, the supports A1, B1 and C2 are displayed.
ADD CUT
After starting this function, you first have to click on the start of polyline (intersection line) and then
add the other points of the intersection line. Please pay attention that the line doesn't intersect nor that
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-104
North symbol
it is “running backwards”. In addition, the segments have to be perpendicular to each other. Otherwise,
you don't obtain a satisfactory result.
Terminate the entry by pressing the right mouse key if you do not want to add any further points. Now,
you are prompted to specify the direction and depth of projection by clicking on another point (in
relation to the start). All areas of the component parts, which are intersected by the polyline, are later
displayed as cut – all areas which are situated within the intersection depth, are displayed as standard
projection.
Then, the following dialog appears which is also opened in case of modification of a cranked view via
AutoPLANT Structural properties.
Name: The name of the cut.
Depth: Here you specify the projection depth of the view.
Height: Here you specify the height of projection of the view. All areas that are situated outside of
this height are not displayed.
Colour: Here you specify the colour of intersection line.
3D-Display: The height of projection will be displayed as well so that you can check the coverage
area.
Display Depth: The depth of projection will be displayed as well so that you can check the
coverage area. Together with '3D-display' you obtain a three dimensional display of the cranked
view.
The parts that are within the coverage of the cut are displayed. All other parts are hidden.
The hidden parts are displayed again.
NORTH SYMBOL
Command name: PS_BENCHMARK
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-105
North symbol
This function allows you to add a benchmark to your model, which may be evaluated later in different
ways.
At the moment, US-benchmark-symbols are available to help with the assembly of girders by
indicating their alignment during installation. The point of the compass, which indicates north, is
situated at the left side of the symbol or above if it is aligned horizontally (or at the upper end if it is
aligned vertically).
NORTH SYMBOL (REFERENCE)

When the function is loaded, you first have to define the benchmark of construction. Click on the
insertion point (reference point) first, then on another point for the benchmark. A north symbol will be
created at the insertion point.
Then, the following dialog will be displayed for further definition of the symbol and display in the shapes:
Options: In the input field Elevation above, you can enter a reference height corresponding to the
model coordinates, z=0.
Select the layer on which the benchmark has to be displayed in the Layer selection list.
In the input field Block path, you may indicate a path to previously defined benchmarks if you
don't want to apply the built-in symbols.
Click on the File Select button and a Windows file selection dialog will be displayed where you
can select the block folder. Alternatively to the built-in symbols, you can also use any block as a
symbol. The Y-axis of this block then corresponds to northern direction; it will be inserted with
the corresponding rotation.
Symbol: If the field Symbol is checked, the built-in symbols will be used for displaying the north
arrow.
You can select the desired symbol in the selection list. In the input field size, the scaling of the
symbol can be defined.
Block: If the field Block is checked, an external block will be used for displaying the north arrow.
The scale factor of the block is entered in the input field Scale.
Normally, the blocks of the folder entered in the input field Block path will be used. Then, you
may select the existing drawings as blocks which have to be used.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-106
North symbol
If the field "Display only DWG Blocks" is checked, you can select the blocks already contained in
the drawing as blocks which have to be used.
Select the block which has to be used as north symbol in the selection list block.
The above-mentioned inputs describe the display of benchmark in the model (which may exist only
once), whereas the following dialog page describes the display of alignment in the shapes. On one
hand, the benchmark has to be inserted into the model and, on the other hand, the option 'Benchmark'
has to be selected in shape properties, otherwise the alignment of a shape cannot be displayed (see -
>‘Insert shapes/Properties‘).
HORIZONTAL ALIGNMENT
Here, it is possible to select either the built-in symbols or external blocks. As the proceeding is the same
as already mentioned concerning the actual benchmark, we don't repeat these settings here, but only
describe the additional options.
Settings: The display for the alignment symbol for the points of the compass is set here.
In the input field End Offset, you enter the distance between the insertion point of the symbol and
the left resp. lower end of the shape.
In the input field Center distance, you enter the distance between the insertion point of the symbol
and the center of the shape.
In the input field Colour, you enter the colour of the symbol as AutoCAD-colour number.
Horizontal: is valid for horizontal girders and vertical is valid for vertical girders.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-107
North symbol
VERTICAL ALIGNMENT
Settings: The display for the alignment symbol for the upper edge of the component is set here.
In the input field End Offset, you enter the distance between the insertion point of the symbol and
the left lower edge of the shape.
In the input field Offset, you enter the distance between the insertion point of the symbol and the
upper edge of the shape.
In the input field Colour, you enter the colour of the symbol as AutoCAD-colour number.
USER-DEFINED SYMBOLS
You have to define an AutoCAD-block in your model drawing or as external drawing (wblock) containing
the block attribute “LABEL” to apply user-defined symbols. This attribute is filled with the current text for
alignment.
SHAPE LABELLING
Annotations: Enter the text which is to be displayed in the represented symbols in the input fields
for the points of the compass and for Upside.
DetailCenter: The global view of the DetailCenter can be set here. Check the corresponding point
of the compass in order to set the global view.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-108
Manual Dimensioning Points
MANUAL DIMENSIONING POINTS

Command Name: PS_INSERT_MANDIM
Some steel constructions are very complex so that the system is not always able to determine the
suitable dimensioning automatically. Often it is even not possible to find all suitable points because
important reference measures such as, weld check measures, or similar values have to be defined
individually and are not automatically known to the system.
For this purpose, you can define dimensioning points directly in the model for the derivation of group
drawings or overviews; the system has to be forced to dimension them. In contrast to the subsequent
manual dimensioning of 2D workshop drawings, the advantage of this function is that they can be
updated at an automatic 2D-update.
View: Here, you specify how the dimensioning points have to be depicted in the 3D-model.
Only Points – Only the two dimensioning points and a short connecting piece will be depicted.
With Line – Apart from the dimensioning points, the connecting line is displayed as well. This
facilitates checking of the corresponding measured points.
With Text – The directly measured dimension is additionally displayed as check text.
Please note that this doesn’t have any influence on the depiction in the 2D-plans.The
dimensioning points there are subsequently replaced by a usual standard measure of AutoPLANT
Structural.
Only Points: Here, you specify the size to be used for depiction of the two measured points.
Layer: Here you specify on which layer the object has to be inserted.
Executive in: The command is carried out as a loop. You can insert several manual-dimensioning
points one after the other without having to call the function again each time.
Group Options
Horizontal: A measure is created in dimensioning direction of the group or of the overview that
runs from the first to the second point.
Vertical: A measure is created perpendicular to dimensioning direction of the group or of the

overview that runs from the first to the second point.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-109
Manual Component Part Link
Direct: A direct (e.g. diagonal) measure is created in the group or overview, running from the first
to the second point.
In Groups The dimensioning point is evaluated in the group to which it has been assigned.
In views The dimensioning point is evaluated in the overview drawing where it is included.
Note By highlighting both entries an identical dimensioning point can appear both in a group
drawing and in an overview..
Click on the OK button to add a dimensioning point to the model. You first have to click on the group
this dimensioning point has to be assigned to and then the first and second point of the distance to be
dimensioned.
SELECTION OF VIEWS
In principle, dimensioning points have to be assigned to a group, even if they only are to appear in an
overview drawing.
Decide in which 2D view the measure has to be depicted by the current view or by the current UCS
when the points are attached in the model. Later, the points are only evaluated in this or in the opposite
view direction to the model (overview) or to the group.
MANUAL COMPONENT PART LINK

Command Name: PS_MANUAL_LINK
The logical links are required for dimensioning and recognition of neighbouring parts. These are
created during most AutoPLANT Structural processing functions.
However, if there isn’t any link between two component parts, a so-called “manual link” can be placed
between the parts. The only task of this link is to create a dependency; it hasn’t got any additional
function.
To create a manual link, first select the main part of the connection (this should be the connected part).
Then select the connecting part (e.g. the support). The designation ‘main part’ has nothing to do with
the main parts of groups – it may be any part.
GLOBAL SCALE
Command Name: PS_SCALE
Like AutoCAD, AutoPLANT Structural works in drawing units according to the scale less method, a
natural scale of 1:1 being assumed (i.e. a drawing unit corresponds to one millimetre natural size).
Any detailing with respect to the 2D shop plans, however, is prepared in a scale you entered
beforehand. However, if you want to attach e.g. position flags later – that have been entered in the
original size (mm) in the pre-settings – you must set a scale in order to ensure uniform sizes of these
elements and a uniform aspect of your drawings. This so-called Global Scale basically corresponds to
the later plot scale of your drawing.
When the program needs a scale and no special scale is entered, the global scale will be adopted.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-110
Drawing Border
When using the command, the following prompt is displayed in the command line
Previous AutoPLANT Structural Scale = 1.0000
Please enter the new default scale 1: ?
The current scale is displayed. Now enter the new scaling factor to be used for your work. When you
enter e.g. the value 10, the default scale 1:10 will apply.
Do not confuse the global scale with the length scaling. The global scale refers to the later printout of
the drawings and scales text sizes, symbol sizes, etc.
However, if you would like to use scale subsequently and if you have reduced the shapes according to
scale, you usually plot using a scale of 1:1 (global scale = 1) and work with a length scaling. Enter both
values when dimensioning manually.
DRAWING BORDER
AutoPLANT Structural allows you to easily insert drawing frames in different formats and scales. The
program package comes loaded with several sample frames and borders. You can also add your own
frames and borders.
A drawing border is inserted as a scaled block corresponding to the drawing scale. The matching
original blocks are filed in scale 1:1. After having defined a title block with block attributes within a
border, you can fill it in using the command ’Drawing Info’.
A dialog box gives you access to several well-sorted border variations. The data are filed in a tree
structure. The standard version already includes the main entries A0-A4. You can either delete them or
add further entries. The actual entries can only be entered as subordinate item under a main item.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-111
Drawing Border
Click this button to generate a new entry.
Click this button to create a gusset below the currently selected gusset.
Click this button to delete a selected entry of a drawing.
Click this button to delete the selected gusset and all subordinate entries belonging to it.
Scale: The drawing border is inserted in the scale entered here.
Activate Limits: If this field is checked, limit is put on edges of the border to avoid drawing
outside of the border You can enter limit parameters by clicking ASSIGN button.
Here, you load the selected entry and the drawing block into the model area.
Here, you load the selected entry and the drawing block into the paper area.
CREATION OF ENTRIES
Select the main point and either press the right mouse button for the subordinate menu or the Create
button. Then, the following dialog opens:
Block Path: Enter the path to the block to be inserted.
Width: Enter the width of the block if you want to work with active limits. If the field ‘Active
Limits’ has been checked, these values are preset as limits with the specified scale.
It is of course possible as well to specify different values for the limits.
Height: Enter the height of the block if you want to work with active limits. If the field ‘Active
Limits’ has been checked, these values are preset as limits with the specified scale.
It is of course possible as well to specify different values for the limits.
Comment: Here, you can enter a comment for identification.
Permits interactive block selection.
Permits size selection by means of a dialog.
After these data have been inserted, a new subordinate entry is displayed in the tree, which still has to
be named. Then, the entry is created and can be used immediately.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-112
Manual Cut
MANUAL CUT
This command is used to insert a cut into 2D details. The prerequisite is that the details are still
intelligent details.
From object selection, the program independently recognizes which objects can be cut and which
objects only represent the borders of the cutting arrows (e.g. dimensioning). This means that the
cutting arrows are in any case attached outside of dimensioning if you select e.g. a completely
dimensioned group including the measures.
The following dialog opens after selection of the command. There, you can make the settings for label
and depiction of cutting symbols:
Label: Here, you enter the text without the cutting code that has to be used as designation. Enter
e.g. Cut.
Sign: Enter the desired cutting code such as e.g. the letter A.
Text Style: Select an AutoCAD-text style for the labels.
Layer: Select the AutoCAD-layer the text and the cutting symbols have to be created on.
Line Type: Select the line type to be used for the depiction of the cutting line.
Colour: In the input fields for Symbol and Text you enter the colour of the cutting arrow and of the
text. You can either specify the colour directly by entering the AutoCAD colour number, or you
click on the desired input field and then on the SELECT button. Then, the AutoCAD dialog for
colour selection is displayed where you can select the colour directly.
Text Size: Here, you enter the size of the label text.
Hatch Scale: Here, you can specify a scaling factor for the hatch to modify the density of the
hatching.
Create Block: A common block is formed consisting of the cutting arrows and the codes.
Otherwise, they are still single lines and text.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-113
Manual Cut
Keep Resolution: If this option is activated, the resolution depiction of possible shapes is not
modified. Inner edges remain e.g. If this option is deactivated, all shapes are set on with Radii.
DIALOG-COMMANDS
LINE
Click on this button to create a cut through component parts along a line to be selected.
Select the parts to be depicted, then the cutting line. Then, you have to indicate the depth of the cut. If
you press ESC here, only a cut at the corresponding position will be made. Otherwise, the parts will be
cut at the position and the projection of the rest will be displayed.
After having created the cut and after having attached the cutting code, you can place the result
anywhere you like.
OBJEcT
Click on this button to create a cut on the base of a cut object. This may be a view frame or an offset
cut.
You only have to select the object; selection of the parts is carried out automatically.
ucS
Click on this button to create a cut of 3D component parts at the current UCS.
After selection of the parts, the cut is created at the XY-plane of the current UCS.
DEPICTION OF THE CUT

You can generate the cutting code either via a generated graphic or via blocks to be selected.
Group Symbol
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-114
Manual Dimensioning
Symbol: The cutting code is created as a symbol consisting of cutting arrow and code.
Continued: The two partial lines are connected through the cut part.
By Side: The cutting code is written beside the cutting arrow; otherwise it is written above the
cutting arrow.
Arrow Size: Specify the size of the arrow.
Distance/Length: Here, you specify the distance of the cutting lines, from their beginning to the
utmost bordering edge (e.g. the dimensioning), and what has to be the length.
Block
Block: A freely selectable block is used for the cutting code instead of a cutting arrow. In the input
fields Top Block and Down Block you see the selected block path; you can assign a block drawing
by clicking on the SELECT button.
Example of a Cut at a Group
The edge of the cut is located in front of the left stiffener and the depth of the cut extends beyond the
head plate – you see all of these parts from the right; the shape is cut and the drill holes are
invisible.
MANUAL DIMENSIONING
The AutoPLANT Structural dimensioning commands allow dimensioning of component parts and
groups automatically in the drawings as well as manual dimensioning with useful help functions.
For example, the overall views of the model may be dimensioned for an overview. However, it is also
possible to dimension individual component parts or groups and then create details manually in cases
where automatic detailing is not suitable for your application. In addition, all major standard functions
of regular AutoCAD dimensioning are available for revision or modification of 2D workshop
drawings.
The dimensioning functions are principally based on the settings for detailing style (dimensioning),
therefore general settings like AutoCAD dimensioning style, optimization, etc. have to be executed in
the respective dialog box. The detailing style dialog can also be accessed using the dialog box
described below and then the style can be modified or a new detailing style can be created.
HINT: Please take care that the settings of scale and scaling of the component part are correct. Please
refer to the chapter “Detailing” and carefully read through the chapter “Dimensioning Style”.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-115
Manual Dimensioning
Group Settings
Alignment: Here, you set the general direction of dimensioning.

Horizontal – The dimension chain is always running in X-direction.
Vertical – The dimension chain is always running in Y-direction.
Line – The dimension chain is running in the same direction like a pre-set line. To carry out the
function, click on the line determining the direction. You can use this method to dimension e.g.
along a cut edge.
As picked – The dimension chain is running in the direction specified by the two points first
picked. This is e.g. reasonable if you want to dimension diagonal holes in a gusset plate.
Like Part – The dimension chain is running in the same direction like the length direction of a
component part. This is the optimal method to dimension along a diagonal shape by clicking on
the shape.
Arc Dimension – You can dimension the length of an arc.
Angle Dimension – You can dimension an angle.
Origin: Here, you specify which origin is used for alternative coordinate dimensioning.
Auto – The dimensions are preferably related to the lower left point of the reference part’s coating
or to that of the group’s main part. If it doesn’t exist, they are related to the current UCS.
Default – The dimensions are related to any point specified by you.
UCS-Origin – The dimensions are related to the origin of the current UCS.
Part – The dimensions are related to the lower left point of the reference part’s coating or to that
of the group’s main part.
Start Dimension Chain – The dimensions are related to the beginning of the dimension chain.
Reference Point: Here, you specify whether a reference part has to be used for dimensioning. This
is necessary to evaluate shape shortenings correctly. However, the part has to be an intelligent 2D
part’.
No – A reference part is not used for dimensioning and all lengths are evaluated in the measured
length.
Default – A pre-set part is used as reference part. Thus, you don’t have to select it each time
you apply this command. This option helps you to dimension more complex groups.
Select – You are always prompted for the reference part, which then has to be selected.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-116
Manual Dimensioning
With Radius: At arc dimension, the reference radius is additionally entered as well into the
dimension.
Position: You can choose the position of the dimension chains at automatic parts dimensioning. If
this field is not checked, the settings of detail style are valid for the distances of dimension chains.
Continuing: A dimension chain can be built continuously by clicking on individual points. If this
field is not checked, you have to continue dimensioning single distances and you can obtain a
dimension chain with gaps.
Scale auto: The settings for scale and object scaling are automatically determined by the global
scale and by the reference part. If your work has been logical according to AutoPLANT Structural
(either un-scaled details and global scale for plot or scaled details and scale 1:1 for the plot),
incorrect default settings are avoided.
Parts Not: The parts to be dimensioned are not scaled. Thus, the original measured lengths can be
used. However, if the field has not been checked, all measured lengths are multiplied with the
indicated scale under 'New Scale'.
New Scale: The scale used for converting the measured lengths and text sizes depending on the
settings for part scaling under ‘Parts Not…’
Here, you enter e.g. the value 10 if you have selected the ‘scale 1: 10 with object scaling’ at
detailing. The details now have been decreased by factor 10.
Group Fence Chains
Work Frame: The dimensions of the work frames are evaluated as fence points and dimensioned
in a dimension chain.
Shape Center: Starting and end points of the shapes are created as fence points and dimensioned in
a dimension chain.
Shape Edges: The corner points of the coating are evaluated as fence points and dimensioned in a
dimension chain.
Overall Dim: An additional dimension chain is created stretching over the overall dimensions of
the fence chains.
Group Coordinate Measures
At Total: Normally, the coordinate measures for overall dimensions are omitted at automatic
detailing or part dimensioning. If this option has been selected, these are displayed as well to
allow e.g. in overviews to specify the position of component parts related to a reference point by
means of the overall dimensions of these parts.
Always positive: If this option has been checked, always positive coordinate measures are
indicated. You can obtain a relative dimensioning around a reference point when the direction is
not important.
Display Zero: If this option has been checked, the coordinate measure having the value “0” is
displayed in a dimension chain. Deactivation is reasonable if the origin (reference) is only
indicated once.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-117
Manual Dimensioning
Display First: If this option has been checked, the first coordinate measure is displayed in a
dimension chain. Deactivation is reasonable if you want a connection with an existing dimension
chain or an identical starting point has only to be indicated once.
Display Last: If this option has been checked, the last coordinate measure is displayed in a
dimension chain. Deactivation is only possible if you have a dimension chain of normal measures
and simultaneously existing coordinate measures.
Others
Info Window: Depending on the selection, you are informed about the type of dimension chains,
global scale of the drawing, pre-selected origin of coordinate dimensioning and pre-selected
component part for part reference.
Detailing Style: Here, you select the detailing style controlling the settings for dimensioning style,
optimization, etc.
At automatic part dimensioning, you also specify the points of a part or of a group to be
dimensioned in the detailing style. Therefore, at identical detailing style the result of automatic
detailing and automatic part dimensioning are in no way different.
DIALOG-COMMANDS
SINGLE PART
Click on this button to dimension a shape or any plate automatically. The relevant points for
dimensioning are determined according to the settings in detailing style and the dimension chains are
attached.
You have to click on the part to be dimensioned. If the ‘Choose Position’ option has been activated,
you can place the created dimension chains at any position you like.
For pre-selection of dimensioning direction, the option ‘As Part’ is recommended for most cases, you
can, however, specify other directions as well.
GROUP
Click on this button to dimension a group automatically. The relevant points for dimensioning are
determined according to the settings in detailing style and the dimension chains are attached.
You have to click on any part of the group you like. If the ‘Choose Position’ option has been activated,
you can place the created dimension chains at any position you like.
can, however, specify other directions as well.
END PLATE
Click on this button to dimension an end plate automatically. The relevant points for dimensioning are
determined according to the settings in detailing style and the dimension chains are attached.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-118
Manual Dimensioning
You have to click on the end plate first and then the connecting shape (this is the shape to which the
end plate belongs). If the ‘Choose Position’ option has been activated, you can place the created
dimension chains at any position you like.
can specify other directions as well.
INSERT DIMENSION
Click on this button to insert new dimensions in an existing dimension chain. The other dimensions
will be adapted.
Select all dimensions belonging to this chain. Then you have to pick a dimension as reference
dimension for the position of the dimension chain. If this demand is only confirmed with RETURN,
the first dimension of your previous selection will be used.
Now the program filters the dimensions, which are not situated in a line with this reference dimension.
Dimensions of other dimension chains may also belong to your selection (e.g. due to “Crossing” the
selection).
Now, the dimension chain will be reconstructed and you can then insert the new dimensions.
DELETE DIMENSION
Click on this button to delete a dimension from an existing dimension chain. The other dimensions will
be adapted.
Selection of the dimension chain and of dimensions is identical with the dialog command INSERT
DIMENSION it has not to be described once again.
MODIFY DIMENSION CHAIN
Click on this button to modify the style of a dimension chain, e.g. to convert it from normal
dimensions to coordinate measures or to modify the detailing style.
Selection of the dimension chain and of dimensions is identical with the dialog command INSERT
DIMENSION; it does not have to be described once again.
SINGLE DIMENSION
Click on this button to attach a single dimension.
Linear Dim: Click on the first and second dimension point as well as the position of the dimension
line. The dimension is aligned according to the direction. Depending on the settings for direction
and part reference, you still have to click on a reference line and/or a reference part.
Arc Dimensions: Click on the center of the arc first and then the starting point and end of the arc
(the end will be corrected correspondingly). Afterwards, you pick the dimension line position.
An arc is principally looked on anti-clockwise from beginning to end.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-119
Manual Dimensioning
Angle Dim: Click on the vertex of the angle first and then the end of the first and second side.
After you pick the dimension line position.
An angle is principally looked on anti-clockwise from beginning to end.
DIMENSION CHAIN
Click on this button to attach a dimension chain out of several dimensions. Click on the position of the
dimension line first and then the points to be dimensioned.
The dimensions are aligned according to the direction. Depending on the settings for direction and part
reference, you still have to click on a reference line and/or a reference part. If you selected the option
‘As Picked’ for the direction, the first two dimension points determine the direction of the dimension
chain.
If you selected the option ’Continuing Dimension Chain’, you are dimensioning according to the
AutoCAD-dimensioning function ‘Continue’. If this option has not been activated, you continue
indicating pairs of points for all dimensions following the first one. You can obtain an interrupted
dimension chain with several dimensions.
FENCE CHAIN
Click on this button to create a fence chain dimensioning. The dimensions are aligned according to the
direction. Depending on the settings for direction and part reference, you still have to click on a
reference line and/or a reference part.
CHANGE DETAIL STYLE
Click on this button to open the dialog for setting parameters for the detail style. If you move to
another style in the ‘Detailing Style’ selection list, the display in the detail style dialog will be updated
as well.
LOAD DETAIL STYLE
Click on this button to load a detail style from the hard drive into your drawing. Select the desired style
file (*.sty) in the file selection dialog (*.sty).
A new loaded detail style at the same time is the current detail style of dimensioning and it is displayed
in the ‘Detailing Style’ selection list.
SPECIFY ORIGIN
Click on this button to define the origin (reference point) of coordinate dimensioning for the time of a
AutoPLANT Structural session. Click on the corresponding point in your drawing.
This is reasonable if dimensioning has to be made e.g. within an overview or a more complex group.
Select the setting Default under ‘Default Origin’ if all following coordinate measures have to be
calculated related to this reference point.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-120
Manual Dimensioning
SPECIFY REFERENCE OBJECT
Click on this button to define the reference object for shape shortening etc. for the time of a
AutoPLANT Structural session. Click on the corresponding part in your drawing.
This is reasonable if dimensioning has to be made e.g. within a more complex group. Select the setting
Default under ‘Part Reference’ if all following actions requiring a reference object have to be related to
this selected part.
DIMENSION CHAINS
During the acquisition of the measurement points the dimension chains are able to capture the points
correctly even if the dimensions have been indicated in a different sequence or if the dimensions
overlap.
The picture below illustrates the interconnections:
Example (1) shows a dimensioning using the ’Continuing Dimension Chain’ option and the following
sequence: First, click the distance C/F, then point D, and finally point A.
Example (2) shows the result if the first dimensioning is like (1) and the next input is the dimensioning
of the distance from the dotted line to point B. The ‘Combine Identical Dimensions from 3 on’ option
in the detail style is active as well (since A/B, B/C and C/D were created!)
Example (3) shows a dimension chain without the ‘Continuing Dimension Chain’ option. The
following was dimensioned: the distance A/C and then D/E. A new measurement of the distance B/F
would now divide the distance of 400 and create a second measurement from point E to F.
ALIGNMENT AND COORDINATE DIMENSIONING

Some variants of dimensioning are admitted especially in combination with overviews due to the
possibility to specify the reference points for coordinate dimensioning and the alignment of the
dimension chains differently.
The picture below shows two dimension chains with coordinate measures. The dimension chain (a) has
been related to the UCS origin (a1) and the first and last coordinate measure has been deactivated. The
dimension chain (b) has been fixed to a free reference point (b1) and negative coordinate measures
have been admitted. These now can serve as relative height indicators.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-121
Manual Dimensioning
In addition, a dimension chain (c) has been attached the position of which is determined by the first
two measurement points (c1) and (c2). Then, the two holes (c3) have been added as further
measurement points. This would also have been possible by modification via the INSERT DIMENSION
dialog command.
FENCE CHAIN DIMENSIONING

Fence chain dimensioning is a semi-automatic dimensioning mode, where the program determines the
relevant points for dimensioning in several different objects. Once this is done, you can position the
dimensioning lines via pre-settings for ‘Fence Chain Dimensioning’ you can select the dimension
chains and the reference points. With the settings for ‘Direction’ you have determined the general
dimensioning direction.
This figure gives you an example for fence dimensioning:
Select the object – here shapes and works frames (B) - then highlight the points set under ‘Fence Chain
Dimension’.
You can manually add more fence points by clicking the area.
At the end, you can remove the fence points selected by clicking.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-122
Elevation Flags
The program then prompts you to determine the insertion points for the dimension lines for highlighted
dimension chains. Depending on the selection, the dimension chains for shape edges (a), shape centers
(c), work frames (b) and the overall dimension (d) are then inserted and extended to the outer edge of
the overall dimension.
ELEVATION FLAGS
Command Name: PS_KOTE
Using this command, you can insert elevations for component parts in the display windows. This
command may also be used to insert length and width distances as elevation symbols. The parameters
length, width, and height correspond to the related parameters of the work frames.
Current Layer: The elevation is inserted on the current layer instead of on the layer indicated in the
configuration.
No Dynamic: The dynamic of the flag is switched off after insertion. This is meant for application
in 2D-mode.
Scale: Indicates the scale used for insertion of the elevation symbol in the drawing.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-123
Elevation Flags
The distance in Z-direction is indicated in the elevation.
The distance in Y-direction is indicated in the elevation.
The distance in X-direction is indicated in the elevation.
A symbol is created within a group, which will be output as elevation at later detailing.
Click on the button representing the desired measurement and the elevation can be inserted.
First click on the definition point (measuring point), then you can position the elevation symbol
(ORTHO is activated automatically) and finally, you position the dimension text (ORTHO is
deactivated again when it was in the OFF-position before the function was selected).
SPECIFICATION OF THE ORIGIN COORDINATES
X, Y, Z-Coordinate: Enter the coordinates of origin for Length (Y), Width (X) and Height (Z)
measurements. The picked points will then be referenced to these coordinates.
Usually you enter the origin of the corresponding work frame.
The coordinates can also be defined in the drawing using the mouse.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-124
Elevation Flags
ELEVATION DEPICTION
Style Selection: Use this box to select the style to be applied for the depiction.
Background: Enter the AutoCAD-colour number for the background colour of the preview
monitor.
SAVE: Click on this button to save the current settings.
LOAD: Click on this button to load a template out of the template management and thus use it
again.
Create Geo: The depiction of elevations is specified by preset parameters in this dialog.
Block Geometry: An AutoCAD block specifies the depiction of elevations. Any block can be
selected.
Block Path: In this field, you specify from which directory the blocks for selecting the geometry of
the elevations have to be read.
Bitmap: You can set an own bitmap for a style for easy recognition. This bitmap then is displayed
in the selection box as well.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-125
Elevation Flags
GEOMETRY DEFINITION
Line Type: Lines means that the elevation symbol is represented as a line triangle.
Filled Triangle means that the elevation symbol is represented as a partly filled triangle.
Default Format: You can indicate a certain text format with a variable $(V) for the measurement
to the elevation. The variable then is replaced by the current value.
Text Style: Presets the text style to be used for depiction of the texts in the elevation.
Group Options
Guide Line: The elevation has a guideline to the definition point.
Dynamic: The elevation is visibly displayed during insertion process.
Bottom Side: The elevation symbol is turned upside down (point to the top, e.g. for the indication
of lower edges).
Thousand sep: The thousand position is separated from the other digits by a point, i.e. 2.500
instead of 2500. If you require the digits after the decimal point, this option should be
deactivated.
Group Sizes
Symbol Size: the size of the elevation symbol.
Text Size: size of text of elevation data
After Dec: The number of digits after the decimal point of the calculated value.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-126
Weld Symbols
Group Colours
Colours: Use the fields Line and Text to set the corresponding colour for the height object. -1 as
value means that the presetting is used.
In the following, you can see an example of different elevations:
STYLE MANAGEMENT
Your elevation styles are maintained in this part of the dialog. New styles can be created; existing
styles can be loaded, updated or even deleted.
Press the above-displayed symbol to create a new elevation style. The style then will be saved by
means of presetting in the directory for elevation styles as a file having the ending *.sty-file. Now you
can work with this style on all other pages of this dialog.
WELD SYMBOLS
Command Name: PS_WELD
Using this command, weld seams or weld symbols may be inserted in the model or in any 2D-drawing.
To conserve memory, a weld seam in a 3D model is represented by a line only. But it contains all
necessary data, so that a weld symbol can be added later. After inserting the weld symbol, you can still
change data in the dialog and check the result immediately in the drawing.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-127
Weld Symbols
A symbol can be composed of an upper and/or a lower part. Since the settings are identical, only one
variation is described here. Weld seams are objects, and allow any kind of alteration at a later date by
using the context menu “Change PS Properties”.
Define the required seams by using the dialog and store them by using the function ‘Templates’. This
allows fast access to the different symbols.
CREATING WELD SYMBOLS AND SEAMS
Click this button to insert weld symbols. For this purpose, select the start point of the guideline and the
insertion point of the flag.
Click this button to insert a weld seam. For this purpose, select the starg and the end point of the weld
seam and the weld seam will be created with the specified style.
Click this button to attach a weld flag at an existing weld seam. Select an existing weld seam and then
specify the insertion position of the weld flag.
Click this button to attach another guideline at a weld flag. First select an existing weld flag and then
draw the new reference arrow to its target point.
Click this button to weld component parts with each other. Select two parts to be welded. AutoPLANT
Structural now creates a weld group with the corresponding weld seams using the specified settings for
weld groups (see also ‘Form Weld Groups’).
Click this button to define the properties of a weld group.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-128
Weld Symbols
FORM WELD GROUPS
Create Group: A new group is formed out of the two component parts, unless it already exists
Treat as one: If this option has been activated in the CAD system the group is set on this selection
mode.
With Welds: The weld seams are integrated into the group as well.
Min. Length: A weld seam created using this command may not be shorter than the indicated
length.
Gap: The minimum gap between these parts is specified. If the gap is bigger than the specified
value, the parts will not be welded.
The value should not be equal 0 to avoid problems with tolerances.
DEPICTION OF WELD SYMBOLS

The depiction of weld symbols is determined by styles, which have to be selected at the corresponding
positions. You may set these styles here.
Weld Style: Use this box to select the style that has to be applied for the display.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-129
Weld Symbols
Click this button to save the current settings.
Click this button to load and to use the templates via the template management.
Created Geo: The depiction of weld symbols is defined in this dialog by means of specified
parameters.
Block Geometry: The depiction of weld symbols is defined by means of any AutoCAD block that
can be selected.
Block Path: In this field you specify the block path for selecting the geometry of the weld symbols
have to be read.
Bitmap: You can set your own bitmap for better recognition of the style. This bitmap is displayed
in the selection box as well.
Click this button to specify the general settings of the weld symbol or the weld seam.
Click this button to specify the special settings for the upper side of the weld symbol (upper weld
seam).
Click this button to specify the special settings for the lower side of the weld symbol (lower weld
seam).
Click this button to specify further settings for the evaluation in the parts lists.
General Default Settings
Line Type: Here you specify the type of the guideline.

No Line – No guideline will be displayed.
Line – The guideline consists of only one single line.
Line with Arrow – The guideline has an additional arrow at the origin of the line.
Line with Point – The guideline has an additional point at the origin of the line.
Text Style: Here you indicate the AutoCAD text style for the labels.
Options: Select the type of weld seam.

All around – The weld symbol is added for an all around weld seam.
Field Weld – The weld symbol is added for an on-site seam.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-130
Weld Symbols
Replaced - The weld symbol is added for an alternating weld seam.

Tail –The weld symbol is added by using this sign.
Text Size: Size of the label text
Symbol Size: Size of symbol representation.
Scale: Enter the scale for the data in the entry fields Text Size and Symbol Size. When selecting
this function, the default scale is entered automatically.
Colour: Specify the colour numbers for the Line, the Symbol and for the Text.
Defaults Upper and Lower Side
Thickness: The thickness of the weld seam
Prefix: A prefix placed in front of the thickness of the weld seam
Length: The length of the weld seam
Gap: Here you can indicate a gap in the weld seam.
Comment: Here you can indicate a comment to the weld symbols.
Add. Length: Additional length details
Symbol: In this list, you can select the type of the weld seam (flat-flap weld, HV weld, etc.).
Toward Position: Indicates whether the weld seam has to be carried out in this way
Defaults Parts List
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-131
Weld Symbols
Material: The weld material which has to be used
Register: The created weld seam has to appear in the parts list.
Weight/LU: The weight of the weld seam per length unit.
Price/LU: The price of the weld seam per length unit.
STYLE MANAGEMENT
In this part of the dialog, your weld styles are maintained. You can create new styles, load styles,
update or delete styles.
Press the above symbol to create a new weld style. The style then will be stored as *.sty file with the
default settings in the directory for weld styles. Now you can work with this style on all other pages of
this dialog.
If you want to work with a special style which is not stored in the drawing, but on your hard drive, you
can load this style using this function.
Select the corresponding *.sty file in the directory for weld styles and load the file. The style will be
available at once.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-132
Short2d
Use this function to remove a style, that is not required any more, from your drawing.
Click this button to change the order of the display.

The order in the display of the style list is not sorted, but you can sort yourself. Use the two arrow keys
to scroll the highlighted style up or down in the order.
Use this function to update the styles loaded in your drawing.

All styles in the drawing are replaced by the styles stored on the hard drive.
If you want to work with a special style, which is not in the drawing, but stored on the hard drive, you
can load it using this function.
Select the corresponding *.sty-file in the directory of elevation styles and load the file. The style will
be available at once.
If you don’t require a style any more in the drawing, use this function to remove it.
Click on this button to modify the order of the display.

The order in the display of the style list is not sorted. You can specify your own sorting. For this
purpose, use the two arrow buttons to move the highlighted style towards the top or towards the bottom
of the order.
If you want to update the styles loaded in the drawing, use this function for this purpose.
All styles in the drawing are replaced by the styles stored on the hard drive.
SHORT2D
Since shapes are shown in full scale during detailing, they may sometimes be very long and not fit in
the drawing.
Under certain circumstances, you might deliberately want to have some “out-of-scale” shapes
(lengthwise) in your drawing, e.g., if large areas of the components do not have any drill holes or
similar features.
This command allows you to shorten finished shapes in a way that areas with many details remain
unchanged and a break is inserted in an insignificant area. The figure below shows the original shape
and then the shortened display (slightly enlarged).
Select this command and you will be first prompted for the shape to be shortened which you have to
click. Then you are prompted for the starting and end point of the shortening which you can either
enter or pick. If you press the ESC-key instead, the shortening is automatically determined and carried
out as it is the case for detailing.
If you want to dimension the shape manually later, you can then consider the shortening as well.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-133
2D-Cutout
2D-CUTOUT
Command name: PS_CUT_OUT
Using this command, you can cut any 2D lines at a polyline at the same time. After selecting the
command, you have to pick the points of the polyline. The same command functions are available as
when drawing a polyline.
Then, all of the lines extending past the polyline are cut off at this line.
Bentley
12/22/2005 3-134
3
4 Miscellaneous
USER-DEFINED COMPONENT PARTS 4-2
BLOCKCENTER 4-11
ROOF/WALL PANELS 4-23
DISPATCH BLOCKS 4-27
AUXILIARY TOOLS 4-31
ADD EFFECTIVE STATIC ANALYSIS LINES 4-34
DATA EXCHANGE 4-37
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-1
User-Defined Component Parts
USER-DEFINED COMPONENT PARTS
SPECIAL PARTS
It may be that you don’t want to display detailed component parts, but you need the corresponding
parts list information nevertheless. Or, you want to display certain elements, which have not been
created with AutoPLANT Structural, as a block and you want their parts list data in your model as
well.
By using the special shape command, you can add parts list information to any existing component
parts. You only have to select the parts in question.
After having selected the command, you can select the component parts directly or you can create a
block from these parts by pressing ESC. Then, you select the parts and define the insertion point of the
block.
After that, the following dialog appears:
Here, you can enter your parts list data and then, this part will be recognized as AutoPLANT Structural
component part.
You can modify this property using the properties command. You can use it at positioning and in the
parts list as well. However, a 2D-depiction cannot be generated when no volume parts are contained.
SPECIAL SHAPES
By using the special shape management of AutoPLANT Structural, you can add your own custom
shapes to the program which will then be processed like pre-defined standard shapes.
These special shapes can be saved in any number of catalogues containing any number of shapes, i.e.,
you can establish same sorting as with standard shapes. The selection menu then shows catalogue
names as a shape type and the shapes contained in each catalogue appear as shape size, making it easy
to choose between different system shapes.
You can create special shapes as combination of existing shapes or by using a drawn cross-section or a
variant (qualitative generation instruction) with corresponding data base.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-2
CREATE AND MANAGE SPECIAL SHAPES

The program once again manages these shape catalogues in four special shape master groups, which all
basically have the same properties and are consequently described together in this chapter.
There is a distinction between general special shapes, roof-wall shapes, combination shapes and weld
shapes.
You create the first two groups by drawing a cross-section; for combination shapes you combine
existing shapes to create a new shape (e.g. two U-shapes welded together). The weld shapes are created
using a special dialog.
These are two examples of possible special shapes. The left shape was drawn as a cross-section and
then stored as a special shape, the right one is a combination of two U-shapes.
In addition, you can store each shape in three different display modes (low, normal and high – which
must be created individually). You thereby avoid having to deal with a confusing number of lines
when working with rather complex shapes like in the left example, but you can show the complete
shape if needed.
Nonetheless, you can always select the AutoPLANT Structural standard display modes (only center line,
envelope, etc.) without having to change any parameters.
Here, you see the dialog for special shape management. It is organized in a tree structure and consists
of 4 main tabs for the different types of special shapes.
Each of these branches can contain subordinate directories and each subordinate directory can have
any number of special shape definitions. However, you cannot make any further subordinate division.
Select a shape and the stored cross-section will be displayed on the right monitor.
Creation of a Catalogue
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-3
Select one of the tabs to layout a catalogue and use the right mouse button. A subordinate menu is
displayed offering you the option to layout a catalogue. A subordinate directory is created and you can
edit the name.
Creation of a Special Shape
A special shape layout is made analogously to the layout of a catalogue. Select the desired catalogue
and use the right mouse button. Then, you can select the option Layout Shape. Enter the name and the
shape appears as an entry. This name is the access name and not the name, that later will be displayed
in a parts list.
Please note that until now you only created a blank cover that has to be filled with creating a
resolution. It is not before then that the special shape has been filed. If you don’t do that, the blank
shape cover will be removed at next selection.
Layout of a Depiction Resolution
After the layout of a blank special shape definition has been affected, you have to define a resolution.
Select the shape and use the right mouse button again.
Here, you select the desired resolution. If resolutions have already been defined for the special shape,
you can modify the defined resolution using this method.
Definition of Cross-Section
Defining the closed and the not crossing contour of the cross-section define a special shape. Depending
on the setting, this can be done using poly-lines or individual lines and arc segments. You have to take
care that these build a closed contour.
After selection, choose your outer contour and any existing inner contours. You can utilise any number
of inner contours that, must not cross the outer contour and must not they have any intersection points
between each other.
Now, the program automatically determines the possible insertion points of this shape (center,
envelope). Finally, you can still define any additional insertion points.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-4
Alternatively, you can define special shapes of regular thickness by using a poly-line contour and by
specifying a thickness. See Specifications.
After end of definitions, the properties dialog for the parts list data will be displayed.
Enter the name of the parts list, notes, material, etc.

Starting from the cross-section drawing and the entered material data, the program calculates the
weight in kg/m and displays it in the entry field Weight.
Here, you can determine which shape data will be applied to the standard parts list and you can change
the weight.
When you close this dialog, the selected resolution has been defined and the special shape layout is
finished and the special shape can then be selected and utilized.
As you can see, the defined resolution is displayed. Now, you could repeat this procedure with
different resolutions or modify any existing resolution as described above.
ROOF-WALL-SHAPES
The creation of roof-wall-shapes is identical with the creation of general special shapes. The only
purpose for dividing them is to have a clearer survey and still another feature of differentiation.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-5
COMBINATION SHAPES
Combination shapes are not created using poly-lines or line elements. You have to arrange the shapes
in the WCS in the way they have to be built later for definition. The best is to apply short shape pieces
(e.g. with a length of 100 mm) in the cross-section. Please note, however, that they mustn’t be
mirrored.
The definition of a combination shape is analogous to that of the other special shapes, with the
exception that you are not asked for poly-lines but for the shapes contained. Select the decisive shape
first, and then the other ones.
An inserted combination shape has the same properties like an individual shape. In contrast to standard
shapes, you can dissolve the combination shapes into their individual parts and any processing of the
individual segments is kept.
Combination shapes are especially suitable for planning tasks or for tasks where several partial shapes
have to be processed analogously (such as e.g. at the construction of fronts of buildings).
SPECIAL SHAPES VIA VARIANT AND DATABASE

The creation of special shapes via drawing a cross-section is especially suitable for individual types
that cannot be summed up in special shape series or, for types where you only need some special
shapes for your construction.
However, if you require whole shape series of similar types, which only differ in their dimensions but
the quality, of which is identical, it is recommended to create them via a variant with corresponding
database.
Using this method, you only determine how the shape has to look like in a description file by
describing a polygon with variables. This means you describe a shape like “line from point (0,0) to
point(a,b)" etc. and then define the values a and b in a DBASE-file. If you enter 10 different data
records with names and variants for a, and for b, you will immediately obtain 10 different shapes
which are similar to each other.
Create Variant
Please also read through the section about the standard method via a drawn poly-line, because basic
information about special shapes is not described once again here.
To create a variant, you have to create a new file tab in the special shapes directory (...\sopro) first. The
name of this file tab simultaneously defines the “shape type”, which will be displayed later in the
selection lists for shape selection.
Now, this file tab has to contain an ASCII-file with the name rules.dat. This file contains the
variant description and the corresponding DBASE-file (*.dbf), the name of which can be freely
determined. In the variant file you enter this name explicitly.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-6
Hint Please note that there mustn’t be a common special shape file (*.psp) in this tab. You can
create a shape of the same type designation only via the standard method or via a variant.
Structure of Variant File (Geometry)
All commands in this file have to be entered in capital letters, and the order specified here has to be
kept. The values for x and y can either be pre-defined or be values from the database.
If you want to apply a value from the database, you define continuous variables $1,$2,$3 etc. for
this purpose, which will then be replaced by the values of the data records. You can indicate all three-
resolution variants in one file.
FILE=TEST.DBF: : Enter the file name of the corresponding

database file.
RESOLUTION=NORMAL;: Enter the display variant LOW), NORMAL or: HIGH.
THICKNESS=5.0;: Optional entry, see command description
STARTPOINT(x,y);: Starting point of the outer poly-line

: ..further polygon description
STARTPOINT(x,y): Starting point of the 1st. inner poly-line: : ...further polygon description
INSERTPOINT(x,y): : Additional insertion points, up to 16 pcs.: : You can only define one set of
insertion points, i.e. you cannot define 16 points for each resolution!
RESOLUTION=END: End of a depiction variant
RESOLUTION=LOW: New depiction variant, if required ...
RESOLUTION=END:
For the description of the polygon segments, commands for lines and arcs are at your disposal which
can be described with relative or absolute coordinates.
LINEAR_TO(dx,dy): Line segment from the last indicated point : in relative coordinates x and y :
(analogously to AutoCAD-line input)
LINEAR_AT(x,y): : Line segment from the last indicated point : in absolute coordinates x and y :
(analogously to AutoCAD-line input)
ARC_TO(r,phi): : Arc segment from the last indicated point,: : tangential at this point with the
indicated : radius r and the arc angle phi in degrees. A positive angle causes a rotation to the right,
a negative angle causes a rotation to the left.
ARC_AT(cx,cy,ex,ey): : Arc segment from the last indicated point,: : tangential at this point with
the indicated center point cx and cy as well as the end point ex and ey in absolute coordinates each.
Normally, the special shape is described using one or more closed poly-lines. However, an easier
description can be selected for thin-wall-shapes (cold-rolled shapes in most cases).
You can specify the wall thickness d by indicating the command THICKNESS=d and only have to
describe the neutral fibre (open polygon) of the cross-section. The program then automatically
calculates the required closed polygon.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-7
Create Database (Shape Sizes)
In the database, a common DBASE-file, you only have to file the data records of the different variables
and some information about the parts list.
Field Field Name Field Type Content

0 KEY Text AutoPLANT Structural-shape designation
(access key)
1 NAME Text Shape name (display, parts list)
2 NOTE1 Text annotation field 1
3 NOTE2 Text annotation field 2
4 ITEM Text item number
5 MATERIAL Text Material index, not implemented
at the moment
6 WEIGHT Double weight per meter
7 FIELD1 Double value of the first variable ($1)
8... n FIELD2 ... n Double value of the next variable ($2...$n)
WELD SHAPES
Weld shapes consist of several plates welded together to a shape cross-section. In most cases, they are
considered as one shape at construction. In principle, they are some kind of combination shape
consisting only of plates.
As it is the case with the other special shapes, weld shapes are managed in catalogues as well. Thus,
you may refer to the essential information there with regard to catalogues; shape names and parts list
entries. Two different kinds of weld shapes are managed by AutoPLANT Structural.
Standard Weld Shapes
Standard weld shapes can have any plates at any positions. You can create box shapes, U-shapes or
others using these shapes. The shapes have a constant cross-section and can be adapted via the slope.
I-form Weld Shapes
I-form weld shapes consist of three plates that are organized like an I-shape. These plates can b e
individually adjusted. However, the greatest advantage of this kind of weld shapes is that the web plate
can be individually adjusted. Even very complex weld constructions can thus be depicted via a shape.
CREATION OF WELD SHAPES

If you want to layout a subordinate directory under the main tab and create a shape there, you can
select between a standard shape and an I-shape.
Standard Weld Shapes
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-8
Here, you can specify and change the shape contour. In addition, you can add plates and determine
their position either relative to the origin or relative to other plates.
When you leave the dialog with the OK-button and enter the parts list data, the weld shape will be
created.
Click this button to add a new plate to the current definition.
Click this button to remove the currently selected plate from the definition.
The previous plate is checked as currently selected plate.
The next plate is checked as currently selected plate.
Act: This option displays which plate is checked as current plate at the moment. There is a separate
display on the monitor.
From: The number of plates is displayed.
Width: The width of the current plate is indicated.
Height: The thickness of the current plate is indicated.
Item: The item number of the current plate is indicated.
Material: The material of the current plate is indicated.
Treat Parts..: If this option is activated, the shape is treated like the contained individual parts at
positioning, parts list and detailing. You have access to the subordinate properties of each single
plate without having to explode the shape.
Check Flats: When you dissolve the shape, it is verified whether flats can create the included sizes.
Then, flats will be created instead of poly-plates.
Monitor Point: Here, you can define whether you want to see and modify the insertion points of
the current plate or whether you want to see and modify the insertion points of the reference plate.
The current plate will be aligned correspondingly.
X-Pos: The X position of the insertion. This can either be relative to the origin or to an insertion
point of a reference plate.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-9
Y-Pos: The Y position of the insertion. This can either be relative to the origin or to an insertion
point of a reference plate.
Rotation: The rotation of the plate around its insertion point.
Insertion Point: Depending on the setting, you can see here the insertion point of the current plate
related to the reference point or the selected reference point at the reference plate.
Relative to: If this field is checked; the insertion point is relative to a reference plate.
Element: The number of the reference plate.
Pos: The number of the insertion point of the reference plate.
Monitor Back...: Select the colour of the monitor background.
Create Weld Shapes I-Type
Here, you can specify the dimensions, item number and the material of the three plates. You cannot
configure as you like but you don’t have to place the shapes in their position.
Top Flange: Specifications for the top flange
Bottom Flange: Specifications for the bottom flange
Web Plate: Specifications for the web plate
Treat Parts: If this option is activated; the shape is treated like the contained individual parts at
positioning, parts list and detailing. You have access to the subordinate properties of each single
plate without having to explode the shape.
Create Flange: If you dissolve such a shape and you have modified the web in a way that the
flanges have to be bent, they normally are built like arc shapes. If this option is activated, straight
flange segments will be created.
Check Flats: When you dissolve the shape, it is verified whether flats can create the included sizes.
Then, flats will be created instead of poly-plates.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-10
BlockCenter
BLOCKCENTER
BlockCenter is an effective tool for creation and management of any blocks within AutoPLANT
Structural.
If you are working e.g. with system constructions which together with individual adaptations form
your final project, BlockCenter gives you fast access to these prepared constructions. As it is a matter
of AutoPLANT Structural3D-blocks, the behaviour of these construction groups after insertion is the
same as if they have just been created out of individual components. Of course it is also possible to
manage any 2D-blocks by means of the BlockCenter or to add these blocks to your shop drawings (e.g.
special labelling fields for your customers, recurring details of construction, and so on).
Within the BlockCenter, you will find a great number of useful functions for your working with
blocks. In addition, there is also an efficient database included allowing a classification and later
search for the required 3D- or 2D-blocks.
Here, you see the two BlockCenter dialogs (navigation dialog on the left, selection dialog on the right)
together with a AutoPLANT Structural-drawing:
STRUCTURE OF THE BLOCKCENTER

Very similar to the DetailCenter, the BlockCenter, too, consists of dialogs which may either be docked
on the left or on the right of AutoCAD or which may be positioned anywhere on the screen.
When the function is loaded, two dialogs are displayed. The dialog on the left only serves for
navigation, whereas the dialog on the right serves for selection of the blocks. Then, all functions are
loaded via context menus of the right mouse button, except for the basic settings of the BlockCenter.
These are reached via the tool button on the upper left of navigation dialog.
If one of the two dialogs isn't needed for current work, it can be hidden temporarily. It can be activated
again by means of the remaining dialog. BlockCenter function isn't finished unless both dialogs are
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-11
BlockCenter
closed or navigation dialog is closed by means of the "Close"-button (x) on the upper right of the
dialog.
NAVIGATION DIALOG
In a tree structure, all existing block directories or groups are listed in navigation dialog. You can
either choose a display reflecting the directory structure of your hard disk or a user-defined display.
Sorting of the user-defined display can be designed freely to a large extent and then saved as a
template (see function ->'Template'). In addition, you may set different display filters.
Navigation dialog is used when:
The current block directory (or block group) is modified
A directory is created or removed from hard disk
Blocks are created
The database structure is revised
The sorting of the display is changed.
If a block group (e.g. system construction XYZ) has been selected, you also could hide this dialog to
gain more space for construction on your screen.
SELECTION DIALOG
In selection dialog, all blocks existing in the selected directory (or in the selected block group) are
listed. They are displayed together with the drawing name and a preview. Of course it depends on the
settings of sorting and filters in navigation dialog which block drawings are finally offered for
selection.
Selection dialog is used when:
a block is inserted into a drawing
an existing block is modified or deleted
the search data (classification) of the block are entered or modified
The figures of preview are created by AutoCAD during saving of a drawing and show this drawing
including current zoom setting at the moment of saving. Apart from scaling of size, you don't have any
further influence on the display within the BlockCenter.
DATABASE
In contrast to other AutoPLANT Structural-functions, where all required data are stored in the
drawing, BlockCenter is working with an additional database. The advantage of this database is that
the blocks, especially if there are a great number of blocks, available at once after the function has
been loaded. Neither a prolonged search in the directories nor a query of drawing data is necessary any
more. In addition, user has a greater influence which drawings are integrated into the BlockCenter and
which ones are not integrated.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-12
BlockCenter
The database format was developed for the BlockCenter and permits fast access to all data required for
sorting and selection. The additional content of the database (user-defined database fields) can be
designed as you like. You may decide yourself which data fields are used to classify your blocks for
selection and search and how they have to be named.
Different properties of the block drawing are already taken from the drawing when a block is created
(or even at a later time) and entered in previously defined database fields. Some search criteria will be
available at once. If these fields are not required, they can of course be removed from the database.
CREATION AND EDITION OF BLOCKS

There must be blocks contained in the BlockCenter to be able to work with it. Blocks are individual
drawings existing on the hard disk, which then may be inserted into other drawings. It is possible to
insert existing drawings or to create new blocks by means of the BlockCenter.
CREATION
Select the option directory structure as display for the creation of a block. Now check the directory
where the block has to be stored in navigation dialog and select the entry create block via context
menu.
Select all components of the model which have to be adopted in the block and pick the main insertion
point of the block. Finally, you are asked for the alignment of the block to allow insertion with correct
alignment afterwards: When you select ESC, the correct UCS will be used. Alternatively, it is possible
to pick a point on the later x-axis as well as a point on the x/y-plane.
Please note, however, that at later insertion the block will automatically always be aligned in a way
that the coordinate system pre-defined here is corresponding with the current drawing UCS. It is
however possible to define alternative insertion points and alignments.
Now, a new drawing will be created and displayed containing the selected component parts. This
drawing can be modified further as you like: you can e.g. add other AutoPLANT Structural- and
AutoCAD-elements or additional insertion points.
Hint: As long as this drawing has not been saved, it cannot be adopted into the database. It is possible
to cancel block creation.
It is not before the block drawing has been stored once – which can also be done when you quit this
function – that the block will be finally adopted into the database and be displayed as preview in
selection dialog.
SELECTION
Select an appropriate sorting in the settings and then check the desired block group in navigation
dialog by clicking on it. Depending on the setting, this may either be a directory or any user-defined
sorting criteria.
Within navigation dialog, you may scroll up and down the tree structure, as you are accustomed to
doing in Windows-Explorer.
If you click on a new entry, selection dialog will be filled with small preview figures as well as with
the file names of available blocks. Only those blocks are displayed, which have been adopted into the
database and which meet the possibly activated filter condition. There may be other drawings included
in the directory.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-13
BlockCenter
Select the desired block by clicking the preview figure in selection dialog. Above the selection list,
additional information on the selected block will be displayed which can also be defined freely.
MODIFICATION
When you want to open an existing block for working or looking on it, select the entry Edit block in
the context menu after block selection.
The block drawing now is opened as new drawing that can be modified. If you want to keep the
modification, the drawing has of course to be stored.
DELETE
Select the entry delete block in the context menu after block selection to remove a block from the
database. Now, you can determine whether you only want to delete the entry in the database or also the
complete drawing on your hard disk.
If you don't delete the drawing, it is possible to adopt it again into the database at a later time.
Any additionally entered data of this block are of course lost because they have been stored in the
database and not in the drawing. Additional insertion points, are kept, because they are stored in the
drawing as visible objects.
CREATE AND DELETE DIRECTORIES

Further directories e.g. new blocks may be created directly from the BlockCenter. Select the option
directory structure as display structure and check the directory beneath which the new directory has to
be created in navigation dialog. Now, select the entry create directory in the context menu and a small
dialog box will be opened where you have to enter the name of the new directory.
To remove a directory, select the directory to be deleted in navigation dialog and click on the entry
delete directory in the context menu.
INSERT BLOCKS
At first, select the desired block in selection dialog and then, click on the entry insert block in the
context menu. Now, you can see a preview of the block, „hanging on the cross-hairs“, and you have to
click on the insertion point of the block.
This insertion point is the main insertion point of the block determined during block creation.
Alignment is effected in a way that the block coordinate system, which was also determined during
block creation is corresponding with the current UCS of the target drawing. Press ESC-key instead, if
you want to cancel the insertion.
ADDITIONAL INSERTION POINTS

You can add further insertion points to a block that is used instead of the main insertion point. E.g. it is
possible to insert a construction at all outer points. When the block is inserted into a drawing
afterwards, you can jump from one insertion point to the other by mouse click and select the desired
point.
Additional insertion points can be determined directly during creation. It is, however, also possible to
insert them later during edition of a block. As this is a matter of visible AutoPLANT Structural
auxiliary objects which will be deleted automatically after insertion, you can also copy, move or delete
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-14
BlockCenter
existing insertion points by means of the standard functions of AutoCAD. Each of these insertion
points is displayed as small 3D-ball the size of which is user-defined.
To add insertion points, open the block drawing for edition (resp. block creation is still activated) and
select the entry add insertion points in the context menu. Now you can add insertion points by clicking
on a point until you end the function by pressing ESC. The alignment at later insertion then
corresponds to the main alignment of the block.
INSERTION POINTS WITH ALIGNMENT

In addition, you can store the later alignment for each insertion point at the point itself to increase the
available alignment variants. Otherwise, only the block alignment determined during block creation
would be available. The block can be rotated directly during insertion.
If you want to add insertion points, which at the same time contain an individual alignment, click on
the entry insertion points with alignment in the context menu. After clicking on the point, you have to
pick another point on the later x-axis as well as a point on the x/y-plane. Here, too, you can add points
until you quit the function by pressing ESC.
INSERTION VIA ADDITIONAL INSERTION POINTS

When you defined additional insertion points for the block, you can select them one after the other.
After insertion of the block by means of its main insertion point, the block is moved to the next
insertion point by pressing the left mouse button. You may follow the result directly on the screen.
After having reached the last insertion point, the block will again be moved to the main insertion point
with the next mouse click and you can start right from the beginning.
DISPLAY OF BLOCK STRUCTURE

The basic settings of the BlockCenter, and especially the kind of sorting, can be pre-defined in the pre-
settings. An appropriate sorting avoids losing track if there is a greateer number of blocks.
When you click on the button on the upper left of navigation dialog, the following dialog box will be
opened:
Group Block Directory
Block path: here, you see the basic directory of the blocks to be managed by the BlockCenter.
These blocks are stored in subdirectories. In this basic directory, you will also find the database
file so that you could work with different block directories (and databases).
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-15
BlockCenter
To modify the directory, click on the button on the right of the display. Then, you can determine
the directory anew via file selection dialog.
Please note that the blocks may only be in subdirectories of this basic directory.
Standard fields...: Here, you determine the behaviour at a database update.

The meaning of the options Do not replace, Always replace and Only replace blanks is described
in detail in chapter 'Update database'.
Group Options for Insertion
Group objects : at insertion of blocks, the program ignores all block elements not belonging to a
group. This option is, however, only valid for special insertion variants planned for future
versions.
Insertion points: here, you specify the ball diameter with which the additional insertion points will
be displayed.
Pattern Rotation Angle
: Here, you specify the angle of rotation of the block about the insertion point.
Group Display
Preview: Here, you can set the height of preview windows in the display dialog.
Directory...: In navigation dialog, the block groups are displayed depending on the directory
structure on the hard disk. You always have to use this sorting for the creation of new blocks,
because otherwise you won't be able to determine a target directory for the block file.
User...: It is possible to create an individual sorting for the navigation dialog depending on the
contents of the user-defined database fields. Sorting then will be made in an hierarchic structure in
the order which is displayed in the list on the right.
ARROW RIGHT: Click on this button to add a property field to the list. Then, a dialog box will be
opened where the existing database fields are displayed. Select the desired field out of this list.
ARROW LEFT: Click on this button to remove the checked field from the list.
Display All: At user-defined sorting, the blocks, which cannot be clearly assigned, will be
displayed as well. This is the case when the corresponding field doesn't exist in the database or
when it is empty. Then, the block will be assigned to a default field of the sorting level in
question.
Incomplete: At all sorting, only those blocks will be displayed the database fields of which have
not been completely filled in. Thus, it is easy for you to find out whether all database fields which
are used for a possible search exist with valid entries.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-16
BlockCenter
Use Filter : At sorting, the blocks are filtered depending on user-defined criteria. Only those
blocks will be displayed which meet the filter condition (and of course the sorting condition). A
specific selection is made possible.
Display Filter: Here, you see the currently selected filter template. Click on the small button on the
right of the information field to select a template.
Please refer to chapter 'Display Filter' for a detailed description of how to create a filter template.
USER-DEFINED SORTING
One important strength of the BlockCenter is the user-defined sorting according to any user-defined
criteria. Fur this purpose, you can define your own database fields and fill them later with data of the
corresponding block.
In the settings, you may now specify a hierarchy according to which the blocks have to be displayed at
a user-defined sorting. Here an example to make things clear:
Let us assume that – among others – you created database fields for the shape, for the whole pattern
and for the 'Schubknagge' to classify prepared root points and you indicate exactly these fields in this
order as sorting.
If you now switch over to user-defined sorting, the tree-structure in the navigation dialog will be as
follows: the contents of the field 'shape' will be displayed on top level, the contents of the field 'hole
pattern' will be displayed on the following level below, and so on.
For each data input, e.g. in the field 'shape' (e.g. HEA140 and HEA160) an entry will be created on the
same level in the tree-structure and blocks with identical contents will be sorted there (analogously to
the directories and sub-directories on the hard disk). This helps you to find out similar blocks at a great
number of blocks.
To avoid slightly differing entries for the same thing, all data existing for this field will be displayed in
a list at data input. Assignments can be made, too. This helps you to avoid that once you enter e.g.
HEA140 and once you enter HE140A.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-17
BlockCenter
DATABASE OF BLOCK DATA

Working with the database is divided into four essential parts: definition of data fields, input of actual
block data, maintenance of the database and use of the data for display and filter.
DEFINITION OF DATA FIELDS

Click on the entry Edit Fields in the context menu of navigation dialog to add your own fields to the
database or to Edit existing fields. The following dialog box will be displayed:
Group Field Definition
List: Here, you see the field names of already defined data fields. If you want to edit or to delete
one of the fields, click on it for selection.
Field Name: Here, you enter the field name of the new database field. Field names always consist
of capital letters (small letters will be automatically transformed) and already existing names are
ignored.
It is useful to enter reasonable field names as these are displayed in the selection dialogs for
sorting and search. For each field a description may be added as auxiliary text for the other
dialogs.
Dialog Text: Here, you specify the labelling of the input field for field data in the input dialog for
block data.
Description: Here, you may specify a describing auxiliary text for the database field, which will be
displayed in the other dialogs at selection of this field.
As you should use concise and easy field names, you can add more information to the field by this
way.
Display:: The data of the database field will be displayed in selection dialog after selection of a
block. This helps limiting the display to some essential fields in the case that there is a great
number of data fields.
Group Data
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-18
BlockCenter
Text Field : Data are evaluated as mere text. Sorting is made in alphabetical order so that the entry
"11" would be sorted in front of the entry "2".
Integer: Data are evaluated as integer. Here, the entry "B2" would be sorted in front of the entry
"A11" because the numerical part has priority.
Floating Point: Data are evaluated as float. If the imperial unit system is used, the units inch and
foot will be displayed correctly.
Floating Point (fix) Data are evaluated as float. If the imperial unit system is used, the units will
not be displayed in inch and foot (e.g. for angles).
COMMAND NAMES OF THE DIALOG
Insert
Click on this button to add the defined database field to the database or to modify an existing one.
Please note that it is not possible to modify a field name. If you select an existing field and you modify
the field name, the program assumes that a new field has to be created.
DeLete
Click on this button to remove the selected database field from the database. Please note, however, that
all existing block data referring to this field will be deleted as well.
INPUT OF BLOCK DATA

After having defined the database fields, you can enter the corresponding data for each created block.
In order to do so, click on the entry Edit block data in the context menu of display dialog or double-
click on a preview window in the display dialog.
Then, a dialog box opens where you can enter the data. It can remain open even if another block is
selected. In this dialog, you will find a list of existing database fields. The size of the dialog depends
on the number of fields.
Enter the desired data in the input fields or select an entry from the list of existing data by clicking on
the arrow on the right of the input field.
When working with the lists, you avoid different entries for the same thing, which facilitates later
searching.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-19
BlockCenter
MoDify
Click on this button to take over your entries or to modify already existing data.
PRE-DEFINED DATA FIELDS

To facilitate the acquisition of standard data, certain pre-defined data fields (standard fields) will be
created at the creation of blocks, the contents of which can be automatically taken from the drawing.
These data fields are managed in the same way like any standard user-defined data fields and therefore
can be modified or deleted, too.
If one or more of these data fields are deleted, they won't be taken into consideration any more at
database update or at the creation of blocks. To restore these fields, it is necessary to re-structure the
database or to create the field manually together with the exact name.
AUTOMATIC CREATION OF DATABASE

At first start of the program or at modification of block directory, it may be that there isn't yet any
database existing. In this case, a blank database is always created to adopt blocks.
The program offers you to search in the block directory including all sub-directories for drawings and
to adopt them into the database. This allows you to manage even earlier created blocks via the
BlockCenter.
When you give a negative answer to this query, only those blocks are displayed which will be created
later with the help of the BlockCenter – even if there are still other drawings in the directories. It is
possible to create a complete new database at any time you like.
NEW CREATION OF DATABASE

At any time, it is possible to replace the existing database by a new one without having to delete the
database file. Just click on the entry Create database new in the context menu of navigation dialog.
Now, the program searches in all subordinate directories for drawings to be adopted into the database.
Important hint: Please note, however, that all user-defined data fields and the corresponding existing
contents will be lost! A new database will be created containing all drawings and blank standard fields
existing in the directory.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-20
BlockCenter
UPDATE OF DATABASE
Click on the entry Update database in the context menu of navigation dialog to update an existing
database. In this case, the program searches for drawing files, which don’t exist any more in the block
directory, and removes them from the database. At the same time, new drawing files and sub-
directories will be adopted into the database.
At update of the database, the entered data and modifications of data fields are kept. You may define
via pre-settings what has to be done with the standard fields during update.
When the option 'Don't replace standard fields' was selected, no entries in the standard fields will be
modified, i.e. new drawings won't be examined either.
When the option 'Always replace standard fields' was selected, all drawings will be searched for
standard data and any possible modifications will be lost.
When the option 'Only replace blank standard fields' was selected, newly added drawings will be
examined, as their standard fields are still blank. All others won't be taken into consideration.
When some standard fields were removed from the database, they won't be restored during update. By
means of update, it is, however, possible to make sure that modifications in the block files will cause
an update of the remaining standard fields. The program assumes that deleted standard fields won't be
required any more.
Please note that each drawing in question has to be opened for update in order to determine the
drawing data. This process may require some time until it is finished.
DISPLAY FILTER
Another strength of the BlockCenter is the display filter according to certain search criteria. Before the
blocks are displayed in the selected sorting, the program first checks whether each single block meets
the filter conditions on the basis of its database entries.
For this purpose, logical links may be created between the existing data fields and their contents. There
is no limit concerning the complexity of the query. Different filter combinations can be stored as
templates and then defined as activated filter in the settings for the sorting.
You may e.g. specify that only blocks having holes will be displayed if they have 4 enforced holes.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-21
BlockCenter
Then, the neighboring figure will show you the result of filtering at a given sorting according to shape,
hole pattern and if they are enforced.
To be able to work reasonably with the filters, user should have a certain mathematical understanding
of logically linked notions. It is very easy to create a filter condition never producing any positive
result at all in combination with the existing data – a corresponding check doesn't take place.
BOOLEAN OPERATORS
Simple queries only consist of one comparing condition such as e.g. whole pattern = 4. It is, however,
the logical link between several comparing conditions, which is really interesting.
Therefore, you may specify a logical operator by means of which the next inserted comparing
condition shall be linked with the existing condition. To facilitate input, previous pairs are
automatically put into brackets, in case of a change of the operator. It is possible to create search
queries such as (A AND B) OR (A AND C) in an easy way. A, B and C here are variables of simple
comparing conditions of data field, operator and content.
An existing term can be manually put into brackets, too, if the condition is not in pairs. The following
condition serves as example: ((A AND B) OR C) AND D.
DEFINE FILTER
To define a filter term click on the entry Edit display filter in the context menu of navigation dialog.
The following dialog box will be opened:
Group comparable term
List: Here, all user-defined database fields are displayed which may be used for the search criteria.
Each field may be used as often as you like.
Select the desired field by clicking on it in the list. Then, the field name will be displayed on the
right. In the information line, the auxiliary text for this field will be displayed containing more
detailed information on the data field.
Display fields: here, user presets an individual comparing condition consisting of field name,
comparing operator and block data. Logical operators to form the complete filter condition can
combine several comparing conditions.
> Left: The current database field, which can be modified by clicking on it in the list.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-22
Roof/Wall Panels
> Operator: Here, the comparing operator is selected linking the database field and the block data
(content of the field) to build a comparing condition.
> Right: Possible block data (contents of the field) of the selected data field in a dropdown-list.
Impossible comparing conditions will be avoided.
After all three components of a comparing condition were preset; you can add this condition to the
complete filter condition by clicking on the INSERT button. Depending on the existing conditions and
selected logical links, appropriate brackets are set by the program.
Group Filter Condition
Display field: the complete filter condition, if need be, as logical link consisting of several
comparing conditions. If a comparing condition has already been inserted, the activated logical
operator of the following comparing condition will be displayed as well.

Operator AND
Click on this button to select the logical operator AND as logical link for the following comparing
condition.
Operator OR
Click on this button to select the logical operator OR as logical link for the following comparing
condition.
bracket
Click on this button to force the program to put the existing filter conditions into brackets manually.
Brackets are always necessary when the complete result of a (partial) condition has to be linked with
another, as the combination of (A AND B) OR C is different to A AND (B OR C).
insert
Click on this button to add the current comparing condition to the complete filter condition.
deLete
Click on this button to delete the comparing condition, which was added last.
ROOF/WALL PANELS
Command Name: PS_ROWADISPATCH
This command allows you to divide any surface with roof-wall shapes and display them in colour. You
choose orientation and grid spacing. The program then determines necessary cut-outs in the shapes.
You can work with all shapes, including special shapes and plates. Layout is done on the active UCS
plane. It is recommended to use a top view of the UCS plane.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-23
Roof/Wall Panels
SURFACE LAYOUT
To divide a wall surface by means of front shapes, outer bordering of the surface as well as possible
inner cuts have to exist as poly-lines first.
After having loaded the function, click the Outer Poly-Line of the Surface first and then the direction
determining line for alignment. Now, pick the Origin of Division and the following dialog appears for
further specifications:
Max. Length: Here, you are prompted to indicate the grid length (i.e. the lengths of the shapes to
be installed).
Grid Width: Here, you are prompted to indicate the grid width. If the grid width exceeds the shape
width, the layout will show gaps - if the grid width is smaller, you will have overlaps. In the
neighbouring input field, the shape width of the currently selected shape is displayed (see ‘Shapes’
tab).
Depth: Here, you enter the distance between layout and active UCS plane. By entering positive
values, you move the surface along the positive Z-axis of UCS.
Offset Top: Here, you enter a projection of the shape over the grid length at the upper end. If you
enter a positive value, the shape is shortened and a gap is shown. If you enter a negative value, the
shape is extended and overlaps with he next grid element.
Offset Bottom: Here, you enter a projection of the shape over the grid length at the lower end. If
you enter a positive value, the shape is shortened and a gap is shown. If you enter a negative value,
the shape is extended and overlaps with the previous grid element.
Offset Side: Here, you enter the dimension by which the shape insertion points to be moved
horizontally from the center of the grid.
Dynamic: The command automatically reacts to a modification of the polygon.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-24
Roof/Wall Panels
Cut: If this field is checked, the shapes, which are longer or wider than the outer poly-line, are cut
at this poly-line.
Offset: Here you enter how grid lines are moved against each other in longitudinal direction. No
offset means that they are not moved.
Centered offset means that they are moved in a way that a new line begins in the middle of the
previous line (“laid brick pattern”).
Dimensions mean that the lines are offset against each other by a value you entered in the
neighbouring input field.
Colour Normal: Select a colour for all shapes not being cut by entering the AutoCAD colour code.
The colour can also be selected by clicking the BUTTON which is situated at the right.
Colour Cut: Select a colour for all shapes being cut by entering the AutoCAD colour code. The
colour can also be selected by clicking the BUTTON which is situated at the right.
Original Colour: Using this option resets the colours to their original values after the dialog
function has been finished.
SHAPE SELECTION
Choose the component parts to be used for installation on the second page.
Shapes: Unless having checked ‚Use Poly-Plates’ field, you select here the shape to be used for
installation. You can select the shape according to the shape categories in the lists.
Plates: If the ’Use Poly-Plates’ field is checked, a rectangular poly-plate is used as installation
element instead of a shape.
You can determine the dimensions in the Plate Width and Plate Thickness input fields, the length
corresponds to the ‘Grid Length’ corrected by the offset value.
You can specify a name for the plate in the selection list. If the Grid field is checked, a plate grid
(e.g. for a grating at the installation of stage coverings) is created for being displayed.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-25
Roof/Wall Panels
POLY-CUTS
You can enter additional cut outs into a surface at which the shapes have to be cut as well. In order to
do this, the poly-lines of the cut outs are required which can, however, still be drawn when the function
is activated.
Poly-Cuts: Here, you can see the number of additional cut outs existing at the moment.
By clicking this button, you can insert a cut out into the division. Click the poly-line of the cut out in
order to do so.
If the poly-line doesn’t yet exist, you can draw it directly before loading this option.
By clicking this button, you can delete the currently selected cut out and close the surface at this
position.
If you have several cut outs in the division, you can select the required cut out by pressing ‘<<’ and
’>>‘.
Here the example of a gable wall automatically lined with wall facing elements. The dark surfaces
show the elements that do not have to be cut out; the light surfaces have to be cut out. In addition, 2
openings have been inserted.
Delete all
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-26
Dispatch Blocks
Click on this button to delete the complete filter condition.
USE FILTER TEMPLATES

As you already know from nearly all other AutoPLANT Structural functions, the filter conditions, too,
may be stored as template. Then, the filter can be used in the settings of the display via the name of
this template.
Don't forget that this is only a hint. If the filter template is modified, the display template, in which this
filter was used, will probably produce another result, too.
DISPATCH BLOCKS
Command Name: PS_DISPATCH
Use this command to distribute as many AutoCAD blocks as desired evenly across a shape length and
add their insertion points as markings to the shape (e.g. for NC output). Of course, you can just add
markings without inserting a block.
In addition, the function allows for the parametric generation of thread bolts or similar solids of
revolution at simultaneous distribution analogously to the distribution of blocks described above.
INSERTION OF THREAD BOLTS

Apart from manual input, you can save the definitions of thread bolts in a data base (*.dbf) as well.
This data base has to be indicated in your configuration file of AutoPLANT Structural. The entries
then are displayed there and are available for selection.
Group Distances
Spacing: Here you enter the distance between the individual insertion points.
Front Offset: Here you enter the distance from shape start to the first insertion point.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-27
Dispatch Blocks
End Offset: Here you enter the distance from last insertion point to the end of the shape.
Insertion Rules: Since in most cases the length of a shape does not coincide with the settings, you
can define the rules for distribution here.
End Dimensions – The margin dimensions are exactly adhered to and the internal distance is
averaged.
Inner Values – The inner values are adhered to and the margin dimensions are averaged.
Center Inner Values - The inner values are adhered to and the rest is evenly distributed at the front
and at the back.
At Plate Drilling – This option is especially meant for distribution of anchor bolts or similar things
at base plates. The parts are aligned at the existing drillings and fixed below a plate.
Hole Dia: You enter the diameter of marking or nipple hole.
Slot Length: You enter the depth of marking or nipple hole.
Group Options
Shape Center: The markings are attached to the center of the selected shapes.
Create Marks..: The marking or nipple holes are attached.
Lower: The component parts are attached below the plate.
Insert Blocks: The selected weld bolts are attached.
Create Groups: The shapes and bolts form a group.
Group Dimensions
Dia: Bolt diameter
Length: Bolt length
Bottom Dia: Diameter of the bolt’s base
Bottom: Length of the bolt’s base
Top Dia: Diameter of the bolt’s head
Top Length: Length of the head
Bolt Dia: Diameter of bolt nipple
Bolt Length: Length of bolt nipple
Group Others
Name: Bolt name in the parts list
List: List of available entries in the selected bolt database
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-28
Dispatch Blocks
This button distributes the bolts on the selected shapes according to the preset rules.
This button permits individual placing of bolts on the selected shapes. Here, each insertion point is
indicated individually.
Here you see two examples for the distribution of welded bolts on shapes:
INSERTION OF BLOCKS
Alternatively, you can also make distribute existing self-created AutoCAD-blocks. Then you have to
select the second page.
The specifications concerning the parametric dimensions are omitted of course. The block is inserted
exactly as you created it. Please note that the current UCS has to agree with the UCS of the block to grant
a correct alignment of the block.
The proceeding is identical as well. The only difference consists in the fact that no generated parts are
inserted but the individually specified block. Therefore this is a very flexible command.
The options concerning the distribution are identical with the distribution of thread bolts. So you
can refer to this chapter for more detailed information.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-29
Dispatch Blocks
Hole Dia Sign: You can specify a code for the drill holes to be created. This code serves for
selection of special NC-programs being able to recognize this code.
Block path: This is the path to the block to be inserted.
List: List of saved blocks from the database
FURTHER OPTIONS AND DATA BASE

As it is the case with many other AutoPLANT Structural functions, here too it is possible to make
some standard default settings directly under ‘Assignments’ for the component parts to be inserted.
Data Base: Select the database to be used.
Seize Parts : The component parts are seized for the parts list.
Monitor Backgr.: The colour of monitor background
DATA BASE DEFINITION

You can define a database with pre-defined thread bolts resp. paths to the blocks before you can
optimally utilize the distribution command. Any thread bolts or blocks indicated there are then
displayed in the selection list. This DBASE-file (e.g. bolts.dbf) has to be indicated in the
configurations.
Meaning of the Data Base Fields
TYPE: indicates the entry type (1 = thread bolt, 2 = block)
NAME: name of the thread bolt or block
BLOCKPATH: complete path to the block (only for type 2)
HOLEDESCRI: drill hole code (only for type 2)
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-30
Auxiliary Tools
HOLEDM: diameter of marking hole
HOLELENGTH: depth of marking hole
LENGTH: length of thread hole (only for type 1)
DM: diameter of thread hole (only for type1)
FOOTDM: diameter of thread hole foot (only for type1)
FOOTHEIGHT: height of thread hole foot (only for type1)
HEADDM: diameter of thread hole head (only for type1)
HEADHEIGHT: height of thread hole head (only for type1)
NIPPELDM: diameter of thread hole nipple (only for type1)
NIPPELLENG: length of thread hole nipple (only for type1)
AUXILIARY TOOLS
COLLISION CHECK
An important task of modern CAD systems is to avoid errors during construction. First and foremost
this is to avoid collisions. This functions serves for the detection and display of collisions within any
kind of component parts. There are various reasons for collisions to occur. In addition this function
helps you to check whether bolts can be mounted or not.
The check is made on the base of the parts volume.
If a collision is detected, the collision volume is displayed on screen and the component parts in
question are highlighted. Then, you can zoom on all collisions one after the other and check the
positions concerned.
Min. Volume: Minimal collision volume, from which on the collision is seized as such. The
display is made in mm^3. This avoids that your attention is distracted from important things by
collisions, which are due to minimal tolerances.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-31
Auxiliary Tools
Display Scaling: Factor by which the zoom window is increased when you zoom on the found
parts to get a survey on the whole situation.
Actual/Max.: Display of the current collision solid and the total amount of found solids.
: Use this button to start collision check. You are prompted to select all parts to be checked. All
colliding components now are highlighted with a colour defined in the settings, and the collision solids
are displayed.
You can of course select a complete model. Please note that the required time increases with the
square of the number of selected component parts. The reason is that each part has to be checked with
each other part. Therefore, it is often more reasonable to check only a certain junction point at a time.
: Use this button to remove the highlighting of the parts and to delete all found collision solids as long
as they are situated on the collision layer.
: Use this button to select the next found collision solid for examination.
: Use this button to select the previous found collision solid for examination.
CENTER OF GRAVITY
Use this function to calculate the center of gravity of any parts. Select the part in question and the
calculation is started. A ball in the model and numerically in the dialog line visually displays the result.
There, you obtain information about the defined volume, the exact coordinates of the center of gravity
(in world coordinates) as well as the total weight of the parts.
Please note that different specific weights are not taken into consideration. The program assumes that
all parts are made of steel.
TUBE UNFOLD
Command Name: PS_UNWIND
Using this command you can unfold any kind of cutout shape and insert its development immediately
into the active UCS plane.
When you select this command, the following dialog box opens.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-32
Auxiliary Tools
Resolution Max.: Indicate the resolution of the unfolding. The higher the indicated value, the more
detailed is the scan of the component searching for any possible outlets or notches. The greatest
acceptable value is 360.
Use ACIS: Switches the component part from unfolding to ACIS. The result may be an increase of
accuracy.
Inner Contour: The inner contour of tube shapes is unfolded as well.
Group Colours Outer Contour
Outside Edges: colour of the outer contour of the developments.
Tessellation L.: colour of the tessellation lines of the outer contour.
Bend Line: colour of possibly existing sharp bent lines of the outer contour.
Create Tessel.: If this field is checked, tessellation lines are displayed.
Group Colours Inner Contour
Outer Edge: colour of the inner contour of the developments.
Tessellation L.: colour of the tessellation lines of the inner contour.
CREATING DEVELOPMENT
After you have exited the dialog, you have to click the shape that is to be unwound or developed. The
desired operation is then supplied “sticking to the crosshairs”. Position it freely anywhere in the model
and process it further if desired.
If you have selected ‘Inner Contour’, both developments are sticking to the crosshairs in the form of
two properly positioned blocks. Position them anywhere in the model and then process them
individually.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-33
Add Effective Static Analysis Lines
MOVE OBJECTS
Use this function to simulate moving of any parts along a line, poly-line or spline. This can be applied
for visualizations or to check whether parts can be assembled. The objects are moved along a guideline
in a set speed. In addition, you can choose whether you only want to move the parts or whether they
have to be rotated as well.
Resolution: Enter here into how many parts the guide lines have to be divided regularly. The
higher the value, the more regular and the more fluent the simulated movement will be.
Delay: Wait in milliseconds after each single movement. This value controls the speed of the
simulated movement.
Move and..: The objects are not only moved along the guide line, but also rotated around this line.
This means, if you have a sharp bend in the line, the part will be rotated along this bend.
After pressing the OK button, seize the guide line first. This may be a line, poly-line, spline or an arc.
Then seize the parts and the simulation starts.
CONVERT ADT SHAPES

Command name: PS_CONVERT_ADTSHAPES
This function is only available in a specific version of AutoPLANT Structural for Autodesk
Architectural Desktop (ADT). This AutoCAD application is specifically designed for architects and
contains a variety of steel shapes.
With a call to this function you can convert the ADT shapes into AutoPLANT Structural shapes for
further use of the AutoPLANT Structural3D manipulation functionality. After a call to the function
you should choose the ADT shapes that should be converted. If AutoPLANT Structural finds a
corresponding shape in its database then the ADT shape is deleted and is replaced with the
AutoPLANT Structural shape.
ADD EFFECTIVE STATIC ANALYSIS LINES

Command name: PS_Analysis
Analysis display allows you to control and to work on the effective static analysis lines of the shapes to
get an optimum output for translation to static analysis programs. From the individual interfaces, you
can force the output of analysis display. The effective lines defined by you will be output instead of the
center lines of the shapes.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-34
If no modifications were made here, the effective lines correspond to center lines. This function offers
you, the possibility to modify the effective lines independently of the insertion of a shape to balance
e.g. eccentricities, if these have no importance for calculation or to close open nodes.
EFFECTIVE LINES
After loading the function, you first have to select the objects that are to be switched to analysis
display. Having made this selection, you only see an individual line of each shape, representing the
effective static analysis line. The different colours within the line help you to recognize whether the
end is connected with another shape (representing a node) or whether it is open (e.g. a cantilever). If it
is open and not a cantilever, you are dealing with eccentric shapes in most cases you could create a
closed system by means of this function.
It is possible to modify the effective lines manually by using the offered options of this function or by
modifying them via AutoCAD grips.
Check colours...:: If this field is checked, the colours of the represented shape ends will be verified
automatically, every time the function is loaded. See button ->'Update colours'
Check connect...:: If this field is checked, the different parts will be verified automatically whether
they are connected with each other or not, every time the function is loaded. Display is adapted
accordingly. See button ->'Automatic'
Hide xxx : If these fields are checked, the selected objects will be hidden to provide a clearer view.
etc.: You can hide Workframes, structural elements (auxiliary lines of structural elements),
polyplates, bolts and connecting parts such as web angles, etc.
Shorten offsets:: If this field is checked, the “cantilevered” ends at a node will be shortened, so that
there will be no offsets.
You can specify the maximum possible offset in the corresponding input field Max. Offset. All
values larger than the actual value e.g. a cantilever and will not be taken into account.
When this button is clicked, the program tries to connect the effective static analysis lines
automatically to create a closed system. If the effective lines are situated in a common plane, they are
extended to each other and a node is symbolically represented as a ball. At the same time, the ends
adopt the same colour as the center part of the line to display a closed connection. Please note, that the
penetrating lines are not divided at the nodes. You can force this division later during export.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-35
When this button is clicked, the program verifies whether a connection exists or whether a connection
is open. The represented colour will be modified accordingly. “Red” signifies that there is an open end
and “green” means that this end is connected with a neighbouring part.
The difference between this function and the function 'Automatic' is, that here the program only checks
and the display is updated where as the function 'Automatic' tries to create a connection and when
doing this can also modify the effective line.
If this button is clicked, the components in question are connected with each other by means of a
manual link. For this purpose you have to select the components in question after.
The main part of the manual connection keeps its position; the connected parts are related to this main
part so that their effective lines can e.g. be positioned diagonally towards it. A node will be created
automatically.
A manual link does not have any further meaning. It only serves for creation of intended connections.
On one hand, these connections are used in this function for the definition of nodes. On the other hand,
they allow dimensioning of system lines at detailing. See also function ->‘DetailCenter / Detailing
Style / Dimensioning‘
QUERY AND MODIFY STATIC EFFECTIVE LINES

The data of effective static analysis lines can also be seen or modified in shape properties. This tab is
only available after having been activated in the global settings (see function ->'Global Settings /
Options').
If this page is loaded, the display immediately switches over to analysis-display.
Start X,Y,Z: the coordinates of the start point of the effective static analysis line in absolute
coordinate values.
End X,Y,Z: : the coordinates of the end point of the effective static analysis line in absolute
coordinate values.
Manual input:: If this field is checked, the values of the corresponding end have been modified
manually (and mostly, they differ from the center line).
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-36
Data Exchange
Connected with:: If this field is checked, the corresponding end is connected with another shape
by means of a node.
No Discrimination: If this field is checked, you can avoid a division of the shape in individual
lines between the nodes of connecting shapes at export of static data. In export functions, you can,
avoid this limitation so that you don't have to modify each single shape if this division is desired.
See function ->'Export
: Allows picking the start point of AEC.
: Allows picking the end point of AEC.
DATA EXCHANGE
GENERAL INFORMATION ABOUT DATA EXCHANGE

It is possible to send and receive data to and from other programs via the import and export interfaces
of AutoPLANT Structural. In most cases, these are 3D-constructions of other CAD-programs or the
static analysis systems of programs for static analysis calculations.
The exchange takes place via a special file format defined by independent standard committees like
e.g. Deutscher Stahlbauverband DSTV (German Association of Steel Construction) or even by the
program manufacturers themselves. The data to be exchanged are mostly saved as ASCII-text file;
therefore they are independent of the used operating systems. In case of possible transfer problems
they can be adapted with any text editor you like.
Additionally to the "acknowledged" formats, AutoPLANT Structural also has its own exchange format
based on a clear text file. This format exactly describes the positioning and detailing of component
parts, group structure and parts list or part information.
DATA EXCHANGE IN PRACTICE

In practice, data are often exchanged between CAD and static programs. This exchange is limited to
the exchange of systems. A static system is created for the rough analysis of costs (determination of the
expected cross-sections). Then the system is transferred to the CAD-program to create overviews or
visualizations for the offer.
At the following construction, a more detailed model of the system is created and could be
retransmitted to the static analysis program to carry out more detailed calculations. After construction,
however, it occurs quite often that special NC-production data for DCC machines are transmitted
which contain already all shape detailing processes. In addition, the parts list data are transferred to the
corresponding PPS systems for storing and for the placing of orders.
DATA EXCHANGE PROBLEMS

AutoPLANT Structural has a great number of interfaces to allow for a universal use. There should
always be a common denominator to be found for the data exchange. The volume of exchangeable
information always depends on the complexity of interface definition and the corresponding
implementation degree of transmitter and receiver.
It might be that AutoPLANT Structural could interpret the complete 3D-model including all
connections as file of a certain interface, the writing program, however, can only write the position of
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-37
Data Exchange
standard shapes. In this case, important data will of course be lost during transfer and would have to be
re-modelled – if necessary.
Another problem is that the designations for material and cross-sections of the concerned programs
partly differ from each other. The data are imported correctly, but the reading program doesn’t
recognize e.g. the shapes because in most cases the name is compared without error tolerance. To
minimize this problem, AutoPLANT Structural offers so-called exchange lists where a translation of
the designations can be controlled exactly.
EXCHANGE LISTS
Exchange lists can solve many problems occurring in the data exchange between AutoPLANT
Structural and other programs. Different designations are often used for the same shape or material –
especially when the files in question are foreign formats, which are not subject to a common standard.
While it isn’t a problem for the human mind to recognize that the designation HEA100 and HE-100A
probably describe the same shape, this is a much bigger problem for the computer.
PRINCIPLE OF THE EXCHANGE LIST

You can create exchange lists to allow for an adaptation to most different target systems; the required
list can be selected for import/export. These links can be permanently saved via templates.
Now, if a material or shape designation is read during import, the program is looking for the
corresponding AutoPLANT Structural designation in the current exchange list. If the search was
successful, this designation will be used in the further process. Of course, it is reasonable that several
alternative designations are assigned to one AutoPLANT Structural designation and that the list is able
to learn. Each unknown designation can be temporarily or permanently saved in an exchange list which
in the course of time will become more and more extensive.
Vice versa during export process, the program is looking for the corresponding exchange designation
of a AutoPLANT Structural designation. This designation will be exported. Due to the capability to
learn and to avoid errors, you should use one list for import and export. Therefore, if there are several
alternative designations, you should explicitly specify one of them as export name.
The use of these lists also allows for an error tolerant handling of exchange files:
Due to the three possibilities, the shape HE100-A will be recognized correctly and translated into the
AutoPLANT Structural designation HE100A. During output, the correct preset shape designation
(grey) will be used.
DEFINITION OF AN EXCHANGE LIST

One or more exchange lists can be created by means of a dialog or via a DBASE-file, which has to be
converted afterwards. They are stored as binary file having the ending *.exm in the data directory of
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-38
Data Exchange
An exchange file processes shape and material names simultaneously. Therefore only one file is
required and this is the reason why in the following only the term “Exchange Designation” will be
used.
Group Exchange List
Internal Name: Here, you will find a list of all designations used by AutoPLANT Structural.
You can assign as many alternative exchange designations to each of these internal names as you
like. The current selection is displayed in the grey input field.
> List Field: Here, you select the shape type. When the input field 'Material' has been checked, this
previous type selection is not available.
> Selection List: Here, you select the shape size or the material designation to which you want to
assign the alternative names.
Replace as: Enter a new designation and insert it into the list. The program doesn’t differentiate
capitalization or the use of small initial letters.
Since exchange designations can only be inserted, you have to insert the new entry first and then
delete the old one, if you only want to modify an entry.
> Selection List: Here, you will find the exchange designations of the AutoPLANT Structural
designation selected on the left.
The first name in the list is the designation used during export of a AutoPLANT Structural model.
INSERT: By clicking this button, the new exchange designation specified in the input field
'Replace' is assigned to the selected AutoPLANT Structural designation.
DELETE: By clicking this button, the selected exchange designation is removed from the selected
AutoPLANT Structural designation.
DELIVERY: By clicking this button, the selected exchange designation is selected for export and
moved to the first position in the list.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-39
Data Exchange
Shapes: Here, you can make the above-mentioned assignments for shape designations.
Material: Here, you can make the above-mentioned assignments for material designations.
All: all-internal names are displayed – no matter whether exchange designations have been
assigned or not.
Ready: Only those internal names are displayed to which exchange designations have already been
assigned.
Open: Only those internal names are displayed to which exchange designations have not been
assigned.
Group Others
File: the file path of the current exchange list.
Content: A short description of the content of the new exchange list or of the list, which has been
loaded at the very moment.
Add Names: The exchange designations of the shape data base are entered when an exchange list
is created or completed.
DIALOG-COMMANDS
LOAD
By clicking this button, you can load an exchange list. It is also possible to import an exchange list in
DBASE-format by selecting the file type in the file selection dialog, which opens then.
DBASE-import is not available when you select the dialog via the interface dialogs.
STORE
By clicking this button, you can store the current exchange list. It is possible to export an exchange list
in DBASE-format by selecting the file type in the file selection dialog, which opens then.
DBASE-export is not available when you select the dialog via the interface dialog.
NEW
By clicking this button, a new exchange list is created based on the shape and material database of
Thus, you obtain all available internal names and you can add the desired exchange designations to
them.
If the field 'Add Exchange Designation at New/Update' has been checked, the exchange designations
of the shape database are entered, too.
UPDATE
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-40
Data Exchange
By clicking this button, new entries based on the shape or material database of AutoPLANT Structural
are added to the current exchange list.
METRIC AND IMPERIAL

When reading the data, the program determines the appropriate shape designation (metric or imperial)
for the drawing. This means that you can import imperial shape names into a metric drawing if those
have been specified as alternative designations. In this case, the internal metric name will be
transferred to AutoPLANT Structural.
Since an explicit export designation has to be defined for the data export, you specify by means of the
selected exchange list whether a metric or imperial designation has to be used. When both variants are
required, you need two different exchange lists, too.
Since import should be of universal use, both names are available in the list as possible exchange
designation. You can copy one list after creation and use the copy to modify the order in the list for the
shapes in question.
EXCHANGE DESIGNATIONS OF THE SHAPE DATA BASE

In the *.dbf-files of the shape data base, you will also find designations for data exchange in the fields
TRANSMETRIC and TRANSZOLL. They come from earlier program versions and are named
according to the DSTV-defaults for DIN-shapes.
The new interfaces don’t use the data fields any more, in contrast to the old interfaces. Since here you
have already “a set” of available exchange designations, these can be loaded as preset when a new list
is created. Thus, you will immediately obtain a list, which is able to work as basis for your individual
adaptations.
EXCHANGE LIST IN DBASE-FORMAT

As an option to the processing possibilities of this function, the exchange lists can also be created and
processed with the help of any other programs being able to read and write DBASE files. This method
is recommended in case of more important modifications because programs like e.g. Microsoft Excel
have been optimized with regard to working with lists.
First, you can create a new list in this function to obtain the internal names. Then, you save these
names as DBASE file which is processed with the help of the foreign program and re-import the file
into AutoPLANT Structural afterwards to save the list in the internal *.exm-format. Please note that
this list has to be available as *.exm-file for use with AutoPLANT Structural.
Data Fields of DBASE-File
The DBASE-file has to contain the following fields, which in general are chains of signs. The fields 0-
5 are absolutely necessary, the fields 6,7,... etc. can be used as an option.
Since the DBASE-file only has a sequential structure of data records, whereas the exchange lists are
organized in a tree structure, this tree structure has to be simulated by means of group-lines. Group
lines only contain the fields 0-2, shape or material lines contain only the fields 0 and 3,4,...
Field Field Name Content
0 TYPE line type, (F) group line (S) shape entry (M) material
entry
1 FAMILY shape type when shape group or "Material" when material
group
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-41
Data Exchange
2 FILE AutoPLANT Structural shape file (when material group: no

entry necessary)
3 METRIC Internal AutoPLANT Structural designation metric
4 IMPERIAL Internal AutoPLANT Structural designation imperial (for
material like field 3)
5 EXCHANGE exchange designation (1st list entry, is also export
name)
6 IMPORT1 if need be, further exchange designation (2nd list entry)
7... n IMPORT2 ... n if need be, further exchange designations (next list
entries)
(shape file) The DBASE-file with the shape data of the data
directory of AutoPLANT Structural. Here
specified without path with name and extension.
(shape type) Type designation (e.g. DIN_HEA); the different sizes are
the shape entries up to the next group line.
INTERFACE FORMAT SELECTION

Import and export of the new AutoPLANT Structural interfaces like PXF or Product Interface Steel
Construction is affected via a common dialog box for all interfaces, which will be described in this
chapter.
In addition, the commands of formats like DSTV-NC or DSTV-PPS, which have already existed for
quite some time, are still available. These are described in a separate chapter and cannot (yet) be
loaded via the common dialog.
When the import or export command is loaded, a file selection dialog opens first, where you can select
the required interface format under File Type.
If an interface dialog is planned for the interface, this dialog appears in form of individual pages in a
dialog box which is identical for all formats. In addition, a page for ’General Settings’ and/or
‘Conversion’ can be displayed where you can enter data, which are independent of the corresponding
interface.
The following figure shows the dialog box. In this example, 2 property pages for ”Product Interface
Steel Construction“ of the DSTV (’Control Field’ and ‘Options’) have been inserted; in addition there
is the common page ’General Settings’ and/or ‘Conversion’.
Control Field: Individual page of the selected interface.
Options: Individual page of the selected interface.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-42
Data Exchange
General Settings: Common page for all interfaces.
Conversion: Common page for all interfaces.
In the following chapters, you will find a description of the different interfaces and of their property
pages. In most cases, the corresponding manufacturers or standard committees can obtain a description
of the interface formats.
DIALOG COMMANDS
CONTINUE (OK)
By clicking this button, import or export will be continued, if the selected interface command is
waiting for further specifications or if the process has been stopped for your information.
LIST
By clicking this button, you can select an existing exchange list for import or export.
PROCESS
By clicking this button, you can process an existing exchange list for import or export or select another
list.
FILE
If you click this button, the read or created interface file will be displayed if it is an ASCII-text file.
ERROR REPORT
By clicking this button, you can view an error report, if it is created by the selected interface command.
In this error report, you are e.g. informed whether errors occurred in a read file or whether certain data
cannot be evaluated by AutoPLANT Structural.
DATA IMPORT COMMAND

This command allows for importing data of other programs in AutoPLANT Structural via an exchange
file. In most cases, these data are 3D-models of other CAD-programs or the static systems of programs
for static calculations.
At printing of this manual, the following interfaces have already been integrated in the new arranged
import dialog:
- DSTV Product Interface Steel Construction (*.stp)
- PXF Data Exchange Format (*.pxf)
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-43
Data Exchange
- STAAD III (*.std)
- SDNF (*.sdf)
It is, however, possible that you will find already further formats in your AutoPLANT Structural
version. The performance range of the interfaces (implementation degree) can have been extended, too.
Please refer to the up-dated hints on your installation-CD.
IMPORT DATA
When this function is loaded, a file selection dialog opens where you can select the required interface
under File Type. Then, you select the file to be imported. Depending on the interface, an interface
dialog opens where you can make further specifications concerning the data to be imported.
After file selection resp. after confirmation of import process in the dialog, the data are evaluated and
the AutoPLANT Structural model is created. Depending on the complexity of the interface and on the
volume of the data, this process may take some time. You are, however, informed about the current
state in the AutoCAD-command line or in the interface dialog. After the creation of the model has been
finished, a note box will be displayed.
WORKING AREAS
A working area can be created automatically to allow you to work with the basic views of the imported
model immediately. A rectangular working area will be created approximately describing the outer
dimensions of the model (only the end points of the shape axes are considered at the calculation).
This is an ideal starting point for the control of the imported model resp. for the creation of further
views.
UNKNOWN DESIGNATIONS
As the data in the exchange formats mostly are the used shapes and plates, it is recommended to
provide all existing shape databases correctly. You should do this above all if you import constructions
containing foreign shape series. In most cases, the interface formats only transfer one shape name as
reference; the actual information on the geometry of the cross-section comes from the importing
program.
AutoPLANT Structural supports so-called exchange lists to cope with the different designations. The
imported name is translated into a valid AutoPLANT Structural shape and the selection of substitute
cross-sections is made possible.
If the name does not exist, the shape is considered to be unknown. A dialog appears where you can
assign a AutoPLANT Structural shape to the unknown shape.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-44
Data Exchange
Unknown: The imported shape name, which is not found.
AutoPLANT Structural: here, you enter the access code or you select the shape from a list by
clicking SELECTION button. The shape type (e.g. HEA) is displayed first at selection. After
having selected the shape type, you can select the required shape from the existing shape sizes by
double-clicking the entry.
Permanent: The specified assignment is permanently stored in a file. Otherwise, it is only valid for
the current load of import command.
Thus, it will also be available for later selections of this or other import commands.
The assignment of unknown designations is also available for material names. The process is the same
as described under shape names.
GENERAL SETTINGS
If the interface dialog is available in the selected import format, it can also contain a page for “General
Settings” apart from the specific pages. This page is identical for all interfaces and permits settings for
the import process. Depending on the implementation degree of the interface, it is possible that certain
fields are not activated.
Error Report: An error report is created during import and model generation. You can see here
which data are defective or which cannot be evaluated by AutoPLANT Structural.
If such an error report was created, you can display it by clicking the ERROR REPORT button in
the dialog box.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-45
Data Exchange
Working Area: A working area of 6 basic views is created with the help of the outer dimensions of
the imported model.
> Name: Here, you can indicate the name of the working area. If it still exists, the new views
obtain the index "2".
Connect: Continuous shape parts (bars) are connected to a common shape.

Only those shapes are connected which have the same size and position, which are situated on a
common axis and which don’t exceed a preset distance of the end points.
> Max. Distance: Here, you enter the maximum distance, which is allowed for the end points to be
connected to be recognized as continuous shape.
> Tolerance Value Here, you enter a tolerance for possible deviations of the gusset coordinates.
This is reasonable when you import data of static analysis programs as these are generating a system of
bars from gusset to gusset (e.g. plate connection) although in reality it is a continuous shape.
Connecting Shapes
The static program transfers this system as 4 bars of 1-2, 2-3, 4-2 and 5-2. Four shapes are created first
which are connected in the way that there will be one remaining shape of 1-3 and one of 4-5.
Supposed the fact that bars of 1-2, 2-3, 4-4a and 5-5a were transferred, the bars 4-4a and 5-5a would
only be connected to a shape if the distance of 4a to 5a was smaller than indicated in ‘Max. Distance’
input field.
CONVERSION
If the interface dialog is available in the selected import format, it can also contain a page for
“Conversion” apart from the specific pages. This page is identical for all interfaces and permits settings
for the import process. Depending on the implementation degree of the interface, it is possible that
certain fields are not activated.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-46
Data Exchange
Query: At import process, you are prompted for each unknown shape or material in a dialog so
that you can select a replacing shape.
If this field has not been checked, the unknown shape cannot be created. However, it might be that
certain parts are not required for very big models. Therefore, a replacement is not necessary.
Import-Table: Here, you see the file name of the currently used exchange list.
DATA EXPORT COMMAND

This command allows for exporting data of AutoPLANT Structural into other programs via an
exchange file. In most cases, this data is 3D-models as static analysis systems or the position and
detailing of single shapes.
At printing of this manual, the following interfaces have already been integrated in the newly arranged
export dialog:
- DSTV Product Interface Steel Construction (*.stp)
- PXF Data Exchange Format (*.pxf)
- STAAD III (*.std)
- AutoPLANT Structural Standard Interface (*.ps3)
- SDNF (*.sdf)
- KISS (*.kss)
It is, possible that you will already find further formats in your AutoPLANT Structural version. The
performance range of the interfaces (implementation degree) can be extended, too. Please refer to the
up-dated hints on your installation-CD.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-47
Data Exchange
EXPORT DATA
When this function is loaded, a file selection dialog opens where you can select the required interface
under File Type. Then, you select the file to be exported. Depending on the interface, an interface
dialog opens where you can make further specifications concerning the format.
After file selection resp. after confirmation of export process in the dialog, the model data are
evaluated and the data record is created. Depending on the complexity of the interface and on the
volume of the data, this process may take some time. You are, however, informed about the current
state in the AutoCAD-command line or in the interface dialog. After the creation of the file has been
finished, a note box will be displayed.
GENERAL SETTINGS
If the interface dialog is available in the selected export format, it can also contain a page for “General
Settings” apart from the specific pages. This page is identical for all interfaces and permits settings for
the export process. Depending on the implementation degree of the interface, it is possible that certain
fields are not activated.
Error Report: An error report is created during exports and file generation. You can see here which
model data cannot be evaluated by AutoPLANT Structural for the interface.
If such an error report was created, you can display it by clicking the ERROR REPORT button in
the dialog box.
Nodes: Continuous shapes at connections or theoretical points of intersection with other shapes are
divided.
> Protection: A possibly existing protection against division at possible nodes is ignored at export
of analysis display.
Since the division is mostly desired, you should deactivate this option only in exceptional cases.
> Max. Distance : Here, you enter the maximum distance, which is allowed for the end point of a
shape towards the continuous shape to be recognized as shape to be divided.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-48
Data Exchange
> Min. Length: Here, you enter the minimum length of the bar, which has to be created by the
division. If this length is smaller, a division will not be made and eccentricities will be determined
instead.
This is reasonable when you export data to static analysis programs as these are expecting a system of
bars from gusset to gusset (e.g. plate connections) although in reality it is a continuous shape. As
AutoPLANT Structural of course cannot be as specialized as a static program, you can switch off this
option by this way, if the static program offers better functions for this purpose.
Analysis: Instead of the CAD-position of the actual shape an alternative static effective line is
exported.
This line can be individually adapted for each shape to your requirements for the transfer of static
systems by means of the ‘Analysis Display’ command. You can avoid e.g. open nodes or
eccentricities (due to different insertion levels).
Dividing Shapes
The AutoPLANT Structural model has the shapes of 1-2, 3-4 and 5-6. The shape of 1-2 is divided first
into two parts of 1-6a and 6a-2.
Another division of the new created shape 1-6a and two other parts 1-4a and 4a-6a is made, if the
resulting two bars have at least the same length as indicated in ‘Min. Bar Length’ input field.
CONVERSION
If the interface dialog is available in the selected export format, it can also contain a page for
“Conversion” apart from the specific pages. This page is identical for all interfaces and permits settings
for the export process. Depending on the implementation degree of the interface, it is possible that
certain fields are not activated.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-49
Data Exchange
Always Flat Steel It is always a flat steel shape, which is exported even if the type has not been
defined as flat steel in the database.
If Unknown: A flat steel shape is exported as poly-plate (metal sheet) if the type has not been
defined as flat steel in the data base.
Always Poly-Plate Each flat steel shape is exported as poly-plate (metal sheet).
Query: At import process, you are prompted for each unknown shape or material in a dialog so
that you can select a replacing shape.
If this field has not been checked, the unknown shape cannot be created. However, it might be that
certain parts are not required for very big models. Therefore, a replacement is not necessary.
Export-Table: Here, you see the file name of the currently used exchange list.
DIRECT DATA EXCHANGE VIA RSTAB

There is a direct data interface to the analysis program for static analysis calculations RSTAB of
Messrs. Ing.-Software Dlubal GmbH which works without explicit exchange file. The prerequisite is
that AutoPLANT Structural and RSTAB have been installed and started on the same machine.
Apart from the transfer of the system and of the cross-sections, this exchange supports a better
adaptation of the system to the requirements of static calculation with RSTAB as well as an intelligent
modification mechanism. Only the corrected cross-sections or insertion points of existing bars/shapes
are transferred so that already assigned data in the other software are kept.
After having selected the command, you obtain a list of the interfaces supporting the direct exchange.
Select the entry 'Dlubal RSTAB' and the dialog for data export with an RSTAB-extension will be
displayed. Since the data exchange is based on an extension of the ’Product Interface Steel
Construction’, please refer to the corresponding chapters there for further information.
After the transfer was started, RSTAB will automatically report data import. For more detailed
information, please refer to your RSTAB-documentation.
If you want to work with the modification mechanism, don’t forget to save your model after data
export because information is stored in the drawing database.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-50
Data Exchange
IMPORT IN AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL

When you receive RSTAB data, AutoPLANT Structural will automatically report the data import.
If you want to work with the modification mechanism, the corresponding AutoPLANT Structural
model has of course to be open before. On an additional dialog page for RSTAB data import you can
select which modifications have to be transferred to your AutoPLANT Structural model.
EXCHANGE WITHOUT RSTAB-INSTALLATION

When RSTAB has not been installed on your machine, you nevertheless can profit from the
extensions. Please select the entry ’Dlubal RSTAB as export format’ as export interface (or import
interface) when normally loading the function (PS_EXPORT or PS_IMPORT).
You obtain a file of ’Product Interface Steel Construction’ where the RSTAB-extensions are added.
However, this file can also be read with any other program supporting this format.
NEW INTERFACES
In this chapter, you will find a description of the interface dialogs and implementation degrees of the
different interfaces. Please note, however, that this is the state at printing of the manual and that your
current AutoPLANT Structural version can have been extended in the meantime. Please refer to the
up-dated hints o n your installation-CD.
As the implementation degree of import and export can differ from each other, these areas are treated
separately at each interface description. These are data which can be interpreted or written by
AutoPLANT Structural at the very moment – the import exchange file might however contain further
data which could be read at a later moment.
Due to their data structure, most of the interfaces support this selective reading of data. Load data of
static programs can e.g. be assigned to an element, the position in the space as well. If the load data
cannot be evaluated, this doesn’t have any influence on the interpretation of position.
DSTV PRODUCT INTERFACE STEEL CONSTRUCTION

The product interface steel construction of the German Association of Steel Construction (DSTV) is a
relatively new data exchange format of all the programs participating in a production process. In a
standardized format, it contains the data exchange between e.g. CAD and static programs, PPS-
systems or DCC-machines and ideally is meant to replace the previous formats after good long testing.
File Format: ASCII-text file with the extension *.stp
The interface format was revised several times in the past. AutoPLANT Structural is only supporting
the latest valid version.
Data Import
AutoPLANT Structural is able to evaluate the CAD-system data for standard shapes and plates, i.e. the
position of the parts in the space without detailing processes and connection elements. Plates, the
contours which are transferred as polygons if displayed correctly. If the shape was, however, created
by cuts or similar things, this information would be lost and only the mostly rectangular basic solid
would be displayed.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-51
Data Exchange
In addition, the static system for standard shapes can be read, i.e. the position of the parts in the space
including eccentricities.
After file selection, it is verified whether this is a valid file of this interface. Then the header area is
read and displayed in the appearing interface dialog. The import can still be interrupted here, if you
recognize that the wrong file was selected.
Click on the OK button of the dialog box to continue the import. The data record is analysed and the
function recognizes itself whether it is a matter of CAD or static data or whether both data types are
together in a common file.
Before the actual model generation will take place, you once again have the possibility to make
individual import settings. You start model generation by once again clicking the OK button. You
could e.g. select which data type has to be preferred at a common file or whether a working area has to
be created, etc.
This page shows the entries of the exchange file header and doesn’t accept any further settings. You
can only interrupt the import process if it isn’t the required file.
Group Others
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-52
Data Exchange
Ignore: Unknown interface commands of the current implementation degree are ignored and
cannot be re-exported. This means that only those entries remain in the file, which can be
processed by AutoPLANT Structural.
: This option is provided for a later implementation degree of the interface. In this degree, it will
be possible to manage modifications and to transfer unknown data 1:1. If need be, the references
will be up-dated.
Position Numbers The imported position numbers are adopted into the parts properties.
Control Entries: The reference numbers and codes of the exchange file parts are adopted into the
shape properties. This facilitates finding mistakes or incomplete data resp. controlling the origin of
modifications.
Group Format-Selection
CAD: At mixed data, the CAD elements (component parts) are preferred and any possible static
analysis data are only evaluated as additional information.
Static Analysis: At mixed data, the static elements (bars) are preferred and any possible CAD data
are only evaluated as additional information. This is an option for a later implementation degree.
Data Export
AutoPLANT Structural is able to export the CAD-system data for standard shapes and plates, however
without detailing processes and connection elements. A plate made out of a number of polygons is
exported correctly. If different detailing processes created it, only the basic polygon will be output.
In addition, the static system for standard shapes can be written. Depending on the settings on the
“General Settings” page, it is tried to determine intermediate gussets for connections and eccentricities.
After file selection, you can enter the header area specifications in the appearing interface dialog.
Click on the OK button of the dialog box to continue the export. The model is analysed and the export
data record is prepared according to your settings on the ‘Option’ page. The data then are written in the
selected file by once again clicking the OK button.
Output File:: You can see the selected output file as this name is entered in the exchange file.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-53
Data Exchange
Input Field: Here, you enter the variable header area data or the part code (authorization).
The authorization is entered in the header area and builds – together with a time mark – the code
for the origin resp. the modification of a component part.
CAD / Static: the model data are exported as CAD system data (component parts) or as static
system (bars).
Mixed: A file of CAD and static data is written. The CAD data are preferred and the static data
describe the static system of these CAD data.
This is an option for a later implementation degree.
PS3-INTERFACE (AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL STANDARD)

The AutoPLANT Structural standard interface is an exchange format of its own to put the
AutoPLANT Structural model data at the disposal of other programs. The format puts a rather exact
copy of the construction including detailing processes at disposal. This is the reason why foreign
programs can evaluate its data for their different requirements.
File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.ps3
The file structure follows the example of Windows *.ini files and is mainly self-explaining. The
complete data records are always output serially for each single component part. References don’t have
to be resolved during evaluation. In addition, references are created by indication to permit this kind of
evaluation, too.
You can obtain a detailed description of the data structure for the development of your own import
routines in your programs at any time you like.
Data Export
AutoPLANT Structural is able to export the model data including detailing processes, group structure;
parts list data and drawing information. In addition, the used bolts are output, too.
Concerning detailing processes, holes, cuts, polycuts and rectangular copes are transferred at the very
moment. In case of detailing by means of Boolean operations between the component parts, this
information will be lost because they are not evaluated.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-54
Data Exchange
Furthermore, only the names of special shapes are transferred at the moment, but not their cross-
sections.
Group Others
Bolts: All bolts existing in the model and being assigned to a group are output.
Processing: the processing of component parts is output.

Apart from that the output is only limited to the position of shapes and plates as well as to their
parts list data to keep the file small e.g. for mere parts list programs.
Sum up: Groups and single parts having the same position number are summed up to one entry
and the corresponding number of pieces is indicated.
In this case, the exported geometry and drawing data can only partly be used because they only
refer to the first part acquired by chance. This option is, however, reasonable for the evaluation of
parts list data because it can help to minimize the data record considerably.
Group Floating Point Output
Length/Size : Here, you enter the accuracy for all values except for the coordinate points. It is
always the complete number of digital places which is exported, if need be they are filled up with
noughts.
Coordinates : Here, you enter the accuracy for all values of CAD-coordinate points. It is always
the complete number of digital places which is exported, if need be they are filled up with
noughts.
Inches: In drawings, the sizes are output in the imperial system e.g. 1´-2 3/8´´. Otherwise, the
decimal value is output in inches (in our example 14.375).
STAAD III-INTERFACE
The STAAD III interface serves for the exchange of static systems between the programs of STAAD
program family and AutoPLANT Structural. Data can also be exchanged with any kind of software
being able to interpret this format.
File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.std
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-55
Data Exchange
The exchange format corresponds to the output file of the graphic editor of this program family.
Data Import
AutoPLANT Structural is able to evaluate the static system data for standard shapes, i.e. the position of
the parts in the space including eccentricities. Please note that it is not possible to interpret all
shortened display forms like REPEAT etc. in the data format of the exchange file. The list shortenings
of the form n TO m are, however, understood.
Data Export
AutoPLANT Structural is able to export the static analysis system for standard shapes. Depending on
the settings on the page ‘General Settings’, it is tried to determine even intermediate gussets for
connections and eccentricities.
PXF-INTERFACE
The PXF interface serves for the exchange of constructions between the programs of REBIS program
family and AutoPLANT Structural. Data can also be exchanged with any kind of software being able
to interpret this format.
File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.pxf
Data Import
AutoPLANT Structural can evaluate the data group 4000 for standard shapes, i.e. the position of the
parts in the space. In addition, general data groups and coordinates that are necessary for transfer are
evaluated.
Data Export
AutoPLANT Structural is able to export the data group 4000 for standard shapes. In addition, general
data groups and coordinates that are necessary for transfer are exported.
SDNF-INTERFACE
The SDNF interface (Steel Detailing Neutral Format) serves for the exchange of CAD-data between
programs being able to interpret this format. A static analysis system can of course also be transferred
via the shape position.
File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.sdf
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-56
Data Exchange
Data Import
AutoPLANT Structural is able to evaluate the CAD-system data for standard shapes and plates, i.e. the
position of the parts in the space without detailing processes and connection elements. Plates, the
contours of which are transferred as polygons are displayed correctly. If cuts or similar things created
the shape, this information would be lost and only the mostly rectangular basic solid would be
displayed.
Data Export
AutoPLANT Structural is able to export the CAD-system data for standard shapes and plates without
detailing processes and connection elements. A plate made out of a number of polygons is exported
correctly. If detailing processes created it, only the basic polygon will be output.
In addition, the static analysis system for standard shapes can be written. Depending on the settings on
the “General Settings” page, it has tried to determine intermediate gussets for connections and
eccentricities.
Input Fields: Here, you enter the variable header area data of the
SDNF-file.
Units: Here, you can choose the units for the output of length and coordinate values.
In combination with a suitable exchange list it is thus possible to create a file with imperial units
from a metric drawing file or vice versa. :
KISS-INTERFACE
The KISS interface (Keep It Simple Steel) provides for the exchange of parts list data between
programs, which are able to interpret this format. Therefore, only export is possible here.
File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.kss
Data Export
AutoPLANT Structural is able to export the parts list data of single parts such as shapes and plates.
Since the KISS format only indirectly supports the group structure, you can determine the belonging to
a certain group by means of dispatch number, but this is lost in case of similar parts in different groups
because each part is only exported once with its total amount.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-57
Data Exchange
Group Others
Customer: Here, you enter the variable header area data of the KISS-file.
US-mark Number: The US-mark-number of the corresponding group the part is assigned to is
exported as shipping number. Otherwise, the position number of the group the part is belonging to
will be exported.
When the component part doesn’t belong to a group, no shipping number will be exported. When
it belongs to different groups, the selected number of the group which was found first will be
exported.
Group Annotation
Note: Here you specify which part data have to be exported as note into the file.
No – A note is not exported.
Note 1 – The content of the note field 1 of the parts properties is exported.
Note 2 - The content of the note field 2 of the parts properties is exported.
Group Surface
Surface: Here you specify which part data have to be exported as surface into the file.
No – A surface is not exported.
Note 1 – The content of the note field 1 of the parts properties is exported.
Note 2 - The content of the note field 2 of the parts properties is exported.
Group Format Default
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-58
Data Exchange
Format Default: Here you specify the output format of the part designation depending on the
indicated part type as a combination of format variable and constant terms.
The output can be set separately for flat steel, plates and standard shapes.
Switches: If the switch is checked, the program uses the format default specified by you.
Otherwise, the standard export designation of AutoPLANT Structural is used instead.
Input Field 1 : Here you specify the format description for the name of the part.
Input Field 2: Here you specify the format description for the length of the part.
BUTTON (X): The format default is reset to a given standard value.
Description of Format Variables
All format variables are in round brackets and inside of these brackets, they start with a $-sign which
identifies them as variable. Then the format specifications for the desired dimension, unit system,
display and accuracy follow in exactly this order.
Dimension L length of the part
W width of the part
T height or thickness of the part
Units c output according to the unit system of the drawing

i output always in inches
m output always in millimetres
Display d floating point number

f fraction (only with inches)
Accuracy 0..8 number of digits after the decimal point or parts of fraction
(1/2n)
Thus, the format variable ($Lif3) means that the length of the part is exported in inches with
fraction display and an accuracy of 1/8 inch, e.g. 10-3/8.
If you require e.g. the specification of a plate with the thickness in inches as fraction (with an exact
accuracy of 1/16 inch) as well as with metric dimensions for width and length having each one digit
after the decimal point in the form PL3/4x200.0 or for the length 300.0, you have to set the default
PL($Tif4)x($Wmd1) in the first input field and the default ($Lmd1) in the second input field.
PREVIOUS INTERFACES
In the following chapter, you will find the description of the interfaces, which have already been
integrated, in AutoPLANT Structural for quite some time. They cannot or not yet be controlled via the
common import and export dialog. You can reach these interfaces by their own command names and
each single interface has its own user control, which often differs from the others.
This does not mean that the used file format corresponds to an outmoded state. The content of the data
is always on the latest passed version of the standard committees. All these formats have proved their
worth in practice and are intensively used there.
PPS INTERFACE
Command Name: PS_PPS
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-59
Data Exchange
Using this interface, data can be transferred from the parts lists under AutoPLANT Structural to a
PPS (Productions, Planning and Control) program. The data is transferred as an ASCII-file.
PPS-data generation is made according to the rules of the DSTV interface description CAD parts lists
issued in November 1997 (3rd. edition).
After having created your 3D-model and carried out positioning (basic requirement), the PPS data can
be generated. Use AutoPLANT Structural menu item OTHER / GENERATE PPS-DATA.
Title Block Data: Here, the title block data of the data records 1 through 5 of the PPS file are
defined.
Work No.: Enter the work no. (max. 2 digits). It will appear in data record No. 1 of the PPS file.
Order No.: Enter the order no. (max. 8 digits). It will appear in data record no. 2 of the PPS file.
Drawing No.: Enter the drawing no. (max. 3 digits). It will appear in data record no. 4 of the PPS
file.
Index: Determine the revision index (1 character) of the drawing. It will also appear in data record
no. 4 of the PPS and is added to the drawing number. A revision index defined in the title block
(Rev. Index) will make this information superfluous.
Prepared by: Specify the person in charge by a name (max. 12 characters). The name will appear
in data record no. 5 of the PPS file. Definition of a name in the title block will make this
information superfluous.
Output Weight: Output of internally calculated weights. Otherwise, no output will take place, and
the values will be given by the PPS.
Output Area: Output of internally calculated surfaces. Otherwise, no output will take place, and
the values will be given by the PPS.
Accord. to DSTV: The order of the panels is according to the DSTV standards. Apart from this,
you can determine yourself the order by entering the values 1-27 in the input fields under Panel
Order.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-60
Data Exchange
Material=Name+: the name of the component part is set in front of the material name.
Header: The header is output
Bolt Quality: At the output of bolts, the bolt quality is output.
Separator: The delimiters of data records are determined.
Point at Dec.Val.: If this field has been checked, a point is used for decimal values instead of a
comma.
Insert NC-Dat..: If this field has been checked, NC production data are output as well.
Without Group: If this field has been checked, no groups (main parts and accessory parts) are
output, but all component parts are output as single parts.
Title Block: Here you find the optional fields of the drawing’s title block. They will all appear in
data record no. 9.
Revision Index: Define the revision index (1 character) of the drawing. When this panel is used,
the Title Block Data / Index panel will be superfluous.
Group: Identifier of groups consisting of 3 characters
Name: Group name consisting of 30 characters
Surface: Surface finish
Addition %: Addition to weight in percent
Prepared by: Name of the person in charge of TB
TB-Date: Input of TB-date
Approval: Date on which the drawing has been presented for approval.
Approved: Date on which the drawing has been returned after approval.
Test Eng.: Date on which the drawing has been transferred to the test engineer.
Release Product.: Date of release for production
Field Order: All fields available for output
Order: List of fields to be used
Path: Output path of the file. Specify the path and the name of the PPS data output file via the left
button. PPS-file name and path can be freely defined by the user. If possible, it should contain the
order number and a drawing number.
Output of PPS-file is started.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-61
Data Exchange
The material designations correspond to the standard names for data transfer of steel construction
issued in August 1993 (2nd. edition).
Hints for Transfer to Knieriem
Since the Knieriem system cannot process different groups of components having the same main part
as pos. no. 12.1 or12A, these groups require special handling. In such cases, use the option
‚25=Max+1’ at positioning.
Thus you obtain different position numbers for such cases. The Knieriem system will accept these
numbers without any problem since they are handled as Z-parts. If you want all component groups to
be handled as Z-parts, turn off the option ‘Transfer Mainpart Group’ and enter a start value for group
positioning.
Example for the Output of a PPS-File
************************************************************
** PPS-DATA FILE created by AutoPLANT Structural PPS-MODUL V 1.00**
**
** Time 13:49
** Date 25. 7.1996
**
************************************************************
0&@
1&11
2&2222222
4&33&3
5&gggg
9&&&&&&&&&&&
S&M 16 x 70 DIN 6914&70&40&5000&6&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&1
H&FL 120x20&315&120&11&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 18.876&&&&&6&&1
H&BRFL 160x15&239&160&14&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 18.876&&&&&4&&1
H&BLECH 8x791x864&864&790&8&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 26.187& 0.416&&&&&&1
H&IPE 240&3481&120&4&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 30.700&&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 240x15&309&240&12&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 28.314&&&&&2&&1
H&BLECH 8x488x499&499&488&10&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 7.661& 0.122&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 160x10&698&160&9&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 12.584&&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 200x10&1030&200&6&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 15.730&&&&&&&1
H&BLECH 10x84x95&95&84&18&4&&&&&&&&&&&& 0.423& 0.005&&&&&&1
S&M 16 x 60 DIN 6914&60&30&5001&12&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&1
H&BLECH 10x95x168&168&94&15&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 0.423& 0.005&&&&&&1
H&BLECH 10x65x114&114&65&17&4&&&&&&&&&&&& 0.247& 0.003&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 200x10&985&200&7&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 15.730&&&&&&&1
H&BRFL 200x10&280&200&13&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 15.730&&&&&4&&1
H&HE 200 A&3850&200&2&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 42.300&&&&&9&&1
H&IPE 240&4317&120&1&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 30.700&&&&&&&1
H&HE 140 A&580&140&5&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 24.700&&&&&1&&1
H&FL 140x20&152&140&16&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 22.022&&&&&4&&1
S&M 16 x 45 DIN 7990&45&20&5002&4&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&
DSTV STRUCTURAL OUTPUT

Command Name: PS_STATIK
Using this interface, information from a structural analysis program (e.g. Dlubal) can be directly
transferred into your model, provided that the structural analysis program is in compliance with the
DSTV interface convention Structural Analysis / CAD issued in February 1992.
This interface can read and process data as described herein. Please note that the format mentioned
previously does not give port definitions. Only the correct shapes can be entered in the defined
position.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-62
Data Exchange
Herein, the bi-directional information flow of the static → CAD → static is described. At the very
moment, only the flow static Æ CAD has been implemented.
Import File: Give full description of the path of the data record to be read in or select a file by
clicking the ’File’ button on the right. Data records of any static data end with *.sc2.
Export File: This option has not yet been implemented.
System Lines : All system lines being defined by the data are created. They are filed in the layer
PS_RAHMEN.
Insert Shapes: All defined shapes are inserted. First, no optimizing is made. Co-linear shapes of
identical type and alignment are not combined. Such shapes are due to the fact that structural
analysis is made from one junction point to the next, whereas a shape can stretch over several
junction points.
Connect Elements This option activates optimizing. Shapes of the same type and of same
position are combined in a way that a shape has maximum length.
Co-linear Tolerance This value in mm indicates up to which distance segments can be considered
as co-linear and thus suitable for connection.
Angle Tolerance: This value in degrees indicates up to which angle distance segments can be
considered as co-linear and thus suitable for connection.
Shape Table
Since the shape designations used in the different structural analyses are not always identical to those
used by AutoPLANT Structural, you will be asked when entering a file with an unknown designation.
After selection of shape table, the following dialog window opens. Here, you can manage and delete
the entered data, or even enter new data.
DSTV NC DATA OUTPUT

Command Name: PS_NC_DATA
This interface gives you the opportunity to generate your NC data directly from within your
AutoPLANT Structural model. For this purpose, the program creates a manufacturer-independent
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-63
Data Exchange
NC file in ASCII format, which you may use for further processing with the postprocessor of your NC
machine. The generated NC data are production-means-neutral.
The NC data generation is carried out according to the standards “Standard Description of Steel
Construction Parts for the NC-Control” of the DSTV association issued in July 1998, 7th revised
edition.
General
This is a standard interface of geometries for steel construction parts concerning the NC production
operations sawing, drilling, burning, punching and signature with the goal to be independent from NC
machine manufacturers, which means that NC machines are exchangeable as long as the same data
processing organization exists.
The interface uses standardized controls to regulate the link between CAD and graphics system to the
NC controls via the CAM level.
The part’s geometry is made available to the interface regardless of the type of production operation
and then forwarded to the NC machine via the NC machine-specific postprocessor.
If this extension is unlicensed, you may nevertheless start the program max. 32 times for evaluation
purposes. Any further use is disabled.
If your version comes equipped with a software protection, it is not possible to start the program for
evaluation purposes.
NC-Data Output
After you have created your 3D model and performed a positioning (prerequisite), you may generate
your NC data. This is done with the AutoPLANT Structural OTHER / NC DATA GENERATION
menu option or the PS_NC_SUPPORT command.
The following dialog box appears after the command has been selected:
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-64
Data Exchange
Format: Choose the output format. You can either create a format according to DSTV or a DXF-
output for plates.
Order No.: Here you enter the max.12 digits of the order number, which will later be the first entry
in the parts description header in the NC file.
Drawing No.: Here you enter the max.12 digits of the drawing number, which will later be the
second entry in the parts description header in the NC file.
Overwrite: any existing file with the same name will be overwritten without asking for
confirmation first.
Straight End: If this option is activated, every shape, if it is a straight one with an uncut end, will
be turned so that this end is viewed as the shape start.
Sign: This enables you to indicate a signature block.
3D Cuts: If this option is activated, 3D cut information is created. This information consists of a
SC record with base on the cutting plane and the cutting plane perpendicular.
3D Holes: If this option is activated, three-dimensional holes are indicated with one originating
point and the perpendicular of the hole.
Metric Output: If this field is checked, the NC-data are principally output in the metric unit
system. Otherwise, the unit system of the current drawing will be used.
Upper Edge Mod.The output is arranged in a way that the parts are situated as in the model, i.e.
the upper edge is at the top, no matter of the parts ECS position.
Insert AutoPLANT Structural: The AutoPLANT Structural header is inserted into the file. There
you will find information about date, etc.
Max. Hole Offset: Here, you can indicate a maximum distance of the hole center to the outer edges
of the part (reference area) to the inside, up to which a hole is still assigned to this view. This may
be important for special shapes.
INSERT
Click on this button to start the NC-output. You are prompted to select the parts for which the NC-data
have to be generated. After all parts have been selected, the parts structure is analysed and the
corresponding data records of the NC-file are generated.
Sign
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-65
Data Exchange
Position No.: The position number is entered into the signature text.
Send No.: The dispatch number is entered into the signature text.
Job No.: The order number is entered into the signature text.
Drawing No.: The drawing number is entered into the signature text.
Label: The shape name is entered into the signature text.
Note: The comment row 1 is entered into the signature text.
Input: The right input is entered into the signature text.
Position: Select the position of the signature text.
Text Size: Select the text size of the signature text in mm.
Input Field: Enter here any additional input text.
DXF Options
You can specify the layer names and the colours for the DXF-output of plates.
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-66
Data Exchange
Contour Layer: Name of the outer contour layer
Contour Colour: Colour number of the layer
Hole Layer: Name of the hole layer
Hole Colour: Colour number of the hole layer.
Output Path
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-67
Data Exchange
Folder Path Where your output files have to be filed.
Folder Name: For output, a directory of this name is created under a path and the individual files
are stored there.
File Appendix: Define how the annex to your files has to look like.
Use Drawing: The drawing name is used as directory name.
Put P first: A P is put in front of the file name which is formed on the base of the position number.
Example for the Output of a NC-File

ST
123
125
3
3
RST_37-2
1
HE200B
I
2980.00
200.00
200.00
15.00
9.00
18.00
61.30
1.15
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
BO
o 492.48o 140.00 22.00 0.00
o 492.48o 60.00 22.00 0.00
EN
Bentley
12/22/2005 4-68
A Appendix
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT STAIRCASE A-2
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT HANDRAIL A-8
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT HANGAR FRAME A-15
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT BRACING A-19
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT TRUSS GIRDER A-27
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT PURLIN COURSE A-30
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT LADDER A-35
PROPERTIES A-39
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-1
Structural Element Staircase
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT STAIRCASE

Command Name: PS_STAIRS
This function generates a complete staircase construction with several stair heads including handrail
and corresponding working frames.
This requires that you just click the starting point and a point in the direction of the stairs (treading
direction). The number of required individual steps will be automatically calculated based on your
specifications.
This is followed by a dialog where you can set the specifications while verifying your input directly
and immediately on screen. The dimensions of the staircase can be changed at a later time by
modifying the (yellow) object frame using its grips.
For a staircase with several stair heads you can add the floors one after the other in the open dialog.
The complete construction including the handrail can be saved afterwards as template. For later
staircase tower constructions, it is possible to create an assembly of standards which can be adapted to
the local conditions if need be.
Here you see a staircase with intermediate stair head and bent running as created from a template:
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-2
DIMENSIONS
Width: The width of the staircase across outer steel edge
Length: Entire length of the stair construction
Height: The height of the staircase from starting point to upper edge stair head including gridiron.
Riser: The desired rise of the staircase steps
Upper Insertion Point: If this field is checked, the insertion point is on the upper side of the
staircase instead of on the lower side (and it is running to the bottom)
Riser Count : The resulting number of steps
Angle : The resulting gradient of the staircase
Treading real: The resulting exact treading depth of the steps; however, you can specify a fixed
value before and the construction will be calculated again based on this value.
Actual Rise: The resulting exact rise of the steps; however, you can specify a fixed value before
and the construction will be calculated again based on this value.
Dynamic: If this field is checked, you can monitor the changes of the settings immediately on
screen.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-3
LANDINGS
Lower Landing : The length of the lower stair head. to create the stair head, you have to check the
input field in front of it. Otherwise, the staircase cheeks are cut at the basic plane and the stair
head is omitted.
Upper Landing: The length of the upper stair head
US-Definition : The definition of the landing lengths is made according to American Standard.
Stair Foot Length: Enter the dimensions of the staircase foot. If you enter the value 0, the
staircase cheek directly hits the basic plane.
Vertical Section: Enter a vertical cut from the front edge of the staircase cheek. This field is only
available if no length was specified for the staircase foot, i.e. if the staircase cheek directly hits the
basic plane.
Ground Distance: Here, you can insert a gap between the staircase foot and the basic plane, e.g. to
have enough space for a completing construction or for foundations. This field is only available if
no length was specified for the staircase foot, i.e. if the staircase cheek directly hits the basic
plane.
Web Grating: Height of the attached gridiron
Side Offset: The projection of the attached gridirons beyond the outer edge of the staircase
construction. Negative values decrease the dimension of gridirons.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-4
FLOORS
No. of Platforms: Enter the number of floors (intermediate stair heads).
Inner Distance: Enter the measure between two staircases (including cheek shapes) if the
intermediate stair heads are stair heads for change over.
Platform No.: Select the floor you want to process.
Angle to prev.: If you enter an angle here, you can create the bent running of the staircase or stair
heads for change over (180°). Negative values create an opposite sense of rotation.
Length, Height...: Please refer to the figure below for exact meaning of the distances.
Here you see the most important measures of a staircase with intermediate stair heads and stair heads
for change over (standard version):
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-5
SHAPES
Shape Type etc.: Here, you select the shapes for the stair and the stair head cheeks.
Drill Stringer: If this field is checked, the stair cheeks are drilled to permit bolting the steps or the
handrail.
Bolt .../Handrail: If this field is checked, the cheeks and the handrail are bolted, if a handrail
exists. Select the required bolt type in the selection list.
Bolt .../Step : If this field is checked, the cheeks and the steps are bolted. Select the required bolt
type in the selection list.
STEPS
Create Steps: If this field is checked, the staircase steps are generated.
Shape Steps: If this field is checked, the steps are generated from shapes instead of as DIN-steps.
In the selection lists you can select the required shape as usual. All shapes are available for
selection.
Increment: Enter the depth of the staircase steps.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-6
b,c,d: Distances for the mounting holes of the staircase steps.
: b is the distance of the holes from the upper edge of the steps, c is the height of the fastening of
staircase steps, d is the hole spacing of both mounting holes.
Hole Distance: The distance of the axes of the steps’ mounting holes
Hole Dia.: The hole diameter of the steps’ mounting holes.
Slot Length: The distance of the axes of the rear oblong step hole.
Offset: The offset of the staircase steps from the front edge of the staircase to the back. Negative
values move the steps to the front.
HANDRAIL
Create...: If this field is checked, a handrail is added to the staircase.
Start Offset: Here, you enter an offset value which moves the start of the handrail from the front
edge of the staircase to the back. Negative values move the handrail to the front. In case of
staircases without basic stair head, you can move the start of the handrail to a position where a bolt
mounting is possible.
End Offset: Analogously to start offset, you enter here an offset value for the end of the handrail.
Side Offset: Here, you enter an offset value that moves the handrail from the outer edge of the
staircase to the outside. This permits you to mount the handrail outside the staircase on other
shapes or on the wall.
Height Offset: Here, you enter an offset value that moves the handrail from the upper edge of the
staircase cheek to the top. This permits you to attach a grout or an individual fastening.
Connection : Here, you specify the bolting of handrail and staircase cheek.
Automatic – The program tries to determine the most suitable fastening.
Vertical - The handrail is always bolted on the staircase cheek from above, independently of the
settings in the used handrail template.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-7
Structural Element Handrail
: By Side – The handrail is always bolted laterally on the staircase cheek, independently of the
settings in the used handrail template.
Individual – The settings in the handrail template are used.
Side Offset : If you enter a value bigger than 0 in this input field, a vertical connecting plate is
inserted between plate and staircase cheek in case of lateral mounting.
Handrail Tem… : Select the template to be used for the handrail in the selection list. This template
describes the exact structure.
Click this button to preset the handrail structure (shapes, distances, etc.) or to edit the used handrail
template.
Another dialog opens then which is identical with the structural element ‘Handrail’. Thus you can refer
to this dialog for further information.
At staircases with handrail, this handrail will be created as structural element of its own. This permits
you to construct and modify the handrail in detail independent of the staircase.
WORK FRAME
Created Views: A separate working frame can be created showing a direct overview on the
staircase to allow for better working at the staircase within the bounds of a bigger construction. By
clicking the fields Front View, Lateral View Left, Lateral View Right or Top View, you can create
the corresponding working frame.
Group Name: Enter the general name of the working frame.
Edge Distance: If you enter a value here, the size of the different frames is decreased. Therefore
you can better select frames which are lying next to each other.
ASSIGNMENTS
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT HANDRAIL

Command Name: PS_HandRail
This function generates a handrail along a previously drawn 3-dimensional polyline. After calling the
function, you will be prompted to pick this polyline, and the program then constructs the handrail
along this line.
and immediately on screen. The spatial development of the handrail may still be modified at a later
time by changing the polyline using its grips.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-8
DIMENSIONS
Connection Height The distance between the drawn polyline and the beginning of the posts
including possible fastening plate.
Railing Height: The distance of the upper edge of the newel posts or the center of the railing head
(if in place) measured perpendicular to the polyline.
Upper Rail...: The center distance of the upper knee-high rail (if in place) measured perpendicular
to the polyline.
Middle Rail...: The center distance of the middle knee-high rail (if in place) measured
perpendicular to the polyline.
Lower Rail...: The center distance of the lower knee-high rail (if in place) measured perpendicular
to the polyline.
Handrail Radius Radius of the railing head at the corners of the handrail.
If a radius is specified the corresponding shape bends are applied; otherwise a mitered joint is cut.
Knee Rail Radius: Radius of the knee-high guardrail at the corners of the handrail.
Kick Plate Radius: Radius of the baseboard at the corners of the handrail.
Post Distance: The approximate spacing of the rail posts within the individual polyline segments.
Depending on the setting, the program uses this information to space out the newel posts in regular
intervals and rounds the value up or down as needed.
Maximum:: If this button is checked, the values of the determined post distances are never
rounded up. The post distance is regarded as the maximum value. If necessary, additional posts are
inserted.
Edge Offset:: The spacing of the corner posts between two handrail segments starting with the
intersection of the polyline segments.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-9
Min. Segment: The minimum length of a handrail segment from which on posts are created. Thus
you avoid e.g. the creation of posts at the inner edge of intermediate landings at staircases with
changing direction.
... 2nd Post: The minimum length of a handrail segment from which on two posts are created at the
beginning and at the end. If the actual length is smaller (but larger than the ’Minimum Segment
Length’), only one post will be created in the middle of the segment.
Start Offset: Projection of the knee-high guardrails and the railing head starting from the middle of
the first rail post towards the outside.
End Offset: Projection of the knee-high guardrails and the railing head starting from the middle of
the last rail post towards the outside.
Connect Sphere Enter the radius of thickening at the intersection points between the posts and e.g.
the knee-high guard rails.
Dynamic: If this field is checked, you can monitor the modification of the settings immediately on
screen.
Draw Diagonal: If this field is checked, a diagonal of the actual structural element is drawn in the
different segments to support an easier selection.
Example of a Thickening
END FORM
You have the possibility to round off the corners. To do so, you have to define an end offset in the
dimensions. There, you can set the details.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-10
Round Edges: This option switches on the rounding off of the corners.
Posts Inside: If this field is checked, the end posts are moved to the inside to reduce the
dimensions by the value specified as ’Start resp. End Offset’ in the ‘Dimensions’ dialog.
Radius: Enter the radius for rounding off. It can be defined either as absolute value or as many
times the amount of the handrail diameter. Enter e.g. *2.
Link With: Define with which knee-high rail the rounding off has to be carried out. If you select
middle knee-high rail or lower knee-high rail (if in place) the other knee-high rails will be
connected to this arc.
SHAPES
Here you can select the shapes for the individual sections of the handrail. However, the corresponding
section is generated only if checked appropriately in the check box.
For example, if you would like to generate a handrail with only two knee-high guardrails, then
deactivate one of the three options for knee-high guardrails. In the selection lists you can select the
required shape as usual. All shapes are available for selection.
If you keep the ALT-key pressed while inserting the shape class or the shapes, the settings of the
previous type will be adopted. This considerably simplifies the input.
Shape Class: The settings are valid for the selected shape group.
Shape Class: The class or catalogue of the selected shape type.
Shape Size: The size of the selected shape.
Shape Type: The type of the selected shape.
Angle: The rotation around the insertion axis.
Mirror: The shape is mirrored before insertion.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-11
BASEBOARD
You can add a baseboard to the handrail. The baseboard will only be created, if the Baseboard field has
been checked.
In the selection lists you can select the required shape as usual. All shapes are available for selection.
Other Side: If this field is checked, the baseboard will be inserted at the other side of the railing
posts.
Side Offset: You specify the distance of outer edge of railing post and inner edge of baseboard.
This permits you to keep some space for individual fastenings or grouts.
Height Offset: The distance between the drawn polyline and the lower edge of baseboard.
Negative values will move the baseboard towards the bottom.
CONNECTION
Here you select the fastening of the handrail posts. If None is checked, no fastening will be provided.
If Vertical is checked, the plates will be perpendicular to the post. If Lateral is checked, plates or bent
connections will be welded to the outside of the post.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-12
Layout: Here you select how the handrail has to be fastened.
Plate Width: Specify the width of the connecting plates.
Plate Length: Specify the length (height) of the connecting plates.
Plate Thickness: Specify the thickness of the connecting plates.
Hole Dia: Enter the diameter of fastening holes.
w (horizontal): Enter the axis distance of fastening holes.
w (vertical): Enter the vertical distance of fastening holes, if you selected lateral connecting plates.
You can thus create a plate with four holes. If you enter the value 0, only two holes are created.
Side Offset: If you enter a value bigger than 0, a perpendicular connecting plate will be inserted
between plate and post. If you indicated an ‘Inlet Radius’ in addition, the additional plate will be
omitted and the connection will be made as bent post.
Start Radius: If you enter a value bigger than 0, the connection will be made as bent post with
perpendicularly welded plate.
Outside: If this field is checked, lateral connecting plates will be welded on the other side of the
posts.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-13
Plate Connections for Handrail Posts
FILLER RODS
Min. Segment: Indicates the minimum segment length from which on web members will be
inserted.
Edge Distance: Indicates the distance of the last web members to the corresponding segment edge.
Intermediate Dist.: Indicates the distance of one web member to the other.
Offset Top: Indicates the distance to the upper border.
Offset Bottom: Indicates the distance to the lower border.
Insert Offset: Indicates the horizontal distance to the segment plane.
Insert from: Indicates the upper border.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-14
Structural Element Hangar Frame
Insert until: Indicates the lower border.
On Collision: Indicates what has to happen if the web members collide with other component
parts. You can choose between ignore, penetrate or divide.
Insertion Position: Specifies the horizontal insertion position related to the selected limiting bars.
Cut at: Indicates whether the web members have to reach up to the lower, upper or middle limit
edge.
ASSIGNMENTS
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT HANGAR FRAME

Command Name: PS_Frame
This function generates a hangar frame from two support members and two crossbars, which can be
connected to one another in different ways.
This requires that you click on the outer edge insertion point of the left and right vertical frame
members.
and immediately on screen. The dimensions of the frame can be changed at a later time by modifying
the (yellow) object frame using its grips.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-15
DIMENSIONS
Width: The width of the hangar frame across outer steel edge.
Ridge Width: Enter the roof ridge width into this field if you have selected an asymmetrical
hangar frame.
Centre Height: Here you indicate the ridge height of the crossbars. Changing the value will affect
the pitch of the roof.
Dynamic: If this field is checked, you can monitor the settings immediately on screen.
Symmetrical: If this field is checked, a symmetrical hangar frame is generated by applying the
values specified for one side to the other side.
Draw Diagonal: If this field is checked, the hangar frame (object frame) is marked with two
additional diagonals.
Box Frames: If this field is checked, a frame is generated only with a crossbeam. In this case, the
specifications for the ridge height are unimportant.
Left Eave Height Here, you indicate the left eaves height of the crossbars.
Right Eave Height Here, you indicate the right eaves height of the crossbars.
Top Side Base: Specify the distance of the supports from floor level (the pick points of the
supports) required to add base plates.
Left Column Offset Here, you indicate the projection of the left support upper edge beyond the
height of the eaves.
Right Column Offset Here, you indicate the projection of the right support upper edge beyond
the height of the eaves.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-16
Left Roof Angle: Here, you indicate the roof pitch of the left crossbar. Changing the value will
affect the ridge height of the roof.
Right Roof Angle: Here, you indicate the roof pitch of the right crossbar. Changing the value will
affect the ridge height of the roof.
SHAPES
This dialog window is used to select the corresponding shapes for the left and right vertical frame
members as well as the crossbars. If you have selected a symmetrical hangar frame, the values
specified for the left side are applied to the right side.
Which Shape: Here, you can select the shape the settings have to be applied to. Please note that at
‘Symmetrical’ setting, the right shapes cannot be set because the values of the left shapes are
applied to them.
Shape Type: Here, you select the shape type, normal, special shapes, etc.
Shape Class: Here, you select the shape type class or catalogue.
Shape Size: Here, you select the shape size.
Alignment: Here, you select how the supports have to be inserted related to the frame.
LEFT AND RIGHT KNEE

This dialog window is used to select the connection type for joining the left crossbar with the left
vertical frame member. The same dialog is opened for the right side. If you selected ‚Symmetrical’, the
entries are locked there and the settings for the right side are adopted from the left one.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-17
Extend/Trim: If this field is checked, the crossbar is cut to the support. You can specify a distance
in the opposite input field.
Angle Cut: If this field is checked, the crossbar and the support are cut to have a mitred joint. You
can specify a gap in the opposite input field.
Haunch: If this field is checked, the connection is designed as a frame haunch. You can select a
haunch template in the opposite input field.
Free Plate: If this field is checked, the connection is designed as a plate connection. You can select
a plate template in the opposite input field.
Align As is: If this field is checked, no connections are implemented.
Turn: If this field is checked, you can rotate an unsymmetrical plate provided you have selected
‘Free Plate’ as connection.
APEX
This dialog window is used to select the connection type for joining crossbars at the ridge point.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-18
Structural Element Bracing
Angle Cut: If this field is checked, the crossbar and the support are cut to have a mitred joint. You
can specify a gap in the opposite input field.
Free Plate: If this field is checked, the connection is designed as a plate connection. You can select
a plate template in the opposite input field.
Align As is: If this field is checked, no connections are implemented.
Turn: If this field is checked, you can rotate an unsymmetrical plate provided you have selected
‘Free Plate’ as connection
ASSIGNMENTS
As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too, you have the possibility to carry
out all assignments directly for each single shape. To do this, select the component part and then select
the settings to be applied.
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT BRACING

Command name: PS_BRACING
This function generates a wall bond or bracing. You can select between a variety of different design
variations. Available are shape bracings, tension bar bracings, as well as pressure pipes . The entire
bracing including gusset plate is generated.
To generate a bracing first place your user coordinates system over the bracing plane and then calls the
function. You are now prompted to click on a system line of the bracing. Finally, click on both shapes
to which the bracing is to be joined.
The following dialog box appears. The first folder is the parent folder for all others; the three other
folders can be selected according to the desired type of bracing.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-19
GENERAL SETTINGS
COMMON
Shape Selection:: Here you indicate the utilized shapes for the bracing bars. Enter the shape
catalogue into the first selection box, the shape type into the second, and the shape size into the
third.
Gusset Plate:: These input fields are used to describe the applied gusset plates.
Plate Thickness : indicates the thickness of the gusset plate.
Edge distance: you can specify the distance from the outermost edge of the bracing bar to the
boundary edge of the bracing (this is most often a shape edge).
Round shapes: this value is used to round off the length of the shape.
Plate width minimum: the minimum gusset plate width at the shape
Position: The position of the gusset plate in reference to the bracing plane can be specified with
the fields Plate Position Front Edge, Center, and Rear Edge.
Form: The shape of the gusset plate can be specified with the fields Gusset Plate Shape.
Cross Bracing:: If this switch is checked, the bracing is designed in the shape of a cross stay.
Otherwise, only one bracing bar is added to the clicked on system line.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-20
Welded Bracing: If this switch is checked, the bracing is welded in its entirety. No borings are
added in that case.
Form Group:: If this switch is checked, the individual bracing elements are formed into groups.
Symmetrical:: If this switch is checked, the bracing is designed in the form of a cross stay and
remains symmetrical if modified with its grips. Otherwise, every bar can be changed individually.
No Gusset Plates: If this switch is checked, no gusset plates are created at the supporting shapes.
Dynamic:: If this switch is checked, the bracing immediately depicts the modifications made in the
dialog. If you would like to modify many values, you can deactivate this option for the time being.
By clicking on this button, you can add additional boundary edges (lines) for the gusset plate
calculation. This method enables you to lengthen a gusset plate up to the base plate, for example. If the
vertical of a gusset plate end point cuts this boundary line, the gusset plate is extended up to this point.
Otherwise, the nearest end point of the line will be accepted.
To add a boundary edge just click on a line or specify a line by indicating two points.
To delete an additional boundary edge just clicking on this button.
BOLTS
Group Bolts
Bolts:: Specify the bolt type.
Dm:: Specify the hole diameter.
Work loose:: Specify the hole work loose.
Group Holes
Here you enter the number of borings and the spacing of the drilled holes to be observed. You can
either specify absolute values or how many times the amount of the hole diameter. If the entries have
to be a multiple of the hole diameter, put an asterisk (*) in front of the multiplier.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-21
Number Shape : The number of drilled holes in the direction of the bracing bar (on both ends).
Edge-1st hole : the distance from the end of the bracing bar to the first hole center in the direction
of the bar.
Hole-Hole : sets the space between the drilled holes in the direction of the bar.
Nth Hole-Edge: The distance from the last hole to the outer edge of the gusset plate in the
direction of the bar.
Number Cross: The number of drilled holes crosswise to the bracing bar.
Distance: The distance between the drilled holes crosswise to the bar direction.
SHAPE BRACING
If you would like to create a bracing from shapes and gusset plates, select the folder SHAPE
BRACING.
Gruppe Profilposition
Shape Position: Here you select the position of the shapes in relation to the gusset plates.
: Front- the shapes are located in front of the gusset plate.

Back - The shapes are located behind the gusset plate..
Cross - One shape is located in front of the gusset plate and one behind.
Centered - The shapes are located in the bracing plane.
Double – One shape each is located in front of and behind the gusset plate (total of 4 shapes for
cross stay).
Replaced – One shape each is located in front of and behind the gusset plate with one being offset
to the left and one to the right (total of 4 shapes for cross stay).
4-Times– One shape is located on each side (front, rear, left, right), which makes a total of 8
shapes for cross stay.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-22
Shape distance: the distance of the shapes for offset or 4-Times bracings.
Rotation Angle: Is used to specify a rotation of the shapes.
Shape Insertion: Specify the insertion position of the shapes

Centred - The shapes are inserted along the shape axis..
COG Line– The shapes are inserted along the COG (Center Of Gravity) line.
Pitch Line – The shapes are inserted along the pitch line.
Diagonal – The shapes are inserted along their corner points from„Upper Edge Left“ up to „Lower
Edge Right“..
Inverse Diagonal – The shapes are inserted along their corner points from „Lower Edge Left“ up
to „Upper Edge Right“.
Hole Position: Here you set the hole positions in the shapes.
Centred - The holes are drilled on the shape axis.
COG Line - The drill holes are drilled on COG line.
Pitch Line – The holes are drilled on the shape pitch line.
Offset: Specify a projection of the central gusset plate extending past the shape edges of the
bracing bars. Positive values increase the size of the plate whereas negative values decrease it.
Shorten: Here you can specify a value to be used to shorten the shapes after the bracing has been
generated.
Mirror Shapes: If this field is checked, the shapes are mirrored and then inserted.
Center Hole: At a cross stay and selected shape position 'Crossed', a common hole is drilled into
the shapes which are crossing each other.
Divide All: If this field is checked, all shapes of a cross stay are separated at the center gusset
plate.
Group Bind Plates
Bind Plates: Opposing shapes have batten plates as stiffeners. The following input fields can be
used for a further description of the batten plates:
Distance: The distance of the batten plates; the program divides the distances regularly according
to this specification and the values are rounded up or down correspondingly.
Offset : In the field Offset, you specify the distance of batten plates from the shape edges. Positive
values decrease the size of the plate whereas negative values increase it, i.e. the plate has a
projection.
Number : The number of bolts which are used to connect each batten plate with the shapes.
Edge-1st hole: The distance from the end of the batten plate to the first hole center in the direction
of the bar.
Hole-Hole: The space between the drilled holes in the direction of the bar.
Dia: Diameter of bolting in the input field Dm.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-23
Weld : The batten plates are not connected by bolts but by a weld.
Af : The weld thickness
ROD BRACING
If you would like to create a bracing from tension rods, select the folder Rod Bracing. You can select a
variety of different variations.
Layout: Select the layout for the rod bracing
Tension rod with Cam.
: A bracing with a traversing tension rod is generated. The shapes connected with the bracing are
penetrated and fastened in the back with a tension element
: The Offset field is used to specify the projection of the tension rod beyond the shape.
The Hole Dia. field is used to specify the diameter of the oblong hole to be drilled.
The Slot Length field is used to specify the length of the oblong hole to be drilled.
The Part Description field is used to specify a term for the tension element to be used with the
parts list.
: If the field Create Element is checked, the tension element is generated and displayed. The
dimensions of the tension element can be specified in the input fields Width, Thickness and
Radius.
: Turnbuckle
A bracing with two tension rods joined by a tension element is generated. A butt strap is welded to
the end of the tension rod, which is used to connect to the shapes via a gusset plate.
: The Butt Strap field is used to specify the length of the strap.
The Butt Strap Width field is used to specify the width of the strap.
The Butt Strap Thickness field is used to specify the thickness of the strap.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-24
If the field Sliced is checked, the strap receives a slit and the tension rod is welded to the center.
If the field Welded is checked, the tension rod is welded to the strap.
The Offset field is used to specify by how much the tension rod and the butt strap are overlapping.
The Gap field is used to specify a gap between the cut out butt strap and the tension rod for
production tolerances, if the 'Sliced' option has been selected.
The Turnbuckle field is used to specify the length of the tension element.
The Offset field is used to specify the length of projection.
The Dm field is used to specify the diameter of the tension element.
The Distance field is used to specify the distance of the tension element from the outer end of the
bar. If the value 0 is indicated here, the element will be placed in the center of the corresponding
bracing segment.
parts list.
Tension Rod
: A bracing with a tension rod is generated, which has a welded on connection element.
: The Butt Strap field is used to specify the length of the connection element.
The Butt Strap Width field is used to specify the width of the connection element.
The Butt Strap Thickness field is used to specify the thickness of the connection element.
: The Bolt Diameter field is used to specify the bolt hole diameter in the connection element.
The Outer Radius field is used to specify the outer radius of the connection element.
parts list
Examples for the different variants of a tension rod bracing:
BRACING CATALOGUES
Databases may be generated for the tension elements of all three types. The terms and dimensions can
be loaded from these databases. An additional folder „Bracing Catalogues“ will be displayed where
you can select a DBASE-file.
After selection of a valid file, you can choose a tension element defined in the database from the list.
PIPE BRACING
If you would like to create a bracing from pressure pipes and butt straps, select the folder Pipe Bracing.
You can select a variety of different variations.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-25
Gruppe Butt Strap Form
Butt Strap Type: Here you set the variant of the connecting butt strap..
Inserted - The butt strap is welded into the pipe.
Pipe sliced - The pipe is slit and the strap is welded at that point.
Strap sliced - The strap is slit and the pipe is welded at that point.
T-Shape – A T-shape section is welded onto the pipe. You can select a shape in the Selection Lists
depicted opposite.
Endplates – A head plate is welded onto the pipe and a butt strap is welded onto this head plate.
Butt Strap Length Specify the length of the strap.
Butt Strap Width: Specify the width of the strap.
Butt Strap Thick: Specify the thickness of the strap.
Butt Strap Offset: Specify the overlap length of the pressure pipe and the strap
Shapes:: You can select the shapes in the selection lists, if you have selected 'T-shapes' as butt
strap type.
Create Group with Pipe Forms a group out of a bracing.
With Bolts: The bolts are inserted into the group.
Group Endplates
You can indicate further specifications for the head plate, if you have selected 'Head Plate' as butt strap
type.
Width: Enter the width or the diameter of the head plate.
Thickness: Enter the plate thickness of the head plate.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-26
Structural Element Truss Girder
Type: If the Edge field is checked, a square head plate is created with the same width as specified
under 'Width'.
If the Round field is checked, a round head plate is created with the same diameter as specified
under 'Width'.
If the Use Polyplates field is checked, the head plates are created as plates.
Example for a pipe bracing
ASSIGNMENTS
The created component parts can receive different assignments such as material and so on.
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT TRUSS GIRDER

Command Name: PS_Truss
This function generates a truss girder from the upper and lower cord as well as the diagonals and many
existing intermediate studs. Upper and lower cords can also be generated from two side-by-side
shapes.
This requires that you click on the left and right outer edge of the truss girder, which then adds the
truss to the current plane of the user coordinate system.
and immediately on screen. The dimensions of the binder can be changed at a later time by modifying
the (yellow) object frame using its grips.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-27
DIMENSIONS
Type: Select the different variations of the framework (parallel or alternating diagonals with or
without intermediate studs).
Layout: Select on which side the bracing has to be carried out.
Length: The complete length of the girder
Height: Height of the girder from bottom edge of lower cord up to intersection of upper edges of
upper cords in the middle (top of roof ridge)
Roof Angle: Roof slope of upper cord.
Side Height: Height of the girder from bottom edge of lower cord up to upper edge of upper cord
measured on the sides. This value remains constant, while the value in the height filed can change
if you adjust the pitch of the roof and vice versa.
Outer Distance: The distance of the axis of any existing intermediary studs at the rim of the roof
truss outer edge (represented with the object frame).
Inner Distance: The distance of the axis of any existing intermediary studs in the center of the roof
truss centerline
Segment Dist. : The distance of the segments of the truss girder (spacing of the girder junctions
with parallel diagonals)
Segment Numb.: The number of truss girder segments
Plate Width: The spacing of the shapes, if, for example, upper and lower cords are generated from
two side-by-side (U-shaped) shapes.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-28
SHAPES
Shape Offset: Select for which shape the settings are valid.
Shape Type: Select the shape types to be used.
Shape Class: Enter the class or the catalogue.
Shape Size: Select the shape size.
Front/Back: If these fields are checked, the selected shapes are added to the corresponding side of
the truss girder. For example, you can also generate a truss girder from two side-by side U-shaped
shapes.
DISTANCES
Top Chord : The distance of the upper cord at the rim from the outer edge of the roof truss
(represented with the object frame).
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-29
Structural Element Purlin Course
Top Chord Inside: The distance of the upper cord in the center of the roof truss centerline
Bottom Chord : The distance of the lower cord at the rim from the outer edge of the roof truss
(represented with the object frame).
Fit Shape Ends : If this field is checked, the diagonals at upper/lower cord are cut to fit.
Top Diagonal : The distance of the diagonal from upper cord, if, e.g., connective plates are to be
inserted.
Bottom Diagonal: The distance of the diagonal from lower cord, if, e.g., connective plates are to
be inserted.
Fit Shape Ends : If this field is checked, any existing intermediate studs at upper (vertical) or
lower cord are cut to fit.
Top Vertical: The distance of any intermediate studs from upper cord if connective plates are to be
inserted
Bottom Vertical: The distance of any intermediate studs from lower cord if connective plates are
to be inserted
ASSIGNMENTS
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT PURLIN COURSE

Command Name: PS_Pfette
This function generates a purlin course within a specified plane. For this, you select the area to be
filled by clicking on the left lower and the right upper corner. The purlins are then inserted into this
area with their lower edge flush with the plane of the current user coordinate system.
An additional application consists of the possibility to insert secondary beams (joists) within two main
girders. For this purpose, you have to finish the input of area at the first point using ESC. Then, you are
prompted to enter the first main girder, then the second one.
The dimensions for the purlin course then are defined by the end points of the main girders. In
addition, you have the possibility to connect them with each other by means of a template.
and immediately on screen. The spacing of the purlin course can be changed at a later time by
modifying the (yellow) object frame using its grips. Diagonals are possible as well.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-30
GENERAL
Angle: The purlins are rotated around this angle value, which means they are arranged in a
diagonal fashion.
Height Offset: Here, you can move the purlin course in positive Z-direction by applying the
indicated value.
Dynamic: If this field is checked, the modifications of the settings can be monitored immediately
on screen.
Symmetrical: If this field is checked, modifications of the structural element will be carried out
symmetrically by drawing the grips.
Draw Diagonal: If this field is checked, the area to be filled (object frame) is marked with two
additional diagonals.
Cut at Edge: If this field is checked, the purlins at the edges of the area to be filled are cut flush.
Values in the fields Left Projection and Right Projection are then not considered.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-31
DIMENSIONS
Fixed Grid: If the ‘Grid’ field is checked, you can indicate in the neighboring input field the
approximate distance of the purlins within the area between first and last purlin. The program
divides the distances regularly according to this specification and the value is rounded up or down
correspondingly. The actual distances then are displayed in the Effective Grid field.
Free Grid: If the ‘Grid’ field is not checked, you can freely define the grid division within the area
between the first and last purlin in the ‘Distances’ list. You can vary the number and the distance,
as you like.
Turn: The distances are used inverted.
Offset Bottom: The distance from the centerline of the lowest purlin to the outer edge of the
selected area.
Offset Top: The distance from the centerline of the topmost purlin to the outer edge of the selected
area.
Offsets Fixed: If one of these options is activated, the selected distances are also kept in the grid;
otherwise they are centered.
Offset Left: Specify a purlin projection extending past the left outer edge of the selected area. In
case of a diagonal edge, this value references the centerline of the purlin; negative values shorten
the purlin towards the inside.
Offset Right: Specify a purlin projection extending past the right outer edge of the selected area. In
case of a diagonal edge, this value references the centerline of the purlin; negative values shorten
the purlin towards the inside.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-32
SHAPES
Shape Headings: Here, (Shape Class, Shape Size, Shape Type) you can select the desired shape as
usual; all shapes are available for selection.
Position: Indicates the insertion position of the girders related to the insertion axis.
Mirror: If this field is checked, the shape position is mirrored at the length axis to turn the web
side e.g. at U-shapes.
Rotation: Specifies the rotation of the shapes around the insertion axis.
BORDER LINES
Cut Lines: Cutting edges can be added subsequently to permit the creation of non-rectangular
purlin courses as well.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-33
Click this button to add a cutting edge. Then, you are prompted for a borderline to be clicked or to be
defined by 2 points. All purlins intersecting this edge are divided at the edge with the distance
specified in the Cut Width input field.
Click on this button to remove a selected cutting edge.
Poly-cut: Apart from cutting edges, it is also possible to add sections for light domes or similar
things. The procedure is the same as for sections; the only difference is that you have to click on a
poly-line here.
Click on this button to add another section.
Click on this button to remove a section.
CONNECTIONS
If you have selected alternative insertion on the base of two main girders, the following page will be
displayed in addition:
Which Page: Here you select for which side the settings have to be valid. You can define both
sides simultaneously or each single side individually.
No Connection: The parts are only inserted; no connection is created.
Cope: The girders are coped. You either select a previously defined template or the simplified
specifications are valid.
Connection: If you want one of the following connections, select the previously defined template.
ASSIGNMENTS
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-34
Structural Element Ladder
STRUCTURAL ELEMENT LADDER

Command Name: PS_Ladder
This function is used to create a ladder including its fastening at the wall. In addition, you can add a
safety cage to the ladder.
To do this, just click the left and right insertion point of the ladder and then the height point (to
determine the length) or any other point you like, if the length has to be determined later.
Then a dialog opens where you can set the specifications by direct monitor control. The ladder
dimensions can be changed at a later time by modifying the (yellow) object frame using its grips.
DIMENSIONS
Width: The width of the ladder as clear dimension between the uprights.
Height: The height of the ladder without possible projection as help for climbing out.
Riser: The desired distance between the rungs. The program divides the distances between first
and last rung regularly according to this specification and the value is rounded up or down
correspondingly.
Actual Riser: The actual resulting distance between the rungs is displayed.
Distance to Floor: The distance between the upper edge of the first rung and the ground area of the
ladder.
Top Distance: The distance between the upper edge of the last rung and the climbing out surface
of the ladder.
Offset: The height of the help for climbing out related to the climbing out surface of the ladder
(axis measure).
Stringer: The depth of the help for climbing out (axis measure)
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-35
Sharp Bend: The front jump-in of the help for climbing out (axis measure), if it has to be created
with a bend.
Dynamic: If this field is checked, you can monitor the modification of settings immediately on
screen.
Diagonal: If this field is checked, a diagonal of the actual structural element is drawn in the ladder
to support an easier selection.
Fit… Rungs: If this field is checked, the rungs are adapted to the uprights. Round tubes are e.g.
cut with each other.
SHAPES
Selection Lists: Select the shapes of the ladder uprights and rungs as usual. All shapes are
available for selection.
O Degree: You can rotate the shapes around their insertion axis here. The upright shape can be
rotated by increments of 90° whereas the rungs can be rotated by increments of 45°.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-36
Mirror: If this field is checked, the corresponding shape will be mirrored before insertion.
WALL MOUNTING
You can add a wall fastening to the ladder here. The wall shape is, however, only created if the Wall
Shape field has been checked before.
In the Selection Lists, you can select the required shape as usual. All shapes are available for selection.
0 Degree: You can rotate the wall shape around its insertion axis here by checking the required
angle.
Mirror: If this field is checked, the wall shape will be mirrored before insertion.
Position: Select the insertion position of the wall shape.

Inner Edge –The wall shape is inserted at the inner edge of the upright and shows to the inside.
Centrally –The wall shape is inserted in axis position on the height of upright axis.
Outer Edge – The wall shape is inserted at the outer edge of the upright and shows to the outside.
Wall Distance: The distance between upright axes and wall surface where the ladder has to be
mounted.
Distance to Floor: The distance between the axis of the first wall shape and the ground area of the
ladder.
Distance: The desired distance of the wall shapes. The program divides the distances between the
first and last wall shape regularly according to this specification and the values are rounded up or
down correspondingly.
Top Distance: The distance between the axis of the last wall shape and the climbing out area of the
ladder.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-37
SAFETY CAGE
You can add a safety cage to the ladder here. The safety cage is only created if the Safety Cage field
has been checked before.
In the Selection Lists, you can select the required shape as usual. All shapes are available for selection.
0 Degree: Here, you can rotate the shape around its insertion axis.
Mirror: If this field is checked, the shape will be mirrored before insertion.
Position: Select the insertion position of the wall shape.

Inner Edge –The wall shape is inserted at the inner edge of the upright and shows to the inside.
Centrally –The wall shape is inserted in axis position on the height of upright axis.
Outer Edge – The wall shape is inserted at the outer edge of the upright and shows to the outside.
Radius: Enter the radius of cage stiffeners.
No. of Rungs: Specify how many longitudinal rungs the cage has to consist of. The bars will be
divided regularly on the resulting semicircle.
Lower Radius: Enter a bigger radius if you want to have a conical cage.
Lower Distance: Specify the distance of the lowest shackle to the next shackle. If you don’t want
to have a conical cage, you can enter 0 in this field and in the lower radius field.
Depth etc.: Please refer to the below figure for the meaning of the other distances.
Distance to Floor: Distance from the floor to the first shackle.
Distance: The desired distance of the stiffeners (rings) of the safety cage. The program divides the
distances between the first and last ring regularly according to this specification and the values are
rounded up or down correspondingly.
Top Distance: The distance from the top to the first shackle
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-38
Properties
ASSIGNMENTS
PROPERTIES
Sometimes the properties of existing component parts have to be modified. There are several
different ways to select the properties function. There AutoPLANT Structural puts in a context
sensitive way all available parameters at disposal for modification.
The most frequent way of selection is to highlight the part(s) and then to open the context menu by
means of the right mouse button. There, you find the option AutoPLANT Structural properties.
Another possibility is to use the function PS_PROP_CHECK.
In addition, the COM module ‘Double-Click’ is available as well. You can call the properties by
double-clicking the parts.
No matter which way you choose, AutoPLANT Structural analyses which parts were selected and
only provides the properties valid for these parts for modification.
Make sure that the desired type of component part has been selected first if you want to modify several
parts simultaneously. This means, if you want to modify all plates of a model, you have to make sure
that the first selected object is a plate. All other selected elements are filtered accordingly. In this case,
you can e.g. select a plate and then the complete model, and then all component parts that are not
plates are automatically filtered out.
The dialog windows can be divided into three different categories.
Dialogs being specific for a component part type.
Dialogs offering processing actions.
Dialogs being generally valid for all component parts.
The first group depends on the selected type. The second group is not displayed if several parts have
been selected and depends on the processing actions included. The third group is generally displayed
for all elements.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-39
Properties
SHAPES
DISPLAY
Use this dialog to modify the display of shapes individually. At insertion, the shapes obtain the settings
that were made and can be overwritten individually.
Layout: Here, you specify how the shape has to be depicted.
Holes: Here, you specify the depiction of drill holes.
Only Outer Cont.: Only the first outer contour is displayed. At tubes, e.g., the inner cylinder will
not be displayed.
Modeller: The component part is displayed by means of the facet-modeler. Normally, the software
independently decides when the modeler has to be used for depiction. However, you can explicitly
define it using this option. If the modeler has to be used, you cannot switch it off.
Acis: The ACIS-modeler is used for depiction instead of the facet-modeler. ACIS is much slower
but more precise than the facet-modeler. Please note that it is not possible to mix ACIS- and facet-
modeller volume models.
2D Display: A calculated 2D depiction depending on the current view direction is displayed

instead of standard 3D depiction.
Center Line: The centerline of the shape is displayed.
COG Line: The gravity line is displayed.
Pitch Lines: If crack lines have been defined for this shape, they are displayed.
Part Label: The name of the component part is displayed dynamically at the part. The position
depends on the angle of vision. The settings are made in the global settings.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-40
Properties
Short name: If a short position has been filed in the database; it will be used instead of the
complete name.
ECS Axes: The Entity Coordinate System is displayed. It mainly serves for verifying purposes.
Transparency: The part is displayed transparent at shading.
Direction marker: If the component part has got a benchmark during detailing, this will be
displayed.
2D-Section: Automatic 2D cut information is displayed.
SHAPE TYPE
Here, you can modify the shape type of one or several shapes.
Shape Type: Select the type of the shape.
Resolution: Select the desired resolution of the shape.
Shape Class: Select the class or library of the shape.
Shape Size: Select the size of the shape.
The data base information about this shape is displayed.
Treat As Singl… : If you have selected a combi shape or a weld shape, you can specify whether
the individual components have to be treated as single parts. The same is valid if the shape has not
yet been exploded.
INSERTION POINT
Use this dialog to specify the insertion or reference axis. You can select the desired points in the
preview.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-41
Properties
Select Line: Here, you specify whether the insertion point or the reference axis has to be set. As
long as a reference axis doesn’t exist, this option cannot be accessed.
X-Offset: X value of insertion
Y-Offset: Y value of insertion
Rotation Angle: Input value for rotation
+Phi: The shape is rotated around the current insertion axis by the input value.
-Phi: The shape is rotated around the current insertion axis by the input value.
+90: The shape is rotated around the current insertion axis by +90 degrees.
-90: The shape is rotated around the current insertion axis by -90 degrees.
The insertion point is rotated and thus mirrored at the Y-axis.
A reference axis is added to the shape.
A reference axis is subtracted from the shape.
At Max. 2 reference points are added to the shape.
The reference points are subtracted from the shape.
DATA
This dialog is used for management of non-graphical properties.
To handle all data on one dialog page, this was displayed excessively. This means that the actual
dialog is higher than displayed and the content can be moved to the right. All-important fields were
arranged in the upper half; less important fields were arranged in the lower half.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-42
Properties
Name: The name of the shape for parts list and output.
Material: The material of the shape for parts list and output.
Note1: The blank note 1 field
Pos No: The position number of the shape
Length: Shape length; if this value is modified, the length is modified as well at the shape end.
Width: The width of the shape
Height: The height of the shape
Modified: It is displayed whether this shape has been modified since last detailing. After scanning
the parts with the Detail Center, this field is automatically deleted and the modification
information is managed in the Detail Center.
Adopt: The shape is adopted into the parts list.
Vol Weight: The weight is calculated via the volume modeler and not on the base of the length
and the weight in meters.
Not Detail.: The shape is not displayed in the Detail Center.
Weight: The weight of the shape
Addition: Length addition to the calculated length
Number: The number of parts for this element. Normally this is

always 1.
Total: This is the number of parts of this position number in the model. This value is only correct
after counting.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-43
Properties
Ship.No.: Shipping number can be used alternatively or additionally to the position number
Orig. Pos No: Fixed stored position number
Item: Item number of the part
CONICAL
Depending on the selected shape, this dialog can look different. This is the dialog of a standard shape.
Slope: Climb in mm per meter length
Show Cut: The diagonal dividing cut is displayed.
For weld shapes, the slope can also be defined via the climb. It is, however, also possible to indicate
starting and end height. In addition, some tools are available to manipulate the cross-section or to
realize a cross-section that changes several times.
Slope: Climb in mm per meter length
Start Height: Height at the beginning of the shape; only available if no other manipulation was
made.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-44
Properties
End Height: Height at the end of the shape, only available if no other manipulation was made.
Use this button to define the height of a weld shape at any point or along a line. If necessary, a new
polygon point will be created.
The side situated next to the picked point will be modified. Then, another dialog opens where you can
indicate the height. The height up to then is displayed, and you can enter the desired new height.
A new edge is inserted into the web plate at the picked point. The height remains unchanged.
The edge situated next is deleted from the web plate.
This button permits modifying the edges of the web plate using the grips. All other grips of this shape
are deactivated at that moment.
This button permits the management of the projections of upper and bottom flange at the starting and
end point. The following dialog appears.
Bottom Fl. Start: The projection of the bottom flange at the starting point of the shape is indicated.
Bottom Fl. End: The projection of the bottom flange at the end point of the shape is indicated.
Top Flange.Start: The projection of the upper flange at the starting point of the shape is
indicated.
Top Flange. End: The projection of the upper flange at the end point of the shape is indicated.
This button permits the management of the flange thickness table. Using this table, you can assign
different widths and thicknesses to individual segments of the shape.
The following dialog appears:
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-45
Properties
This button permits to click on a flange edge to add it to the table. The preset values are taken over
first, which however, can be directly modified in the table.
The current table entry is deleted using this button. The thickness is reset.
Upper and bottom flange are considered separately. The indication of the flange refers to the number
of flanges from the starting point per side.
It is recommended to edit the thicknesses after having determined the bend points. A modification of
the form by insertion or deletion of points modifies the table as well because the number of flanges is
modified.
STATIC VIEW
If the static view has been activated in the global settings, the static values are displayed in the dialog.
For a more detailed description of the options please refer to the chapter Static View.
BEND
If the selected shape is an arc shape, this dialog is additionally displayed.
Radius: The radius of the arc shape up to the center line
Starting Angle: The angle between the ECS-X axis and the starting point of the shape in degree
End Angle: The angle between the ECS-X axis and the end point of the shape in degree.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-46
Properties
Rotation: Rotation around the insertion axis in degree
SHORTENING
If the shape is displayed in 2D-mode, additional shortenings may have been inserted into the shape.
You can see these shortenings on this page.
The selected shortening is deleted.
PLATES
DISPLAY
Use this dialog to modify the depiction of plates individually. At insertion, the plates obtain the
settings that were made and thus can be overwritten individually.
Layout: Here, you specify how the plate has to be depicted.
Holes: Here, you specify the depiction of drill holes.
Modeler: The component part is displayed by means of the facet-modeler. Normally, the software
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-47
Properties
but exacter than the facet-modeler. Please note that it is not possible to mix ACIS- and facet-
modeler volume models.
2D Display: A calculated 2D depiction depending on the current view direction is displayed

instead of standard 3D depiction.
Center Line: The centerline of the shape is displayed
Element Name: The name of the component part is displayed dynamically at the part. The position
depends on the angle of vision. The settings are made in the global settings.
Short Position: If a short position has been filed in the database; it will be used instead of the
complete name.
ECS System: The Entity Coordinate System is displayed. It mainly serves for verifying purposes.
Grid: A plate grid is displayed on the upper side of the plate. This grid represents a gridiron or
similar things.
POSITION
Use this dialog to specify the plate position related to the insertion point and to the insertion plane.
Length: Plate length; only available if the plate is in rectangular mode.
Width: Plate width; only available if the plate is in rectangular mode.
Thickness: Plate thickness
Height Offset: Position of the insertion plane above the ECS plane
Insert Edge: The edge at which the plate is inserted related to the ECS plane.
X-Offset: X- Offset related to the insertion point.
Y-Offset: Y- Offset related to the insertion point.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-48
Properties
Rectangular: The rectangular basic form of the plate is kept, and you cannot change it into another
form using the grips. If this option is deactivated, you cannot reset it.
At most 2 reference points are added to the shape.
The reference points are subtracted from the shape.
DATA
This dialog is used for management of non-graphical properties.
dialog is higher than displayed and the content can be moved to the right.
All-important fields were arranged in the upper half; less important fields were arranged in the lower
half.
Name: The name of the plate for parts list and output.
Name: The final name built according to the settings with dimensions.
Material: The material of the plate for parts list and output.
Pos No: The position number of the plate
Length: The length of the plate
Width: The width of the plate
Height: The height of the plate
Modified: It is displayed whether this plate has been modified since last detailing.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-49
Properties
Adopt: The plate is adopted into the parts list.
Vol Weight: The weight is calculated via the volume modeler and not on the base of the
dimensions.
Not Detail.: The plate is not displayed in the Detail Center.
Man. Alignment: The dimensions of the plate are determined according to a selected direction.
Man. Surface: The direction of the surface symbols was determined manually.
Weight: the weight of the plate

always 1.
after counting.
Ship.No.: Shipping number; can be used alternatively or additionally to the position number
Orig. Pos No: Fixed position number
Item: Item number of the plate
BOLTS
DISPLAY
Use this dialog to modify the depiction of bolts individually. At insertion, the bolts obtain the settings
that were made and the selected bolt style; thus they can be overwritten individually.
Layout: Here, you specify how the bolt has to be depicted.
Coating: Here, you specify the coating.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-50
Properties
Modeler: The component part is displayed by means of the facet-modeler. Normally, the software
but exacter than the facet-modeler. Please note that it is not possible to mix ACIS- and facet-
modeler volume models.
2D Bolt: The bolt is displayed in a calculated 2D depiction.
Assembly Room: The assembly room is displayed as well. It mainly serves for verifying whether
an assembly is possible.
2D: The bolt is depicted as 2D-symbol.
Countersunk: The bolt is displayed as countersunk bolt.
Mounting Bolt: The bolt is checked as assembly bolt, in contrast to workshop bolts. This has an
influence on the assembly parts list.
Bolt: The bolt is depicted.
Washer: The lower washer is depicted.
Nut: The nut is depicted
Lock Nut: The safety nut is depicted
Tapered Washer: The tapered washers are activated, but not displayed. They serve as basis for the
parts list entries. You can choose between U- and I-form washers.
2nd Washer: The 2nd washer is depicted.
2nd Tapered…: The 2nd tapered washer is depicted.
The insertion direction of the bolt is turned.
DATA
dialog is higher than displayed and the content can be moved to the right.
All-important fields were arranged in the upper half; less important fields were arranged in the lower
half.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-51
Properties
Name: The name of the bolt for parts list and output.
Material: The material of the bolt for parts list and output.
Style: The assigned bolt style
Pos No: The position number of the bolt
Length: Bolt length
Dia: Bolt diameter
Grip Length: The calculated clamping length of the bolt
Weight : The weight of the bolt
Addition: Length addition to the bolt
Modified: It is displayed whether this bolt has been modified since last detailing.
Adopt: The bolt is adopted into the parts list.
Bolt: The bolt is listed in the parts list as single data record, if desired.
Nut: The nut is listed in the parts list as single data record, if desired.
Washer: The washer is listed in the parts list as single data record, if desired.
Safety Nut: The safety nut is listed in the parts list as single data record, if desired.
Tapered Washer: The tapered washer is listed in the parts list as single data record, if desired.
2nd Washer: The 2nd washer is listed in the parts list as single data record, if desired.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-52
Properties
2nd Tapered…: The 2nd tapered washer is listed in the parts list as single data record, if desired.
Pre-Tension: The pre-tension of the bolt in %

always 1.
after counting.
Ship.No.: Shipping number; can be used alternatively or additionally to the position number
Item: Item number of the shape
VOLUME SOLIDS / BASIC PRIMITIVES
DISPLAY
Please refer to the section about the shapes for the individual descriptions of these setting options.
DATA
The parts list data of these component parts are identical with the parts described until now. The dialog
is excessive as well. Please refer to the above chapters for the description of the different fields.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-53
Properties
SPECIAL PARTS
Special parts are drawing elements with special properties added by AutoPLANT Structural. You
can edit these properties using this dialog for their being correctly displayed in the parts list.
WORK FRAMES / VIEWS

In the case of work frame objects, you can modify the properties of the complete object according to
the options described in the manual. Please refer to the corresponding pages of this manual.
STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS
In the case of structural elements, you can modify the properties of the complete object according to
the options described in the manual. Please refer to the corresponding pages.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-54
Properties
ROOF/WALL-OBJECTS
Please refer to the corresponding chapter of this manual where the modification of roof/wall-objects is
described.
POSITION FLAGS, ELEVATIONS, WELD MARKS,...

The properties of label objects such as position flags, elevations, weld marks, manual dimensioning
objects and benchmark can also be set specifically for each component part.
DRAWING PARTS LISTS

Please refer to the corresponding chapters of this manual where the setting of a drawing parts list and
of a drawing containment list is described.
3D MODIFICATIONS
The processing actions included in the AutoPLANT Structural-elements can mostly be modified
or deleted on the property pages described in the following. Please refer to the following chapters
to find out how it works.
DRILL HOLES/BOLTED JOINTS

Use this dialog to modify or delete the drill holes or bolted joints included in the part. Please refer to
the chapter Drill Holes/Bolted Joints in this manual for the description of the different parameters.
BOOLEAN OPERATIONS
Use this option to modify or delete the Boolean operations included in the part.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-55
Properties
Length: Indicates the length of the discharge-solid.
Width: Indicates the width of the discharge-solid.
Height: Indicates the height of the discharge-solid.
Operation: Indicates the kind of Boolean operation an.
Code: You may add a code to the processing action.
Click on this button to create the discharge-solid as new element.
Click on this button to remove the Boolean operation.
CHAMFERS
Use this option to edit the chamfers included in the part. The dialog is analogous to the Plate Editor.
Please refer to this chapter for the description of the different processing parameters.
Click on this button to delete the chamfer.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-56
Properties
FLAT CUTS
Use this dialog to process and delete flat cuts (diagonal cuts) included in the component part.
Phi Dx: Indicates the rotation angle around the X-axis
Phi Dy: Indicates the rotation angle around the Y-axis
Center of Rota…: Indicates the rotation point
Click on this button to delete the cut.
POLY-CUTS
In this dialog, all poly-cuts included in the part will be displayed.
Length: Modify the length of the poly-cut using this button.
Offset: Modify the offset of the poly-cut using this button.
Click on this button to delete the poly-cut.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-57
Properties
EDGE PROCESSING
Here, you can modify the edge properties of plates. Please refer to the corresponding chapter in this
manual for the settings.
Click on this button to delete the processing of an edge.
OUTLET
Use this dialog to modify the properties of the currently selected outlet.
Length: Specifies the length of the outlet.
Insertion Position: Specifies the insertion position of the outlet.
Click on this button to delete the outlet.
COMMON PROPERTIES
In this section, you will find a description of the general parts properties. The properties described here
are not always completely available, but are only displayed if required.
GROUP
In this dialog the data of the group are listed to which the component part in question belongs.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-58
Properties
LOGICAL LINKS
In this dialog, the logical links of the part are listed.
Active: Indicates whether the link is activated. You may also deactivate the link here.
Index: Internal code of the link
Link Type: The action is described by which the link has been created.
Modification: Indicates the modifications of the part caused by this link.
Use this button to process the link directly.
Use this button to delete the link directly.
ASSIGNMENTS
Use this field to make the assignments to the drawing object. These assignments may differ from one
part to the other. They are however described in the corresponding chapter.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-59
Properties
Detail Style: Here, you can assign a detailing style to the part.
Display : Here, you can assign a display class to the part.
Area Class: Here, you can assign the part to an area class that you created before.
Parts Family: Here, you can assign the part to a part family (e.g. support or girder).
Description: Here, you can add the part a general description of its function within the
construction.
Bentley
12/22/2005 A-60

AutoPlant 3D Structure - Reference Guide 2004 Edition

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

AutoPlant 3D Structure - Reference Guide 2004 Edition

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

AutoPLANT® 3D Structural

AutoPLANT is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Incorporated.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft™ Corporation.

RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGENDS

1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................... 1-1

2 MODELING ......................................................................................................................... 2-1

3D COMPONENT PART VIEWS.................................................................................... 2-7

NOTCH ................................................................................................................. 2-66

CONNECTION PLATE ....................................................................................... 2-126

3 DETAILING ......................................................................................................................... 3-1

WORKING WITH DETAILING STYLES ............................................................... 3-46

4 MISCELLANEOUS ................................................................................................................ 4-1

STRUCTURE OF THE BLOCKCENTER ............................................................. 4-11

STRUCTURAL ELEMENT BRACING ..........................................................................A-19

GENERAL INFORMATION 1-2

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS 1-3

DIALOG FRAMEWORK 1-4

PROJECT MANAGER 1-10

GLOBAL SETTINGS 1-14

WELCOME TO AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL

CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL

NOT PROVIDED IN THIS MANUAL

DIFFERENCES TO YOUR CURRENT VERSION

Operating System Microsoft Windows 2000, SP4 or later, OR

AUTOPLANT STRUCTURAL DIALOG BOXES

DIALOG FRAME STRUCTURE

When you click on this button, the Online-help is opened.

PERMANENT AND TEMPORARY DIALOG TEMPLATES

DBASE-IMPORT AND -EXPORT

PICK FRAME AND AUXILIARY GRAPHICS

FILE MANAGEMENT RELATED TO THE PROJECT

WORKING WITH PROJECTS

CREATE NEW PROJECTS

 Temp Files: Enter the path for your temporary files.

 Template Files: Enter the path for your template files.

 DWG Frame: Enter the path for your frame files.

 Options: General settings

 Shapes: Settings for shapes

 Straight Plates : Settings for any kind of plate (poly-plates)

 Bolts: Settings for bolt display

 Work Frame: Settings for work frame

 Values: Settings for resolution of circular volumes for volume patterns

 LogLinks: Settings for links between elements

 Display: Settings for display

 Dialogs : Settings for all dialogs are specified.

 Text Size: Enter the text size of the shape labelling.

 Label: The name of the shape is additionally added to the labelling.

 Position Number: The position number is additionally added to the labelling.

 Length: The length of the shape is additionally added to the labelling.

$(D) outside diameter in case of round shapes or edge length at

 Grid Height: Enter the grid height here.

Format Default Structure:

 RollOver: Here, you switch on RollOver for the dialogs.

 Suppress ToolTips: Here, you switch off the auxiliary ToolTips.

Field is switched off

Pick Length DoubleClick

Pick Length DoubleClick with CTRL

DELETE TEMPORARY FILES

LAYER FUNCTIONS .............................................................................................................. 2-2

Command Name: PS_LAYER

Work Frame On: LFRAMEON

Work Frame Off: LFRAMEOFF

Element Layer On: LELEMON

Temp Files: Enter the path for your temporary files.

Template Files: Enter the path for your template files.

DWG Frame: Enter the path for your frame files.

Options: General settings

Shapes: Settings for shapes

Straight Plates : Settings for any kind of plate (poly-plates)

Bolts: Settings for bolt display

Work Frame: Settings for work frame

Values: Settings for resolution of circular volumes for volume patterns

LogLinks: Settings for links between elements

Display: Settings for display

Dialogs : Settings for all dialogs are specified.

Text Size: Enter the text size of the shape labelling.

Label: The name of the shape is additionally added to the labelling.

Position Number: The position number is additionally added to the labelling.

Length: The length of the shape is additionally added to the labelling.

Grid Height: Enter the grid height here.

RollOver: Here, you switch on RollOver for the dialogs.

Suppress ToolTips: Here, you switch off the auxiliary ToolTips.

Direction: determines how the direction of the construction line is defined.

2 Points: You have to pick 2 points.

Line: You pick a line.

PS_CONST_HOR: This command creates a horizontal construction line.

Start or End X, Y, Z are the coordinates of the two measuring points.

Dist X, Y, Z is the distance in the direction of the respective coordinate axis.

Dist Direct is the direct distance of the points.

Off: The cut plane command is deactivated.

On: The cut plane command is activated.

Distance: Input of the cut plane distances

Set: The perspective view is activated.

Off: The perspective view is deactivated.

Multiple: The elements can be moved several times.

Axis: Here, you select the desired rotation axis.

Method: Enter the desired mirror plane here.

Drill Holes: All drilled holes are transferred.

PolyCut: All poly-cuts are transferred.

Notches: All outlets are transferred.

Boolean; All Boolean operations are transferred.

Method: Defines the kind of distribution.

Vertical Offset: Vertical offset between the different elements.

PS_Hide_Group_Exclude: this function is working like PS_HIDE_EXCLUDE. The only

Rectangular work frames

Cylindrical (also conical) work frames

Wedge-shaped work frames

Pyramidal work frames

Width: The work frame width is determined analogously to the length.

Height: The work frame height is determined analogously to the length.